Home

the Data

1. 31 222227 Procedures olo oA Gace vt qur wet 31 2 2 3 Uninstall 5 rero ren RO GRA a e ed 36 2 2 4 Using the Help File on Windows Vista or Windows 7 36 29 Before Installing the Software Section 2 1 2 1 Before Installing the Software Reference The Support Tool comes with the following program data Type Specifications NT ZJCAT1 EVA For IBM PC AT compatibles media CD ROM e Support Tool Supplement Symbols keyboard keypad collection Color Palette Symbol Tilling collection for color type PT System installer for replacing the PT system program NT20 system program System program for NT31 NT31C NT631C with V3 System programs for NT31 NT31C with V2 Ver 3 1 System programs for NT631 NT631C with V2 Ver 3 1 System programs for NT21 System program for NT11S e System program for NT11 V1 System programs for NT30 620 Series The following software should be installed separately NT Transfer Utility This utility uploads downloads screen data file from to PT using MMI format For details refer to Appendix C NT Transfer Utility NT Translation Support Utility This utility will help in translating the language to another supported language For details refer to Appendix D Translation Support Utility The following data is copied to the folder if it is selected when installation P
2. een 309 7 9 4 Description of Mathematical Table 310 7 9 5 Description of Set Mathematical Formula Fields 311 7 9 6 Description of Edit Operand Fields 312 7 9 7 Description of Edit Result Fields 313 7 9 8 Description of Move To Fields sse 313 7 10 Recipe T ble iii oio e LERRA RR ERR E ARA AER 313 7 10 1 Operation Procedure sopre deri epre ipn en 313 7 10 2 Description of Recipe Table Fields 314 7 10 3 Record Setting Table isis E roa a ac 317 267 Section 7 1 7 1 Common Operation The operating procedures common to all memory tables are described below Copy setting button Batch address change button TE BamHI 1 Spes em en Me Edit button Set button Specified number display button Reference button Search button Operation starts by specifying the number that is clicking on the objective line memory table entry number The shape of the mouse cursor changes as shown below when it enters the No field 7 1 1 Reference Operation The reference screen displays the screen numbers and the table entry numbers in which the specified table entry is used in
3. Section 6 1 o o o memes 9 5 Ww 5 1 5 Specification possible x Specification not possible Input a word address as a 4 digit number leading zeros can be suppressed and a bit number as a 2 digit number PLC Vendor Mitsubishi Fx Possible areas and characters that indicate area types are as follows x mum o v owes oJ w any Rey c s jme o c mm gt T me o 9 Bata Regier oJ O Specification possible x Specification not possible S C T x Input a word address as a 4 digit number leading zeros can be suppressed and a bit number as a 2 digit number PLC Vendor AB Possible file types and characters are as follows available only for NT31 631 models Character File Type File Slot Element Sub Ele Bit Termi Number Word ment nal Num Number Number ber Counter x m p c x Nw mee o CENE s p E T Character File Type Slot Number Word Bit Terminal Address Number Hen jor E e owa o o o Specification possible x Specification not possible Input a file number as a 3 digit number leading zeros can be suppressed ele ment number or word address as 3 digit number sub element number as 1 digit and bit number as a 2 digit number PLC Vendor GE 132 Section 6 1 Possible mem
4. Displaying not displaying drawing tool bar m Utility Displaying not displaying utility bar Displaying not displaying alignment bar 59talus Bat ao heo Vasa Rc d Displaying not displaying status bar Full Screen e EPI Y d Changing over entire screen display Zoom L 10096 2 x ERR HR Changing display enlargement scale 10096 20096 ER EE UE Changing display enlargement scale 20096 L 40096 iot eia Rn Ea Changing display enlargement scale 40096 80096 2 n Rx es Changing display enlargement scale 80096 Errot LOG coti or oth e p n Displaying the error log I Simulate Displaying flash status of an object L Simulate ON OFF Displaying lamp ON OFF status Draw 7 Selector Selecting object Grouping objects Ungroup Ungrouping objects I Bringto Front Bringing object to the front SendtoBack Sending object to the back Associate with Associating touch switch with object Canceling association of touch switch with object I SetOrder Specifying moving order among numeral character string input fields Properties
5. Image library data Alarm history record data WARNING HIGH TEMP 98 04 10 16 02 WARNING HIGH PRESS 98 05 12 18 25 1 When a bit memory table entry for which a check mark is set for the history property goes ON the alarm history element reads out the alarm message from the character string memory table entry string table and records the 167 Alarm Section 6 3 Note Operation procedure message with the date time of the occurrence The recorded information is displayed when the alarm history element is displayed 2 If the operator touches the displayed alarm message the specified image li brary data is displayed The bit memory table entries to be checked are determined according to the set tings made at the individual bit memory table entries Selection using the menu bar Objects Alarm History Selection using the drawing toolbar 83 Related elements and settings Terminology Property setting 168 Bit memory table Tools Table Bit Memory Refer to 7 4 Bit Memory Table Background t Image library data Page scroll touch switch General Position Indicates the display position of the alarm history The attribute point is at the upper left corner of the alarm history Size Indicates the size of the alarm history Message Length Specify the number of characters of a message to be displayed Max 3
6. Input using extended input control code input function PT Numeral memory table Input field iJ key 50 m f Screen No 3 No 4 No 5 Extended External numeric keys input 1 By turning ON an external switch that is connected to an external input the numeral or the control code set for the extended input function can be input to the numeral setting input field 2 Press the touch switch to which the key code is allocated to write the data set at the input field to the specified numeral memory table entry For the setting of an extended input refer to 7 5 Extended I O Input Table Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Data Input gt Numeral Selection using the drawing toolbar 14 Related elements and settings Touch switch control code input Objects Touch Switch gt Control code input function 174 Data Input Section 6 4 Touch switch copy setting Objects Touch Switch gt Copy setting Extended I O input table control code input Tools Table Control code function Terminology Cursor focus moving touch switch Background 000000 00 mo m momo momo moo mo omo Sign digit E __ L M N Input digits of maximum limit Prop
7. 240 Graphs Section 6 9 Intervals can be set in the manner shown below Note that intervals are set as numbers of dots 1 Specify the point for which the interval is to be set The field of the specified point is displayed in reverse video 2 Change the width between points the number of dots 3 Click on Set 4 After setting the interval for all point positions click on ex When displaying a broken line graph the display points are determined by cal culating the percentage value based on the values for 100 0 and 10096 If the 100 value 0 value and 10096 value are set as indicated below ref erence values are displayed in the broken line graph as shown below 100 C Table Entry a wa 0 C Table Enty a Value 100 C Table Entry Value 2000 Value referred to 3000 100 Value referred to 1500 50 Value referred to 0 0 Value referred to 1000 50 T Value referred to 2000 10096 241 Graphs Section 6 9 6 9 4 Trend Graph Operation procedure Terminology If the 100 value 0 value and 100 value are set using numeral memory table entries as indicated below the percentage value of the reference value is calculated according to the value stored at the specified address 100 C Table Enty 2 C Value 10 Numeral memo
8. Setting attributes of selected object Use as Default Registering the status of the selected object as the default for the object Centralize Label Centralizing label of lamp touch switch 23 Menu Chart Section 1 5 24 Objects Screen r Fixed aioe ts hile helena dares Specifying text Display area sees Specifying a circle E ER Specifying an arc b euro hee Specifying a sector Polyline 2o ette Specifying a polyline Polygon bcc ele espana Specifying a polygon L Rectangle Specifying a rectangle Tilitigo Specifying tiling m Image Display Specifying image data display I Library Specifying library data display ey eee Specifying a mark Touch Switch oii ended au Lec rir B EA AERA Specifying a touch switch Lamp rT Standard Specifying standard lamp Image RR ei Specifying an image library lamp Data Input 4 Specifying a numeral setting input field coire Ur Eolo Specifying a character string input field I Thumbwheel Switch Specifying a thumbwheel switch Recipe asini n Specifying a recipe screen element Numeral Display Spec
9. Touch switch print screen function Section 10 1 Refer to To stop the buzzer sound using a touch switch Objects Touch Switch Input Key Control Create a touch switch for which the stop buzzer code of the PT is set PT Screen ps Stopping buzzer RUE Touch switch control code input function To display the PT s sys tem menu using a touch switch Objects Touch Switch Input Key Control Create a touch switch for which the menu display is set PT PT Screen y 2 2 Touch switch control code input function 423 Quick Reference Touch Switches To input a different string from the label Section 10 1 Operation Objects Touch Switch Input Key String Create a touch switch for which a different string from the label is set as the Input key string Character string input field Screen NT31C ST141B V2 T input NT31C Black Touch switch string input Only for NT21 NT31 631 Refer to To centralize the touch Switch label Specify the touch switch to be centralized and select Draw Centralize Label To disable the touch switch input according to the ON OFF status of a PC PLC bit 1 Objects Touch Switch Create a touch switch for which interlock is set 2 Turn OFF the PC PLC bit to which the interl
10. Section 6 1 the selected component of the internal touch switch will be decorated with green handles 6 1 4 Modifying an Element The size shape and or position of a created element can be modified Modifying the size and shape of an element To modify the size or the shape of an element drag one of green W marks han dles that enclose the objective element Position the mouse cursor on a green handle and the shape of mouse cursor changes as shown below Same direction as arrows in the handles Drag the mouse cursor in the indicated direction to modify the size and the shape of the element IT ie T T Caa i N 1 Drag Note Ifa green mark is shown as when an element is selected the size of this ele ment cannot be changed Moving an element by dragging operation To move an element position the mouse cursor on the selected element and confirm that the mouse cursor changes as shown below Then drag the element as desired RA 112 Section 6 1 If multiple data creation screens are displayed an element can be moved over to another data creation screen by dragging it Moving an element by keyboard operation The screen element can be moved by pressing cursor key 1 lt on key board after selection The size of movement depends on the setting of the Snap to Grid as follows When Snap to Grid is OFF Cursor key move by 1 dot Shift
11. Frame ON color OFF color e OFF color Frame Setting graph colors When setting the color for bar graphs analogue meters broken line graphs and trend graphs specification is possible for the frame of the graph range range line foreground and scale Frame Specify the color of the graph frame Range Specify the background color of the graph to be applied when the numeric value is positive For a bar graph the bar is displayed in the specified color in the pos itive range Range Specify the background color of the graph to be applied when the numeric value is negative For a bar graph the bar is displayed in the specified color in the negative range Line Color Foreground color Specify the line color of broken line graphs and trend graphs and foreground color for present value of analogue meters 123 Section 6 1 Scale Color Specify the scale color of analogue meters lt Analogue meter gt lt Bar graph gt 100 0 100 0 Foreground color ve Frame a trange Lone 4 Scale color 10090 0 10096 100 100 A Frame range color range range Broken line graph Trend graph ange range 10096 100 M Y 0 AW 0 A 100 10096 range range Frame color Frame color Settings for text display Set the size
12. MN j Label Label 4 81 l UM CLR r E a E Label Label ane 1 Press edit button to set the label 2 Press edit button to set the label It is also possible to select a mark by pressing inset mak button in the label property 10 For the key and the CLR key modify the label size to 1 x 2 For other keys the label size should not be modified 402 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 11 Select all the touch switches above 12 Select Centralize Label from the Draw menu The position of all the labels for the selected touch switch is centralized both vertically and horizontally Creating a temporary input field Reference 1 Select Objects menu bar Data Input Numeral 2 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the data input field is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner of numeral in put field 3 At the cursor moving touch switch use selection dialog box set the dis played items as shown below Create Cursor Move Touch Switch _ With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C this dialog box is not dis played and accordingly the cursor moving touch switch cannot be set at the temporary input field For a temporary input field the setting of Create Cursor Move Touch Switch is not so significant Even with NT20 NT20S NT30
13. Y 159 089 Space Space 160 032 161 1738 162 155 163 156 Space 7 135 063 27 Space 136 094 Space 137 063 Space 5 138 083 Space lt 139 060 Space 140 063 Space 141 063 Space 2 142 063 Space 143 063 Space 144 063 Space n 145 039 562 Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule Appendix N Windows 1508859 1 MS DOS CP437 Windows 1508859 1 MS DOS CP437 0 2 2 164 063 189 171 pg pq 24 2 165 157 190 063 1 2 2 166 063 191 168 37 167 063 192 065 168 063 193 065 169 063 194 065 170 166 171 174 196 142 a ro 173 063 198 146 C 7 2 n E r 2 2 E 3 1 n u ul 1 182 063 207 073 183 250 208 068 LI LI N N s i 185 063 210 079 186 167 211 079 187 175 212 079 4 v4 O 61 188 172 213 079 195 065 563 Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule 564 Windows ISO8859 1 MS DOS CP437 3 T E 214 153 215 120 216 079 217 083 218 n Appendix N MS DOS CP437 137 141 161 239 139 240 100 241 164 242 243 Windows ISO8859 1 Du M 244 245 m 246 n 248 5 249 151 250 163 251 150 252 129 121 116 152 E N 25 254 Not Used 255 Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule Appendix N 5 C
14. hehehe hh hen 487 CANT Transfer U lity 2 ab See eee a N me eS 493 D Translation Support Utility cesses 501 E Tables of Functions of PT Models 0 0 cece cee III 517 Limits on Numbers of Elements gt 537 G New Functions of Support Tool 4 1 541 New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 6 0 cee ce eee 543 I New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 7 0 ee eee 545 J New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 8 2 0 0 0 cee ee eee 547 K Error Messages menni bora Sud eser E EA ede QC E CU ies 549 E Shortc t Keys oue rS er be ACE a E RE Ves o EROR Sea 555 M Connecting Cable Specifications orros tessa n Enirar Sa ns EER e 557 N Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule 559 Index Revision 575 xiii Organization of the Manual and How to Use It The related manuals are listed below The final digit of the manual number is the revision code For operating the Support Tool NT series Support Tool for Windows Operation Manual V061 E1 2 nen This manual Details on the operating procedure settings etc of the Support Tool can be displayed on the screen in the form of online help information Normal operation can be carr
15. Alarm WARNING HIGH TEMP No 2 EN list Image library data Press message l 161 Alarm Section 6 3 1 When the bit memory table entry number in the specified range goes ON the alarm list element reads out the alarm message from the character string memory table entry string table and displays the message at the alarm list area in the screen 2 If an operator touches the displayed alarm message the specified image li brary data will arrive Note The alarm message and the image library data to be displayed are specified ac cording to the setting at the bit memory table entry Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Alarm List Selection using the drawing toolbar Related elements and settings Bit memory table entry Tools Table Bit Memory Refer to 7 4 Bit Memory Table Terminology Image library data Background Page scroll touch switch Background Line scroll touch switch Property setting General Position Indicates the display position of the alarm list The attribute point is at the upper left corner of the alarm list Size Indicates the size of the alarm list Message Length Specify the number of characters of the message to be displayed Max 32 characters NT21 Max 39 characters NT30 NT30C NT31 and NT31C Max
16. Connecting Cable Specifications Tool Interface Connector Specifications The following specifications apply to the connection between the PT and the sup port tool personal computer Signal Name Meaning FG Frame ground SD Send data RD Receive data RS Request to send CS Clear to send SG Signal ground Assembly of Connecting Cables Wiring should be carried out in one of the following ways depending on the type of RS 232C connector 25 pin Connector SD SD RD RD RS Connector for peripheral Personal computer RS devices on PT body cS cs SG SG FG Shield Connector Connector hood hood Note Connect the shield wire to the connector hood at both the personal computer and at the PT Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable Name Model Remarks Connector XM2D 2501 25 pin Made by OMRON XM2A 0901 9 pin Made by OMRON Connector hood 25 2511 25 pin Made by OMRON XM2S 0911 9 pin Made by OMRON Cable AWG28 x 5P Multi core shielded cable Made by IFVV SB Fujikura Ltd CO MA VV SB Multi core shielded cable Made by 5P x28AWG Hitachi Ltd 557 Connecting Cable Specifications Appendix M 9 pin Connector RD Q 4 O 80 50 O RD RS RS Personal computer Connector for peripheral cs CS devices on PT body SG SG Shield Connector hood Connector hood
17. Reading setting uploading downloading clock data in the PT Window New Window Opening another window on the same screen I Cascade Displaying cascaded windows Displaying tiled windows Arrange Arranging icons Symbol Manager Starting symbol manager Opened Window Selecting window 25 Usable Hardware Combinations Section 1 6 Help Contents Displaying table of contents of online help Search for Help Displaying help by search operation _ Whats Displaying help by a click PLC Address Help Displaying PLC Address help of the specified PLC vendor About NT series Support Tool Product information 1 6 Usable Hardware Combinations The combinations of hardware that can be used are shown below The table shows the basic combinations Depending on the PT display method and system configuration they may not be usable 1 6 1 Applicable PT NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 can create screen data for the following PT models PT Model Model NT11S NT11S SF121 NT11 NT11 SF121 NT20 NT20 ST121 NT20S NT20S ST121 NT20S ST122 NT20S ST121 NT20S ST161 NT30 NT30 ST131 NT3
18. To write a character 1 Objects Data Input String string To input a character string Create a character string input field 2 Objects Touch Switch Function Input Key Con trol or Objects Touch Switch Function Input Key String Create a touch switch for which the control code input function or the character string input function is set Character string input field PT Screen Character string memory table PC PLC String table Input E ABC ABC Touch switch control code input Touch switch character string input 418 Quick Reference Writing Data to the PC PLC To write a character string To copy between charac ter string memory table entries string table with one touch switch Operation 1 Objects Touch Switch Function Copy Setting Create a touch switch for which the copy function is set and copy the content of a character string memory table entry string table to another character string memory table entry string table Objects String Display Display the content of the character string memory table entry string table PT Character string display Character string memory table String table T ABC ABC Screen ABC Touch switch copy functi
19. vAlanmliust 25h n RR ix sint IN Ve 161 6 3 2 Alarm HIStory tec ener os NMPE esa Gad bd tad 167 6 4 Inputs oet tete NOU Se IR Oe c eee p 173 6 4 1 Numeral Input oe eee eer pev p enr hr Heinle ERI EP He RH E EUER 173 6 4 2 Character String Input 2 ce eee eee 181 6 4 5 Thumbwheel Switch eens 189 O25 cree te ole ee 194 6 5 1 Standard Lamps ese on gee wee et pe WE gee wince Red weet 194 6 5 2 Image library Lamps 5 3222 ape oh e d Vike pets 199 6 6 Numeral Display 2 ee bee em ebrei Ree eere 202 6 7 Character String Display 5 eens 206 6 8 Touch Switches cits a rA ya GUERRE etc a E a eade at eR area 209 6 8 1 Input Notify Touch Switch 8 216 6 8 2 Switch Screen Touch Switch 5 217 6 8 3 Character String Input Touch Switch 217 6 8 4 Pop up Window Keyboard Function Touch Switch 218 6 8 5 Control Code Input Touch Switches 219 6 8 6 Setting Touch Switch 0 eee cece eee ene ee 222 6 8 7 Cursor Moving Touch Switch 1 00 0 eee eee cee ene 223 6 8 8 Window Moving Touch Switch 0 eee eee ene
20. specific conditions in personal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or op erations given TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 Introduction to the Support Tool 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 What Is Support Tool Equipment Necessary for Using the Support Tool General Configuration of the Support Tool 8 8 Basic Operation Flow Menu Usable Hardware Combinations SECTION 2 Setting Up the Support Tool 2 1 2 2 Before Installing the Software Installing the Support Tool SECTION 3 Support Tool Starting up and Exiting Procedure and File 3 Starting up and Exiting the Support Tool 3 2 User Intetface coe mee were ES Per EEUU RE LUC P PESO ue ON GG NDS 3 3 Operation of Screen Data Application 8 SECTION 4 Application Manager 4 1 4 2 What Is the Application Manager Operating the Application Manager SECTION 5 Screen ies Oa ha wu De Ea Su 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4
21. Adding an I O comment To set add an I O comment after clicking on the table entry number of the blank field at the bottom click Set PLC Bit Address I O Comment 0000400 Trend Graph2 0000500 Bar Graph 0000600 Bar Graph2 0001000 Numeral1 10001200 Numeral2 0001400 Thumbwheel Swit 10010000 Thumbwheel Swit Setting items in the set dialog box Channel Word Specify the type of area area name in PC PLC for which a comment is to be displayed Address Specify the address number where the I O comment to be edited is allocated If you specify a new address or bit an I O comment be added If a comment is allocated using an element or a table entry i e Yes is dis played for Reference it is not possible to change the comment It is possible to change the comment if it is not allocated using an element or a table entry Bit Specify the PC PLC bit number where the I O comment to be edited is allo cated If you specify a new address or bit an 1 0 comment can be added If a comment is allocated using an element or a table entry i e Yes is dis played for Reference it is not possible to change the comment It is possible to change the comment if it is not allocated using an element or a table entry Comments Specify a comment for a PC PLC address or bit A comment can comprise up to 16 characters 7 7 3 Importing Comments from a Ladder Program With
22. Create Menu button v Create Monitor button v Create Alarm button v 359 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Creating the Alarm Screen Create new screen screen No 4 v Set properties for screen No 4 v Create screen title v Create alarm list v Create Menu button v Create Set button v Create Monitor button v Create alarm library data v Create numeric keys for pop up window display v Save the created data v Download the created data 9 3 Creating the Sample Data This section describes the operational procedure and data creation procedure step by step according to the operation flow shown in 9 2 Operation Flow Reference The explanation in this section assumes that the default value of each object s property is not changed since installation 9 3 1 Starting up the Support Tool At the start up screen of Windows double click the Support Tool icon to start the Support Tool Refer to 3 1 Starting up and Exiting the Support Tool 9 3 2 File New Select File in the main menu then select New to create a new file Refer to 3 3 1 Creating New Screen Data Application File 9 3 3 Setting the PT Configuration At the PT configuration setting dialog box set the items as shown below Refer to 3 3 1 Creating New Screen Data Application File
23. Host connect 1999 Screens System initializ ing screens Password screens Menu screens Print format screens System Screen display Screens OFF Extended screens Occurrence his tory screens Frequency his tory screens Programming Console screens Device monitor screens Return to the previous screen 1 Available only from the system menu A screen number is not assigned 2 Only with V2 and above Standard screens Standard screens are the fundamental screens of the PT Specify a Standard Screen to create a screen 18 General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Overlapping screens Continuous screens Window Keyboard Screen Overlapping screens are grouped screens a maximum of eight screens can be overlapped to display information on one screen The screen used as the base for the overlapping screens is called the Parent Screen and the multiple standard screens that configure the overlapping screen are called Child Screens This is an Screen No 10 Screen No 8 Child Screen Parent Screen This is an example of ang 1 1 example of an Overlapping Screen Screen No 7 Child Screen Overlapping Screen No 25 Screen Child Screen When screen No 8 parent screen is specified objects
24. Numeral memory table 1234 SE oie x 1234 SET 2 2345 SET 3 3456 By setting a constant in the data setting field of a copy function touch switch be forehand the necessary data can be copied to a numeral memory table entry as desired Copying a constant to a string table entry is not possible Copying data or a constant in a memory table entry to an input field Character string PT 4 Numeral Character string memory memory table table String table input field N li a input 1 234 CONSTANT y 1 L 1234 PT By setting the setting data to a memory table entry or a touch switch beforehand the data is copied to the input field at the cursor location as desired Since the data is copied to the input field it can be modified after copying 6 8 7 Cursor Moving Touch Switch Function Moving cursor Settings Related elements and setting Use Window Keyboard Screen Screen No Window position Replace Local Window Auto Arrange Numeral input element Specify whether or not the window keyboard screen is displayed when the cursor is moved Specify the screen type Local 1 Local 2 and the screen number of the window keyboard screen to be displayed when moving a cursor Specify the bottom left co ordinate of window to be dis played Specify the behavior of windo
25. 1 2 6 8 1 Input Notify Touch Switch Function Notify bit Settings Address PC PLC Bit Address Specify the PC PLC bit that is driven ON OFF ac cording to the operation of a touch switch comment Specify the comment of the PC PLC bit that is driven ON OFF according to the operation of a touch switch 216 Touch Switches Section 6 8 Action Type Set Reset Alternative Momentary mE Displays the dialog box used to specify the bit number m Displays the I O comment table Guidance The input notify touch switch drives the specified PC PLC bit ON OFF in re sponse to the pressing of the touch switch The status of the PC PLC bit when the touch switch is pressed is processed as shown below according to the setting for Action Type Set Drives the PC PLC bit ON when the touch switch is pressed The PC PLC bit stays ON even after the touch switch is released Reset Drives the PC PLC bit OFF when the touch switch is pressed The PC PLC bit stays OFF even after the touch switch is released Alternative Drives the PC PLC bit from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF when the touch Switch is pressed The PC PLO bit is turned ON when the touch switch is pressed while it is OFF and if the touch switch is pressed when the PC PLC bit is ON the PC PLC bit goes OFF Momentary Drives the PC PLC bit ON when the touch switch is pressed the PC PLC bit remains ON only while the touch switch is be
26. With NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C however a line scroll touch switch and a page scroll touch switch are independent elements and their position size and label can be changed as required However the touch Switch function and the lamp setting should not be changed otherwise the switch and the lamp will fail to function correctly To display the image library data set a check mark in the check box of Display Image Lib in the Property setting dialog box The procedure for editing the image library data display area is shown below 1 Specify only the image library data display area dotted line frame while holding down the Shift key and Ctrl key automatically enters to Edit Object mode Green W marks handles are displayed surrounding the image library data display area 2 Specify the display size of the image library data display area and move it as desired Alarm Section 6 3 e If the size of the image library data is smaller than the display area the image library data is displayed taking the lower left corner of the display area as the reference Imagellibrary data display area 4 Image library data Reference With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C if image library data is larg er than the image library data display area the area exceeding the display area will not be displayed on PT while the whole data is displayed on the Support T
27. 360 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 PT Model NT620C 625C PLC Vendor OMRON Font Type CP437 Comments SAMPLE DATA Initial Screen 1 Backlight OFF Check mark set 60 min Resume function Check mark not set Number of Numeral Table 512 Table Entries String Table 256 Bit Memory Table 256 Printer for PT Printer ESC P Mode Color History Setting Alarm Use Ring Buffer Check mark set Buzzer Enable Check mark set On Error Key Input Check mark not set After setting the PT configuration items as indicated above click ex 9 3 4 Setting Memory Tables Set the memory tables numeral memory table character string memory table string table and bit memory table Refer to Section 7 Memory Table Setting Opening a table 1 Select Tools menu bar Table Setting numeral memory table 1 Make the numeral memory table settings as shown below PC PLC Address Comments D00000 Mtr Num disp 1 D00001 Mtr Num disp 2 D00003 Mtr Trd graph 1 D00004 Mtr Trd graph 2 D00005 Mtr Bar graph 1 D00006 Mtr Bar graph 2 Initial Words D00010 Set Num input 1 D00012 Set Num input 2 D00014 Set Thumbwheel Setting character string memory table 1 Click on String 361 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 2 Make the character string memory table settings as shown below P
28. PT Model Screen No NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S NT600S None NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C 1999 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C 9000 Reference For the NT21 NT31 NT31C TN631 and NT631C it is called a System Initializ ing Screen 5 9 Password Screen A Password screen is treated as one of the 250 Standard screen in NT11S NT11 It is used to protect another screen by password When a password screen is displayed on the NT11S NT11 PT it forces the user to enter the correct password before bringing up the designated screen The figure above shows a new password screen created It has a text element with password as labeled Next to the text element is the password element that indicates the current password for this password screen In the password prop erty page you can set the password and the designated screen number to be displayed next 102 Programming Console Screen Section 5 12 5 10 Menu Screen A Menu Screen is treated as one of the 250 Standard screens in NT11S NT11 It serves as a control screen that maps a numeric key inputs onto a designated Screen A maximum of 4 designated screens for each of the numeric keys 1 to 4 can be specified in the menu screen property page 5 11 Print Format Screen The Print Format Screen has the screen number 255 in NT11S NT11 It creates a format for PT printing function mainly for the daily printing You can only use Nu m
29. Properties Code Displays the code of the selected image data Size Displays the size of the specified image data To change the size set the desired size Mode Displays the specified color mode To change the color mode set the desired color mode Compression Specify the data format for storing the created image data Check mark set Image data is compressed for storage Check mark not set Image data is stored without being compressed Although the data size of the created image data will be reduced if the data is compressed the speed of display on the screen will be slowed a little Comments Specify the comment for the image data to be created Screen Configuration of Image Editor The screen configuration of the image editor is described below Tool box MEAN Too seccion m e a 9 A EIE 4 Color selection BIEJLILI B ZN 74 Pattern selection lt Point type selection Edit area EX Line width selection Set Font 4 34 Font selection Operating the image editor Using the image editor you can create a graphic in the desired shape in the edit area as combinations of lines points rectangles and circles after selecting the 329 Image Editor Section 38 1 tool and drawing conditions color tiling pattern point type line width an
30. Surrounding the title with a frame S 6 7 8 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Rectangle Refer to 6 2 3 Rectangle On the data creation screen drag the rectangle so that it encloses the Menu Screen character string Use the properties as they are Adjust the size and the position of the frame rectangle Creating the Monitor Screen button 364 Monitor Screen Monitor Screen Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Setting the touch switch outline 1 Select Objects menu bar Touch Switch Refer to 6 8 Touch Switches 2 Create the outline of the Monitor Screen button by dragging the mouse on the data creation screen 3 Set the properties as shown below Position Size Frame Shape 3 Dimension Show ON State Color Frame White ON White OFF Transparent Function Switch Screen Screen No 2 Address PC PLC Address Comments Lamp Attribute Light Label in Description Monitor Screen Refer to the fol lowing 2 1 For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 or later models multiple lines of label On Off static label numeral string display label can also be set 2 Click the edit Button to set the label After completing the setting go to the next step by clicking the Button 8 For the NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2
31. The element copied to the clip board can be used for pasting as many times as desired until another element is copied or cut Pasting a copied element to anoth er screen is also possible 113 Section 6 1 Common Operation Reference Cutting and pasting elements 114 1 Select an element 2 Select Edit menu bar then select Copy This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse on the element and select Copy in the menu Select Edit menu bar then select Paste This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse and select Paste in the menu Copied element is pasted at the ox upper left section of the screen Copy Align Align IT Delete Delete Tar Brine To Front gt Brine To Front i d Send To Back Send To Back Pn LL Select Object Select Object Properties Use As Default f multiple data creation screens are displayed an element can be moved over to another data creation screen by dragging it If Ctrl key is being pressed while dragging an element will be copied instead of being moved f two Support Tools are started up copy cut paste and drag amp drop operations can be performed between Support Tools For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Start
32. To open close control a window from the host Only for NT21 and for NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V1 and above 1 Tools PT Configuration Control Notify Area Allocate Window Control Area to a host 2 Screen New Create a window keyboard screen 3 Write window screen No to be displayed and X Y co ordinate in a word to which window control area is allo cated Window Screen Screen PC PLC Bit Status Display To turn a lamp ON OFF according to the ON OFF status of a PC PLC bit Objects Lamp Standard Set the PC PLC Bit address PT Screen PC PLC PUE 413 Quick Reference PC PLC Bit Status Display 414 To turn a lamp ON OFF according to the ON OFF status of a PC PLC bit that is controlled by the operation of touch switches 1 Operation Objects Touch Switch Function Notify Bit Reflect the touch switch status in the PC PLC bit sta tus Objects Lamp Standard Reflect the PC PLC bit status at the lamp Section 10 1 Refer to To switch the graphic to be displayed according to the PC PLC bit status Tools Image Editor Tools Library Editor Create the image data or the library data Objects Lamp Image Create an image library
33. Undoing the operation Redoing the operation However it is effective between different shapes of fixed display since they are treated as one kind 1 Select an element Selection of multiple elements collectively is possible 2 Select Draw menu bar then select Bring to Front or Send to Back This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse on the object and select Bring to Front or Send to Back in the menu Choose Bring to Front to move the selected element to the foreground and Send to Back to move it to the background Send To Back Properties Alt Enter Use as Default The Undo function will undo or cancel the last most recent action that was per formed Ten times of Undo can be performed It is invoked by Menu bar Edit gt Undo Draw bar Click on E The Redo function will repeat the last most recent action that was performed Ten times of Redo can be performed It is invoked by Menu bar Edit Redo Draw bar Click on eJ 6 1 6 Aligning Elements 116 Two or more elements can be aligned collectively There are following six functions for alignment The buttons below are provided on the alignment bar Align Top 37 Short cut key Ctrl Up Arrow Align Bottom pu Short cut key Ctrl Down Arrow Align Left El Short cut key Ctrl Left Arrow e Align Right 91
34. 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 7 063 Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule Appendix N MS DOS CP437 Windows 1508859 1 MS DOS CP437 Windows 1508859 1 225 223 241 177 226 063 242 063 227 063 243 063 228 063 244 063 229 063 245 063 230 181 246 247 231 063 247 063 232 063 176 233 063 149 9 2 234 063 183 235 063 063 236 063 063 237 248 178 063 063 Not Used Space 063 255 160 063 567 Symbols Help Menu 76 Show Window Keyboard 87 Numbers 32 dot font 125 A About NT series Support Tool 77 Add Node 139 Alarm History 167 alarm history 439 Alarm list 161 Applicable PT 26 Application in file units 435 438 Application Manager 66 Arc 140 Arrange Icons 76 Associate With 119 Attribute 125 Available Data Communication Methods 430 B Background function 249 Backlight 81 Bar Graph 226 base screen 94 Batch selection of multiple elements 109 Bring to Front 116 Broken line Graph 230 237 Buzzer 81 C Cable 430 Cascade 76 Channel setting 129 Character String Input 181 Character String Input Touch Switch 217 Index child screen 92 93 Circle 142 Clip 335 Closing a Creation Screen 67 Color Palette Symbol 260 Colour 82 Comment 81 Comms Setting 73 Comms Setting 432 communication method 27 Communication method for each PT type 27 Connection to PT 430
35. 12 12 Ticked Check mark set 12 12 Ticked Check mark set 12 12 Notticked Check mark not set 1 000 1 Notticked Check mark not set 12 001 2 Not ticked Check mark set 1 00 1 Not ticked Check mark set 12 01 2 Ticked Check mark set 1 0 1 Ticked Check mark set 12 1 2 m NI N W W o 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 With conventional PT models negative numeric value data is prefixed by F For example 12 is set as F0000012 With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C numeric values are stored as signed binary data Specify the PC PLC address used for reading and writing by an element such as memory table entry lamp or touch switch For a numeral or character string memory table entry string table specify the lower address or the least significant address of the word to be referred to For a lamp a touch switch or a bit memory table entry specify the allocated bit number When specifying a bit specify the address of the word and the bit position in the word that is referred to Note that timer TIM and counter CNT cannot be set for bits or character string words Using PLC address setting dialog box Normally a button for displaying the PLC address setting dialog is provided for PLC address input field 129 Section 6 1 Direct input of PLC address 130 In
36. Lamp or Touch switch Create a lamp or a touch switch for which String Display is set as the label type Only for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above To insert image data and library data into a string with NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above Tool PT Configuration Enable NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode The range of image library data is as the same as NT30 620 series in NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode 3 3 APPENDIX A 420 To centralize the lamp la bel Specify the lamp to be centralized and select Draw gt Centralize Label Quick Reference Section 10 1 Operation Refer to Touch To create numeric keys 1 Objects Data Input Numeral Switches Create a numeral setting string input field 2 Objects Touch Switch gt Function Input Key Control Create numeric keys using touch switches for which the control code input function is set PT Screen gt Numeral setting input field Input Touch switch control code input To display numeric keys 1 Objects Data Input Numeral as a pop up window key board by touching a nu meral input field Create a numeral input field where a cursor moving touch switch is automatically set 2 Specify the automatically created touch switch and add the window keyboard screen display function by setting properties PT PT Screen Screen Pop up window
37. Notify Bit Switch Screen 95 Window Keyboard Screens Section 5 4 Input Key Control e Input Key Window Keyboard Input Key String Copy setting Cursor Move Print Screen With NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C keyboard screen can be used as a standard screen If it is used as a keyboard screen called from other screen Notify Bit Cursor Move and Print Screen functions are not available NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C below V1 Switch Screen Input Key Control Input Key Window Keyboard Input Key String Copy setting NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C V1 and above Notify Bit Switch Screen Input Key Control Input Key Window Keyboard Input Key String Copy setting Window Move Print Screen Changing the size and the position of pop up display frame The procedure for changing the size and the position of a pop up display frame is shown below 1 Click the mouse on a dotted line of the pop up display frame Green handles appear around the pop up display frame Arrows in the handle indicates the direction to be resized 2 The frame size can be changed by dragging a handle When the mouse cursor is positioned on a handle the shape of the mouse cursor changes as shown below according to the handle position When the mouse cursor is dragged in this state the pop up display frame size chan ges in the direction the arrow symbol of the mouse cursor i
38. The screen number referenced in Touch Switch is not a Window Keyboard screen Create the window keyboard screen after selecting New then use it as the refer ence screen The total number of Alarm List and Histo ry exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of XXX by YYY Create the alarm list history within the limit The total number of Bar Graph exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of 400 by YYY Create the bar graphs within the limit The total number of Broken Line Graphs exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of XXX by YYY Create the broken line graphs within the limit The total number of lines in Broken Line Graphs exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of XXX by YYY Create the broken line graphs within the limit The total number of XXX exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of 256 by ZZZ Create the elements within the limit The total number of Image Display and Library Display exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of 256 by XXX Create the image library data within the limit The total number of Numeral Display ex ceeds the overlapping screen s limit of 1024 by XXX Create the numeral display fields within the limit Error Messages Appendix K Error Message Corrective Action The total number of Numeral Table refer ences exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of XXX by YYY Reduce the number of reference elements The total num
39. To add a broken line click on A broken line is added and the line properties are displayed for the added broken line A maximum of 256 broken lines can be created To delete a broken line select the broken line to be deleted with the Settings and click on pete tee The specified broken line is deleted The following four types of line are provided for displaying broken line graphs Solid Dash Dot dash Dot dot dash Set the line type with the Style property The relationships between the points vertices in a broken line graph and numeral memory table contents are shown below When display direction is right Numeral memory table 30 Start table entry number 28 4 Number of points The intervals between numeral memory table entries in a broken line graph can be set as even or uneven as desired with the Interval Type line property If you select even the numeral memory table entries are displayed in equal intervals Sas Even intervals If you select uneven the intervals between numeral memory table entries can be set as desired Click On interval Settings and the interval setting dialog box is displayed Interval Position H Set 0 229 Interval Position Set number of dots
40. comment table Show Window Keyboard Screen Allow the use of window keyboard screen Screen No Local 1 or Local 2 Sets the keyboard screen to use with this recipe object Either Local 1 or Local 2 alone can be enabled Screen Position X amp Position Y Sets the position for the keyboard screen Screen Attributes Replace Local Window Determine whether to replace the local window 265 Recipe Screen Element Section 6 11 Touch Switch General Settings Touch Switches Interlock Read Write Touch Switch Read White Page Scroll Touch Switch Up Left Down Right Line Scroll Touch Switch Up Left Down Right Cancel Apply Help Read Write Touch Switch Read Show Read touch switch Write Show Write touch switch Page Scroll Touch Switch Up Show Page Scroll Up touch switch 2 Down Show Page Scroll Down touch switch Left Show Page Scroll Left touch switch 44 Right Show Page Scroll Right touch switch Line Scroll Touch Switch Up Show Line Scroll Up touch switch Down Show Line Scroll Down touch switch V Left Show Line Scroll Left touch switch 4 Right Show Line Scroll Right touch switch de Interlock Refer to 6 1 12 Interlock 266 SECTION 7 Memory Table Setting Memory tables are areas in a PT for storing numeric value data and character string data These areas are used for communicat ing with
41. 1 to 1899 2000 1 to 3999 Window Keyboard Screen 1900 to 1979 1900 to 1979 1 to 3999 Extended Screen 1980 to 1996 1980 to 1996 x Occurrence Histo ry Screen 1997 1997 9001 Not editable Frequency History Screen 1998 1998 9002 Not editable Host Connect Screen 1999 1999 9000 Password Screen Menu Screen Print Format Screen x Device Monitor Screen 9021 9023 Brightness and Contrast Adjust ment Screen 9030 2 1 Available only for V2 models 2 Available only for V2 System Ver 3 1 or later models Screen Properties NT620C NT625C Ver 4 NT11S NT600S NT620S Items NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 NT631C None x Contin uous x Buzzer Beep Long Short History System Keypad Back Type light Color Color Back ground e xix xix e e x x x xi x Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E Elements NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT600S NT620S Items Ver 5 Ver 4 Alarm List Start Bit e e Table Entry Alarm List No of Bits Referenced Alarm History order of frequency order of occurrence Alarm History History Info Alarm History Info Type Message Display 9 12 Line Qty Messa
42. 1000014 a 4 i 9 1 Specify the table address the start position of the replace range 2 Click on Search 3 Select the objective of replace the Search By box 4 Specify the data to be replaced in the Find What box b Specify the data to replace the old data in the Replace With box 271 Common Operation Section 7 1 6 Click on Besse Or Repisce aii Hamers String VO Comments Bit Memory Initial Storage Words PLC Addres VO a Eind Next Find What Close BLO Addruss Replace With PLO Addere meum 000030 se 7 1 3 Batch Address Change Operation The set PC PLC addresses can be changed into the required addresses in a batch Since the change source can be specified as a range processing such as changing the address range DM1000 to DM01499 to the address range DM1800 to DM2299 is possible at one time Shifting in bit units is also possible Note that the batch address change operation is allowed only for displayed table entries Independent with the location of the cursor this address change will be per formed to the whole table Description of batch address change dialog box Find Channel I O Area Start Range 0 D End Range lo p Change To Channel Change Comment Find Channel Word Specify the word type of
43. 4 Numeral setting input field of numeral setting element To turn ON OFF the lamp connected to a PT ac cording to the status of a PC PLO bit Tools Table Extended I O Output Set a PC PLC bit for an extended I O output table entry PT Extended table ri Extended I O output PC PLC To output the status of a touch switch to an exter nal device 1 Objects Touch Switch Function Notify Bit Create a touch switch and notify the PC PLC of the status of the touch switch 2 Tools Table Extended I O Output Set the same PC PLC bit as the one set in 1 above for an extended 1 output table entry PC PLC Ladder IH S Extended table 2 Extended Touch switch output T notify bit function Operations To change grids Screen Grid To copy a created graphic 1 Specify the graphic to be copied 2 Edit Copy 3 Edit Paste If screen data of the same PT model setting is opened by Import Component from the File menu copy amp paste operation above is possible between the Support Tools 425 Quick Reference Operations 426 To copy the screen data Section 10 1 Operation Using the application manager select t
44. 7 10 Recipe Table Each application has one recipe table A recipe table see Section 7 10 2 con sists of a number of entries Each entry consists of a collection of records and each record consists of a number of parameters or attributes Parameters desig nate consecutive memory areas from a starting address defined for each recipe entry Each standard screen is limited to one recipe screen element A recipe screen element see Section 6 11 1 is a compound screen element consisting of an alarm like grid structure and some touch switches It is like a collection of numer al inputs featuring access and display of data from the recipe table Recipe Table is only available in the NT21 and NT31 631 V2 System Ver 3 1 7 10 1 Operation Procedure The recipe table can be activated by selecting Tools menu bar Recipe Table 313 Recipe Table Section 7 10 7 10 2 Description of Recipe Table Fields Ho of Ho of Bytes ure Set Recipe Records Parameters Record Bytes 3 _5 E 3 Ei ub 36 Edt gt GoTo Entry m Summary Total 7 Available x Close New Delete Search Help Description of Recipe Table Dialog Controls No Displays the entry number By default the 1st record is selected Nothing hap pens when an entry is double clicked This number will not change when another entry is deleted Name Displays the name for a recipe
45. Contents 76 Continuous Screen 91 Control Code Input Touch Switches 219 Copy 114 Copy Setting Touch Switch 222 Copy to Image 90 Copying a Screen 68 Copying and pasting elements 113 Creating a New Screen 67 Creating an Element 107 Cross Reference 445 Cursor Moving Touch Switch 223 Cutting and pasting elements 114 D Data Communication Procedure 432 Data logging function 249 Date and Time 440 Decimal 128 Delete 115 Delete 69 Deleting a Screen 69 Deleting an element 115 Direct Access Information 435 Direct Connection Information 446 Disassociate 119 display history 439 display history Screen History function 100 Display Sign 128 Display Type 128 569 Index Displaying and Setting Screen Properties 69 Displaying and Setting the PT configuration 69 Displaying the Print Image Preview 458 Distance 232 Download NT Series Support Tool PT 434 Download NT series Support Tool PT 74 E Edit Object 110 Editing a Table 69 Error Log 73 Extended I O Input table 15 Extended I O input table 17 Extended I O Output table 15 17 Extended Screen 99 F Fixed Display 138 Format 128 Full Screen 87 Full Tiling 83 G Get History Log 439 Global window 97 Graph 226 Group 118 Grouping Elements 118 H Hardware 6 Hexadecimal 128 History 81 History Report 447 Host Connect Screen System Initializing Screen 1
46. Copy paste operation can not be performed between the two files if the PT model of the two files is different In this case perform data conversion before hand so that the PT model setting of the copy source screen data matches to the setting of the copy destination screen data Selected PT model can be checked on the status bar It is not possible to edit the same screen data file by two Support Tools If you try to read out the file that is already opened by the other Support Tool error mes sage will be displayed The second Support Tool can read out the screen data file regardless of the file types onw mmi When the second Support Tool is started the windows of both Support Tools are automatically resized into normal windows that overlap each other to facili tate the copy operation between the files It is not possible to open one more Support Tool when two Support Tools are already started Import Component will not be displayed in the File menu when no screen data is opened with the Support Tool Conversion of PLC address is executed when the PLC vendor direct access is different between the copy source destination screen data Conversion of key code is executed when the key code font type is different between the copy source destination screen data In case of the numeral string table and bit memory table if the table size of copy destination is smaller than the size of copy source excessive entries will be
47. Foote Help 1 Sample e Exit If you click on in the Reports dialog box the dialog box used to specify the report output file is displayed Specify the file name and click on se then the report is output to a file Save As L2 x Save in Save as type RTF files rtf x Cancel For details on operations at the Reports dialog box the Set Margins dialog box and the Header and Footer dialog box refer to 12 2 2 Output to a Printer 12 3 Displaying the Print Image Preview 458 Before printing a report it is possible to visually check the print image on the screen The procedure for displaying the print image is basically the same as that for out putting the report to a printer Operation procedure to display the print preview is shown below 1 Select File menu bar Print Preview The Reports dialog box is displayed 2 To specify the print position of the paper click on Set Margins The Set Margins dialog box is displayed After setting the items in this dialog box click ex The Reports dialog box is displayed again 3 To set the header footer click on the Header Footer The Header and Footer dialog box is displayed After setting the items in this dialog box click on The Reports dialog box is displayed again Outputting the Screen Image Section 12 4 4 After completing the setting click on in the Reports dialog box For det
48. It is possible to display a numeral table entry so that you can select the desired Fixed Display Section 6 2 table entry number from it To display a numeral table entry follow the procedure below 1 Click on direct button in the property setting dialog box to display the numeral table selection dialog box atthe right side of the table entry number after checking the In Numeral Table x Numera Settings Change Address Edit gt Set 2 If the number of the desired numeral table entry is not found in the list scroll the list using the scroll bar at the right side of the screen or click on Gsto Entry to open the entry input dialog box EN Loewe Hep Input the number of the desired numeral table entry and click ex 3 Select the desired numeral table entry to be referenced The selected line will be highlighted 4 Click on to close the dialog box How to create the image data is described in 8 1 Image Editor 6 2 10 Mark Mark data is displayed Mark data can be used for all models With NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S mark data can be inserted only in string Since the Support Tool does not support mark data of 32 x 32 dots and 64 x 64 dots it is necessary to group 16 x 16 dot marks if image data created by the DOS version Support Tool is im cr 155 Fix
49. Library Object Mark m Lamp 1 Standard Lamp Image Lamp Numeral Display String Display Graph Bar Graph Analogue Meter Broken line Graph Trend Graph Alarm List Alarm History Input Touch Switch Input Numeral Input ial DNUS String Input Table Numeral Table Thumbwheel Switch String Table Recipe r Bit Memory Table Extended I O Input Table I Extended I O Output Table I I O Comment Table L F key input Notify Table I Mathematical Table Recipe Table System Memory L Symbol Data Direct Access Screen N Screen 2 Temp Alarm 10 00 4 Alarm display Screen 1 ABCD Graph display Fixed gt ie ee cl display Arg String Display 41516 Data input numeral input _ 213 p 2 eoc Touch switch Fixed Numeral display text display What Is Support Tool Section 1 1 Product Configuration The NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 consists of the following soft ware and data Support Tool Model number Specifications NT ZJCAT1 EV4 For IBM PC AT or compatible media CD ROM Keyboard
50. Limits on reading the data 539 limits on the use of elements 537 List box 45 Main Window 40 Mathematical table 308 MEMLINK 48 Menu bar 41 message box 45 Mitsubishi A 48 Mitsubishi FX 48 mmi format 56 New 46 New Models 538 Notify bit 293 NT series Support Tool 38 Number of Table Entries 50 Numeral Memory Tables 277 Numeral Storage Type 51 object position 41 OMRON 48 onw format 56 Open 54 Option button 44 PC PLC Address dialog box 53 PLC Vender 41 Printer for PT 50 PT Control Area 52 PT Notify Area 52 PT Type page 47 Reference Operation 268 Remaning memory 41 replacement 269 Resume Function 49 Save 55 Save As 55 Screen switching 293 Screen switching function 289 Search Operation 269 Selected PT model 41 Siemens 48 Start up Procedure 38 Status bar 41 Storage Type 280 System Installer Operation 487 488 489 System page 49 system program 487 Table Display Operation by Specifying the Table Number 277 Table of Functions 4 493 494 495 517 518 519 Text box 45 the import method of I O comment 301 Title bar 41 Tools 465 Total memory 41 Value 279 Vendor 48 Words 281 Switch Screen Touch Switch 217 Index Switching Screen by Extended I O Input 89 Switching Screens by Extended I O Input at Each Screen 89 Symbol Manager 254 System installer 30 System Keyp
51. Menu Position Font Type Standard Scale 1x1 Equal Smoothing Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Transparent Reference With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Color ON and Color OFF can be set independently for a label so that the lamp can be displayed in different colors in the ON and OFF states Click on returns to touch switch property then click on again Adjusting the size and position of the touch switch 5 Specify the Menu button and select Edit menu bar Edit Object 6 Adjust the size and position of Menu button frame 7 Adjust the position of label Menu by dragging it 380 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Creating the Set button 8 Copy the Menu button and paste it on the screen 9 Move the Menu button pasted at the upper left area of the screen to the Set button position 10 Double click the moved button and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged Settings Screen No 3 Label Label Set 1 Press Edit to set the label 11 Create the Alarm button in the same manner Modify Alarm button properties as shown below Settings Screen No 4 Label Label Alarm 1 Press Edit to set the label Creating the frame 12 Select Objects main menu Fixed Display Rectangle
52. NT series Su pport for Windows Ver 4 00 OPERATION MANUAL OMRON NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 Operation Manual Revised July 2010 Introduction The NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 1 is a software package for creating and maintaining screen data used by OMRON Programmable Terminals Be sure to read and understand the functions and performance of the Support Tool before you attempt to use a Programmable Terminal When using the Support Tool be sure to have the manuals for the Programmable Terminal close at hand Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must also have knowledge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the equivalent and computers Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities Personnel in charge of designing FA systems Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA equipment Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities Notice This manual provides information required to use the NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Support Tool and keep the manual close at hand for reference during operation OMRON 2000 rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electron
53. NT21 is supported Pick I O comment from CX Server database Only CSV file import is available When defining PLC address for each object the I O name in CX Server point data is picked up as the PT I O comment When editing the I O comment table multiple names in CX Server point data are imported as PT I O comments Property Dialog for Grouped Object Grouped object attributes cannot be edited unless ungrouped Grouped object attributes can be edited to select each property for grouped object Preview in Symbol manager Each symbol cannot be previewed on the Symbol Manager Symbol Manager shows preview and object tree view Symbols created before V4 6 can be read on V4 6 screen edit to add preview data then can be previewed after copying then back to the Symbol Manager Copying Image Library Mark with contents Only code of image Library Mark in the object is copied when the object is copied from other application with Import Components Command Contents must be copied separately Contents of Image Library Mark in the object is copied when the object is copied form other application with Import Components command Separate copying of contents is also available 543 Appendix New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 7 Some User Interface functionality was added to Ver 4 7 to improve operation efficiency NT11 V1 Model support Not supported NT11 V1 is supported Supported OS Wind
54. Settings Value Table Entry Specify the table entry number of a numeral memory table entry to be displayed Display Specify whether or not a percent value is displayed on the screen 100 Table Entry Specify this item if a 100 value is set by a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral table Value Specify this item if a 100 value is set by a constant set the value to be taken for a 100 value 0 Table Entry Specify this item is a 0 value is set by a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral table Value Specify this item if a 0 value is set by a constant set the value to be taken for a 0 value 100 Table Entry Specify this item if a 10096 value is set by a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral table 232 Graphs Section 6 9 Value Specify this item if a 10096 value is set by a constant set the value to be taken for a 10096 value Note that specification for 10096 is valid only when Display Sign is selected Guidance Analogue meters are displayed as follows depending on the settings of Shape Direction and Display sign Assumptions Direction Clockwise Display 30 Shape Display Direction Direction Direction Direction sign Up T Down J Left Right E O O O Semi Circle O O Circle e Which of 0 to 100 and 100 to 100 analogue meters is dis
55. The Delete Translation Dialog box will be displayed You can delete any language except the source language Delete Translation x Language OK 7581 Help Export Use Export to export string data to an MS Excel worksheet xls You can then translate the strings on MS Excel and subsequently import the data to the Translation Support Utility to save it to the MMI files of the translated language Select Export in the Translation Menu of the Application window 507 Translation Support Utility Appendix D The Export Translation Dialog box will be displayed Translations French Cancel Help Russian Click the Button after selecting the language to be exported A file save dialog box similar to the file open dialog box will prompt you to enter a filename Once a valid filename is specified the export operation begins The cursor will change to a wait cursor for the duration of this operation When the operation is finished an export completion message box will be displayed Import Use Import to import string data from an MS Excel worksheet xls Select Import in the Translation Menu of the Application window The Open File dialog box will be displayed Enter the name of the file to the im ported The Import Translation Dialog box will be displayed Import x Current Text Source Translation Status Excel Text Import Text jJ eee am 96 Language
56. base the first time it is opened Translation Project Setup Ed Source Project Language OK Source Project Character Set Cancel dii Source Project Language Displays all the available Languages You may input a language that is not in the list Source Project Character Set This will be disabled if the specified Source Project Language type is the same as the pre defined Source Project language type However if you have input your own language the Source Project Character Set combo box will be enabled and the default language will be Latin New Translation Creates a new target language column for translation Select New in the Translation Menu of the Application window 505 Translation Support Utility Translation Setting 506 Appendix D The New Translation Dialog box will appear and the user can edit the Language Character Set and Output File Name New Translation x Language E eran Y Character Set Cancel Output File Name Latin ISO 8859 1 CP437 Help C Program Files Omronapp_German mmi Browse Language Displays all the available Languages You may input a language that is not in the list Character Set The Code Page will be disabled if the specified language type is the same as the pre defined language type However if you have input your own language in the edit box the character set combo box will be enabled and the default will be Latin Outp
57. conventional model word addresses remain as they were With a new model the word address is five digits The word address is reset Invalid PC PLC address It is reset to default Reset the word address to a number of four or less digits If this PC PLC address is re ferred to from the pro gram it is necessary to correct the program ac cordingly Refer to 6 1 10 Setting Proper ties With a new model with V2 V3 the ac cessible CS CJ se ries area is speci fied Correction related to continuous screens The word address is reset Invalid PL PLC ad dress It is reset to default Reset the word address to an accessible area If this PLC address is re ferred to using program ming also make correc tions in accordance with the programming Refer to Word setting for an element in 6 1 10 Set ting Properties When the data of a conventional model is converted into data for a new model an error may occur due to differences in the handling of continuous screens be tween conventional models and new models Difference New models Conventional models Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Continuous screens cannot be used Status after Conversion Error Message Continuous screens can be used Corrective Action With conventional models continuous Screens are used Correction related to overla
58. numeric value of up to 8 digits can be input for the maximum minimum limit Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Status after Conversion Conversion Corrective Action Error Message With a new model With a conventional Create a new numeral a numeral setting model maximum Numeral Input Maxi setting input field Cor input field for which and minimum value mum value is out of rect the screen data or a numeric value greater than 8 digits limit Default values the program in the host greater than will be reset restored for maxi so that a constant of up mum and minimum to 8 digits suffices Re smaller than fer to 6 4 1 Numeral In 10000000 is speci put 6 4 3 Thumbwheel fied as a maximum Switch or minimum limit is registered to the symbol manager 100000000 or Correction related the number of digits for numeral input In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model conver sion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the range of numeric values that can be input Difference New models A numeric value of up to 10 digits can be input Conventional models numeric value of up to 8 digits can be input 480 Data Conversion Appendix A Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a new mo
59. sel oma nla Standard toolbar y Draw bar Application manager screen Data creation screen Status bar RA 1 sta t T Spe To P EIE Application manager screen Directories of screens and tables are displayed as a tree list which allows open ing copying and other operations Data creation screen On this screen the screen to be displayed by the PT is created Control menu box The control menu box displayed at the upper left corner of the operation screen and windows allows you to select how a window is displayed 40 User Interface Section 3 2 Title bar Status bar For Help press F1 Status Help message or information of object Menu bar The titles of windows are displayed here on each window respectively The status bar displays a simple explanation about the selected function se lected object cursor position object position the model type of the objective PT PLC Vendor the maximum memory size and the remaining application size R 20 3 120 80 NT31C V1 OMRON 1017576 1048320 B Application Memory Remain Cursor Position Selected PT model ing memory Total memory Selected PL In case user application ex Top left coordinate of Vendor ceeds the total memory re selected objects maining memory will be shown as negative value in red color The functions provided by the Support Tool are divided into several gro
60. 1 Select Connect in the menu bar then choose Download NT series Sup port Tool PT Application If the screen data is free of errors sending of the data starts immediately A message is displayed if the data has an error Sending Downloading specified screen 1 Specify the screen icon Multiple files can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key Select Connect in the menu bar then choose Download NT series Support Tool PT Screen Specify if child screens of continuous overlapping screens are also to be sent then click the Button If the screen data is free of errors sending of the data starts immediately A message is displayed if the data has an error Sending Downloading specified Tables 1 2 Select Connect in the menu bar then choose Download NT series Support Tool PT gt Table The dialog box used for specifying the table to be sent is displayed for PTs that allow table data to be sent in table units With PTs that do not allow table data to be sent table by table sending of the data starts immediately Specify the table to be sent then click the Button Reference Downloading in table units may not be possible with some PT types 4 2 13 Window Menu 74 Sending the Direct Access Information and system memory 1 Select Connect in the menu bar then choose Download NT series Support Tool
61. 123 8 9 5 6 2 3 CL To switch the objective in Objects Data Input Numeral put field among multiple numeral setting input fields arranged in a PT PT screen in response to the Screen Sedi touching of a numeric set ting input field 1234 Input objective field Create the cursor moving touch switches automatically 421 Quick Reference Touch Switches 422 To switch the objective in put field among multiple numeral setting input fields arranged in a screen using the arrow symbol 1 and keys Section 10 1 Operation 1 Objects Data Input Numeral Create a numeral setting input field 2 Objects Touch Switch gt Function Input Key Control Create the and J touch switches PT PT Screen Screen T 1234 s Input objective field Refer to To copy between numeral memory table entries or character string memory table entries string table with one touch switch Objects Touch Switch Function Copy Setting Create a touch switch for which the function to copy char acter strings or numeric values between character string memory table entries string ta
62. Alarm Screen button v 357 Operation Flow Section 9 2 358 Creating Monitor Screen Create new screen screen No 10 v Set properties for screen No 10 v Create screen title v Create numeral display field of Numeral Display 1 v Create numeral display field of Numeral Display 2 Create Trend graph v Create new screen screen No 11 v Set properties for screen No 11 v Create Lamp 1 to Lamp 5 v Create image data for image lamp Create Image Lamp v Create Bar Graph 1 v Create Bar Graph 2 v Create Menu button v Create Set button v Create Alarm button v Create parent screen screen No 10 11 as child screens Uu Operation Flow Section 9 2 Creating the Set Screen Create new screen screen No 3 v Set properties for screen No 3 v Create screen title v Create numeral input field of Numeral Input 1 v Create numeral input field of Numeral Input 2 v Create Thumbwheel is di Create Start and Stop buttons ed Create String Display display field v Create Auto button sei Create Man button v Create Step button IE Create Reset button v
63. All graphics have inverse attributes 475 Data Conversion Appendix A Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With conventional model the inverse attribute is specified for a graphic for which the inverse at tribute is not sup With a new model the foreground color and background col or are automatically interchanged Object Name inverse attribute not supported Fore ground and back ground colors inter changed Since the foreground col or and background color are automatically inter changed no special correction is required display attribute is set to ported by a new model default standard Correction of smoothing processing for marks If a mark is converted between a conventional and a new model conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the handling of mark smoothing processing between them Difference New models Smoothing processing is not possible for marks Conventional models Smoothing processing is possible for marks Conversion result error message and corrective action Status after Conversion Status before Conversion Corrective Action Error Message Correction not neces sary With a new model smoothing proces sing is invalid for a mark With a conventional model smoothing processin
64. E 1900 1979 Window Keyboard 1980 1996 Extended C3 1997 1998 History Log 1999 Hast Connect C3 Table 91 Continuous Overlapping Screens Section 5 3 5 3 1 Continuous Screens 92 Two to eight screens can be registered for one continuous screen The base screen where multiple screens are registered is called a parent screen and multi ple screens registered to the parent screen are called child screens Screen No 10 Screen 20 j Screen No 15 Screen 1 pue o Parent Continuous Continuous Continuous Screen Screen 1 P SEI screen 2 SET ll Screen 3 When screen No 10 is specified the first continuous screen screen No 20 is displayed Pressing touch switch J changes the screen to screen No 15 Pressing the touch switch again changes the screen to screen No 1 Since the screen of screen No 10 is set as the parent screen of continuous Screens it cannot be displayed independently Screens set as continuous screens are switched by the pressing of the touch switches 4 and for which system key functions are allocated In the parent screen setting dialog show page number can be set or reset to indi cate currently activated child screen number out of total pages on the upper right corner of the parent screen Child screens should be created on standard screens in advance Continuous screens are set in the procedure described bel
65. Edit Param Displays the parameter setting table 317 Recipe Table Section 7 10 Note Parameter Setting Table Edit Permits clear copy and paste operations on a selected range of record entries An edit popup menu with these 4 options will appear like the menu in the current numeral table entry Clear Copy Paste is only enabled when the clipboard contains record data Goto Entry Allows the selection of an entry by specifying the entry number through a Go to dialog The behavior is same as the numeral table Go to dialog Insert Mark Inserts a mark object in a record or a parameter name Import Import parameter data from a CSV formatted file A file open dialog with a CSV Formatted Recipe Data csv filter will prompt for the source file Export Export all data of this recipe entry A file save dialog with a CSV Formatted Rec ipe Data csv filter will prompt for the target file name Exporting a selection of parameter data is not supported Reset Width Resets the width of each column to the default setting The parameter data cell will always be displayed using the parameter s number format A decimal type parameter will display values in decimal while a hexade cimal type parameter will display values in hexadecimal Parameter Setting x pe reete este so osos wee nee ifCheese E Dec 1 00020 As t 5 1 01 L00021 Dec 5 0 1 L00022 Cl
66. Entry Specify the table entry number of the table to be displayed The cursor moves to the specified table entry number Operation procedure 1 Click on exe 2 Specify the table entry number of the table to be displayed 3 Click on x 7 2 Numeral Memory Table Numeral Memory Table The numeral memory table is an area provided in a PT to store numeric value data A numeral memory table entry is allocated to one or two words in a PC PLC and the numeral memory table entry used for display can be shared with the PC PLC 277 Numeral Memory Table Section 7 2 With elements such as numeral display graph and numeral input reading writ ing of a numeric value is executed by specifying the numeral memory table entry number PT Screen Numeral memory input element Bar graph Numeral display 1234 element Read Storage type Numeral data 2345 No of words table Initial value Initialization PC PLC Write 0 Shared comment MET Reference Shared Read n 2 ahr 7 2 1 Operation Procedure Setting Reference A numeral memory table entry is displayed by the operation described below At the property settings for individual elements click on in the table entry number field e Select Tools menu bar Table then click the Nu
67. File menu 553 Appendix L Shortcut Keys The following shortcut keys can be used with the Support Tool Pressing these shortcut keys can perform the functions easily without selecting the items from the menu New Function Shortcut key Ctrl N Ctrl O Save Ctrl S Print Ctrl P Undo Ctrl Z Redo Ctrl Y Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Align Top Ctrl Up Arrow Align Bottom Ctrl Down Arrow Align Left Ctrl Left Arrow Align Right Ctrl Right Arrow Center in a Column Ctrl F9 Center in a Row Ctrl Shift F9 Delete Del Select All Ctrl A Refresh F9 Group Ctrl G Ungroup Ctrl U Bring to Front Ctrl F Send to Back Ctrl B Centralize Label Ctrl L New Ctrl W Delete Ctrl E Table Ctrl T Validate F12 Download Application Ctrl Shift D Upload Application Ctrl Shift U Properties Alt Enter Objects Selection Higher Display Order Tab Lower Display Order Shift Tab Edit Object Mode ON OFF Insert Edit Object Mode ON Object Selection Ctrl Shift Click The mark in the list indicates that you should press the key after the mark while you press the Ctrl key etc 555
68. Fixed Display Text 2 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the Alarm List character string is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner of text 3 Set the properties as shown below Description Alarm List Position Font Type Standard Scale 1x1 Equal Smoothing _ Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background screen by dragging it Black 4 Adjust the position of the Alarm List character string on the data creation 395 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Creating the alarm list 5 Select Objects menu bar Alarm List Refer to 6 3 7 Alarm List 6 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the alarm list is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner 7 Make the following settings in the dialog box for selecting whether or not the line scroll touch switches and page scroll touch switches are used Create Line Scroll Touch Switch al Create Page Scroll Touch Switch 4 Reference For NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C this dialog box is displayed For these models create the alarm list and then set whether or not the line page scroll touch switches are created in the property settings 8 Set the properties as shown below Position Size Message Length Display Line Qty 8 Scale 1x2 High Smoothing 4 Frame
69. Import I O Comments from the Tools menu The dialog box to specify I O comments will be displayed 2 Specify CX P IO Comments Tab Delimited txt or All Files as a file type and specify the I O comment file tab delimited text file saved and click the OK Button The I O comment will be imported 3 When the operation is finished the message Import of I O Comments op eration completed will be displayed Next click the Button When an I O comment import was aborted or could not be performed be cause of an error the message Failed to import I O comment will be dis played Click the Button to clear the message In this case the contents of the I O comment table in Support Tool remain unchanged If this message box is displayed check the following points Is the data format of the I O comment file to be imported tab delimited text file correct see the following page If an import is aborted in the middle of the import operation I O comments in the Support Tool will remain unchanged Text file format to be imported by the Support Tool The Support Tool can read the tab delimited text file which was created by the user as an I O comment file Here the rule for the text file format is described Format One line must be constructed as follows Name TAB PLC address TAB O comment Enter Example START 0 01 START ON STOP 0 02 STOP OFF N DataV1082 DM1082 Speed N DataA1083
70. Jis clicked Direct Access Information Data transmission starts immediately System Memory Data transmission starts immediately Table NT20 NT20S and NT600S Data transmission starts immediately NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C The dialog box where the information to be sent is specified is displayed Only the information for which a check mark is set is sent Data transmission starts when is clicked 3 Place the PT in the Transmit mode so that the data sent from the Support Tool can be received If the PT is not in the Transmit mode a timeout error occurs in about 10 se conds at the Support Tool In this case set the PT in the Transmit mode and click on in the error message dialog box 4 While the data is being sent to the PT the progress of data transmission is indicated by a bar graph To abort the operation click on cea Reference If data transmission is aborted it is necessary to initialize the image data memory in the Maintenance mode System Menu Execute the same processing if data transmission is interrupted due to trouble When sending all the screen data Application initialization is not necessary since initialization is automatically executed 435 Receiving Uploading Data Section 11 4 screen data When transferring the data in units of screens if there are changes a memory table and or direct access transfer such data along with
71. NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C and NT625C it is not necessary to set this property 4 Set the properties as shown below Position E Font Type Standard Scale 2x2 Smoothing Attribute Standard Color Foreground Black Background White Table Entry 10 Display Type Decimal Format Integer 8 Decimal 0 Limit 1 Maximum 99999999 Minimum 0 Zero Suppression al Display Sign Focus Frame Focus Attribute Standard 1 The setting is not needed for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C 5 Specify the numeral input field and adjust the position 403 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Setting the pop up display range frame Set the range for pop up display 1 Move the range specifying frame displayed at the upper left section in the screen to the numeric key area and adjust its size so that the keys and tem porary input field are enclosed For details of changing the size and the position of pop up display frame refer to 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens 9 3 13 Saving the Created Data 1 Select File menu bar Save As Refer to 4 2 10 Saving the Screen Data Application to a File 2 Specify the file name of the file where the created data is saved example SAMPLE ONW and click ex 9 3 14 Downloading to the PT Setting the PT status control area and PT status notify area 1 Select Tools menu ba
72. NT631 and NT631C with V1 and above smoothing is not performed since 32 dot font is used 524 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT11S NT600S NT620S NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Insert Mark e e e Insert Image ON State Code OFF State Code Indirect Reference Table Entry e Display Type e Decimal Decimal Hexadeci only mal Format Integer Decimal Zero Sup pression Display Sign e Font Type standard only e Scale 2x1 1 1 Smoothing x Attribute e Color Fore ground Color Back ground String Indirect Display Reference x Table Entry x Length 20 Font Type standard only 1x1 2x1 525 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT11S NT600S NT620S Items NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 String Smoothing x x Display Attribute Color Foreground Color Background Table Entry e Display Type e Decimal Hexadeci mal Decimal only Limit Maxi mum x Limit Mini mum Format In teger Deci mal Zero Sup pression Display Sign Font Type Smoothing Attribute Color Foreground Color Background Focus Frame Focus Attrib
73. Numeral setting input field Numeric keys Pop up window keyboard 6 4 2 Character String Input You can write character string data to a character string memory table entry string table using touch switches and a bar code reader Touch switches must be allocated character strings or a key code control code input and character string input function or the copy function beforehand 181 Data Input Section 6 4 Input using touch switches character string input function control code input function Character stri e Screen table String table ud Input field 4 N key __ No 1 ABC E ABC No 2 d Writing No3 DEF GHI No4 Touch switches 1 Setthe character strings to be input using the character string input function to touch switches 2 Press a touch switch to set the label that is set for the touch switch into the character string input field 3 Press the touch switch for which the J key code is allocated by the control code input function to write the character string set at the input field to the specified character string memory table entry string table Input using touch switches copy function control code input function Character string memory Screen table String table Input field 4 key No 1 ABC L L 3 ABC No 2 SET No 3 Copying the ABC
74. O OC OC OF OC OC CO OC CO Cf O OC O OF OC O CO OC OF OC OC CO OC CO Cf OF OF OC OF CO OC OF CO OC OF OC OF OC gt i gt gt D gt gt bP bP EP Pe EP D gt Eb bP D gt gt gt P P gt gt Pe gt Pb EP Pl gt bP D D gt PI P E D gt gt gt gt D gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt x gt gt gt D gt gt gt gt D gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt D x gt gt gt D gt gt Pb EP D gt D D gt gt b gt be D x x Usable in the default state A Exclusive system program should be installed A Exclusive communication I F unit is needed C200H I F unit NT LB122 x Not usable Note Communication methods are indicated in the table above using the following ab breviations C200H C200H I F 28 SECTION 2 Setting Up the Support Tool When you are going to use the Support Tool for the first time the Support Tool software must be installed at your personal computer The Support Tool is an application software that runs on Windows 95 98 NT4 0 2000 or XP of Microsoft Corporation The procedure described in the following pages assumes that your personal computer already has Windows installed 2 1 Before Installing the Software 1 0 1 ec 30 2 2 Installing the Support Tool cee eee eee ee 31 2 2 1 Basic Installation
75. PT gt Direct Access Information or System Memory If the setting is free of errors sending of the data starts immediately A mes sage is displayed if the data has an error The following Support Tool operations are possible using the Window menu Opening a new window for the data creation screen that is active Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 Arranging windows Switching windows Reference The Support Tool can operate windows in the same manner as other Windows Opening a new window Reference Arranging windows applications Here only the functions that can be selected from the Support Tool menus are explained To open a new window for the data creation screen that is active follow the pro cedure described below 1 2 4 Windows with the same screen number display the same contents When the same screen is displayed in two windows elements can be copied between the windows by dragging them while pressing the Ctrl key Usually copying an element to a desired position in the same screen is not possible However if two same windows are opened it is possible to copy an element to a desired position although they are on the same screen Similarly if different screen data files of the same PT model are opened by two Support Tools it is possible to copy screen data between the files When multiple windows that have the same screen number exist the follow ing information is displ
76. Report ows te ete ites ROAST Ace teo Tae t yn 444 12 1 I Cross References eee b pere eres geld el 9E ERPPRERCIN EP E 445 12 1 2 Direct Connection Information 0 0 eee cee e 446 12 1 3 Report x ue eere Rte eR 447 12 1 4 Image Library Report 0 cee III 447 12 1 5 MarkLlistsu v ees Rr bee eR m eR EY HERE RERI ed tae ed awed ES 448 12 1 6 Screen Image ss deae er eh Re tc e eger X le cete d 448 12 137 Screen Last sers Le Re ERR eal RP ARP ULERPEDR e RP 449 122128 Table Report 29 ace pi ogi ENG See rg eed eve X VE CEDE LS 450 12 1 9 Validation Report n 450 12 1 10 Mathematical Report n 450 127111 Recipe e naer picks CS ERR OP EP PE US 451 12 2 Printing Reports eos e yr eer RE 451 12 241 Printer Setting iine iac E DDR T TR Rp oh ada apa 451 12 2 2 Output to tended wet dds eR ee doe HERE RE Te ES 452 12 23 Output toa File RTF cece eens 457 12 3 Displaying the Print Image Preview 58 458 12 4 Outputting the Screen Image 0 0 ccc ee ence eens 459 443 Report Types Section 12 1 12 1 Report Types The Support Tool outputs the following types of report Cross Reference Direct Connection Information Histor
77. Scroll 1 line right No Display recipe number Recipe Screen Element Section 6 11 Property setting General General Settings Touch Switches Interlock Position Sie 2o Yea Width 319 Height 239 Show Parameters Frame Colour H Show Serial Number m Message Record Name Colour 4 No Of Parameters 2 m Foreground m Back d Display Line Qty 10 9 195 i Parameter Name Colour Param Column Width 0 E Ee s Record Name Width i 2 E Background Scale 1x1 Equal 2 Parameter Data Colour Smoothing Foreground Background Em Help Cancel Note The text data display in the recipe frame will be such that any character that ex ceeds the specified column width will not be shown This affects the following fields recipe name record name and parameter name For example given a recipe entry named Long Recipe the recipe frame will show Long when the Record Name Width is set as 4 i The parameter data values display will depend on the Param Column Width setting If it is set as 2 and the parameter data is 200 then will be displayed for each digit The value will be displayed as 200 only when the column width is set greater than 2 The width of each cell in the recipe frame will be set such that the width is a multi ple of
78. So at this time valida tion will be also performed Reference Validation will be also performed when saving the screen data in mmi format Executing the Validation Reference Validating the current focused screen Make sure the screen you want to validate is open and select Validate from the Tools menu Validating the whole screen data application file 1 Right after performing the screen validation mentioned above choose Vali date from the Tools menu again Confirmation dialog box arrives 2 Click the Button Then the validation will start During the validation it is not possible to perform other operation After the validation has been completed the result message arrives Please execute the validation after the creation of screen data application Validation might need a sufficient time period in case the screen data applica tion itself has large size and validation for the whole data has been executed So when Validating for the whole data has been performed the confirmation dialog box appears asking whether you want to perform the validation or not Click the Button to start the validation Displaying the error log and its location 72 Reference If the error check function detects an error a brief error message is displayed and you are requested to confirm the error log The messages contents of the error log are cleared when an element or a screen is operated There
79. Status before Conversion Extended screens are not supported Status after Conversion Error Message Extended screens can be used as standard screens Corrective Action With a conventional model the screen number of an ex tended screen is used for a standard screen With a new model the screen is treated as a stan dard screen The screen no XXX was an Extended Screen that is not supported by this model so it is con verted to a standard Screen 471 Data Conversion Appendix A Correction related to history screens When a history screen is converted an error message may be displayed due to differences in the handling of the screen numbers of the frequency history screen and the occurrence history screen between conventional and new models Difference New models Conventional models Screen No 9001 and No 9002 History screens occurrence order frequency order cannot be edited Screen No 1997 and No 1998 History screens occurrence order frequency order can be edited Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a conventional model a history Screen occurrence order frequency or der is edited With a new model the history screen is deleted displaying the edited history Screen is possible by specifying it from a PT Correcti
80. The time necessary for error check execution varies depending on the registered screen data Reference Printing information on errors occurring during data conversion The procedure for printing information on errors occurring during data conver sion is shown below 1 Data of NT series Support Tool Open the source file 455 Printing Reports Section 12 2 Select Tools PT Configuration and specify the PT model conver sion destination Execute data conversion Data of DOS version e Specify the file using File Import Execute data conversion 2 If an error occurs the message Application conversion has resulted some messages in Error Log is displayed Click 3 Select View Error Log to display the error log 4 Select File Print and set the properties as shown below Report Type Validation Report e Destination Printer or Rich Text Format Screen Print Current Error Log Window For details of data conversion refer to Appendix A Data Conversion Setting margins Specify the margins to define the print area Y Top Bottom K gt Left K gt Right The units for dimensions can be selected between cm and inch Setting footer and header Specify contents of header and footer to be printed The header footer print position can be set as Left Center or Right Left Center Right Header y eee EE Foo
81. Touch Switch Display Start Pos End Pos Function Frame Disp SPos Disp EPos Attr Pos Lamp Bit State Attribute Frame Col Off Col On Col Flash Col Label Pos Font Scale Smoothing Attribute Label Fg Col Label Bg Gol Label On Col Label 181 141 500 200 Switch Screen No 2 3 Dimension 181 141 500 200 No Light White Transparent White White 230 155 Standard 2x tandard White Transparent Monitor Screen 181 221 500 280 Switch Screen No 3 3 Dimension 181 221 500 280 Yes Light White Transparent While Whit 265 235 Standard 2x2 Yes Standard White Transparent Set Screen 181 801 500 360 Switch Screen No 4 3 Dimension 181 301 500 360 Yes Light White Transparent While White 250 315 Standard 2x2 Yes Standard White Transparent Alarm Screen 12 1 7 Screen List lenu Screen Monitor Screen Set Screen Fixed Display Rectangle Square Start Pos End Pos FrGnd Colour BkGnd Colour Attribute 10 10 204 59 White Transparent Standard Fixed Display Text Mark Position Font Scale 20 15 Standard 2x2 Yes Smoothing Attribute FrGnd Colour BkGnd Colour Description Standard White Transparent Menu Screen Touch Switch Display Start Pos Pos Function Frame Disp SPos Disp EPos Attr Pos Lamp Bit On State Attribute Frame Col Off Col On Col Flash Col Label Pos Font Scale Smoothing Attribute_Label Fg Col Label Bg Col Label On Label 181 141 500 200 Switch Scree
82. Touch Switches Section 6 8 Guidance Common description The following shapes can be used for touch switch elements Selectable shapes vary according to the PT model Standard Shadow 3 Dimension Rectangle z gt D i i D zi MEER T e ERE Circle Polygon Sector Although Standard and Rectangle have the same shape how the touch switch frame is defined differs between them With Standard the touch switch frame itself provides the display graphic With Rectangle however a rectangle shape can be specified independently of the touch switch frame and the touch switch frame can be separated from the rectangle shape If rectangle circle polygon or sector is selected only the shape of a graphic can be modified in the procedure shown below The touch switch frame touch sensing area remains unchanged even if the shape is modified Use the element edit function to modify the touch switch shape For details refer to page 112 1 Click on a line of a graphic while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key 2 Drag a green W mark to modify the graphic 3 To add a green W mark addition of a node in a polygon position the mouse cursor on the line in a graphic and execute a vertex addition operation right click the mouse Add Node To delete a green lll mark deletion of a node position the mouse cursor on the green mark to be deleted and execute a vertex deletion oper
83. Vo Comments Memory Insert Image button OK button m Screen Screen abedefghi jk abodeligfghi jk T Image data list You can first insert this image to a string and then register the image data afterward Use the image editor to create image data Reference clicking the new Button an image code with no data can be added to the 287 Bit Memory Table Section 7 4 7 3 6 Inserting Library Data into a Character String To insert library data into an initial value follow the steps described below Note that insertion of library data into a character string is possible only with the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT21 NT20 30 620 compatible mode NT31 C V2 NT20 30 620 compatible mode and NT631 C V2 NT20 30 620 compatible mode 1 After specifying the Value field move the cursor to the position where the library data is to be inserted 2 Click the neues Button The Library Table dialog box is displayed 3 Specify the library data in the list of library data 4 Click the Button The code of the specified library data is inserted to the Value field The library data itself is not displayed here Numeral Sting O Comments Bit Memory Nomeal Stree vo Comments OK button Screen Screen abedefghi jk abcdetgifghi jk i Library data Reference By cl
84. White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Settings Specify this when displaying multiple broken lines The line properties Line are displayed Delete ine Specify this when deleting broken lines Line Property Specify this when modifying broken lines The line properties Line are displayed Line Start Table Entry Specify the start table entry number of the numeral memory table entries that are displayed in a broken line graph No of Points Specify the number of vertices in the broken line graph Interval Type Even Specify this when displaying numeral memory table entries at even intervals Uneven Specify this when displaying numeral memory table entries at user selected intervals Interval Settings Set the broken line intervals if Uneven is selected Line Color Specify the broken line color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Style Specify the broken line style Solid Dash Dot dash Dot dot dash 100 Table Entry Specify this item if a 100 value is set with a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral memory table Value Specify this item if a 100 value is set with a constant set the value to be taken as the 100 value 0 Table Entry Specify this item if a 0 value is set with a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral memory table Value Speci
85. Window Control Area Use the PC PLC Address dialog box only when the area type and address are input individually If the PC PLC address is directly input in the Control Notify Area page it is not necessary to call this dialog box Example PLC Vendor OMRON Channel None Pick Ox Server Point Bit Cancel Help Channel Word Specify the type of PC PLC area that is used as a PT Status Control Area a PT Status Notify Area or a Window Control Area by selecting an item from the drop down list box Address Specify the first word address in the PC PLC area that is to be used as the PT Status Control Area PT Status Notify Area and Window Control Area 53 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 Comments Set a comment concerning the area set as the PT Status Control Area a PT Status Notify Area or a Window Control Area As a comment a character string of up to 16 characters can be set Clock Address When the PT is set to the NT21 the addresses must be set to read the clock from the PLC host This setting is not necessary for other models of PT If the PT is set to the NT21 on the tools page of the PT configuration dialog box the clock address dialog box shown below appears Always set an address when using the clock function data displays screen display history or alarm history Clock Address Address PLO Address VO Gomments PLC Address
86. be used symbol data file should be opened However if the symbol data file has a Read only property the characters Read Only are displayed in the symbol manager In this case it is not possible to perform symbol registration 255 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Section 6 10 Closing a folder file Creating a new folder 256 1 Select File in the menu bar then select Open The dialog to specify the file name is displayed In the dialog the folders that contain the symbol data file to be read are displayed File type is fixed to a Symbol File SBL Specify the desired folder and file name and click on omm Opened symbol data file is displayed in the symbol manager Ex Opening ISO Symbol file 1507000 0001 0099 SBL BL 507000 1100 1199 BL jm Spplmntsbi BL 0001 0099 File Files of type File Edit View Help L CokurPalette L SO7000 0001 0099 Read Only Supplement Symbols Close the unnecessary folder symbol data file to remove it from the symbol manager 1 2 Select the folder that should be closed in the symbol manager The folder name is displayed in reverse video Select File in the menu bar then select Close If the file has not been saved the message asking you whether to save it or not is displayed If you click the played Button the window to specify the file name is dis Speci
87. eee en 289 7 4 2 Related El ments oou E ERE EIS ES 289 7 4 3 Description of Bit Memory Table Fields 290 7 5 Extended I O Input Table n 293 7 5 1 Operation Procedure sssi en 294 7 5 2 Description of Extended I O Input Table Fields 295 7 6 Extended I O Output Table sssi rossa E AG 297 7 6 1 Operation Procedure oerste erne Eo E a T eee 298 7 6 2 Description of Extended I O Output Table Fields 298 7 7 Comment Table isse ex A GREE E RR RE S 298 7 7 1 Operation Procedure errei iep ER 299 7 7 2 Description of I O Comment Table 1 300 7 7 3 Importing I O Comments from a Ladder Program 301 7 7 4 Importing I O Comment from Tab delimited Text File 305 7 8 F Key Input Notify Table ec ce eens 307 7 8 1 Operation Procedure cee eee ene 307 7 8 2 Description of F Key Input Notify Table 308 4 9 Mathematical Table see eet ea ee ed epe ehe eae d ea 308 7 9 Operation Procedure s riaren opea rT era RAT AE en 308 7 9 2 Supported ODjJects e tmr Leer emt Ip ate ee em e xa 308 7 9 3 Supported PLC Addresses
88. in an analogue meter e Position of a Display in a trend graph and touch switches for controlling function Display position of image library data and position of touch switches in an alarm list alarm history 1 Select the element to be edited Select only one element if multiple elements are selected edit object func tion can not be used 2 Select Edit menu bar then select Edit Object This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse on the elements and select Edit Object in the menu It is also possible to enter Edit Object mode by simply pressing the Insert button on a keyboard To cancel Edit Object mode press Insert button again The green ll marks handles change into red 3 Select an element Section 6 1 Example Changing the position of the label in a touch switch Green Red Reference The following operation is also possible 1 Confirm that no element or element other than objective one is selected 2 While holding down the Shift key and Ctrl key click on the objective part of the element that consists of multiple elements 3 The element automatically enters into Edit Object mode so that the element selected at 2 can be edited Multiple Edit Mode for Recipe Touch Switch Activating Edit Modes To edit the component o
89. port Tool and a combo box for selecting to display certain screen object type refer to 5 1 4 Filter Function are provided En l Centralize Simulate Filter Screen Label ON OFF Element Simulate Flash Alignment Bar This toolbar provides the object alignment to the top bottom left right and also center in a row and center in a column Refer to 6 1 6 Aligning Elements Align Center in Top a Column Align Align Center Bottom Right in a Row Reference Whether or not Status Bar Standard Toolbar Draw Bar Utility Bar and Align ment Bar are displayed can be selected respectively by the following opera tion 42 User Interface Section 3 2 Status Bar View menu bar Status Bar Standard Toolbar View menu bar Toolbars Standard Bar Draw Bar View menu bar Toolbars Draw Bar Utility Bar View menu bar Toolbars Utility Bar Alignment Bar View menu bar Toolbars Alignment Bar Each time you select the item display no display selection changes alternately The check mark if displayed indicates that the selection of the corresponding item is to be displayed If Auto hide invoked by selecting Start button Windows Settings Taskbar Taskbar Options is checked status bar may not be displayed cor rectly when the window of the Support Tool is maximized In this case clear the checkmark for Always on top at Taskbar Op
90. to en sure error free communication if a communication error occurs due to an inadequate communication environment Data communication at the 9 6 Kbps Standard setting will take about twice the time required in the 38 4 Kbps High setting If the PT is set to the NT21 even faster communications are possible by selected 115 Kbps Select this item by setting a check mark in the check box if you want to check the communication data at the same time it is transmitted Please note that this setting is al lowed only for NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S 3 After completing the setting for all items click on 11 3 Sending Downloading the Data To send download the data created or edited by the Support Tool to a PT follow the steps shown below The type of data that can be sent is indicated in the table below Data Type Description Application in file units All data is sent in batch Screen Data is sent in units of a screen It is possible to send the data of several screens at a time When sending the data of a parent screen you can specify whether or not the data of the child screens should be sent with the parent screen data Direct Access Information NT20 NT20S and NT600S Information on the PC PLC addresses allo cated to the PT status control area PT status notify area numeral character string memory table string table etc NT21 Information on the PC PLC ad
91. 0 Word 11 Word 10 t Change To Address start address after the change Before change After change 0000010 H0001000 0000012 H0001002 0000100 H0001006 0000110 H0001100 0000115 ween H0001105 Click On Change Address Select the type of word before the change in the Channel box BB Specify the range of the change by setting addresses at the Start Range and End Range boxes 4 Specify the word and the address after the change in the corresponding boxes in the Change To area 273 Section 7 1 5 Seta check mark in the Change Comment check box as desired If a check mark is set in this check box I O comments appended to the ad dresses before the change are also appended to the addresses after the change 6 Click on x 7 1 4 Edit Operation The procedure for clearing cutting copying pasting and incremental copying of the data set a memory table is described below In the copy to next operation the specified incremental amount is automatically added to the data in the memory table entry at the cursor location and copied to the memory table entry with the next number The procedure for specifying the incremental amount to be used for copy to next is explained in 7 1 5 Cop
92. 1000 NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C 1 to 1899 1900 to 1979 1980 to 1999 2000 NT21 1 to 3999 9000 9001 9002 9020 NT31 NT31C 1 to 3999 9000 9001 9002 9020 to 9023 NT631 NT631C 9030 On a screen a variety of objects can be arranged as desired The following objects are used to create a screen Display objects are drawn on a screen and do not have an input function Display objects are classified into two kinds Objects that are always displayed in the same status and those that change according to the status of the PT or the PC PLC Input objects are objects that allow input by operation at the PT Touch switches and input fields for numerals and strings are examples of input objects Objects having code numbers These objects are created using an exclusive editor They are registered with a code number so that they can be used in different posi tions and different screens Library data A drawing created as a fixed display is registered as library data so that it can be used multiple positions and screens The library editor is used to create library data Image data Image data are objects used to display bit map data on the screen An image editor or bit map editor running on Windows 95 98 NT 4 0 2000 or XP available on the market is used to create image data Marks Marks are used to display special characters and symbols These objects can be handled as characters
93. 225 6 8 9 Print Screen Touch Switch 12 0 eect e 225 105 106 6 0 Graphs sisse estem 6 0 1 ii lem eR eee DeL eee tea ee 6 9 2 Analogue Meter x eed M ada dee FT I Ie was 6 9 3 Broken hne Graph zuerst E ER PERRO CERE 6 0 4 Trend Graphs sis RUE EIER ck UD 6 10 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation 6 10 1 Screen Configuration of Symbol Manager 6 10 2 Basic Symbol Manager Operation 6 10 3 Operating the Symbol 6 10 4 Pasting a Symbol to Screen 6 10 5 Operating Procedure of Color Palette Symbol 6 11 Recipe Screen Blement eae eek mee Rer mr e bee de AE UP E EE R 6 11 1 Recipe Screen Element 226 226 230 237 242 252 252 254 255 259 260 261 261 Common Operation Section 6 1 6 1 Common Operation Operations common to all element creation steps are shown below 6 1 1 Creating an Element Reference To create an element specify the element to be created and click the mouse at the position where the element is to be placed 1 3 Specify an element Menu bar Objects Select the objects to be created Drawing toolbar Click on the icon of the object to be created Click the mouse after pl
94. 335 Library Editor Section 8 2 8 2 Library Editor Graphics of any required shape can be created by combining fixed elements The created graphic can be registered as one element library data and any number of elements can be displayed at any positions in any screen using the library display function Created library data can be used for image library lamp display alarm list display alarm history display Reference Library editor has the following features You can draw any graphics by combining fixed elements e It is possible to import library data from the different screen data file Fixed display elements can be copied cut pasted from the editing screen Copy cut paste operation of library data is possible Preview display of selected library data is available on the library table 8 2 1 Operating the Library Table Library table dialog is configured as follows Comments Edit gt Goto Code Preview L New Delete Close Help Edit Deletes cuts copies or pastes the library data of the selected code refer to pages 337 to 338 It is possible to select two or more codes and delete them collectively Goto Code Code number can be specified and the cursor moves to the code The operation method is same as the Goto Entry of memory table refer to 7 1 6 Table Display Operation by Spec ifying the Table Entry Number Preview Switches the preview window ON a
95. 40 characters NT631 and NT631C to which a system program ver sion lower than Ver 2 1 is installed With these models above the number of characters to be displayed will be less 162 Alarm Section 6 3 than these values according to the display method and if the history informa tion is displayed Max 40 characters NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 System Ver 2 1 and NT631C System Ver 2 1 With these models above up to 40 characters can be displayed regardless of the display method etc Display Line Qty Specify the number of messages to be displayed Max 7 lines NT21 Max 12 lines NT30 NT31 NT31C Max 16 lines NT620S Max 24 lines NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C Scale Specify the character size of the message to be displayed 1 x 1 Equal 1 x 2 High 2 x 1 Wide 2 2 3 x 3 4 x 4 8x8 Smoothing Specify if smoothing processing is executed for the message to be displayed Line Scroll Touch Switch Set if a touch switch is set for scrolling messages line by line Only for NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Page Scroll Touch Switch Set if a touch switch is set for scrolling messages page by page Only for NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Color Frame Specify the color used for the frame of an alarm list Background ON Specify the background color of the selected message display field OFF Specify the background color of the message display fields that are not selected Image amp L
96. 459 Outputting the Screen Image Section 12 4 Reference The screen image of the editing screen is saved in the bit map file without change If you want to save an inverted image to a file select File Print and set Screen Image for Report Type and Rich Text Format for Destination set a check mark for Inverse Print and output it Refer to 12 2 3 Output to a File RTF If you use this method the screen image will be monochrome even when the col or printer is used 460 APPENDICES This section provides reference information on using the Support Tool information on the operational procedure for the sys tem installer which is supplied with the Support Tool Please refer to the information that you need X Data Conversions ao Rd ate ta rt e e Re CAT ROO ed 463 B System Installer Operation eee eens 487 NT Transfer Utility os see iR pe e e Re aere i REFER I REPRE 493 D Translation Support Utility sa daS SAd n 451 E Tables of Functions of PT Models 8 5 5 517 Limits on Numbers of Elements 0 0 0 cece eee 537 G New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 1 0 0 0 0 ee 541 New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 6 0 0 0 cece eee 543 I New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 7 545 J New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 8 2 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee
97. 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Standard Screen Continuous Overlapping Screens Window Keyboard Screens Extended Screen Occurrence History Screen Frequency History Screen Host Connect Screen System Initializing Screen Password Screen Menu Print Format Screen Programming Console Screen Device Monitor Screen Contrast and Brightness Adjustment Baan 22 26 29 30 31 37 38 40 45 65 66 67 79 80 90 91 94 99 100 101 101 102 103 103 103 104 104 xi xii TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 6 Element Operating Procedures 6 1 Common Operation s sisie hh 6 2 Fixed Displays ost oth cb vee pe IB E ER EAE C p D 6 3 Alarm 242 0er eie Late e Pie eerie A E eue ee 6 4 Data Mpito eo perve MGs TEAS TPS MSW Wh g weds RE Pada a gee EU WR 6 5 eer Bite ete eines eee sete tee det pe alah de Ee a LO epee b bg as 6 6 Numeral Display ce RE A OAR A OA EAR ERER ER EE IA REDE 6 7 Character String Display esseeeeeeeeee eee eens 6 8 Touch Switches 4 253 gae xu dg EL ee RU RECO In ia bis RR RE 6 9 Graphs ci imer ha ere er ERN pt die a pee E ts 6 10 Regi
98. 547 K Error Messages 5e ere eer gti Geb Read bei I EC Nb or be edes 549 I ShortcutKeyS s don Soo bet euh gt po Ren bw OA Greed te tralia ett Lv tro duet SL ater a 555 M Connecting Cable Specifications siy rad cee eee eee 557 N Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule 5 559 461 Appendix Data Conversion This section describes the data conversion method between different direct ac cess types and different PT models In the following explanation the NT20 NT20S NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C and NT625C are referred to as conventional models and the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C including models with V1 V1 System Ver 2 1 and V2 System Ver 3 1 are referred to as new models Direct Access Types Direct access type can be set at PLC Vendor of PT Type PT Configuration Changing PLC vendor of existing screen data changes direct access type The direct access types that can be handled by the Support Tool Ver 4 are as follows OMRON This is a direct access for OMRON PLCs Memory Link This is a simulative direct access with which host and PT execute sending or receiving of command via RS 232C 422A communication Mitsubishi A This is a direct access for Mitsubishi A series PLC Mitsubishi FX This is a direct access for Mitsubishi FX series PLC Memory Link Mitsubishi A and Mitsubishi FX can be set only with NT31 NT
99. 6 1 5 Copying Cutting Pasting and Deleting Elements Bring To Front Send To Back e Copying cutting pasting of the specified area between image editors or mark editors Drag amp drop is not possible Refer to NO TAG Creating Image Data Using Image Editor NO TAG Creating Marks Using the Mark Editor These operating procedures are same as normal operations of copy cut paste and drag amp drop on one Support Tool Copying Pasting an Object That Contains Image Library Data Even if a screen or an object that contains image library data is pasted onto a different screen data file image library data itself is not copied if NT series Sup port Tool version number is lower than 4 6 If you want to copy paste an object that contains image library data between Screen data files you need to copy the image library data referenced by the ob ject beforehand Ex Copying pasting a fixed display image that references image code 0001 while the contents of the code are different between the screen data files As shown above image data to be displayed will vary even if both objects are referencing the same code when the contents of the referenced image code are different between the screen data files When no data is registered to the refer enced code is displayed 3 3 7 Using Method of Parts Collection With the Support Tool on CD ROM Parts Collection is supplied In this section using method of Parts Collection is
100. 6 Copy Setting Touch Switch Data Conversion Appendix A Corrections related to lamp touch switch label In the conversion of data between a V2 model and a non V2 model conventional model conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the new functions of the lamp touch switch label added to V2 models Difference V2 N3 models Multiple lines of label On Off Static label Numeral String Dis play label can be set Conventional models non V2 V3 models Only fixed display label one line can be set Conversion from conventional models to V2 V3 models Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a conventional model a fixed dis play object is used with a label to dis play multiple label lines With a V2 V3 mod el multiple label lines can be set no need to add a fixed display object 1 Create multiple label lines using Label proper ty 6 5 1 Standard Lamps or 6 8 Touch Switches and delete fixed display objects With a conventional model A numeral string display object is created on a lamp touch switch With V2 V3 models numeral string dis play labels can be set Select Numeral Dis play or String Display as the Label Type in La bel Property for the lamp touch switch Make the setting as required Delete the numeral stri
101. After the completion of installation the folder specified in step 8 is dis played along with the installation completion message Click on then click on in the setup completion screen Installation operation is completed An uninstaller uninstall software is supplied with the NT Transfer Utility If you want to remove the NT Transfer Utility from your personal computer run the uninstaller to delete the NT Transfer Utility program files and installation in formation Note that the data saved by the NT Transfer Utility is not deleted Starting the uninstaller from the Windows start menu Select Uninstall Transfer Utility in the same folder where the short cut to the Support Tool is stored Example Assuming the short cut to the Support Tool exists in the Start Pro gram Omron NTST4 8E Uninstall Transfer Utility folder Select the uninstaller by the following operation Start Program Omron NTST4 8E Uninstall Transfer Utility After the start up of the uninstaller follow the instructions displayed on the Screen NT Transfer Utility Appendix C How to use the NT Transfer Utility Reference For connection method of the NT Transfer Utility and PT refer to 11 1 1 Connect ing to PT Start up and exiting the NT Transfer Utility Starting up the NT Transfer Utility When using Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista or Windows 7 log in with a user ID in the administrators group To
102. Application Manager Section 4 2 3 Input a screen number and a comment then click the Button 4 2 4 Copying a Screen The procedure for copying an existing screen to another screen number is shown below Reference The operations shown below can be performed between different screen data files of the same PT model by starting up two Support Tools For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool Operation using the mouse 1 1 Specify the screen icon Multiple screen icons can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key 2 Click right button of the mouse on the selected screen icon then select Copy Click right button of the mouse on one of the screen icon then select Paste Input a screen number then click the Button The screen number of the copy source screen is displayed as a duplicated number and in the new screen number field the smallest number of the available screen numbers is displayed 9 If you input an existing screen number a confirmation message is displayed to overwrite it Operation using the mouse 2 1 Specify the screen icon Multiple screen icons can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key BS Drag the selected screen icon in the screen icon display area Input a screen number then click the Button The screen number of the c
103. Charte le bare NOU us p OE Ron Gobet a Daas etes Were a 22 1 6 Usable Hardware Combinations 0 0 0 ccc ce ce cee eee eee 26 1 6 1 Applicable PE iiis ecco ak BS ODE EE EI RE 26 1 6 2 Communication Method for Each Model 27 What Is Support Tool Section 1 1 1 1 What Is Support Tool The NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 1 hereafter referred to as the Support Tool is application software that runs on Windows 95 98 NT4 0 2000 or XP and was developed to create the screen data for programmable terminals PTs Since the Support Tool has been developed to use the graphical interface and run under the operation environment of Windows persons not familiar with the Support Tool can create the screen data of the programmable terminal without difficulties The Support Tool can create the screen data for the following models of PT NT11 NT11S NT20 NT20S NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S T620C NT625C NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C The screen data created using the Support Tool consists of the objects shown in the following page What Is Support Tool Section 1 1 Data created Screen Data 7 Screen 1 Screen Properties by the Support Tool I Display 4 Arc Object Circle eee Sector I Polyline Polygon I Screen 3 Text Tiling Image Object
104. Displays all the available target languages present in the Translation Table and that have corresponding valid target language data in Excel All items are se lected as the default but are disabled once the import operation starts 508 Translation Support Utility Appendix D Status Displays the status of each target language that is being imported Current Text Source Displays the source text present in the Translation Table Current Text Translation Displays the translated text for the target language existing in the Translation Table Excel Text Displays the translated text for the target language that can be imported from Microsoft Excel format Import Text Shows the converted text i e with correct converted key code if necessary length limit etc However if you modify the text and then press Import or Import All validation is performed Start Use the Start button to activate the import operation for a language Stop Use the Stop Button to terminate the import operation for that language Next Use the Next Button to move down by one item Previous Use the Previous Button to move up by one item Import All Use the Import All Button to import all items for the selected column Import Use the Import Button to import the selected item The sequence of events for the import operation is given below The term Translation Data Item may be used interchangeably with a Record in the notes below
105. EE E e SECTION 10 Quick Reference E E E E 00 009 0000 0000 000000090 0090 9 9 9 9 10 1 Quick Reference eee teer Ree ees reme re Piecing exe ters SECTION 11 Data Communications with a PT 11 1 Preparation for Data Communications with a PT and Data Communication Procedure 11 2 Communication Setting at the Support Tool 8 8 11 3 Sending Downloading the 11 4 Receiving Uploading Data 1 trina ee eee 11 5 Receiving Uploading the History Record 11 6 Setting and Reading the Date and Time 105 107 138 161 173 194 202 206 209 226 252 261 267 268 2T 283 288 293 297 298 307 308 313 323 324 336 344 351 352 357 360 407 408 429 430 432 433 436 439 440 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 12 Making Reports 443 12 1 Report Types uer e OE ORE ed ECHO Nee wa EDS 444 1222 Printing Reports uendere er DE ER RR E RN E S e YU 451 12 3 Displaying the Print Image Preview 458 12 4 Outputting the Screen Image 5 459 Appendices A Conversion uo doors regen Ir EORUM De PAR ee b e dre EON e Te a Bote ege ed ak 463 B System Installer Operation 0 1 ccc
106. Entry 3t Numeral Input Numeral Input PLC Address Table Entry Reference Type String Input String Input PLC Address Table Entry 3 Reference Type Recipe Recipe Recipe Number Recipe Name Write Notify Bit No of Records No of Parameters Numeral Display Numeral Display PLC Address Table Entry 3 Reference Type String Display String Display PLC Address Table Entry Reference Type Bar Graph Bar Graph PLC Address Table Entry 3 Direction Trend Graph Trend Graph Type Drawing Width Direction Broken line Graph Broken line Graph Direction Alarm History Alarm History Display Image Library or not Alarm List Alarm List Table Entry 3 Display Image Library or not Analogue Meter Analogue Meter PLC Address Table Entry 3 1 M Mark I Image L Library 2 If the image or library data for when the switch is lit is not specified the com ment for the image or library data for when the switch is not lit will be dis played 3 For the NT21 and the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V2 or V3 the information to be displayed depends on the Label Type as follows Static Label On Off Static When View Simulate ON OFF setting is ON displays ON label when OFF displays OFF label Numeral Display Same for Numeral Display information String Display Same for String Display information 4 N Numeral Table S String Tab
107. For the library data creation procedure refer to 8 2 Library Editor FA20 FA21 Set line 1 Set line 2 FA22 Check torque Screw FA23 FA24 Detection near Check pipe and entry Confirm valve safety before re starting the line FA25 Check the PC PLC and the network Reference With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C the library data codes are 1000 to 3FFF However if NT20 30 620 compatible mode is used with the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C library code will be the same as NT30 NTSOC NT620S NT620C and NT625C Creating the library data of code FA20 1 2 3 Select Tools menu bar Library Editor Specify FA20 in the library table and click on gm Click the library creation area frame dotted lines that is displayed at the upper left area in the library creation screen and drag the point at the lower right corner The mouse cursor position is displayed under the screen change the frame size to X 200 Y 200 size 200 x 200 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Text Click the mouse at the position where the character string is to be dis played at the intended upper left corner of text Set the properties as shown below Description Set Line 1 Position Font Type Standard Scale 1x2 High Smoothing _ Attribute Inverse Flash Color Foreground White Backgr
108. Foreground 4 Adjust the position of the String Display on the data creation screen by dragging it 389 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Creating the character string display field 5 Select Objects menu bar gt String Display 6 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the char acter string display field is to be displayed at the intended upper left cor ner of string display field Y Setthe properties as shown below Position E Font Type Standard Scale 1x2 High Smoothing _ Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Black Reference Indirect Reference Table Entry Length 8 Adjust the position of the character string display field by dragging it Creating the character string display field frame 9 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Rectangle 10 On the data creation screen drag the rectangle so that it encloses the character string display field 11 Use the properties as they are 12 Adjust the size and the position of the frame rectangle Creating the Auto button Man button Step button and Reset button Creating the Auto button frame 1 Select Objects menu bar Touch Switch 2 Create the Auto button frame by dragging the mouse at the button dis play position 3 Set the properties as shown below 390 Creating
109. Global window will be closed automatically when the screen other than user screen was displayed and will be re displayed when the screen was switched back to user screen Only one global window can be displayed at a time It can be opened closed or moved only by the operation of Window Control Area from the host For details of Window Control Area please refer to the operation manual of PT Local window This window will be closed when the screen displayed on PT is switched By setting local window for attribute of each screen specified window can be opened at the same time the screen is opened Up to two local windows can be opened at the same time Local window 1 Local window 2 Local window can be opened closed or moved by following operations Setting screen attribute Opens when the screen is displayed 97 Window Keyboard Screens Section 5 4 Touch switch operation By Input key window keyboard touch switch and win dow move touch switch Operation of Window Control Area from the host Types of windows can be specified when opening the window It is possible to open same window as a Global window or as a Local window However multiple display of the same window is not possible Opening Closing and moving a window Window can be controlled by the following operations Opening windows by setting screen attribute When creating screen using Support Tool up to two windows can be selected to be displayed when op
110. It is possible to upgrade NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C models without V2 to System Ver 3 1 by installing the new system In this case however the functions indicated below cannot be used even though other functions can be used in the same way as the models with V2 32 dot font For details of 32 dot font refer to Settings for text display in NO TAG Setting Properties Note that smoothing is not performed for 32 dot font For details of font types refer to Font Type in NO TAG Operation of Screen Data Application File and Appendix K SECTION 1 Introduction to the Support Tool This section is designed for users to utilize the efficient usage of Support Tool Discussed in this section are what you can do using the Support Tool and the specifications and functions of Support Tool 1 1 WhatIsSupport Tool aves s Retreat RENI EROR RE RR 2 1 2 Equipment Necessary for Using the Support 1 8 6 1 3 General Configuration of the Support Tool 00 eee eee eee 7 1 3 1 Outline of Screen Data 0 eee eee eee 7 1 3 2 Correspondence to PC PLC Data 11 153 3 Tables rr Rye eatin ste UR hada PIS Edd 15 1534 SLY pes OF SCLeONS voie ue RE NER ERR EE EH ele s 18 14 Basic Operation Plow 2 eal Bobs ese Eb teed 21 1 5 Menu
111. LINEB onw amp OOsIO LINE onw BOOsLINE A onw BDOsLINEC MONTR onw 620download onw 6201TC LINE onw Flename 631C KK LINEG onw Save as type NTST Application onw After inputting the folder and file name click the Button the screen data is saved to the specified file If the file name of an existing file is specified a message requesting confirma tion that the file is to be overwritten is displayed File types When saving files in file name setting dialog either of following two file types can be selected NTST screen data onw format onw format This is a standard file format for Support Tool Use this format to save screen data normally Memory map image file mmi format mmi format This is a file format to which screen data is compressed after deleting informa tion used only for Support Tool Data to be lost are grid setting and grouping information Use this format for purposes such as transferring screen data using FD It is advisable to save the same data with onw format also since part of in formation are lost with this format as mentioned above Once you saved data specified file types will not be changed until you exit the Support Tool or perform saving reading the onw file Data will be saved in the format same as before when you select Save to save it If you want to change the file type select Save As t is not possible to save da
112. Mark objects can be allowed A Name can comprise up to 12 characters No of Records Displays the number of records contained in the recipe No of Parameters Displays the number of parameters contained in the recipe Bytes Record Displays the size in bytes of all records in each entry This size is 4 no of param eters in 1 record The size of a parameter value is 4 bytes regardless of whether it is 1 or 2 words Occupied Bytes Display the size in bytes of all records in each entry This is the size of memory occupied by each recipe entry in the recipe memory Equals No of Record Bytes Record New Shows the recipe setting dialog to create a new recipe entry The created entry becomes the last entry and gets selected 314 Recipe Table Section 7 10 Recipe Setting Dialog Delete Delete the selected entry Same as Edit Delete Set Recipe Shows the setting of the selected entry in a recipe setting dialog Set Record Show the records of the selected entry in a record setting table Edit Permits delete cut copy and paste operations on a selected recipe An edit pop up menu with these 4 options will appear Delete Cut Copy Paste is disabled when no entry exists Paste is available when the clipboard contains recipe data Goto Entry Selects an entry by specifying the entry number through a Go to dialog The be havior is the same as numeral table Go to dialog Total Displays the byte s
113. Memory Table Entry Number Specify this when there is a character string dis play numeral display bar graph and or input setting element on the screen and if you want to print the element with the set memory table entry number Image Library Number Specify this when there is image data display and or library data display on the screen and you want to print the displayed data with the image library code number Specification of History Report If you specify History Report for Report Type you are requested to specify the file name where the display history record data sent from the PT is stored Open BEI Look in CX Data 1 ek a 380202a log File name lod Files of type History loa log zl Cancel Specification of Validation Report If you specify Validation Report for Report Type you are requested to speci fy whether an error check is to be executed and then the result of the check is to be printed or the present error log information is to be printed If an error check is executed the existing error log is lost To keep the record on the error for which the message is displayed like after the conversion select Print Current Error Log Window Action Print After Validation Print Current Error Log Window To print the result of error check click on after selecting Print After Validation A message asking if you want to execute an error check is dis played
114. Message Corrective Action 552 The code for screen element Object Name has been converted from XXXX to YYYY If the converted code differs from the code of the image element that is to be dis played correct the code The code for screen element Object Name has been converted from XXXX to YYYY If the converted code differs from the code of the library data that is to be displayed correct the code The component Touch Switches of the Alarm List will be discarded Create the control touch switches using the control code input function as required and associate them with the alarm list his tory The screen no XXX of type YYY is not supported as a child so the parent child association is discarded With a new model it is not permissible to specify a window keyboard screen as a child screen of overlapping screens Copy the contents of the window keyboard Screen to a standard screen and specify this screen as the child screen of the over lapping screens The screen no XXX was a Continuous Parent Screen which is not supported in this model It is discarded Use a touch switch to switch screens If the program is created to display the par ent screen of the continuous screens cor rect the program so that the first child screen is displayed The screen no XXX was an Extended Screen which is not supported in this model so it is converted to standard screen Correction not necessary
115. NT series Support Tool for Windows it is possible to import I O comments from the ladder program that is created using the following PLC Support Soft ware Inputting I O comments can save time and labor This section describes the import method of I O comment SYSMAC Support Software SYSMAC CPT comments can be imported from a C series ladder program with the exten sion SP1 Reference With SYSMAC Support Soft when saving ladder program I O comments are automatically saved in a file with an extension SP1 301 I O Comment Table Section 7 7 Priority in comment 302 SYSMAC CPT saves ladder program in SSS program SP1 and use this file to import I O comment D comment of CVM1 CV series can not be imported with Support Tool With SYSMAC CPT it is not possible to save ladder program of PLC with Z in a file with an extension SP1 Therefore Support Tool can not import I O com ment of ladder program for Z created with SYSMAC When the I O comment table at Support Tool has an existing I O comment or when both word I O comment and its bit I O comment exist in ladder program to be imported e g 0005CH DDD 000512 EEE priority will be as follows smaller number takes higher priority 1 Existing I O comment in Support Tool in comment table 2 I O comment of bit in ladder program to be imported 3 comment of word in ladder program to be imported Example Exi
116. Note Connect the shield wire to the connector hood at both the personal computer and at the PT Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable Name Model Remarks Connector XM2D 0901 9 pin Made by OMRON XM2A 0901 9 pin Made by OMRON Connector hood XM2S 0911 9 pin mm pitch screw Made by OMRON XM2S 0913 9 pin inch pitch screw Made by OMRON AWG28 x 5P Multi core shielded cable Made by IFVV SB Fujikura Ltd CO MA VV SB Multi core shielded cable Made by 5P x 28AWG Hitachi Ltd At personal computer use the connector hood which conforms to the standard of the screw at connector part 558 ISO 8859 1 Example Hex code is represented by 30 decimal code by 48 and character by 0 30 0 48 Appendix N Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 BO CO DO EO FO 0 0 Space Space NBSP A D 0 32 48 64 80 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 1 1 A Q a 9 Space Space i A N 33 49 65 81 97 113 129 145 161 177 193 209 225 241 i qo e t H 6 amp 38 39 40 6 54 7 55 8 56 F 70 G 71 JAE JE LEER Space Space Space JME pace inii aahi aM ca n ua sun ee ba lt at LTIIILLIILLLLII Hiss Hank Haahi H H w 559 K
117. ON Switch to the previous screen based on the record of screen history Alarm Switch Screen NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Setting for Bit Memory Table Usage of Alarm Function Setting Switch Screen Screen No No function For reg istering only allocated bits and securing them To display alarm only Alarm None To display alarm and Switch to a specified screen in response to As desired the pressing of alarm message To switch to a speci fied screen at the same time the bit goes ON Switch screen As desired When converting the bit memory table from the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C to the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C the function setting is not the same with before converting To adjust the setting of this bit memory table please refer to Data Conversion Bit memory conversion in Appendix A 166 Alarm Section 6 3 6 3 2 Alarm History The Settings of an alarm list element are used to specify the range of bit memory table entries that are subject to the check The check objective range is determined by setting the start bit memory table entry number and the number of bit memory table entries The maximum allow able number of bit memory table entries varies according to the PT model and the setting of the number of bit memory table entries The range of bit memory table entry numbers is displayed in parentheses in the dialog box S
118. PLC Address PLC Bit Address Set IV id Storage acp Tm Cancel This is almost like the address dialog box There is an extra field Storage Type Storage Type Specify the type of the storage type BCD BIN Numeral Table Entry Operand Type Numeral Table Enty Numeral T able Entry d E Cancel Numeral Table Entry Specifies numeral table entry number Numeral table entry can be specified in this edit box using corresponding table button gg 312 Recipe Table Section 7 10 Constant Constant Specify constant integer for the operand 7 9 7 Description of Edit Result Fields This dialog box will be obtained by clicking Result button This will be used to specify the result Result Type This is to specify type of the result Choices for result types are 1 Numeral Table Entry 2 PLC Address Dialog boxes are same as that of corresponding Edit Operand dialog boxes Re fer to 7 9 6 Description of Edit Operand Fields Dialog Box for Ul and fields 7 9 8 Description of Move To Fields This dialog box will be used to move a mathematical table entry to any of the ex isting entry Move Entry Cancel Entry Help Specifies the table entry number of the table where current entry will be moved The cursor moves to the specified table entry number Entries following this will be moved downwards to adjust for the moved entry
119. PT models touch switch position and size may change 477 Data Conversion Appendix A Conversion result error message and corrective action Status after Conversion Status before Conversion Corrective Action Error Message Correct the touch switch tion and size may position and size as change needed Refer to 6 8 Touch Switches Touch switch posi Correction related to a touch switch for which a pop up window keyboard function is set If a touch switch assigned the pop up window keyboard function is converted be tween a conventional and a new model conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the range of screen numbers of the touch switch window keyboard screen Difference New models Conventional models Status before Conversion Screen numbers of window keyboard screen 1 to 3999 1900 to 1979 Conversion result error message and corrective action Status after Conversion Error Message Screen numbers of window keyboard screen Corrective Action With a new model the touch switch for which a pop up win dow keyboard func tion is set is regis tered to the symbol manager With conventional model the window keyboard screen number is corrected to 1900 Input Key Window Keyboard screen number is not within the valid range Minimum value re stored Correction related to the touch switch for which the copy function
120. Remove Node 140 rich text format 457 Right click the mouse 108 Rotate or Flip 333 S Save 71 Save As 71 Saving the Screen Image 90 Scale 125 126 Scale 232 Scale Length 232 Screen 435 438 Screen Image 448 Screen List 440 Screen No 81 Search for Help on 77 Sector 146 Select Object 109 Selecting an Element 108 Selector 107 Sending Downloading the Data 73 433 Setting footer and header 456 setting for screen switching 89 Setting margins 456 Setting the color for graphics 122 Setting the color for lamps and touch switches 123 Setting the color for text and numerals 122 Setting the display color 121 Setting the line type 121 Setting the Screen Attributes 80 Setting the tiling color 122 Settings for numeral display 126 Settings for text display 124 setup 31 Show Tag 85 Size and display position of window 99 Smoothing 148 Smoothing 125 Specifying an element consisting of multiple elements 110 Standard Lamps 194 Standard Screen 90 String Display 206 String table 16 Style Fun Style Name Page Sep Window Control Area 53 Alarm list history function 289 Application manager screen 40 Backlight OFF 49 Bit Memory Tables 288 Buzzer 50 Canceling backlight OFF 294 character string memory table string table 283 Check box 44 Close 57 Code setting in the image library code field 292 Combo box 45 Comment 48 Connecting C
121. S above the reference graphic display area The mark data list dialog box is displayed 347 Mark Editor Section 38 3 Select the data you want to use as the reference in the mark data list dialog box and click on or double click the mouse on the desired reference data Table Application X Code FFFE Clear Help Referring to characters The mark editor allows you to use the existing characters as the reference for creating characters Click on above the reference graphic display area and the reference character setting dialog box is displayed Input the characters you want to use as the reference and click ox For the reference characters two characters 8 dot size can be input To change the font and or size of the characters used as the reference click on tw The character setting dialog box is displayed Character Reference ch Enter characters PT Cancel Eont Help Font 21 Font Font style Size Arial Regular Z 2 x T Arial Black Italic 14 Cane p Arial Narrow Bold 16 Ir Book Antiqua Bold Italic Bookman Did Style Century Gothic 22 Ip Century Schoolbook 1124 Effects Sample T Strikeout I7 Underline AaBbYyZz MM Color Presently the Color setting is not EN Black See Westem lt supported It will be invalid even if it was specified 348 Mark Editor Sec
122. Setting is not possible for NT20 NT20S and NT600S Long The buzzer sounds in cycles of 1 second beep and 1 second stop Setting is not possible for NT20 NT20S and NT600S Beep The buzzer sounds in cycles of 0 5 second beep and 0 5 se cond stop Only for NT20 NT20S and NT600S Buzzer type setting is possible only when the buzzer attribute is selected Load Local 1 Keyboard other than NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S Select whether or not a local window 1 Keyboard pops up on the screen when standard screen is opened 81 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 If the attribute is checked a window keyboard pops up when the screen is dis played Window keyboard does not pop up if the attribute is not selected If the attribute is not set when the standard screen is created it can be selected later to display Specify the screen number of window keyboard screen to be displayed as a pop up window keyboard Window Keyboard will be displayed at the position specified when window key board screen was created With NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C and NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C below V1 window is called a keyboard window since it is used to place keypad touch switch for inputting numeral string With the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and above it is simply called a window since all kinds of objects other than thumb wheel can be register
123. System Control Notify Area Initial Screen History Setting I Backlight OFF z Alarm Use Ring Buffer E Resume Function Number of Table Entries Buzzer Numeral Table 512 Enable ays zj String Table 256 Key Input Bit Memory Table 256 e Printer for PT d Printer Esc P v colour Initial Screen Screen number which appears when the wrong data is set for PT Control Area when PT is driven is selected from the drop down list box or keyboard input Nor mally this setting is invalid since PT References PT Control Area for the initial screen number when starting up The screen numbers of existing screen data are listed in the list box or only screen number 1 is displayed if the screen data is newly created Backlight OFF Specify whether or not the backlight OFF function is used This option can be selected from System of PT Configuration in the Support Tool The Backlight OFF function automatically turns OFF the screen if the Support Tool is not operated for a certain time period to save the backlight of PT If the check box is clicked to utilize the option the time interval will be displayed in the drop down list box to set it For details of the PT models that can use this function refer to Appendix E Sys tem Setting PT Configuration Resume Function The resume function holds the data in the table when the PT is OFF or reset Fo
124. Terminal Reference Manual VO69 E1 1 These manuals contain full descriptions of PT functions operations and restrictions For information on the functions and operations of the PC Operation manual for each PC XV When you need information about the operations functions etc of the PC refer to the operation manual for the PC advanced function unit or communication unit being used Description of NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C xvi There are two types of the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C models with the suffix and models without the suffix V In this manual they are written as NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C collectively when it is not necessary to classify them However they are written separately as NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V 1 and NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C without V when it is necessary to classify them The system program version will be indi cated as NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with System Ver 3 1 if re quired The system programs of the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 or System Ver 3 1 4 1 are supplied by NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 System Ver 4 1 is supported only by NT31 NT31C and NT631C models with V3 It cannot be installed to upgrade the NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C below V3
125. The mark editor is used to create marks Registering created objects symbol manager The efficiency of use of created objects can be increased by reusing them in oth er screen data or by registering objects that will be used frequently The symbol manager is provided to register created objects General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Objects that can be used The table below shows that objects can be used with particular PT models O Objects Display Arc Object Circle Sector Polyline Polygon Rectangle Text Tiling Standard Lamp Image Library Lamp Numeral Display String Display Bar Graph Broken line Graph Analogue Me ter Trend Graph Alarm List P Alarm History Recipe Can be used A 1 Can be used only with models with V1 and above A 2 Only use is insertion into character strings Can be used only with models V2 System Ver 3 1 and above General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Objects Input Touch Switch Objects Numeral Input String Input Thumbwheel Switch Library Image Display Type 7 Object Library Display Mark Can be used A Can be used only with models with V1 and above A 2 Only use is insertion into character strings 10 General Configuration
126. Tool can display the following element information on the screen at the same time Information Displayed on the Screen PC PLC address PC PLO bit addresses of lamp settings light function for lamps PC PLC addresses of lamp settings for touch switches or PC PLC address es of notification notify bits are displayed For a touch switch with the notification bit function both PC PLC address of the notification notify bit and lamp setting are displayed upper notify bit lower lamp bit and for touch switches with other functions the PC PLC addresses of lamp settings light function are displayed Description The first character represents the type of element as shown below In case of touch switch the first character for lamp bit is also represented by a T L Lamp Touch switch The second character represents the area type of PC PLC addresses Example PLC Vendor OMRON Blank CIO area HR area SR area LR area DM Data Memory area EM Current Bank For characters that indicates area type of Mitsu bishi refer to page 131 84 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 Information Displayed on the Screen Description The table entry number of the Numeral or Charac ter String Memory Table String Table that is ref erenced for a numeral display character string display bar graph numeral setting input charac ter string input or thumbwheel
127. When a touch switch is pressed the input processing of the control code is executed as shown below Oto 9 numeral keys Data setting at the numeral setting input field CLR key Clearing the numeral setting input field 4 key Confirmation Arrow symbol key Switching among continuous overlapping screens Moving the cursor in the numeral setting input field Numeric keys can be created using the touch switches assigned these control codes Note These touch switches are always used with a numeral char acter string input element The element to be used differs according to the allocated control codes 1 When a touch switch is pressed the data in the memory table entry or a constant is copied to another memory table entry or input field Copy Source Copy Destination Numeral memory table Numeral memory table Character string Character string memory table String memory table String table table Constant Input field specified by cursor 1 When a touch switch window move touch switch is pressed the window can be moved by touch panel operation at PT When you press the destination center of the window will come here window will be moved to that position Note Window move touch switch can be created only on window keyboard screen 1 When a touch switch cursor moving touch switch in an input field is pressed the cursor moves to that input field Note The cursor moving touch switch should be specified
128. White Back ON White ground Black Image amp Library Display ImageLib in Color Foreground White Background Black List Settings Start Bit Table Entry 0 No of Bits Referenced 8 9 Adjust the display position of the alarm list by dragging it After that click on any position in the screen other than the alarm list to cancel the alarm list selected state edit state Changing the frame of the line scroll down touch switch 10 Specify the switch at the bottom in the touch switches at the right side of the alarm list and adjust its size and position move it to the lowest line in the alarm list 11 Double click the line scroll down touch switch and set the properties as shown below 396 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Position Size Frame Shape Standard Show ON State al White White Transparent Color Function Input Key Control Control Key hd Address PC PLC Ad dress Comments Lamp Attribute Label General Light IFFF9 1 1 Here the label is not changed If you need to change it press Edit button After completing the setting go to the next step without clicking on button Reference With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the touch switches used to control the alarm list are a part of the list and their properties such as t
129. a character string input element f Auto Arrange is selected it is not possible to move a touch switch indepen dently To move a touch switch independently deselect this attribute f acursor moving touch switch is created later independently the touch switch can be associated with a specific input field Specify the touch switch and se lect Draw menu bar Associate With To disassociate the touch switch from an input field select Draw menu bar Disassociate Cursor movement among data input fields is also possible using control code input touch switches for which arrow symbol key codes are set 224 Touch Switches Section 6 8 6 8 8 Window Moving Touch Switch Function Moving window Settings Function setting only Guidance When a window move touch switch on a window is pressed window can be moved by touch panel operation at PT This touch switch function is available only with the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above Procedure for moving a window is as follows 1 Press a window move touch switch on a window to be moved 2 Press the touch panel at a destination position of a window center position of window comes and a window moves to that position Window Window In a moving status Screen Screen Screen 6 8 9 Print Screen Touch Switch Function Print screen Sett
130. a lamp or a touch switch for which String Display is set as the label type Only for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above 6 5 6 8 Quick Reference Writing Data to the PC PLC To turn PC PLC bits ON OFF by operation at the PT Section 10 1 Operation Objects Touch Switch Notify Bit Create the touch switch for which the notify input function is set PT Screen C PLO gt Bit address Refer to Writing Data to the PC PLC To write a numeric value To input a numeric value using numeric keys or a system keyboard 1 Objects Data Input Numeral Create the numeral setting input field 2 Objects Touch Switch Input Key Control Create a touch switch or Screen Properties System Keypad Ticked Display the system keypad Note With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C reg ister the system keypad from the symbol manager since the system keypad cannot be used for these models Numeral setting input field PT Screen Numeral memory table Input __ 123 123 PLC E Ay Touch switch control code input or system keypad To write a numeric value To write a constant using a touch switch 1 Objects Touch Switch Function Copy Setting
131. a line of the specified width line width selection and in the specified foreground color The inside of the circle or oval is tiled with the colors specified as foreground color and background color in the specified pattern A Used to draw a character Click the mouse at the position where a character is to be drawn and the character cursor is displayed Input characters the input characters are displayed in the color specified as foreground color with the background displayed in the specified background color Select this tool when tiling the inside of the closed area of a drawn graph ic The area is tiled according to the specified pattern and in the colors spe cified as foreground color and background color 330 Image Editor Section 8 1 e Color selection Displays foreground color B Displays background color Color selection palette On the color selection palette move the cursor to the desired color and click the mouse a left click selects the foreground color and a right click selects the background color Pattern selection Selection box N ES Eu m Move the cursor to the desired pattern and left click the mouse the selection box moves to the pattern at the cursor location indicating that the pattern is selected e Point type selection Selection box o 9 m Move the cursor to the desired point type and left c
132. absence of analogue meter Difference New models with V1 and above Analogue meter can be used Conventional models new models below 1 Analogue meter cannot be used Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Status after i i rrective Action Conversion Conversion Error Message Corrective Actio With a new model With a conventional Cannot paste ana Create a bar graph or 1 and above model and a new logue meter It is other display element an analogue meter model below discarded instead of an analogue is registered to the 1 an analogue meter to display con symbol manager meter is not dis tents that was displayed played by an analogue meter Correction related to control touch switch of trend graph In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model conver sion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the trend graph control touch switches Difference New models Marks with codes FFEF to FFF5 hexadecimal are used as trend graph control touch switches Conventional models No trend graph control touch switches codes FFEF to FFF5 may be used as desired 482 Data Conversion Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Appendix A Corrective Action With a conventional model the marks
133. according to the PT model 125 Section 6 1 Standard Text is displayed in the specified color and specified back ground color Inverse Text and background are displayed in colors that are the re verse of the specified colors Flash Text flashes when displayed If this attribute is selected stan dard display and no display background color only are alter nately displayed Inverse Flash Text is displayed by alternating standard display and inverse display Reference To check Flash and Inverse Flash display on the screen specify Simulate Flash from the View menu For details refer to 5 7 3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool Settings for numeral display Set the size and display attributes for displaying numeric values of numeral table data and percentage values in a graph in the manner shown below The following shows only the common settings for numeral display As an example the properties of a numeral display are described below Numeral Input x General Settings Position 3 R 80 780 Font Type Scale 1 1 Equa Smoothing Attribute Standard Colour Foreground Background m Cancel Apply Help Font Type Specify the font type Standard A numeric value is displayed in the standard font 16 x 8 dots Half Height A numeric value is displayed in the h
134. and Screen switching touch switches can be created Other area of the screen must not be changed The screen number of the frequency history screen is shown below PT Model Screen No NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S NT600S None NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C 1998 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C 9002 A Cannot edit Only display is possible The screen to be displayed differs according to the PT model Example For NT30 NT30C No Date Time Cnt Message No NT30 NT30C Screen No NT620S NT620C NT625C Indicates a screen number Date NT30 NT30C Time NT30 NT30C YY MM DD HH MM NT620S NT620C NT625C Indicates the date and time the screen was displayed Cnt NT30 NT30C Frequency NT620S NT620C NT625C Indicates the number of times the screen has been displayed Message Indicates the Title of the screen attribute 5 8 Host Connect Screen System Initializing Screen The host connect screen is displayed for the start of PT operation until commu nication with the PC PLC is established This screen can be created freely using only fixed display In case host connect screen is not registered a default screen indicating that PT is trying to connect to the host will be automatically displayed at the time PT pow er is switched on or when the mode is changed to the RUN mode 101 Password Screen Section 5 9 The screen number of the host connect screen is shown below
135. and the number of going ON events are re corded and displayed by the alarm history All bit memory table entries for which a check mark is set for the history property are objects of alarm history recording Therefore it is not possible to check different bit memory table entries with different alarm histories The status of the bit memory table entries for which a check mark is set is always checked while a PT is running regardless of whether or not an alarm history element is displayed Note that an alarm history element displays only the record of past events It displays only the contents of the record at the point when it was displayed and the displayed record remains the same even if the status of the bit memory table entry changes after that Alarm list and alarm history elements cannot be used with NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S If a bit memory table entry in the check objective range goes ON the alarm list element displays the contents alarm message of the character string memory table entry string table that is allocated to the bit memory table entry It is also possible to display the corresponding image library data It is possible to switch the screen by operating the alarm list element by setting the screen number to which the screen should be switched for the bit memory table entry Screen g Bit memory table Character string memory table String table WARNING HIGH TEMP w No 1
136. are no string to show string input will be invisible Therefore with Support Tool dotted line frame is displayed in character fore ground color enclosing string input This frame will not be displayed on PT This frame can not be set to off However the dotted line frame can be set to ON and OFF when printing screen image refer to page 427 Touch Switches Section 6 8 6 8 Touch Switches When a touch switch is pressed any of the nine functions shown below is executed In addition to the general functions such as the input notification notify bit and the screen switching standalone function a variety of functions can be realized including control codes used in combination with a data input element Touch switches cannot be used for NT11S NT11 N CAUTION Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where danger to human life or serious property damage is possible or for emergen cy switch applications Notify bit touch switch PT 1 When a touch switch is pressed the specified bit in the PC PLC goes ON OFF IER Set switches reset switches alternate switches and momen Switch PC PLC tary switches can be used Specified bit goes ON OFF Screen switching touch switch 1 When a touch switch is pressed the screen is switched to the screen with the specified screen
137. as BCD or binary data when read ing writing the content of a PC PLC word to which a numeral memory table Numeral Memory Table Section 7 2 entry is allocated This setting is valid only for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C With other PT models numeric values are always treated as BCD BCD The content of an allocated word is regarded as BCD binary coded decimal When the content of an allocated word is read it is stored as signed binary data If F is set at the most significant digit position in the allo cated word the content is regarded as a negative value If an error is found in the content of an allocated word A to E at the most significant digit position or A to F in other than at the most significant digit position the read out content is not stored in a numeral table The previously stored content remains in the numeral table When data is written to an allocated word the signed binary data in the numeral memory table entry is converted into BCD before writing If a negative value is written F is entered at the most significant digit posi tion In this case the number of storable digits is reduced by one If the number of digits in the content of a numeral memory table entry is greater than the number of digits of the allocated word in the PC PLC only the numeric value is written from the least significant digit value Binary The content of an allocated word is regarded as binary data When
138. be displayed Attribute The display attribute cannot be set fixed as standard display Color Foreground Specify the color of the percentage value Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the background color of the percentage value display area Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Reference A percentage value and other elements cannot be overlapped on a trend graph With a trend graph a percentage value can be displayed for each line If there are too many lines with percentage values and the correspondence between the values and lines is not clear use the procedure shown below to check the line that corresponds to the percentage value 1 Select a trend graph 2 Select Edit menu bar Edit Object Or press Insert key P122 The trend graph element enters the edit enabled state and the marks surrounding the trend graph change to red 247 Graphs Section 6 9 248 3 Select Edit menu bar Select Object Place where graph or display does not exist The components of a trend graph trend graph percentage values are dis played in a list The line numbers that correspond to the individual percent age values are displayed If you click a line in the list the corresponding percentage value display is selected in the screen to make
139. be done 4 2 11 Error Check Validation The Support Tool has a function to check the data such as limitations of screen elements and PC PLC address assignments in order to prevent illegal data from being downloaded This is called Validation The following three validation functions are provided Validation performed on real time 71 Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 The Support Tool provides real time validation while users are creating data This function mainly checks the elements one by one Moreover maximum number of elements and memory size will be also watched Validation performed from the Tools menu Validate It is also possible to perform the Validation using Tools Validate from the menu bar By the check Support Tool will detect the contradiction in the screen applica tion data including association between touch switches and the elements and so on This check will be also performed at the beginning of the download process to prohibit the wrong data to be downloaded Validation during the data conversion and importing DOS data file Validation will be also performed when converting the screen data application from a current model to another model and when importing the DOS data file Data conversion will be also performed when the registered symbol data from the Symbol Manager that was created by a certain PT model has been dragged and dropped to the another PT model screen
140. content in a numeral memory table entry The setting for Initial is not valid if the numeral memory table entry is not allocated to a word in the host To make the Initial item valid click on the check box to display a cross mark x in the box If the box is clicked on while it is in the valid state the Initial item is made invalid The content of numeral memory table entries at the start of PT operation is as shown below according to whether or not a numeral memory table entry is allo cated to the host the Initial setting for the numeral memory table entry and whether or not the resume function is used Resume Function Allocation to Initial Host setting Used Not Used Allocated Initialized Existing numeral memory Initial value of the numer valid table value retained al memory table also for the word in the also for the word in the host host Initial value of the numeral memory table entry if it is initialized by System Menu operation also for the word in the host Not initialized Content of word in the host invalid Not allocated Invalid Existing numeral memory Initial value of the numer table value retained al memory table entry In case numeral table entry has been initialized in the system menu operation initial value of the nu meral memory table entry Storage Type only for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Specify if a numeral in the PC PLC is treated
141. differs depending on the display position of the icons before the arrange icons operation was attempted Operation 1 Select Window in the menu bar then choose Cascade Tile or Arrange Icons The windows are arranged according to the selected item Switching windows Under the Window menu up to nine windows that are open are displayed in a list If the number of windows is ten or more the More windows item is displayed The window selection dialog box opens when this item is selected Users can activate the particular screen to edit from Window in the main menu or selecting from window selection dialog box of More windows This feature brings simple operation to edit data of veiled screen 4 2 14 Help Menu The Help menu includes the following items Contents Search for Help on Whats This PLC Address Help About NT series Support Tool Displaying help information using the table of contents The help information of the Support Tool is constructed so that the functions can be tracked according to the menu configuration To display help on a specific function display the table of contents of the help information and find help on the relevant function Operation 1 Select Help in the menu bar then select Contents The table of contents of help is displayed 2 Select an item to display the corresponding help contents In the information displayed in the help screen items that h
142. dragging operation without releasing the button of the mouse If you try to expand the image data that was shrunk once the shape or the color may be modified It is possible to display the edit area at an enlarged size to facilitate drawing fine areas and creating small images To change the display size of the edit area select View in the menu bar then choose Zoom specify the zoom percentage EZ Tools Connect Toolbars Status Bar amp 185 Created graphics can be mirrored flipped up and down or right and left or turned 90 left or right The mirroring and 90 turn operations are possible for the graphic in the range specifying frame Image Editor Section 38 1 To modify the graphic select Edit menu bar Rotate or Flip then specify the desired modification method ES view Tools Connect Window Help Undo Ctri Z Redo Cut CitrlexX Copy Paste Ctr Delete Del Copy To Paste From Clip Rotate or Flip Rotate Left Rotate Right Flip Horizontal Flip Vertical i i i Flip Horizontal Flip Vertical Rotate Left Rotate Right Cutting copying deleting graphics You can cut copy paste and delete the created graphic Cut copy and delete operations are valid for the graphic in the range specifying frame To call the desired operation select Edit in the menu bar then specify Cut Copy Paste or Delete or right click the m
143. edit the translation data that is being im ported for that language During this process of importing translation data items one by one you can skip any of the translation data items by clicking the Next button the item will be ignored for import and processing will proceed to the next record Conversely you can navigate back to any of the previous records that you may have missed inadvertently by clicking the Previous Button so that you can inspect and import that particular record When the last record of a language is processed the language will be removed from the Language list box and the next language will become ready for import In addition the status box displays Done for the completed language and the Start button which had until now displayed Stop caption changes back to Start You may start importing the next language by clicking the Start Button again You can search for specific text and replace it or you can search for and replace all forms of a word for example replace lamp with standard lamp Select Find Replace in the Edit Menu of the Application window A Find Replace Dialog box will appear on the screen Find Replace Ea Language German 1 Find Replace Replace Replace All m Direction Close Up Down E Help Language Display the currently selected language column Situations where error warnings may be displayed are
144. firmation of saving it is indicated displayed NT series Support Tool Save changes to Appl If the file name is not set the name setting dialog appears If the file name has been already determined the data will be overwritten The screen data file closes without saving the screen data Cancel The file close operation is canceled 3 3 5 Importing Reading the DOS Version Screen Data Application File The Support Tool has a function for reading screen data files created using the previous DOS version Support Tool Note that although the DOS version screen data files can be read files cannot be saved in DOS format 57 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 The procedure for reading a DOS version screen data file is File main window menu Import File Import Lookin E Ntv2 aE Fienme Files of type 15 m Cancel For Files of type select any of the following items according to the model of Support Tool used to create the screen data you are going to read M1S Screen data for NT11S NT11 e M2S Screen data for NT20S e M6S Screen data for NT600S G6S Screen data for NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C Click the Button after selecting the folder and specifying the file name The application manager of the read screen data will be displayed Reference For details of the PT models and types the Support Tool can create screen data
145. for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof viii Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may
146. for data conversion If the data has been created using the DOS version Support Tool select File menu bar Import in the Support Tool screen to open the file For details of the operation refer to 3 3 2 Heading the Existing Screen Data Application File or 3 3 5 Importing Reading the DOS Version Screen Data Application File 2 Convert the data At the Support Tool select Tools menu bar PT Configuration then se lect the PT Type tab Select the conversion destination PT model or PLC Vendor refer to Dialog Box Settings in the PT configuration on page 46 Click on and the data conversion confirmation message is dis played Click on again to execute data conversion NT11S NT11 cannot convert to other model from PT Configuration If you want please use symbol manager to convert to other model e After converting the screen data there might be some messages in the error log This error messages will disappear when the screen data has been edited Especially for the converting errors it is not possible to reproduce these errors even if the error check Validation has been performed So soon after the con verting error occurs it is recommended to perform Print Current Error Log Window The operation for this refer to 12 2 Printing Reports When converting the screen data to the NT21 or the NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C using V2 the specification of NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode is po
147. for the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C has been upgraded to Ver 3 1 Ver 4 0 so the following functions are now supported System pro gram version 4 0 is used only with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C New system program is supplied with Support Tool Ver 4 1 CS CJ series PC PLC memory area support Recipes Interlocks e Mathematical table What Is Support Tool Section 1 1 NT30 620 compatible mode Multiple line labels ON OFF state labels Numeral display string display labels Device monitor screens Contrast amp brightness adjustment screens Addition of NT Translation Support Utility The Translation Support Utility is software that helps in translating a language to another supported language For details refer to Appendix D NT Translation Support Utility comments importing from TAB delimited text file For details refer to 7 7 4 Importing I O Comments from Tab delimited Text Files Centering the Labels of Lamp and Touch Switches Only horizontal direction could be centered in previous versions In this version the labels of lamp touch switches can be centered in both vertical and horizontal directions For details refer to 6 1 9 Centering the Label of Lamp and Touch Switch The Data input string in a string input function touch switch Only for NT31 631 The label was used for the input data string in previous versions In this version a different string from the label can be specif
148. header footer click on the Header Footer button The Header and Footer dialog box is displayed After setting the items in this dialog box click ex The Reports dialog box is displayed again b After completing the setting click on in the Reports dialog box The Print dialog box is displayed page 457 Set the print range and the number of copies 452 Printing Reports Section 12 2 6 After completing the setting click on in the Print dialog box Printing starts M Edit View Draw Objects Screen Cubs LO gt Dels A punter User intervention 0 documents wahing Tipa LaserJet d Whee 59 00804 Comment Part to file Pret range Copies ra Mabecsow 2 Pages 1 s las d Selector CE Reports dialog box Report Type Destination Printer m Cancel Header Footer Set Margins Help Header Footer In this dialog box the contents of printing and printing header footer are set Report Type Select the type of report to be printed Destination Specify the destination of report output Printer report is output to the printer Rich Text Format report is output to a file Header Specify this item to attach the header The contents of header can be specified by pressing Footer Specify this item to attach the footer The contents of foot
149. if elements are overlapped you can select the desired element easily using the Select Object function For elements such as a trend graph that consist of several elements use the Edit Object function to make element selection easi er 9 Specify 100 Line 2 display 96 at the upper right of the trend graph and drag it to the 6 display position for Data 2 10 Specify the trend graph frame and adjust the size and the position Displaying an example Create the example of display using fixed display text and straight lines 11 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Text 12 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor positioned at the Data 1 display position 13 Set Data 1 in the character string setting Fixed Display Text dialog box 14 Adjust the Data 1 display position 15 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Polyline Refer to 6 2 1 Polyline 16 Drag the mouse cursor in the range from the start point to the end point where a line is to be displayed to the left of Data 1 Set the line property as shown below Generi Une Siye 17 Specify the drawn line and adjust the length and the position of the line 18 Create the example display of Data 2 in the same manner Set the line property as shown below General Une Sye Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 9 3 7 Creating the Monitor Screen Child Screen 2 Here create screen No 11 as chil
150. is appended to the address after the change To append the same I O comment click on the check box to display a check mark in it Batch address change processing starts when you click on this button How addresses are changed In the operation for changing addresses in bit units processing is executed as suming that bit 15 of a word is immediately followed by bit of the next word Addresses are changed as shown below according to the set search range and the address after the change Section 6 1 Example Bit memory table entry Address and Bit set Address and Bit set for End Range for Start Range ClO area Word 1 ClO area Word HR area Word 11 HR area Word 10 Change To Address start address after the change Before change After change 0000010 H0001000 0000012 H0001002 0000100 H0001006 0000110 H0001100 0000115 Bien H0001105 Operation procedure 1 Tools menu bar Change Address 2 Select the type of word before the change in the Channel box 3 Specify the range of the change by setting addresses at the Start Range and End Range boxes 4 Specify the word and the address after the change in the corresponding boxes in the Change To area 5 Seta check mark in the Change Comment check box as desired If a check mark is set in this check box I O comments appe
151. is created by arranging objects on this data creation screen The application manager is the tool to manage the screen data created by a user For operation procedure refer to Section 4 Application Manager Dialog Box Settings in the PT Configuration Before creating screen data it is necessary to set the PT configuration and the Control and Notify Areas that are shared with the PC PLC The operation steps shown below display the PT configuration dialog box 46 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 e Menu Bar File New creating new application Menu Bar Tools PT Configuration for modifying The PT configuration dialog box has a variety of setting items provided in three pages PT Type page System page Control Notify Area page PT Type page The PT Type page is displayed when you click on the PT Type tab The PT Type page is used to set the hardware configuration of the PT to be connected System Control Notify Area PT PT Model E NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode Vendor OMRON x Font Type ISO8859 1 X Comments Specify the type of PT to be connected When you are using the NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C refer to the table below to select the correct model according to the system program being installed System Program Ver 1 01 Ver 2 0 Ver 2 1 Ver 3 1 or Ver 4 0 NT31 NT31 V
152. is drawn Text can be used with all models ABCDE 1 Text is drawn Font size color etc can be changed Note Mark data can be inserted into a character string With the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above with NT20 30 620 compatible mode set image data can also be inserted Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display Text Selection using the drawing toolbar Al 147 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Terminology ABCDE Foreground color Property setting General Description Position Font type Scale Smoothing Attribute Color Set the text to be displayed Indicates the position where the text is displayed Specify the font Only Standard can be set for NT11S NT11 Standard Half Height Specify the character size Only 1 x 1 Equal and 2 x 1 Wide can be set for NT11S NT11 1x1 Equal 1x2 High 2x1 Wide 2x2 3x3 4x4 8x8 Not for NT20 NT20S Specify whether smoothing processing is executed for characters larger than 2 x 2 scale Setting is not possible for NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S For NT20S NT600S smoothing is al ways ON Specify the display attribute Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Foreground Specify the text color Can only be set for PTs with color display Transparent white black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Transparent is ava
153. is fixed as LOG Since the file is described in a special format the contents cannot be read using Windows general application tools The history record data file LOG can be output to a printer saved in an RTF file or output to the screen using the Print function or the Print Preview function of the Support Tool To analyze the history record data using other software convert the file into an RTF file so that it can be read by other software 1 Select Connect menu bar Get History Log The menu is displayed allowing you to select the history record to be re ceived The items that can be selected vary according to the PT model 2 Select the history record to be received The dialog box for setting the file name for saving the history record is dis played 3 Set the folder and file name where the history record is to be saved and click Receiving of the history record data starts 4 Place the PT in the Transmit mode so that it can send the data to the Support Tool If the PT is not in the Transmit mode a timeout error occurs in about 10 se conds at the Support Tool In this case set the PT in the Transmit mode and click on 3 in the error message dialog box 5 While the data is sent from the PT the progress of data transmission is indi cated by a bar graph To abort the operation click on caa 439 Setting and Reading the Date and Time Section 11 6 11 6 Setting and Readi
154. key Cursor key move by 16 dots When Snap to Grid is ON Cursor key move by 1 dot Shift key Cursor key move by set grid size However if the selected elements include touch switch elements always move by the size of the touch switch grid regardless of whether Shift key is pressed or not To move a part of an element such as the 96 Display for a bar graph or Label for a lamp touch switch click on the objective part while holding down the Shift key and Ctrl key or after selecting Edit Object then perform move operation In case of NT11S NT11 there is a special requirement i e The selected objects will move by one system grid size 8 16 in all cases The snap to grid option value is not considered Reference The Snap to Grid setting can be made by the procedures below Screen menu Property Grid button Screen menu Grid Double clicking on a screen Grid Right clicking on a screen Property Grid button 6 1 5 Copying Cutting Pasting and Deleting Elements The operations for copying cutting and pasting elements using the clip board and also the operation for delete an element are described below Copying and pasting elements The procedure for copying an arranged element to the clip board then pasting it at another position in the screen is shown below The attributes set for the copy source element are also copied The pasted element is displayed at the upper left section of the screen
155. key or Ctrl key 2 Select Delete from Edit in the menu bar A message requesting your confirmation is displayed 4 2 6 Displaying and Setting the PT configuration The procedure for displaying the PT configuration dialog box is shown below For details refer to Dialog Box Setting in the PT Configuration on page 46 Operation using the mouse 1 Click right button of the mouse on the screen data application file icon then select Setup Operation using the menu 1 Select PT Configuration from Tools in the menu bar 4 2 7 Displaying and Setting Screen Properties The procedure for displaying the property setting dialog box is shown below For details refer to 5 1 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Op erations Operation using the mouse 1 Click right button of the mouse on the screen data file icon then select Properties Operation using the menu 1 Select the screen icon 2 Select Properties from Screen in the menu bar Reference The following operations can also display the screen property setting dialog box Click right button of the mouse on the editing screen where no objects are reg istered then select Properties Double click on the editing screen where no objects are registered 4 2 8 Editing a Table The procedure for displaying the table setting dialog box is shown below 69 Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 For details refer to Secti
156. nofm 0001 No 4 X24 Circle Imp OFF Ci ircle 1 Imp red 0002 No 8 Colo 24 X24 Circle Imp OF 0004 No B Colo40 x 40 m Imp red S nofrm Circle Imp red S nofrm lt 0005 No 2 2 Circle Imp OFF min fm 00 No BColeS2X32 Circle Imp OFF min fm 0006 No Colo 32 X32 Circle Imp yllw min frm 0006 No 8 ColoB2X32 Circle Imp yllv min fim 0007 No 6 Colo 48 X 48 0007 No Colo48 X 48 0008 No BCel48 X48 Circle Imp ylw S frm Circle Imp red min nofrm t B Colo 48 x oa No Cololte X 48 ice g 0021 No Colo D x 48 sw up red Copy Open New Delete Chse Paste CtritV ae Close Pasting the image data To paste an image data that is stored in the clipboard by cut or copy operation follow the procedure below Reference When two Support Tools are started up by Import Component from the File menu the data that is cut or copied on the image table of one Support Tool can be pasted onto the image table of another Support Tool PT model setting of the two screen data files should be the same For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool If the paste operation is performed the image data previously registered to the code is overwritten and lost Confirmation dialog box will be displayed When an image data is pasted t
157. number Screen 2 Switch Switching to screen 2 Character string input function touch switch Character string data input field 1 When a touch switch is pressed the label of the touch switch by character string input element is stored in the character string input field Note This type of touch switch is always used in combination with a character string input element Pop up window keyboard function touch switch Standard screen base screen 1 When a touch switch OPEN is pressed the specified win Window Keyboard screen dow keyboard screen is displayed on the screen presently displayed 2 When a touch switch CLOSE is pressed the window key board screen presently displayed closes OPEN CLOSE 209 Touch Switches Section 6 8 Control code input touch switch Input key Control Standard screen Input field 1234 Copy setting touch switch Memory COPY table 50 50 Window move touch switch MOVE 5 4 Cursor moving touch switch L3 Data input field 3 a Input cursor moves Input cursor moves 210 1
158. numeral memory table When the data of a conventional model is converted to the data for a new model the converted data requires your attention to the fact that the processing that oc curs if incorrect data existence of A to F other than F at the most significant bit position is written to an allocated word in the host differs between a conventional and a new model Difference New models The written data is invalid and the existing content is retained Conventional models The incorrect data is stored Conversion result error message and corrective action Status after Conversion Status before Conversion Corrective Action Error Message Note that the display dif fers between a conven tional and a new model if incorrect data is writ ten Refer to 7 2 Nu meral Memory Table Correction related to bit memory table If a bit memory table is converted from the conventional model to the new model conversion will be executed in the manner shown below due to the difference of the bit memory table function Difference New models Alarm function and switch screen function cannot be set simultaneously Conventional models Alarm function and switch screen function can be set simultaneously Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action Switch screen OFF Screen 0 Funct
159. numeric keys With the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above all objects other than thumbwheel switch and recipe objects can be created on a window Window Keyboard Displayed when the input field is touched e t is possible to create a temporary input field at the same time as numeric keys are arranged in the window keyboard A temporary input field is created using a character string input element When character string input element is arranged in the window keyboard the element is automatically set as a temporary input field Only one string input element temporary input field can be created for one window keyboard Setting processing differs as shown below depending on whether or not a tem porary input field is used When a temporary input field is used 2 Storing by pressing EE Character string memory table String table gt ABCDEF Temporary input field F2 ras 1 The input character string is displayed in the temporary input field 2 Press the J key and the character string in the temporary input field is set in the character string input field and stored in the character string memory table string table at the same time When a temporary input field is not used 2 eM M ES Character string memo
160. of the PT Notify Area Window screen number and window position bottom left co ordinate of current ly displayed screen will be written to Window Control Area Checking these areas from the host enables to know the display status of win dow For details refer to the operation manual of PT 5 5 Extended Screen An extended screen is used by the expansion function of a PT Although an extended screen can be used in the same manner as a standard screen it should not be used unless absolutely necessary since it is used by the expansion function 99 Occurrence History Screen Section 5 6 If data is registered as a standard screen the registered data is given priority The screen numbers used for an extended screen are indicated below PT Model Screen No NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S NT600S None NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C 1980 to 1996 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C None 5 6 Occurrence History Screen An occurrence history screen displays the screen numbers recorded by the dis play history Screen History function in the order of displayed date and time This function records the date time of display and the number of times the screen was displayed for the screens for which the History attribute is ticked in the screen property The occurrence history screen provided with NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C has a blank area at the right side in the screen so that scroll and screen switching
161. of the Support Tool Section 1 3 1 3 2 Correspondence to PC PLC Data The following table shows objects that are capable of transmitting data with PC PLC to execute processing such as updating the screen display Object Input Output Standard Lamp PC PLO bit address PT Numeral table 1 PT String table 1 Image Library Lamp PC PLC Bit address Touch Switch PC PLC bit address for lamp PC PLO bit address for in terlock 1 PT Numeral table 1 PT String table 1 Notify Bit bit address Switch Screen Input key Window Keyboard Window Move Can be used only on Win dow Screen Copy Setting Numeral String table Input key Control Input key String Cursor Move Print Screen Thumbwheel Switch PC PLO bit address for in terlock 1 PT Numeral table Numeral Display PT Numeral table String Display PT String table Bar Graph Analogue Meter Broken line Graph Trend Graph PT Numeral table Numeral Input PC PLO bit address for in terlock 1 PT Numeral table String Input PC PLO bit address for in terlock 1 PT String table Alarm History PT Bit Memory table PT Alarm History Alarm List PT Bit Memory table String Display Image Library Display Recipe Object PC PLC Word address PC PLC Word address 1 For the NT21 and the NT31 NT31C NT631 an
162. of the code be checked in the preview window one by one 3 Select the code of the library data to be displayed The selected line will be highlighted 4 Click on to close the dialog box Indirect Specify the numeral table entry to be referenced With indirect reference the contents for the specified numeral table entry are treated as a library code and the corresponding library data is displayed This is useful when you want to change the library data to be displayed according to the statuses Set the storage type of numeral table entry to be referenced by indirect reference to Binary and specify the value library code to be stored in hexadeci mal since the library code is in hexadecimal Numeral Table Library Display 1048 1049 Hexadecimal 1049 104A 104B Set the numeral table entry number to be referenced in the table entry number field It is possible to display a numeral table entry so that you can select the desired eg 159 Fixed Display Section 6 2 table entry number from it To display a numeral table entry follow the procedure below 1 Click on atthe right side of the table entry number after checking the In direct button in the property setting dialog box to display the numeral table selection dialog box 2100012 2000014 20000216 200018 2000020 2 D00022 2 D00024 2 D00026 2 If the number of the de
163. of the tiling element Pattern Specify the tiling pattern Color Foreground Specify the foreground color of the tiling area Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the background color of the tiling area Can only be set for PTs with color display Transparent white black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Border Specify the color of the border of tiling area Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Guidance mark handle is displayed when a tiling element is selected Property setting and tiling element can be edited by selecting the lll mark han dle 150 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Reference Tiling is possible for the elements shown below Rectangle circle polygon sector In addition to the elements indicated above tiling is possible for an area en closed by a solid line of the same color border color If an element such as a lamp that changes status is specified for the border however tiling may not be executed correctly due to changes in color and display To check the tiling status select View menu bar then select Full Tiling The result of tiling will be displayed in this state a check mark is set for Full Tiling in the display menu When Full Tiling is selected again then return to the previous W mark han dle Se
164. or cancelled by pressing the corresponding button in the message box NT series Support Tool Y PT Model PLC Vendor Font Type has changed Convert this application 3 3 Operation of Screen Data Application File The procedure for operating the screen data file where the PT screen data is stored is described below The PT Configuration which determines the basic PT operation is also discussed 45 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 3 3 1 Creating New Screen Data Application File To create new screen data select New in the File Menu of the main window view Connect H Open Ctri O Import Print Setup Recent kile Exit PT configuration dialog box appears so that users can set information of the ap plication environment and type of PT device PT Configuration x PT Type System Control Notify Area PT PT Model NT30 620 Compatible Mode PLC Vendor OMRON Font Type CP437 Comments Cancel Help Click the Button after completing the setting at the PT configuration dialog box For details of the setting at the PT configuration dialog box refer to Dialog Box Settings in the PT Configuration below If the PT is set to the NT21 the clock address dialog box will appear next Refer to page 54 The application manager and the data creation screen 1 Standard Screen are displayed PT screen data
165. pressing the Ctrl key Shift key U key Upload Application x teca Place the PT in the Transmit mode so that the data can be transmitted to the NT Transfer Utility Click on after selecting the PT model Uploading of data is started If the PT is not in the Transmit mode a timeout error occurs in about 10 se conds at the NT Transfer Utility In this case set the PT in the Transmit mode and click on 3 in the error message dialog box If the type of PT connected and the PT model setting at the NT Transfer Util ity is different error message is displayed While the data is sent from the PT the progress of data transmission is indi cated by a bar graph To abort the operation click on meme 499 NT Transfer Utility Appendix C b After data transmission is completed click on in the message box 6 The dialog to confirm the screen data is displayed see below Upload File Information x File Information PT Mode NT31 V1 PLC Vendor Omron File Size 34164 7 Click on and the file name setting window is displayed Save in a Data e File name Screen data Save as type Memory Map Image File rnmi Cancel Open as read only Specify the folder and file name where data is to be stored and click on sae The warning message about the mmi format is displayed Click on and the screen data is saved to the specified file in mmi format If you specify the
166. procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display Sector Selection using the drawing toolbar Terminology Gerson eu Property setting General Position Center point Indicates the position of the center of a sector Start point Indicates the position of the start point of a sector End point Indicates the position of the end point of a sector A sector is drawn anti clockwise from the start point to the end point Size Indicates the radius of a sector 146 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Attribute Specify the display attribute Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Color Foreground Specify the line color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Guidance A sector is defined by the center point the start point and the end point The line type is specified using line style attribute Center point Indicates the position of the center of a sector End point Indicates the position of the end point of a sector The end point can be dragged to a desired position to change the position of the end point Start point Indicates the position of the start point of a sector When the start point is dragged the start point position and sector radius are changed When tiling a sector paste a tiling element in it Tiling element Sector For details of tiling element refer to 6 2 8 Tiling 6 2 7 Text Text
167. red magenta green cyan yellow Specify the background color of the percentage value display area Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow When displaying a specific value reference value in an analogue meter the percentage value are calculated based on the values for 100 0 10096 235 Graphs Section 6 9 When the following values are specified 10096 096 10096 in an analogue meter with semi circle shape Analogue f LN om n 100 7 Table tne a wlan f Veb m 100 Value referred to 3000 ma jm Value referred to 1500 Value referred to 0 Value referred to 1000 D a Value referred to 2000 If the 100 value 0 value and 100 value are set using numeral memory table entries as indicated below the percentage value of the reference value is calculated according to the value stored at the specified address Analogue Meter 1074 bx wx G Table Ening 4 Bl gt Table Erir zl Tile Ey E C Val yp C Vae fo mm 236 Graphs Section 6 9 6 9 3 Broken line Graph The present values of several consecutive numeral memory table entries are displayed in the form of a broken line graph Broken line graph Numeral memory table VE 1 The values of consecuti
168. screens can only be view on PT if the communication method is NT link If communication method is host link it would not be possible to switch to these Screens 5 14 Contrast and Brightness Adjustment This is a system defined screen and cannot be created or viewed on NTST The application manager will not list this screen Contrast and Brightness Adjustment is used for tuning the contrast and brightness of the PT screen without the need to disconnect from the PLC The screen number designated is 9030 PT models that support this requirement are as follows NT31 V2 System Ver3 1 NT31C V2 System Ver3 1 NT631 C V2 System Ver3 1 NT631C ST141L only This screen can be accessed using the following functions 1 Touch switch Switch screen 2 Bit memory table Switch screen function 3 Bit memory table Alarm function 104 SECTION 6 Element Operating Procedures Screen data for a PT is created by arranging elements on a screen Elements are classified into two groups elements for display and those used for inputting data at a PT 6 1 Common Operation sau Taa Tua mh 107 6 1 1 Creating teen eee 107 6 1 2 Pop up Edit M nu see eee RC Ree eu ones 107 6 1 3 Selecting an Element ee rV qe ets 108 6 1 4 Modifying an Element 112 6 1 5 Copying
169. scroll down touch switch Reference With NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the touch switches used to con trol the alarm list can be adjusted only in position Size color label can not be changed If you want to move the position select Edit menu bar Edit Object or right click Edit Object and specify the touch switch Setting for the image library data display field 16 Specify the alarm list and select Edit menu bar Edit Object 17 Specify the image data display field displayed at the central left part of the alarm list and adjust the size and the position Resize the size to 200 x 200 dots Creating the Menu button Monitor button and Set button Menu Copying and pasting the buttons from screen No 3 1 Copy the Switch Screen character string frame rectangle Menu but ton Monitor button and Alarm button collectively and paste them onto screen No 4 2 Adjust the display position of the pasted character string frame rectan gle and buttons Modifying to the Set button 3 Double click the Alarm button and change the properties as shown be low Settings Screen No 3 Label Label Set 1 Press Edit to set the label 398 Creating the Sample Data 9 3 11 Creating the Alarm List Library Data Section 9 3 Create the library data that is displayed at the occurrence of an alarm Create the library data for FA20 to FA25
170. set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Range Specify the color of bar graph displayed for a negative value Can only be set for PTs with color display Valid only when Display Sign is selected White black blue red magenta green cyan yel low Settings Only 100 can be set for NT11S NT11 Value Table Entry Display 96 10096 Table Entry Value Specify the table entry number of a numeral memory table entry to be displayed Specify whether or not a percentage value is displayed on the Screen Specify this item if a 10096 value is set by a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral memory table Specify this item if a 100 value is set by a constant set the value to be taken for a 10096 value 227 Graphs Section 6 9 Guidance 228 0 Table Entry Specify this item if a 096 value is set by a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral memory table Value Specify this item if a 0 value is set by a constant set the value to be taken for a 096 value 100 Table Entry Specify this item if a 10096 value is set by a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral memory table Value Specify this item if a 10096 value is set by a constant set the val ue to be taken for a 10096 value Note that specification for 10096 is valid only when Dis
171. set on the individual child screens screens No 10 No 7 No 25 are displayed in this order Since screen No 8 is set as an overlapping screen it cannot be displayed inde pendently Note that a child screen can be displayed independently Continuous screens are grouped screen a maximum of eight screens can be displayed in series The base screen where continuous screens are registered is called the Parent Screen and the registered screens are called Child Screens Screen No 10 oe PAG ea Screen No 20 jj Screen No 15 Screen No 1 i i p Parent Continuous Continuous Continuous Screen screen 1 mE END Screen 2 f cm screen 3 When screen No 10 is specified screen No 20 which is the first of the contin uous screens is displayed After that screens are displayed in the order of screen No 20 screen No 15 and screen No 1 by the operation of touch switch 1 Since screen No 10 is set for a continuous screen it cannot be displayed inde pendently Continuous screens are switched by pressing touch switches and 1 to which system keypad is assigned Continuous screens cannot be used for the NT21 NT31 NT31C and NT631 NT631C For these models Switch Screen function of touch switch is recommended to obtain the identical function Window Keyboard Screen is used as a window screen This is a partial screen used to display a keyboard such as a keypad
172. several elements is registered as a single element symbol After registering the symbol data be sure to perform the file save operation To register the symbol data select the elements to be registered collectively and drag them to the symbol manager folder where they are to be registered ili Symbol Manager SymFile1 SBL File Edi View Help H ColourPalette 1 42 GROUPI 4 9 05 Supplement Symbols File Edit View Help ColeurPalette lt 3 GROUP LJ Supplement Symbols Drag the symbol to the desired then release the mouse The element in the source screen remains as it is For a new symbol symbol name New Symbol x x is a serial number is as signed Reference The symbol data can be registered also by the following operation 1 Select the elements to be registered in the source screen and select Copy or Cut from the Edit menu in the Support Tool 2 Select Paste from the Edit menu in the symbol manager 257 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Section 6 10 In this case symbol name Pasted Symbol x x is a serial number is assigned for a new symbol Changing the symbol name To change the symbol name to the one easy to understand follow the opera tion shown below 1 Select the symbol name that should be changed The symbol name is dis played in reverse video 2 Select Edit in the menu bar the
173. start up the NT Transfer Utility select Program Omron Ntst4 8 NT Transfer Utility starting from the Windows Start button Items to select vary depending on the Program Folder setting specified on installation The NT Transfer Utility starts up and displays the main window shown below RENT Transfer Utility rf 1 File Configure Help Exiting the NT Transfer Utility When using Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista or Windows 7 log in with a user ID in the administrators group You can exit the NT Transfer Utility in any of the methods below Select File Exit e Click on at the upper right area of the main window Double click on the NT Transfer Utility icon at the upper left area of the main window Click on the NT Transfer Utility icon at the upper left area of the main window and select Close from the displayed control menu box Press F4 key while holding down the Alt key The screen returns to the Windows screen after the NT Transfer Utility is closed Communication Setting at the NT Transfer Utility Set the baud rate and communication port at the NT Transfer Utility personal computer 1 Select Configure menu bar Comms Setting The communication setting dialog box is displayed x COM Port E j c Verify Cancel Help 497 NT Transfer Utility Appendix C 2 Setthe data for the displayed item The meanings of the items are described be
174. switch 5 3 2 Overlapping Screens Overlapping screens allow two to eight screens to be displayed as one screen For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C one to eight screens can be Set The base screen of an overlapping screen is called the parent screen and multiple screens that are the constituents of the overlapping screens are called child screens This is an Screen No 10 Screen No 8 child screen parent screen This is an example of an overlapping Screen No 7 screen child screen overlapping Screen No 25 screen child screen When screen No 8 parent screen is specified the elements set on the screens No 10 No 7 and No 25 are overlapped for display on the parent screen Since the screen of screen No 8 is set for a parent screen for overlapping screens it cannot be displayed independently In the setting for a parent screen screen numbers of a parent and child screens are set Child screens should be created on standard screens in advance Overlapping screens are set in the procedure indicated below 1 Create the child screens on standard screens 2 Specify Parent Screen from New command in Screen 3 In the parent screen setting dialog box set a parent screen number and child screen numbers Parent Screen 10 Cancel In K
175. switch is dis played The first character represents the type of table as shown below N Numeral memory table S Character String Memory Table String Table Image and library code The code of image and library data of a fixed dis play is displayed as a hexadecimal number Multiple sets of the element information described above can be displayed at the same time If they are set for a single element the information is displayed ac cording to the priority shown below PC PLC address gt Table entry number gt Image and library data code Setting for the display of element information is possible for all the editing screens The display method for element information is set in the manner shown below 1 Select View in the menu bar then choose Show Tag The menu shows the items that can be set The items for which display is presently set are identified by a tick 2 Select any of PLC Address Table No and Image and Library Code to change whether element information should be displayed or not Each time a menu item is selected the tick mark is set or canceled alter nately When a tick mark is displayed the specified element information is displayed Inverting and flashing the objects Some of the objects have Inverse Flash and Inverse Flash attributes Inverse status is always reflected on the screen Flash display can be checked by specifying the Simulate Flash command It is p
176. tenkey library Color pallette symbols Library of parts for filling with color models System Installer to replace PT system program NT20 system program System program for NT31 NT31C and NT631C with V3 Original NT30 620 system program NT Screen Data Transfer Utility This utility is for uploading and downloading PT data using mmi screen data files Refer to Appendix C NT Transfer Utility for details e Samples Lamp touch switch parts library This parts library contains the image library with lamps and touch switches incorporated into it as a mmi image data file Refer to 3 3 7 Using Method of Parts Collection for details The folder containing the parts library list in the samples folder also contains HTML files with operating methods and a parts list Sample screen data This screen data is provided only as a sample Operation may not be as expected when this data is transferred to a PT and used for communications with a PLC Symbol manager ISO symbol data Refer to 6 10 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation for details Main Differences of V4 1 Following changes are made for NT series Support Tool for Windows to improve operational efficiency and to support new functions added for NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 or V3 System Ver 3 1 or 4 0 Refer to Appen dix G New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 1 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C new system program support System program
177. the Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably 11 4 Receiving Uploading Data To receive upload data stored in a PT at the Support Tool as the screen data being edited follow the steps shown below The type of data that can be received is indicated in the table below Data Type Description Application in file units All data is sent in batch Screen Data is received in units of a screen It is possible to receive the data of several Screens at a time When receiving the data of a parent screen you can specify whether or not the data of the child screens is to be received with the parent screen data Direct Access Information 436 NT20 NT20S and NT600S Information on the PC PLC addresses allo cated to the PT status control area PT status notify area numeral character string memory table string table etc NT21 Information on the PC PLC addresses allo cated to the PT status control area PT status notify area and window control area NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Information on the PC PLC addresses allo cated to the PT status control area PT status notify area and window control area models with V1 and above Receiving Uploading Data Section 11 4 Data Type Description System Memory The contents of System set at the PT are re ceived and set for System of PT Configura tion Table NT20 NT20S and NT600S The following data i
178. the Sample Data Section 9 3 Position Size Display Type Standard Drawing Width 3 Frame d Display Sign d Direction Sampling Cycle 1 1 Color 1 For NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C sampling cycle of trend graph must be multiple of 5 minimum 5 Setting the graph line 4 Double click the Settings tab and click on Line Property Set the line 1 properties as shown below Table Entry 2 Display Color Cyan Style Solid C Table Entry Value 800 Table Entry Value Table Entry Value b Click on to close the line 1 properties 6 Click on to add line 2 Set the line 2 properties as shown below Table Entry 3 Display Color White Style Dot dash Table Entry Value v 1200 Table Entry Value 600 Table Entry Value 0 371 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Reference 372 Click ex 0 returns to setting property then click on again Adjusting the size and position of the frame and display 7 Specify the trend graph and select Edit menu bar Select Object 8 In the list specify 0 Line 1 display 96 at the upper right of the trend graph and drag it to the display position for Data 1 Even
179. the Select Object dialog box is also selected on the Screen so that you can confirm which element is being selected before you click the button In the Select Object dialog box object information same as the one displayed on the status bar is shown For details refer to page 43 Batch selection of multiple elements It is possible to select multiple elements collectively Using the Shift key Click an element while holding down the Shift key and it is added to the pre viously selected elements If you click a selected element while holding down the Shift key the element is deselected Specifying a range 109 Common Operation Section 6 1 Drag the mouse cursor so that all elements will be enclosed by the range speci fying frame Range specifying frame Selecting all elements in a screen To select all the elements arranged in a screen use the select all function Select Select from the Edit menu ILE view Draw Object Undo Ctri Z R t mm Cut Ctrl X gt Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrit Align gt i Delete Del Select Object Specifying an element consisting of multiple elements 110 To edit an element that consists of multiple elements as shown below use the edit element function e Position of a label in a touch switch e Position of a label in a standard lamp e Position of a Display in a bar graph e Position of a Display
180. the batch change source Find Start Range Specify the start address of the source range for the batch address change Find End Range Specify the end address of the source range for batch address change The address to be set for End Range must always be larger than or equal to the address set for Start Range 272 Section 7 1 How addresses are changed Operation procedure Change to Channel Word Specify the word type and start address after the change Addresses are changed within the number of specified points from the start ad dress number of points from Start Range to End Range Change Comment Specify whether or not the same I O comment appended to an address before the change is appended to the address after the change To append the same comment click on the check box to display a check mark in it Batch address change processing starts when you click on this button In the operation for changing addresses in bit units processing is executed as suming that bit 15 of a word is immediately followed by bit of the next word Addresses are changed as shown below according to the set search range and the address after the change Example Bit memory table Address and Bit set Address and Bit set for End Range for Start Range ClO area 1 ClO area Bit 15 0 15 10 0 SEE TESTE TS Bit 15 0 15
181. the copy function can be used for pasting 1 Click on the table entry number of the data to be copied 2 Click on Edit gt or right click the table entry number 3 Select Copy The paste function pastes the data stored in the clip board by the cut or copy op eration to the specified table entry 1 Click on the table entry number of the table where the data is to be pasted 2 Click on Edit gt or right click the table entry number 3 Select Paste 275 Section 7 1 Operation procedure Copy To Next The copy to next function copies the data at the specified address of a memory table to the next address after adding the specified amount to the existing data The procedure for specifying the incremental amount is explained in 7 1 5 Copy Increment Setting Operation 1 Click on the table entry number of the copy source table 2 Click on Edit gt or right click the table entry number 3 Select Copy To Next 7 1 5 Copy Increment Setting Operation To set the incremental amount used for the copy to next operation follow the steps described below Copy Increment Setting dialog box Value Increment By Specify the incremental amount for the initial value data in a numeral memory table entry The amount set here is valid only for the numeral memory table Value Input Type Specify whether the incremental amount is specified in decimal or hexad
182. the correspondence between the line and the percentage value clear Instead of the operation in step 3 above right clicking the mouse on the trend graph Edit Object right clicking the mouse on the trend graph near by the 96 display where 96 display and frame does not exist Select Object the per centage values displayed near the click point are displayed in a list When displaying a trend graph the display points are determined by calculat ing the percentage value based on the values for 100 0 and 1009 6 If the 100 value 0 value and 10096 value are set as indicated below refer ence values are displayed in the trend graph as shown below 100 C Table Entry O el 0 C Table Entry 5 Value 0 C Table Entry 5 E Value 2000 Value referred to 3000 Value referred to 1500 Value referred to 0 Value referred to 1000 Value referred to 2000 Value 3000 pU Gana 100 50 0 50 10096 R Graphs Section 6 9 If the 100 value 0 value and 100 value are set using numeral memory table entries as indicated below the percentage value of the reference value is calculated according to the value stored at the specified address 100 PET E An ce table 0 0 1 Table Enty s E 2
183. the data of character code FA20H for the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above with NT20 30 620 compatible mode or the data that corresponds to image library code 1000H for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with out NT20 30 620 compatible mode is arranged The mark shown below will be displayed if library data has not been created for the specified code E To change the library data to be displayed click on __ in the property and se lect the desired library data or numeral table entry from the list If you are using the NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C V1 and above and its system program version is 2 1 and above Indirect reference can be set The procedure for specifying the desired library data is shown below Direct Specify the code of the library data to be displayed directly Fixed Display Section 6 2 1 Click on at __ the right side of the code after checking the Direct button in the property setting dialog box to display the library data selection dialog Comments LAMP4 S OFF 61 X B1 LAMP1 L OFF 1 X B1 LAMP2 L OFF LAMP3 L OFF 2 If the code of the desired library data is not found in the list scroll the list us ing the scroll bar at the right side of the screen or click 8 1 open the code input dialog box Input the code of the desired library data and click on By pressing cursor keys 1 on keyboard the contents
184. the dialog PLC address can be set easily by selecting from the available areas Example Numeral table PLC Vendor OMRON Example Touch switch PLC Vendor OMRON Channel Channel Common I O Area I O Area Address Bit m Address o Channel Word Select the type of word to be referred to from the list box Address Input the address of word to be referred to Bit Input the bit position in the word to be referred to It is possible to input PC PLC address for example 000001 directly into the address input field You can input addresses easily when you know which area is available When inputting PLC addresses input a word address and a bit number without blank following a character that indicates area type However in case of numeral table or string table specification of bit number is not needed When you do not specify PLC address input into the input field Input methods varies according to the PLC Vendor setting as listed below Only input method is described here For details on specification method of PLC ad dress for PLC other than OMRON refer to PC Connection Operation Manual V042 E1 l 1 PLC Vendor OMRON Possible areas and characters that indicate area type are as follows Nw ommmiowe 0 qmm A WAm TO 1 je 9 5 oT me c omm 5 Data Memory Area EM Current Bank LU
185. the fol lowing characters to the next line On the Label Description edit box the new line character will be shown as lt n gt 196 Lamps Section 6 5 Guidance Reference Set Lines Displays the On Off Description Settings dialog box This dialog is for entering Off Description and On Description with multiple lines In all NT21 and NT31 631 V2 models Labels can be entered in multiple lines The following table shows the specification for each PT model Maximum Maximum Number of Remarks number of number of lines per characters characters mitted per line 32 1108 Maximum number of characters per line in clude the n charac ter NT31 C V2 40 1to 15 Maximum number of characters per line in clude the n charac ter NT631 C V2 256 1 to 30 Maximum number of characters per line in clude the n charac ter The Set Lines button will display On Off Description Settings dialog box in which the On Off description can be entered in multiple lines by pressing Enter Key When Numeral Display or String Display is selected as Label Type For the NT21 and NT31 631 V2 Models only Indirect Reference If a numeral in the specified memory table entry is treated as the reference table entry number for indirect reference specify this item Table Entry Specify the address of the numeral or string memory table entry to be referred to If indirect Reference is not selected the contents
186. the maximum number of significant digits of a negative value is 3 if 1 word is set and 7 if 2 words is set Example When 1 word is set the value 123 is treated as F123 in hexadecimal in a numeral memory table entry 281 Numeral Memory Table Section 7 2 Similarly when 2 words are set the value 1234567 is treated as F1234567 in hexadecimal in a numeral memory table entry PT models NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Regardless of the number of allocated words 2 words are always secured for a numeral memory table entry and a numeric value is stored as signed binary data If the setting for Storage Type is decimal F appearing at the most signifi cant digit position is treated as a negative sign In this case therefore the num ber of significant digits of a negative value is one digit less than the number of significant digits of a positive value as with conventional PT models Example If the settings are BCD and 1 word the value 123 is treated as F123 in a PC PLC word and FFFFFF85 in a numeral memory table entry However the value F123 in a PC PLC word is 0000F123 61731 in decimal in a numeral memory table entry if the Storage Type is hexadecimal Similarly if the settings are BCD and 2 words the value 1234567 is treated as F1234567 in a PC PLC word and FFED2979 in a numer al memory table entry However the value F1234567 in a PC PLC word is F1234567 249346713 in decimal in a numeral mem
187. the name of the driver that is set for the selected printer Where Displays the name of the port that is set for the selected printer Comment Displays the comment that is set for the selected printer Paper Set the paper size and the paper tray 451 Printing Reports Section 12 2 Size Set the size of paper to be used Source Set the paper tray to be used Orientation Set the direction of printing paper Portrait Specify this item if the data is to be printed parallel to the short er dimension of the paper Landscape Specify this item if the data is to be printed parallel to the longer dimension of the paper Properties Used to set the printer properties Since the setting differs according to the printer refer to the manual of the printer driver Reference If the print setup print or print preview has been executed under condition that no printer driver has been installed there may be times Support Tool does not move correctly 12 2 2 Output to a Printer To output the report to the printer follow the procedure shown below 1 Select File menu bar Print The Reports dialog box is displayed page 453 2 Set Printer for Destination 3 To specify the printing position of the paper click on Set Margins button The Set Margins dialog box is displayed After setting the items in this dialog box click ex The Reports dialog box is displayed again 4 To set the
188. the parameters in the record The second line onwards contain the parameter value of the records in the rec ipe The first field is the record name The second field is a value indicating whether the Lock check box should be checked or unchecked 0 means un checked and 1 means checked Any other values are considered invalid Subse quent fields are the actual values of the parameters in that record During export of parameters in the Record Setting Table the decimal points of the parameters will not be exported Example Parameter 1 is set to 3 integer digits and 2 decimal digits and the parameter value is 123 45 After exporting to CSV format the value will become 12345 Hexadecimal values will be converted to the decimal equivalent after export If you try to import a CSV file that has a value with a decimal point it is considered invalid and an improper line dialog is displayed Likewise hexadecimal values containing A F are not allowed i is only for testing 12 4 62H178 231 Recipe data mome tock Paramz Param Original fthis is only for testing 12 PUA 52 78 tisisony 0 10 D Es _ The import operation will overwrite all the current parameter values However if any line in the file is incorrect an improper line dialog will prompt for instructions An improper line is any line of text in the source import file whose data does not comply with the CSV forma
189. the screen element Parameter Comment Colour Foreground Defines the foreground color of the recipe name and parameter name part of the screen element Background Defines the background color of the recipe name and parameter name part of the screen element Parameter Data Colour Foreground Defines the foreground color of the parameter data part of the screen element Background Defines the background color of the parameter data part of the screen element Recipe Screen Element Section 6 11 Setting General Settings Touch Switches Interlock Recipe Recipe Entry Edit Para Write Notify Address PLC Bit Address I Set V d somments Window Keyboard Screen Screen No r Screen Position Bottom Left Local 1 Keyboard fi a xe 0 0 C Local 2 m Screen Attributes 7 v Replace Local Window Cancel Apply Help Recipe Entry Sets the recipe entry to refer to The button invokes the recipe table when it is clicked Edit Param Call up the Parameter Setting Table Write Notify Address PLC Address Inputs the write flag PLC address If this is a valid address the write notify bit in the memory map is set Set Sets the write flag PLC address via an ad dress composition dialog Comments Inputs comments for the write flag PLC ad dress The button will invoke the I O
190. the screen property With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C system keypad is not available Screen 2 Set a numeric value in the numeral setting input field using the numeric keys on the screen 3 Press the touch switch to which the J key code is allocated to write the data set at the input field to the specified numeral memory table entry 173 Data Input Section 6 4 Input using touch switches copy function control code input function PT Numeral Screen memory table Input field 0 1 50 No 2 Set No 3 Sei eoat 50 No 4 e opying the et data 5 50 1 Copy the preset data numeral memory table entry or constant to the input field using the copy function allocated to a touch switch 2 Press the touch switch to which the J key code is allocated by the control code input function to write the data that was copied set to the input field to the specified numeral memory table entry Reference To copy in the numeral table and display a numeral by a single key operation without using the J key code use a touch switch copy function and a numeral display element Numeral Screen memory table Display field No 1 No 3 Part type A 50 No4 No 5
191. to display range of window keyboard screens Input Key Window Keyboard screen number is not within the valid range Minimum value re stored Correct the screen data so that the local window 1 includes all the re quired elements When a window keyboard screen is converted conversion is executed as shown below due to differences in the window keyboard screen display range between a conventional and a new model Difference New models 470 A window keyboard screen can be specified only in the range that fits the touch switch grids Data Conversion Conventional models desired position Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Appendix A A window keyboard screen can be specified at any Corrective Action With a conventional model a range that does not fit the touch switch size is specified as the dis play range With a new model the range is cor rected so that it agrees with the touch switch posi tions Some screen ele ments exceed frame size The ele ments will not be downloaded to PT Hardware If the position and the range of the window to be displayed is inconve nient for operation cor rect the position and the range Refer to 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens Correction related to the system initializing screen Host Connect screen When the system initializ
192. to display the input numeric value in hexade cimal Format Integer Specify the number of digits of the integer part of the input data Decimal Specify the number of digits of the decimal fraction part of the input data Limit Maximum Specify the upper limit of the input data Minimum Specify the lower limit of the input data Display Sign Specify if a sign is displayed for a negative value 1 An input method for a negative value in decimal differs between the following types of PT With NT20 NT20S NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C and NT625C Input F to indicate a negative value in the most significant digit e g F0000008 With NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Input negative sign in the most significant digit e g 8 Interlock Refer to 6 1 12 Interlock Guidance Each time a numeral input or thumbwheel object is newly created a numeral table entry number where input data is stored is automatically set as 012 incrementally table entry number after the last set one will be the next default number A numeral table entry number can be changed by displaying the prop erty setting dialog box It is also possible to change it later 191 Data Input Section 6 4 The size of a thumbwheel switch can be selected from the following three sizes Small Medium With end plates Without end plate With a thumbwheel switch the data input method can be selected as d
193. touch switches can be created Other area of the screen must not be changed The screen number of the occurrence history screen is indicated below PT Model Screen No NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S NT600S None NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C 1997 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C 9001 A Cannot edit Only display is possible The screen to be displayed differs according to the PT model Example For NT30 NT30C No Date Time Cnt Message No NT30 NT30C Screen No NT620S NT620C NT625C Indicates a screen number Date NT30 NT30C Time NT30 NT30C YY MM DD HH MM NT620S NT620C NT625C Indicates the date and time the screen was displayed Cnt NT30 NT30C Frequency NT620S NT620C NT625C Indicates the number of times the screen has been displayed Message Indicates the Title of the screen attribute 100 Host Connect Screen System Initializing Screen Section 5 8 5 7 Frequency History Screen A frequency history screen displays the screen numbers recorded by the display history Screen History function in the order of frequency of screen display This function records the date time of display and the number of times the screen has been displayed for screens for which the History attribute is ticked in the screen property The frequency history screen provided with NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C has a blank area at the right side in the screen so that scroll
194. value the existing value is corrected to 100 for a 0 value it is corrected to O and for a 10096 value it is corrected to 100 IW Object Name value is out of limit Default values re stored for 10096 0 and 100 Correct the screen data or the program at the host so that a constant of up to 8 digits suffices Refer to 6 9 Graph Correction related to the label component of standard lamp and touch switch In the conversion of the data between a NT31 631 V2 or later model and a NT31 631 V1 or earlier model conversion is executed in the manner shown be low due to differences in the label data of standard lamp and touch switch Difference On label and Off label can be different On label and Off label should be same V2 or later models Other models Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a V2 or later model a standard lamp touch switch label type is set to Static and On Off label descriptions are different With a V2 or earlier model standard lamp touch switch label type is set to Static and On label description will be set to that of Off la bel IW Label Type On Off Static is not sup ported Label will set to Off descrip tion None With a V2 or later model set Standard Lamp Touch Switch label to Label lt n gt in lt n gt m
195. value display are displayed Bar Graph lt Display gt Lx General Position 140 Font Type Scale Standar 1x1 Equal Smoothing Colour Eoreground Background ie Position Font Type Scale Smoothing Attribute Color Foreground Background Indicates the display position of the percentage value The reference point is at the upper left corner of the percentage value Specify the font of the value to be displayed Standard Half Height Double Width Only Standard can be set for NT11S NT11 Specify the scale of the value to be displayed 1x1 Equal 1x2 High 2x1 Wide 2x2 3x3 4x4 8x8 Only 1 x 1 Equal can be set for NT11S NT11 Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for the value to be displayed Setting is not possible for NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S The display attribute cannot be set fixed as standard display Specify the color of the percentage value Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Specify the background color of the percentage value display area Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow 229 Graphs Section 6 9 When displaying a specific value reference value in a bar graph the percent age value is calculated based on the values for 10096 0 and 100
196. wheel numeral input string input will work if the address is OFF the touch switch thumbwheel numeral input string input will not respond to the touches The interlock functionality is supported for the PT models NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above The temporary input object does not support interlock function Select the Interlock tab on the property sheet of the screen object that supports Interlock Touch Switch x General Settings Light Function Label Interlock Address J Cancel Apply Help This property page will be the same for all other supported objects Only the cap tion will be changed according to the object Interlock Check Box To ON OFF interlock By default it is OFF PLC Bit Address To specify the bit address associated with Interlock Interlock is ON if this bit is set OFF otherwise IO Comment Comment for the address specified For conversions due to cut copy paste drag drop of screen elements with inter lock settings e g Touch Switch Thumbwheel Numeral Input and String Input 137 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Reference from the NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above to previous PT models interlock settings will be discarded as they are not being supported In the case of copy paste of screen elements drag drop of screen elements as well as application conversion Target PT model sup Original screen ele Remarks ports Interlock ments support Interlock
197. when the window keyboard screen is opened as a window although they can be registered for the window keyboard screen With the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above up to three windows can be opened at the same time and all objects other than thumbwheels and recipes can be registered However only one input field of numeral string input can be registered Pop up display frame The pop up display frame specifies the display range and display position of a pop up window keyboard the size and position of the frame can be specified as follows NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C Specify by 1 dot unit NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Specify by 20 dot The pop up function displays only the area enclosed by the pop up display frame Since the same memory area is shared by a pop up window keyboard and print screen function it is not possible to open the window during the printing process Moreover it is also not possible to print from PT during the window is opened With PT models other than the NT21 and the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above communication with a PC PLC is not possible for elements that are displayed in a keyboard window Therefore the lamp bit of a touch switch in a window cannot be controlled While a window is open display processing may be slowed a little Touch Switch functions that can be set on Window Keyboard screen NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C
198. 0 compatible mode and NT631 C V2 or later models NT30 620 compatible mode 519 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT11S NT600S NT620S one me NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Ver 4 No x x 256 1000 History x x e String Table Entry e Color Image Library Code Switch Screen Screen No PC PLC Address Com ment No Cancel Table Backlight Extended off VO Input Function Descrip tion No Table PC Extended PLC Out Address put Com ment Total No Table I O Com Address ments Com ments Total No F key PC Input PLC Notify Address Table Com ments Mathe matical Total No Table Recipe Table No 4 This option is available only for V2 or later models 5 This option is available only for V2 System Ver 3 1 or later models 520 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E Screens NT11S NT11 NT600S Ver 5 NT620C NT625C Ver 4 NT620S Ver 4 NT631C Screen Size Dots 160 x 64 320 x 240 640 400 640 640 x x 400 480 320 x 240 Max No of Screen 250 2000 1000 2000 3999 Standard Screen 1 to 250 1 to 1899 2000 1 to 1000 1 to 1899 2000 1 to 3999 Parent Screen 1 to 1899 2000
199. 01 Image 199 Image data 8 Image Display 152 Image Library Report 447 570 Input Notify Touch Switch 216 K Keyboard Screens 94 L Lamp 194 Library data 8 Library Display 157 Load Keyboard Screen 81 82 Local window 97 Mark Editor 344 Mark List 448 Marks 8 MEMLINK 131 Menu Chart 22 Meter Shape 231 Mitsubishi A 131 Mitsubishi Fx 132 Modify Parent 94 Modifying an Element 112 More windows 76 Moving an overlapped element to the front or back 115 N New 67 New Window 75 No of Division 232 Numeral Display 202 Numeral Input 173 O Objects which can be used 9 Occurrence History Screen 100 OMRON 130 Opening a Data Creation Screen 67 Opening Closing and moving a window 98 Output to a File RTF 457 Output to a Printer 452 Outputting the Screen Image 459 Index Overlapping Screens 93 P parent screen 92 93 Paste 114 PC PLC address 129 Polygon 144 Polyline 138 pop up window function 94 Pop up Window Keyboard Touch Switch 218 Print 452 Print Preview 458 Print Screen Touch Switch 225 Print Setup 451 Printing information on errors occurring during data conver sion 455 Properties 69 80 121 PT Configuration 69 R Receiving Uploading Data 436 Receiving Uploading the History Record 439 Rectangle 141 Refresh 86 Relationships between Elements and Memory Tables 136
200. 0C NT30C ST141 NT600S NT600S ST121 NT600S ST211 NT600S ST121 NT600S ST211 NT620S NT620S ST211 NT620S ST212 NT620C NT620C ST141 NT625C NT625C ST152 NT21 NT21 ST121L E NT31 NT31 ST121L E NT31 ST121 NT31 ST121 NT31 ST122 NT31 ST123 NT31C ST141 NT31C ST141 NT31C ST141 NT31C ST142 NT31C ST143 NT631 NT631 ST211 NT631 ST211 NT631 ST211 NT631C NT631C ST141 NT631C ST151 NT631C ST141 NT631C ST151 NT631C ST141 NT631C ST151 NT631C ST152 NT631C ST153 1 NT20S and NT600S have direct access Ver 4 and Ver 5 NT series Support Tool for Windows supports only Ver 5 Reference Direct access version 4 screen data for the NT20S or NT600S can be used on Windows by using version 5 of the Support Tool for Windows 26 Usable Hardware Combinations Section 1 6 1 6 2 Communication Method for Each PT Model Usable communication method differs depending on the PT types Also some PT can use communication method that is not supported in their ini tial state by installing the exclusive system programs For details refer to Ap pendix B System Installer Operation Co
201. 1 NT31 V1 System Ver 2 1 NT31 V2 V3 System Ver 3 1 NT31C NT31C V1 NT31C V1 System Ver 2 1 NT31C V2 V3 System Ver 3 1 NT631 NT631 V1 631 1 5 Ver 2 1 NT631 V2 System Ver 3 1 NT631C NT631C Vi NT631C V1 System Ver 2 1 NT631C V2 V3 System Ver 3 1 Reference To check the system program version installed in a PT display the following Screens Version display at the upper right position of PT system menu PT system menu Expansion mode Version display With the NT20 either NT20S screen data compatible with previous NT20S or NT20 screen data with expanded CS CJ series PLC data access can be used The following PT Models are also available 47 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 48 NT31 V2 NT31C V2 NT631 V2 MT631C V2 NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode For NT21 and NT31 631 V2 or higher models the NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode check box will be enabled By setting this option the Control Area will take 4 memory address instead of 5 and Notify Area will take 3 memory address instead of 2 This allows straight conversion for NT30 620 PT models to NT31 631 or NT20S models to NT21 without the need to modify the PLC pro gram PLC Vendor Specify the usable direct access type from either of the following MEMLINK Mitsubishi A and Mitsubishi Fx can be set o
202. 13 Drag the mouse so that the rectangular frame encloses the three buttons 13 14 Use the properties as they are 15 Adjust the size and the position of the frame rectangle Setting the Switch Screen character string 16 Select Objects main menu Fixed Display Text 17 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the Switch Screen character string is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner 18 Set the properties as shown below Description Switch Screen Position ES Font Type Standard Scale 1x1 Equal Smoothing is Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Black 19 Adjust the position of the Switch Screen character string on the data cre ation screen by dragging it 381 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 20 Specify the Switch Screen character string then select Draw menu bar Bring to Front For details of Moving an overlapped element to the front or back refer to 6 1 5 Copying Cutting Pasting and Deleting Elements The Switch Screen character string is brought to the front of the frame Reference The positional relationship in the display of the same kind of elements such as among fixed display elements can be controlled by selecting Draw Bring to Front or Send to Back 9 3 8 Creating the Monitor Screen Parent Screen Register screens No 10 and NO 11
203. 2 characters NT21 Max 39 characters NT30 NT30C NT31 and NT31C Max 40 characters NT631 and NT631C to which a system program ver sion lower than Ver 2 1 is installed With these models above the number of characters to be displayed will be less than these values according to the display method and if the history informa tion is displayed Max 40 characters NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 System Ver 2 1 and NT631C System Ver 2 1 Alarm Section 6 3 With these models above up to 40 characters can be displayed regardless of the display method etc Display Line Qty Specify the number of messages to be displayed Max 7 lines NT21 Max 12 lines NT30 NT30C NT31 NT31C Max 16 lines NT620S Max 24 lines NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C Scale Specify the character size of the message to be displayed 1x1 Equal 1x2 High 2x 1 Wide 2x2 3 3 4x4 8x8 Smoothing Specify if smoothing processing is executed for the message to be displayed Line Scroll Touch Switch Set if a touch switch is set for scrolling messages line by line Only for NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Page Scroll Touch Switch Set if a touch switch is set for scrolling messages page by page Only for NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Color Frame Specify the color used for the frame of an alarm list Background ON Specify the background color of the selected message dis play field OFF Specify the background color of the message display fie
204. 254 1 Window menu bar Symbol Manager Reference Help fi Symbol Manager New Windows File Edit View Help Cascade 8 3 ColourPalette Tile H E Supplement Symbols Arrange loons Lom 1 App5 21 Standard Screen The symbol manager window is always displayed at the top of the windows dis played on the screen If this disturbs your operation minimize the window by either clicking on the button at the upper right area in the window or select ing the minimize item from the control menu box displayed by the clicking on the button at the upper left area in the window The symbol manager memorizes the folder that was open when you quit the symbol manager last time and opens the same folder automatically when you next start the symbol manager The symbol registration state in the folder is however the state when the folder was saved last Menu bar File New Creates a new file folder Open Displays a file folder that is not displayed in the screen Close Closes the file folder presently displayed in the screen The file is not deleted although it disappears from the screen Save Saves the specified folder by overwriting the present file Save As Saves the specified folder by changing the file name Folder name remains unchanged Save All Saves all folders to the individual files Exit Lets you exit the symbol manager Edit Cut Moves the specified symbol data to the clip board The dat
205. 3 Set the properties as shown below Description Numeral Display 1 Position ER Font Type Standard Scale 1x2 High Smoothing i Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Transparent 4 Adjust the position of Numeral Display 1 on the data creation screen by dragging it Creating the numeral display field b Select Objects menu bar Numeral Display Refer to 6 6 Numeral Display 368 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 6 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the nu meral display field is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner of numeral display 7 Setthe properties as shown below Position Font Type Standard Scale 2x2 Smoothing Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Black Reference Indirect Reference Table Entry Display Type Format Integer Decimal Zero Suppression Display Sign 8 Adjust the position of the numeral display field by dragging it 0j Surrounding the numeral display field with a frame 9 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Rectangle 10 On the data creation screen drag the rectangle so that it encloses the nu meral display field 11 Use the properties as they are 12 Adjust the size and the position of the frame rectangle Creating the numeral di
206. 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool If the paste operation is performed the library data previously registered to the code is overwritten and lost Confirmation dialog box will be displayed When a library data is pasted the property size colors compression com ment of the library code is changed to that of the new one 1 Select Library Editor from the Tools menu The library table is displayed 2 Select the code of the library data to be pasted Select only one code When two or more codes are selected paste opera tion can not be performed 3 Click the edit Button or right click on the selected code 4 Select Paste Paste can not be selected if the library data to be pasted is not stored in the 338 Library Editor Section 8 2 clipboard After clicking the fF Button in confirmation dialog box li brary data will be pasted to th Delete Ctri L Quitting the library table You can quit the library table in any of the two ways described below e Clicking the cese Button of the library table dialog e Clicking the Button at the upper right corner of the library table dialog 8 2 2 Creating Library Data Using Library Editor Registering new library data 1 Select Library Editor from the Tools menu The library table is displayed 2 Click the new Button
207. 3000 Value 0 4 2000 100 d 5 Table Entry 4 Jat Value o The data logging function and background function can be used with the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Data logging function The data logging function records the values used for display at a PT Usually the data collected in sampling for display in a trend graph are not re corded internally If you use the data logging function the data are logged and can be displayed by tracing them back The data logging function can be executed for up to 8 kinds of data Background function The background function continues data sampling even when a trend graph is not displayed With a trend graph data sampling is executed only when a trend graph is dis played and stops when the screen is switched from the trend graph screen However if the background function is used data sampling can be continued in the background mode while the trend graph is not displayed The data sampled and logged when in background mode can be displayed by tracing back to the past The background function is valid only when it is used with the data logging function when the background function is used the objective data is continu ously recorded Please note that since data sampling is executed continuously if the background function is used the processing speed at a PT may be a little slow How the data recording is changed depending on whether or not the da
208. 31 V2 and later models in NT20 30 620 compatible mode possible Status after Conversion Conversion result error message and corrective action Error Message Insertion of an image library into a character string is Corrective Action With a conventional model the imagelli brary is used ina character string With a new model the code is dis played like this lt gt The code after con version conforms to the image library code conversion method E Image Table entry has been con verted E String Table Table Entry XXXX has in valid component code It has been converted from XXXX to YYYY Delete a code in the character string and make corrections so that the character string and image library fixed dis play or image lamp are overlapped for display or grouped allowing the image library to be dis played in the same way as a character string Refer to 6 1 7 Grouping Elements In case of lamp touch Switch label a fixed dis play image goes behind the label and the display will not be as desired In this case use an image lamp instead Correction of graphic display attributes When a graphic is converted between a conventional and a new model conver sion is executed as shown below due to differences in the display attributes Difference New models The inverse attribute is not supported for some kinds of graphic Conventional models
209. 31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and above Reference The direct access version that can be handled by the Support Tool is NT20S NT600S Ver 5 Conventional models other than NT20 NT20S NT600S Ver 4 New models direct access versions Depending on the direct access types exclusive system program may be needed for the PT hardware For details of the system programs and system installer refer to Appendix B System Installer Operation Direct access version 4 screen data for the NT20S or NT600S or direct access version 3 or lower screen data from previous PT models can be used on Win dows by using version 4 or 5 of the Support Tool for Windows NT20M NT600M screen data can be reused by converting it to NT20S NT600S screen data using the Support Tool for Windows Refer to the Support Tool for Windows Operation Manual Cat No V028 E1 To create screen data to be used for direct access PLC vendor other than OMRON Memory Link Mitsubishi A and Mitsubishi FX use system installer of DOS version Conversion between different direct accesses PLC vendor With the Support Tool Ver 4 0 data conversion between different direct ac cesses such as OMRON gt Mitsubishi A or Mitsubishi FX OMRON is possible 463 Data Conversion Appendix A However data conversion between different direct accesses is limited to data of the same PT model e g Between NT31 V1 data fo
210. 4 100 06 comment5 EOF 0010006 ABC rae 100 07 comment6 EOF 0010007 A Blank space TAB TAB code Enter Enter code EOF End of file NG A rAB 100 04 Enter A TAB 100 05 Enter TAB TAB COmment4 Enter Reference It may take time to import comments when there are many I O comments There are the PLC address I O Comment and Reference in an I O comments table Addresses with no comment and no reference will not be downloaded to PT See below Can be downloaded x Cannot be downloaded Lines in an I O comment table with only the PLC address input for future use etc will not be downloaded to PT and as a result when the data is uploaded to the Support Tool the line itself will be lost This also applies when saving data in mmi format Support Tool cannot import more than 3 000 PLC addresses with comments Therefore if there are more than 3 000 PLC addresses with comments only the addresses will be imported for PLC addresses from entry 3001 onwards comment import operation will be finished normally Rejected entries are displayed in the Error Log Check them by selecting Error Log from the View menu and print them 7 8 F Key Input Notify Table This table is only available for NT11S NT11 The F Key Input Notify Table con sists of four entries Each entry is assigned to a function key in the PT device It specifies a PC PLC memory bit t
211. 5 Extended I O Input Table Section 7 5 When Notify Bit is specified Extended I O Input Setting Cancel Backlight Off Function Notify Bit 4 Notify Bit Address Channel sadi mw E Table Notify Bit Address Specify the PC PLC bit where the event of the input terminal going ON is noti fied Comments Specify a comment for a PC PLC bit A comment can comprise up to 16 characters When Input Key Control is specified 296 Extended I O Input Setting IZ Cancel Backlight Cancel Help Control Key Select the control code to be input when the input terminal goes ON from the list Inputs numeral in a data input field Inputs numeral 1 in a data input field Inputs numeral 2 in a data input field Inputs numeral 3 in a data input field Inputs numeral 4 in a data input field Inputs numeral 5 in a data input field Inputs numeral 6 in a data input field Inputs numeral 7 in a data input field Inputs numeral 8 in a data input field Inputs numeral 9 in a data input field Inputs hexadecimal A in a data input field Inputs hexadecimal B in a data input field BHESBHEAESEEHRHE SE Inputs hexadecimal C in a data input field Extended I O Output Table Section 7 6 B mt m Inputs hexadecimal D a data input field Inputs hexadecimal E in a data input field Inputs hexadecimal F in a data input field Deletes numeri
212. 620C NT625C Printer Select one of the Supported printers from the printer drop down list box Although this setting is possible for NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C it is not valid from Support Tool Please set from the Maintenance Mode of PT Mode Color Specify Color for color printing Designation of Color is valid for the following PT models NT30C NT620C NT625C Tone Specify Tone for monochrome printing If a color type PT is used with Tone set for Mode color data is expressed using a gray scale printed in monochrome These setting are available for the following PT models NT30 NT30C NT620S Printer only NT620C NT625C For NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C this setting has to be selected from PT Numeral Storage Type BCD or Binary can be selected for the storage type of the Numeral memory table This setting is available only when the time the Storage Type in the Numeral memory table has System setting When BCD or Binary is set for Numeral memory table Storage Type this setting in the PT Configuration will be ignored and follows the storage type in the Numeral Table This setting is available for the following PT Model NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Control Notify Area page The Control Notify Area page is displayed when you click on the Control Notify Area tab The Control Notify Area page is prepared to set the PT Control area control ling PT from PC PLC and for PT Notify Area noti
213. 620S NT620C and NT625C if a character string input is selected as the touch switch function up to 80 characters can be set for an input character string With NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C however although up to 80 char acters can be set for a label the limit is 40 characters for an input character string a character string that is input using a touch switch Fixed Display Mark smoothing not supported It is ignored The mark is automatically displayed with out smoothing processing Image Table entry has been converted If the converted image code differs from the code of the image data that is to be displayed correct the code Incompatible PT hardware connected communication aborted The PT model between the screen data and the target PT is mismatching on down loading uploading Check the contents of PT Configuration Input key window keyboard screen num ber is not within the valid range Mini mum value restored Create the window keyboard screen for a screen number in the range 1900 to 1979 and convert the window keyboard screen number set for the touch switch according ly Library Table Entry has been converted If the converted library code differs from the code of the library data that is to be displayed correct the code Memory access mismatched commu nication aborted Target PLC vendor type or PT type is mis matching between the Support Tool and PT hard
214. 84 Numeral String 40 Comments l Bit Memory l Change Address Edit gt Set Insert Mark sert Goto Entry Close Reference Search Help Value Specify the initial value to be set when the power is switched ON the PT is reset or the mode is changed from the System Menu to RUN For an initial value a character string containing a maximum of 40 characters can be specified 20 characters for NT11S NT11 32 characters for NT20 NT20S To display V input two characters without a blank like V Setting of an initial value is valid when the resume function is not selected and the Initial item is selected for the character string memory table entry string table and in this case the content of the character string memory table entry string table is returned to the initial value If the PT has the memory table initialization function this function can also be used to return the content of a character string memory table entry string table to the initial value Character String Memory Table String Table Reference Section 7 3 By clicking the Insert Mark Insert Image or Insert Library Button you can insert mark data image data or library data into a character string With the NT21 and NT31 631 without NT20 30 620 compatible mode Insert Image insert are not enabled Initial Specify whether or not the c
215. Address VO Comment Ref C6 0600 poo No 00002 BBB Yes 00003 cece Yes 0004 CGG No T6a600 DoD No 00002 AAA Yes 100003 FFF No T6 0604 GGG No Existing I O comment in Support Tool in comment table Import Procedure SYSMAC Support Software SYSMAC CPT Follow the procedure below to import I O comment from ladder program 1 Select Import I O Comments from the Tools menu Dialog box to specify I O comment is displayed 2 Specify the I O comment file SP1 to be imported and click the Button comment Import is performed While importing progress will be dis played on status bar 303 I O Comment Table Section 7 7 304 Reference 3 When the operation is finished the message Import of I O Comments op eration completed is displayed Then click the Button When an I O comment import was aborted or could not be done because of error the message Failed to import I O comment is displayed then click the Button In this case the contents of I O comment table in Support Tool remain unchanged If this message box is displayed check the following points s this a program file for OMRON C series PLC s the extension SP1 SSS program file format In case OMRON SYSMAC CPT is used store export the ladder program in SSS program SP1 format and then use this file to import I O comment For SYSMAC Support Soft SYSMAC CPT priority of word ty
216. Auto Arrange in the Settings page of a touch switch property The cursor can also be moved using an arrow symbol key touch switch The cursor moves in the order the character string input elements were created this order can be changed after creating the elements 6 4 3 Thumbwheel Switch Thumbwheel switches are provided as means to input numeric data and o keys are provided at each input digit to allow you to input numeric data at individ ual digits Thumbwheel switch cannot be used with NT11S NT11 Numeral memory table Touch the or key at each digit of thumbwheel switches to set numeric data The numeric data set using the thumbwheel switch is written to a numeral memory table entry 189 Data Input Section 6 4 Note If thumbwheel switches are used to input numeric data the input data is directly written to a numeral memory table entry without being set in a data input field Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Data Input gt Thumbwheel Switch Selection using the drawing toolbar Terminology Frame Foreground Character Color Foreground Frame Background Character Color Background A Property setting General Position Indicates the display position of the thumbwheel switch The attribute point is at the upper left corner of the thumbwheel switch Size Specify the size of the thumbwhee
217. C PLC Address Comments 0 E Initial Words Automatic Manual Step X Reset 000150 Alarm data 1 000170 Alarm data 2 000190 Alarm data 3 D00210 Alarm data 4 000230 Alarm data 5 000250 Alarm data 6 D00270 Alarm data 7 D00290 Alarm data 8 Line 1 Error Line 2 Error A spot Screw Error B spot Screw Error Low Pressure Area 1 Alarm Area 2 Alarm PC PLC Network Error ee Setting bit memory table 1 Click on Bit Memory 2 Make the bit memory table settings as shown below Click the Button to set the following items e Function History Switch Screen String Table Entry Image Library Code Color Click the Set Button to set the following items Direct input on a bit memory table is also possible PLC Address O Comments 362 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Switch History PC I O Function Screen Address Comments Alarm Switch 0002000 Alarm 1 Screen Alarm Switch 0002001 Alarm 2 Screen Alarm Switch 0002002 Alarm 3 Screen Alarm Switch 0002003 Alarm 4 Screen Alarm Switch 0002004 Alarm 5 Screen Alarm Switch 0002005 Alarm 6 Screen Alarm Switch 0002006 Alarm 7 Screen Alarm Switch 0002007 Alarm 8 Screen 1 With NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C set the Alarm for function and unmark t
218. C Continuous Iv 227 hunter Insert gt gt eA ERN 93 Window Keyboard Screens Section 5 4 e Set the screen number of a parent screen for Screen No in Parent If the screen number has already existed it cannot be registered as a parent Screen Select Overlapping Specify child screens Select a screen that is specified as a child screen by selecting it from the Standard field then click on mss The selected screen moves to the Child field If a wrong number is moved click on gms the screen returns from the Child field to the Standard field Two to eight screens can be registered as child screens For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C one to eight screen can be registered as child screen Modify the screen switching order Child screens are overlapped in the order they are set in the Child field The setting order of the child screens can be modified using _ MoveUp and Move Down Click on after the completion of child screen setting 5 3 3 Editing a Parent Screen Modification The type continuous overlapping and configuration of a created parent screen can be modified Reference The procedure for modifying a parent screen is indicated below 1 2 Specify the parent screen that you want to modify from the application man ager or display the pop up menu by right clicking the mouse on the parent Screen Select Screen in the
219. Code Specify whether or not image library data is displayed in the lamp OFF state and the code of the image library data to be displayed ON State Code Specify whether or not image library data is displayed in the lamp ON state and the code of the image library data to be displayed Change Image Specify the image data to be displayed when the lamp is ON OFF Change Library Specify the library data to be displayed when the lamp is ON OFF Color Only for NT31C and NT631C Setting is not possible for other color types of PT Foreground Set the display color of an image element Specification of color is valid only when the color mode is 2 colors Setting is not possible for a monochrome type PT Background Set the display color of the background in the image element display area Specification of color is valid only when the color mode is 2 colors Setting is not possible for a monochrome type PT Light Functions Address PC PLO Bit Address Specify the bit at the PC PLC that drives an image library lamp ON OFF Comment Specify the comment of the PC PLC bit that drives an image library lamp ON OFF Edit Displays the dialog box used to specify the bit number pem Displays an I O comment table entry Reference To check lamp ON status on the editing screen select Simulate ON OFF from the View menu For details refer to 5 1 3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool 200 Lamps Sectio
220. Create a touch switch for which the copy function is set and copy a constant to a numeral memory table entry us ing this touch switch Objects Numeral Display Display the contents in the copy destination numeral memory table entry PT Numeral memory table PC PLC Constant gt 123 123 V 123 Numeral display Te switch copy function 417 Quick Reference Section 10 1 Operation Refer to Writing To write a numeric value 1 Objects Data Input Numeral Datato To write a constant to a ina i i D reate a numeral sett the numeral setting input field eral setting input PLC 2 Objects Touch Switch Function Copy Setting Create a touch switch for which the copy function is set and copy a constant to a numeral memory table entry us ing this touch switch Copy To Cursor Position PT Constant N I Screen 123 memory table Numeral setting input field Touch switch copy function To write a numeric value Objects Data Input Thumbwheel Switch To input a numeric value Create a thumbwheel switch using thumbwheel switch PT Screen Numeral memory table m 123
221. Creating the title 1 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Text 2 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the title is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner of text 3 Set the properties as shown below Description Thumbwheel Position Font Type Standard Scale 1x2 High Smoothing D Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background 386 Black Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 4 Adjust the position of the Thumbwheel on the data creation screen by dragging it Creating the thumbwheel switch 5 Select Objects menu bar gt Data Input Thumbwheel Switch Refer to 6 4 3 Thumbwheel Switch 6 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the thumbwheel switch is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner of thumbwheel Y Setthe properties as shown below Position Size Medium Attribute Standard End Plate d Thumbwheel Color Frame White Foreground White Background Black Character Color Foreground White Background Black Table Entry 12 Display Type Decimal Format Integer 4 Decimal 0 Limit Maximum 999 Minimum F0009999 Display sign For the NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V2
222. Cutting Pasting and Deleting Elements 113 6 1 6 Aligning Elements II IH 116 6 1 7 Grouping Elements 2 eee ee cee 118 6 1 8 Associating Elements with the Touch Switch 119 6 1 9 Centralizing the Label of Lamp and Touch Switch 119 6 1 10 Setting Properties si ertrrerniei a eee 120 6 1 11 Relationships between Elements and Memory Tables 136 61 12 Interl ck sz sailor ete e LIEN IE Ee Ven re pen E uh UNT Erde 136 6 2 Fixed Display i ones eee br GREEN Rete pte tae tee a pte De pete pde 138 6271 Polylitte suom ain IN E BOE Donc 138 6 27 27 ATO ses Sos Me St ak See kt dct rud mr trs 140 62 9 Rectangle usse e y Rer e pp eR Ra ER ec pue Ei os 141 6 2 4 Circles cei eR ERR RR ES a V Redi bere 142 6 2 5 Polygon sg ERE Y HIR 144 62226 SeGclOL e se vu uu der ashe ee eee Red Rr ae SEU TAE A 146 6 257 Next doe peu CR ER RARE E ES cia E RH ee 147 6 2 8 ente endive band NR eat DRG ea UP ht 149 6 2 9 Image Object Data n mI 152 622210 Mark RROD eee OES MORE Wow QI reed 155 6 2 11 Library Object Data nossen ae ee eee eee 157 ONE ML m 161
223. DM1083 Speed2 For details of the format rule see the description below and the Example of im port Name The Support Tool imports only the PLC address and the I O comments to the I O comment table Therefore the address name can be omitted In this case however be sure to insert TAB code before PLC address Example TAB O 01 TAB S TART ON Enter 305 Comment Table Section 7 7 PLC address Each word type should be expressed as shown below To specify a bit number input bit number after a decimal point HR area HR or H HR120 AR area AR or A AR120 LR area LR120 TIM100 CNT100 Count up flag C Work area w EM current bank EM bank specification E 1 Bank specification hexade cimal 1 digit LR U K CS CJ series does not have an LR area If an LR area bit L00000 to L00199 is set to screen data it will be automatically converted to CIO 01000 to CIO 01199 inside the PT comment If an comment longer than 16 characters is set the remaining characters are discarded Example of import Import Result OK NG PLC address JS _ ABC rae 100 01 Comment Enter 0010001 00 _ _ W amp cmamer 200008 a ESS 00 306 F Key Input Notify Table Section 7 8 A rag 100 03 Comments Enter 001000
224. Data Communication Methods by PT Models For details of updating the system pro gram refer to Appendix B Cannot have more than XXX child Screens When creating a new screen insert a number of child screens that does not ex ceed the maximum limit Clock Monitoring Address has not been set With an NT21 PT set the Clock Address to define a clock Data Area so the clock data can be read from the PLC Constant Value is out of limit Maximum value restored Correct the screen data or the program in the host so that a constant of up to 8 digits set for the copy setting touch switch will suffice Continuous screen does not allow child screen to have Thumbwheel Numeral String Input elements Delete thumbwheel switches numeral in put elements and or character string input elements Control Notify Window Control area can not overlap each other Make sure that the PT status control area the PT status notify area and the window control area are not overlapping each oth er Cursor Move Touch Switch does not have any association link Select the cursor moving touch switch on the screen choose Draw Associate then specify the element with which the selected touch switch is to be associated 549 Error Messages Appendix K Error Message Corrective Action Due to length limitation Input Key String Touch Switch is only displaying part of the label message With NT
225. Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool 38 Starting up and Exiting the Support Tool Section 3 1 1 2 3 Details Previous Versions Shortcut Compatibility If you have problems with this program and it worked correctly on an earlier version of Windows select the compatibility mode that matches that earlier version Help me choose the settings Compatibility mode E Run this program in compatibility mode for Windows XP Service Pack 3 Settings Run in 256 colors Run in 640 x 480 screen resolution Disable visual themes Disable desktop composition E Disable display scaling on high DP settings Privilege Level v Run this program as an administrator fg Change settings for all users On Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista or Windows 7 you must have administrator rights to run the Support Tool Before you start the Support Tool make sure you are logged on with a user ID in the administrators group or power users group On Windows Vista or Windows 7 the following procedure can be used to run the Support Tool with administrator rights 1 Right click the program select Properties and then click the Compatibili ty Tab In the Privilege Level Area select Run this program as an adminis trator and then click the OK Button Refer to the box in the following figure 2 Right click the program and select Run as
226. Displays the parameter name A string of up to 8 characters can be used and edited Dec Hex Displays the numeral display format either decimal or hexadecimal When this is changed Integer and Decimal will be reset to default Sign Display sign option Check if you want a sign to be displayed Integer Decimal Displays the precision of the integer decimal digit of the numeral data Limitation on the sum of integer and decimal digits will follow the numeral display restriction Words Defines the memory size for the parameter The address column will be reset when this size is changed PLC Address Displays the starting PLC address used by the parameter Goto Entry This will allow the selection of an entry by specifying the entry number through a Go to dialog Insert Mark Inserts a mark object in a parameter name The Parameter values in the records of a recipe can be edited through a CSV Comma Separated Values file Each line consists of the fields of a record with a comma separating two fields 319 Recipe Table Section 7 10 Improper Line Dialog 320 Improper Line Improper Line The first line of a CSV file is the header The first field is the recipe name If it con tains ASCII characters from 0x00 to Ox1F will be converted to spaces after im port The second field is Master Record Flag which is equivalent to the Lock check box in the Record Setting dialog Subsequent fields are the names of all
227. F Limit Fixed Display 65 535 entries screen overlapping screens max 524 280 entries Numeral Display 256 entries screen overlapping screens max 1 024 entries String Display 256 entries screen overlapping screens max 1 024 entries Image Data 256 entries screen including library data overlapping screens max 1 024 entries Library Data 256 entries screen including image data overlapping screens max 1 024 entries Mark Display fixed dis play 65 535 entries screen overlapping screens max 52 480 entries Bar Graph 50 entries screen overlapping screens max 400 entries Analogue Meter 50 entries screen overlapping screens max 400 entries Broken line Graph 1 frame screen overlapping screens max 8 frames 256 lines frame Trend Graph 1 frame screen overlapping screens max 8 frames Data logging function not used 50 lines screen data Data logging function used 8 lines screen data Lamp 256 entries screen overlapping screens max 1 024 entries Touch Switch 256 entries screen overlapping screens max 1 024 entries Numeric Key Type Numeral Input 256 entries screen overlapping screens Registration is possible only on one child screen Thumb wheel SW Type NT21 26 entries screen overlapping screens Registration is pos sible only on one child screen NT31 NT31C 64
228. GE 382 9 3 10 Creating the Alarm Screen 0 0 eee ec eee nee 394 9 3 11 Creating the Alarm List Library Data 399 9 3 12 Creating the Pop up Display Numeric Keys 400 9 3 13 Saving the Created Data 404 9 3 14 Downloading tothe PT 5 404 351 Example Screen Configuration Section 9 1 9 1 Example Screen Configuration The configuration and screen transfer of the example screens you are going to create are described below 9 1 1 Screen Configuration Menu Screen Screen No 1 Menu Screen PT power ON Screen Menu Screen Screen Menu button pun button button button Monitor Screen Screen No 2 w 4 Set Screen Screen No 3 Monitor Screen M l 1 _ HW Monitor D 7 button Alarm Monitor Menu Alarm Set button button button button button Alarm Screen Screen No 4 Create the Monitor Screen as overlapping screens comprising screen No 10 and screen No 11 Parent screen screen No 2 Child screen screen No 10 Child screen screen No 11 352 Example Screen Configuration Section 9 1 9 1 2 Screen Transfer among Example Screens How the displayed screen switches acco
229. I es Or Jo SO _ eS LE n Os jr ue E p OE Lr sees EM Bank 3 CS CJ series PLCs 4 EM Bank 4 CS CJ series PLCs Section 6 1 EM Bank 6 CS CJ series PLCs EM Bank 7 CS CJ series PLCs EM Bank C CS CJ series PLCs Count Up Flag CS CJ series PLCs Time Up Flag CS CJ series PLCs Work Area CS CJ series PLCs Task Flag CS CJ series PLCs EM Bank D EM Bank E EM Bank F are not available since these are reserved words Only available for the NT20 NT21 and the NT31 631 V2 and above models Specification possible x Specification not possible With NT11S NT11 NT20S NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C and NT625C Input a word address as a 4 digit number leading zeros can be suppressed and a bit number as a 2 digit number With NT20 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Input a word address as a 5 digit number leading zeros can be suppressed and a bit number as a 2 digit number PLC Vendor MEMLINK Possible areas and characters that indicate area types are as follows Noe MemwytmAes 0 Specification possible x Specification not possible Input a word address as a 4 digit number leading zeros can be suppressed and a bit number as a 2 digit number PLC Vendor Mitsubishi A Possible areas and characters that indicate area types are as follows Link Relay Ce 131
230. If the 100 value 0 value and 10096 value are set as indicated below ref erence values are displayed in the bar graph as shown below Bar graph 100 100 f C TableEnty TableEnty E C Table Enty E Value go Value I Value po Value referred to 3000 10096 Value referred to 1500 5096 ES Value referred to 0 096 Value referred to 1000 50 Value referred to 2000 100 If the 100 value 0 value and 100 value are set using numeral memory table entries as indicated below the percentage value of the reference value is calculated according to the value stored at the specified address Bar graph o plo C Table Enty 4 E C Table Enty 3 C Table Ents e C Value fo C Value foo Numeral memory table D 3000 2000 ap o 6 9 2 Analogue Meter A present value in a numeral memory table entry is displayed in the form of quar ter semi circle circle graph Analogue meter can be used only with the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above Numeral Memory Table A value in a numeral memory table entry is converted into a percentage value in the range from 0 to 100 or from 100 to 10096 and displayed in the form of quarter semi
231. Lamp Attribute Label 1 Uncheck the check mark for Auto Arrange Otherwise it is not pos sible to change the position of each numeral input and touch switch 2 For the NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 or later models it is possible to set an interlock bit that can enable dis able the operations 385 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Adjusting the size and position of numeral input 1 input field and the touch switch 10 Specify only the touch switch area and adjust the size and the position 11 Specify only the numeral input field and adjust the size and the position Creating the numeral input field Numeral Input 2 2 Copying and pasting the numeral input field Numeral Input 1 1 Copy Numeral Input 1 character string numeral display field and touch switch and paste them to the data creation screen 2 Move the character string numeral display field and touch switch pasted at the upper left area of the screen to the desired position for displaying Numeral Input 2 3 Double click the Numeral Input 1 character string and modify the proper ties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged 4 Double click the data input field 0 displayed and modify the proper ties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged Table Ent Creating the thumbwheel switch Thunbuhee Thunbuheal
232. NT Transfer Utility in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder Destination Folder C Program Files Omron NTST4 8E Transfer Utility After specifying the destination click on 8 The screen for specifying the destination for registering the start menu is dis played 495 NT Transfer Utility Uninstall 496 Appendix C 8 In the start menu of Windows specify the folder where the short cut to the Support Tool is created In the initial state the following folder is selected Start Program Omron Wtst4 8E If you want to change the folder select the desired folder from the Existing Folders or directly input the folder name If a folder that does not exist in the hard disk is specified the specified folder is automatically made NT Transfer Utility Setup Select Program Folder Please select a program folder Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the existing folders list Click Next to continue Program Folders OMRONSNTST 4 86 Existing Folders Accessories Administrative Tools Games Startup lt Back Cancel After specifying the folder click on Installation of the specified programs is implemented files are copied During program installation the progress of the processing is indicated as a percentage 9
233. NT625C and select Alarm for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Switch Screen The meaning of the Switch Screen setting differs between the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C and the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C To use the alarm function the check box must not have a check mark set in it If it does the screen switching function is selected NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C To display the specified screen by the operation of an alarm list history ele ment set a check mark in the check box Clear the check mark in the check box in order not to display the specified screen Screen No The message area displayed in the alarm list history element is a touch switch and pressing the touch switch that is in the selected state displays the specified Screen 291 Bit Memory Table Section 7 4 NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C Specify the screen No of the screen to which the screen should switch by the operation of the alarm list history Specify 0 if you do not switch the screen NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Specify the screen No of the screen to be displayed if a check mark is set for Switch Screen The setting for this item is not valid unless a check mark is set for Switch Screen String Table Entry Specify the character string memory table entry string table number where the character string that is displayed as a message is
234. No 9001 No 9002 The history is displayed in either the order of occurrence or order of frequency To sound a buzzer at the occurrence of an error Tools PT Configuration Set On Error for the buzzer setting 427 Quick Reference To upload download the screen data without modifying the contents Operation Use the NT Transfer Utility supplied with the Support Tool on CD ROM The screen data should be saved in mmi format Section 10 1 Refer to Appendix C To display calculated numeric value 428 Tool Mathematical Table Define formulas that are used for calculations on PT Only for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above SECTION 11 Data Communications with a PT This section describes the procedure for sending the created and edited screen data to a PT to register them in the PT and also the procedure for reading the data registered in the PT 11 1 Preparation for Data Communications with a PT and Data Communication Procedure 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 1 1 Connection to PT 11 1 2 Available Data Communication Methods by PT Models 11 1 3 Data Communication Procedure Communication Setting at the Support Tool 0 eee eee eee eee Sending Downloading the Data Receiving Uploading Data Receiving Uploading the History Record Set
235. No No No No No No o o o o o o o o IO I O I MAN IO String Mrrory Table Automat io Manuel Step Reset Line 1 Error Line 2 Error 12 1 9 Validation Report Nun disp 1 Nundisp 2 Trd eraph 1 Trd eraph 2 Bar graph 1 Bar graph 2 Num input 1 Nun input 2 Thurboheel data 1 date 2 The results of an error check on the setting contents are printed or displayed The contents to be printed or displayed are the same as in the error display dialog box Error List 1 1 Stenderd Screen Screen iz erpty 2 App3 E Control Ares not speci fied 12 1 10 Mathematical Report 98 12 25 9 56 1 downloading mmy rot be possible The setting of mathematical table is printed or displayed Mathematical Table Report Mathematical Tabls onw Mathematical Table Ho Iesrriptiomn Hidd 0001 Hog 000002 000002 5 100006 AND D dggg T 22 Z NOOR 050007 HOR N S 8 55 11 100007 NH l 3 56 0005 A ll 00000 AND 1000007 22 Nook nag uL Anong D 450 12 30 5535 05 PH Printing Reports Section 12 2 12 1 11 Recipe Report The setting of Recipe table is printed or displayed Recipe Table Report Recipe Table No Name Comment No of Records No of Params Bytes Record Occupied Byte
236. Objects Touch Switch Input Key Window Key screen help menu etc board using a touch switch Create a touch switch for which the window display function is set 2 Screen gt New Create the window keyboard screen to be displayed Note For a keyboard the data registered to the symbol manager can be used Creation is also possible using Touch Switch Function Input Key Control Screen Screen Keyboard Screen 412 Quick Reference Screen display To display multiple screens in one screen Section 10 1 Operation Screen New Parent Set the child screens then specify the parent screen on which to overlap them Note With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C if a parent screen is created it is automatically set for overlapping screens since continuous screens are not supported Screen No 10 PT ABC Screen No 1 gt ABCDEF Screen No 11 DEF Refer to To move a window using a touch switch Only for NT21 and for NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V1 and above 1 Screen gt New Create a window keyboard screen 2 Objects Touch Switch Register Window Move touch switch on a screen created in 1 Window Screen A Screen Center point of the window keyboard screen goes to the position touched next
237. P Windows Vista or Windows 7 log in with a user ID in the administrators group 2 Setthe Support Tool CD ROM in the CD ROM drive The setup program au tomatically starts Follow step 6 onward If the setup program does not start automatically execute the setup program according to the steps shown be low 31 Installing the Support Tool Section 2 2 Reference You can execute the setup program by double clicking Setup exe in the Support Tool system disk by displaying Windows Explorer In this case steps 3 4 and 5 below can be skipped 3 Click on the Start button of Windows and select Run A Documents Settings Search Help and Support 4 Input d FD_Version Disk1 Setup exe in the input field in the displayed window Note that drive designation must agree with the name of the drive where you set the CD ROM If you set the CD ROM in drive E input e FD Version Disk1 Setup exe the name of a program Folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it For you Open D SETUP v 5 Click on The installation is started 6 When the setup screen of the Support Tool is displayed click the fi Button The screen to prompt you to input User Information Name and Company is displayed 32 Installing the Support Tool Section 2 2 7 Input your name and company In the initial state the name and company that are registered for the computer are
238. PC PLC 7 1 Common Operation 2 025 sse eR e ye e Ede Y IR E REY Vie yas 268 7 1 1 Reference Operation 0 eee nn 268 7 1 2 Search Operation Ayoo ee ie ere eee ue ep E eren 269 7 1 3 Batch Address Change Operation 272 71 4 Operation enc es Hee ge FEE RE PE E E 274 7 1 5 Copy Increment Setting Operation 276 7 1 6 Table Display Operation by Specifying the Table Entry Number 277 722 Numeral Memory Table e use pie pe QU NE en ERN 277 7 2 1 Operation Procedure sosise eee en 278 7 2 2 Related Elements n ada taa e ER Re cec Rn 278 7 2 3 Description of Numeral Memory Table Fields 279 7 3 Character String Memory Table String Table 283 7 3 1 Operation Procedure arsan es nro 283 7 3 2 Related Elements issu ee ove eles ee ea a rta ED 284 7 3 3 Description of Character String Memory Table String Table Fields 284 7 3 4 Inserting Mark Data into a Character String 286 7 3 5 Inserting Image Data into a Character String 287 7 3 6 Inserting Library Data into a Character String 288 7 4 BitMemory Table MEER ebb eS be ure tace b oet AD 288 7 4 1 Operation Procedure
239. PLC 1 The status of a lamp is changed according to the allocated PC PLC bit Selection using the menu bar Objects Lamp Standard Selection using the drawing toolbar Lamp ON color OFF color Property setting 194 General Position Indicates the display position of a standard lamp The reference point is at the upper left corner of the standard lamp Size Indicates the size of a standard lamp Frame Specify whether or not a frame is displayed for a standard lamp Shape Displays shapes of a standard lamp Selectable shapes vary according to the PT model Rectangle Circle Polygon Sector Lamps Section 6 5 Color Frame Specify the color of a lamp frame if Frame is selected Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow ON Specify the display color of a standard lamp when the PC PLC bit is ON Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow OFF Specify the display color of a standard lamp when the PC PLC bit is OFF Can only be set for PTs with color display Transparent white black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Light Functions Address PC PLC Bit Address Specify the bit at the PC PLC that drives a standard lamp ON OFF Comment Specify the comment of the PC PLC bit that drives a standard lamp ON OFF Lamp Attrib
240. Rate Specify the meter width of an analogue meter in format re garding the radius as 10096 10 to 100 by 196 231 Graphs Section 6 9 Scale Display Scale Specify whether or not a scale is displayed for an analogue me ter Distance Specify the scale position in format regarding the radius as 10096 0 to 150 by 1 Scale Length Specify the scale length in format regarding the radius as 100 10 to 110 by 1 No of Division Specify the number of the division that the scale should be di vided in the range from 0 to 100 1 to 20 Scale Color Specify the scale color of an analogue meter Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Color Foreground Specify the color for displaying the present value Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the background color of the circumscribed rectangle of an analogue meter Can only be set for PTs with color display Transparent white black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Range Specify the color of analogue meter displayed for a positive value Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Range Specify the color of analogue meter displayed for a negative value Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow
241. Reading the Date and Time Section 11 6 To set the time at a PT set Hour Minute and Second here and execute sending downloading Click the Set button to download it to the PT To read the time data of a PT execute receiving uploading and the result is displayed here Click the Get button to upload it from the PT At first the same contents as displayed at Current Date amp Time are dis played Set Used to download the date and time data set at Date and Time to a PT to set them Get Used to upload the date and time data in a PT and display them at Date and Time To set the date and time at a PT set the data at Date and Time and click on Set To read the date and time of a PT click on cet s Data transmission starts when sj or amp is clicked Place the PT in the Transmit mode so that communications between the Support Tool and the PT are enabled If the PT is not in the Transmit mode a timeout error occurs in about 10 se conds at the Support Tool In this case set the PT in the Transmit mode and click on F in the error message dialog box In the case of receiving uploading the date and time data that have been read from the PT are displayed at Date and Time 441 SECTION 12 Making Reports The Support Tool provides a function for displaying various kinds of data such as screen data and memory table use status in the form of a list and printing them 1251
242. Reference In the case that the font size for Display Properties of Control Panel is set to large font it may be printed while part of mark list is being chipped off When it occurs please select Start Settings Control Panel then open the Display Proper ties and set the font size in Setting to small font and perform the mark list printing displaying 12 1 6 Screen Image The screen image and the setting contents of a screen are printed or displayed to print the screen image add Screen Image to the simultaneously printed items With the default status check mark is set You can select whether or not to inverse screen image for printing It is also possible to select whether or not to include screen grid or dotted line frame for string display etc for printing P461 448 Report Types Section 12 1 Reference It is possible to save each screen image to a bit map file In this case open the Screen to be saved and select Screen Copy to Image The saved screen image can be edited using the application software such as Paint Screen No 1 Standard Screen Screen Comment Menu Screen Fixed Display Rectangle Square Start Pos End Pos FrGndColor BkGnd Colour Attibute 10 10 204 59 White Transparent Standard Fixed Display Text Mark Position Font _ Scale Smoothing Attribute FrGnd Colour BkGnd Colour Description 20 18 Standard 22 Yes Standard White Transparent Menu Screen
243. SS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR vii Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient
244. Save As or Save All If there is a folder that has not been saved the file name specifying window is displayed regardless of the save method you chose If this window opens speci fy the file name to save the folder Please note that the file name specifying win dow does not show the objective folder name which means that the objective 258 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Section 6 10 folder for saving cannot be distinguished if you select Save All when there are several unsaved folders It is advisable to save a folder that has not been saved by assigning a file name beforehand ILES Edit Help Overwrites the file where the symbol data was originally stored with the symbol data in the specified folder Saves the symbol data of the specified folder to the file of the specified file name Cts Overwrites the individual original files with the symbol data that was open Reference Before executing Save or Save As click the object folder Copying deleting the registered symbol Registered symbols can be moved or copied to another folder or deleted To move copy or delete a registered symbol select Edit in the menu bar then select the required function Cut Copy Paste Delete Moves the specified symbol to the clip board Help The specified symbol is deleted from the source folder Copies the specified symbol to the clip board The specified symbol
245. Section 7 1 Operation procedure Clear Operation procedure Cut Operation procedure Copy Operation procedure Paste Copy to Next Executes the copy to next operation How this function is executed differs according to the table type as shown below Table Type Increment Item Initial Value PC PLC Address Numeral memory table Addition processing Addition processing Character string memory table String table Cannot be specified Addition processing Bit memory table Cannot be specified Addition processing Extended I O input table Cannot be specified Extended I O output table Cannot be specified The clear function clears the data at the specified address of a table Since the data is not stored in the clipboard the data deleted by the clear function cannot be restored by the paste function 1 Click on the table entry number of the data to be cleared 2 Click on edit or right click the table entry number 3 Select Clear The cut function cuts the data at the specified address of a table and stores it in the clip board The data deleted by the cut function can be used for pasting 1 Click on the table entry number of the data to be cut 2 Click on Edit or right click the table entry number 3 Select Cut The copy function copies the data at the specified address of a table to the clip board The data copied by
246. Set the area and the address of the first word from which to read the clock data A Clock Data Area will be defined consisting of 4 words starting at the specified address Comments Set a comment for the address used to define the Clock Data Area Up to 16 character can be input PLC Address Dialog Box This dialog box is set in the same way as the one for the PT configuration dialog box 3 3 2 Reading the Existing Screen Data Application File To read the screen data that is saved in a file select File gt Open from the main window menu 54 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 The dialog box for the applicable folder file name and files of type exist appears to specify them Open BEI Lookin 3 Screen e zz BDOsLINEC M NTR onw jt 620download onw iae B20ITC LINE onw File name 600sLINEC MONTR onw Files of type NrsT Application onw Cancel After specifying the folder file name and file type click on the Open button The application manager of the read out screen data is displayed With NT series Support Tool for Windows following screen data files can be han dled onw mmi For details refer to File Types in page 56 Reference Recent used files will be shown at the bottom of File menu Recent four files can be opened from this command NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 7 can read the screen data that is created
247. Short cut key Ctrl Right Arrow Center in a Column E Short cut key Ctrl F9 Section 6 1 Center in a Row gH Short cut key Ctrl Shift F9 These functions can align the elements to the extremely edge in the selected ele ments range or to the vertical horizontal center of all the selected objects Align Top Align Bottom Align Left Align Right t l Align Left CON WW Align w Align Ve Top Bottom l S Align Right Eo 7 LJ A icm oF VE z Center ina amp Row Center in a Column Nar e However if a touch switch including elements such as thumbwheels alarm lists histories that contain touch switches within themselves is included in the selected elements the touch switch will take precedence for alignment and the other elements will be aligned to the touch switch as follows Example Align Bottom Align Right Base line for Align Bottom Base line for Align Right Reference Alignment function can be used also in the Edit Object mode By using this function in this mode position of the lamp touch switch label or image library 117 Section 6 1 for image library lamp ON OFF status can be aligned easily within the element If alignment function was used in Edit Object mode only the selecte
248. T11 Table Entry Specify the number of the character string memory table entry string table to be referred to If Indirect Reference is not selected the contents of this char acter string memory table entry string table are dis played If Indirect Reference is selected the con tents of this numeral memory table entry are treated as the reference table entry number and the contents of the referenced character string memory table entry string table are displayed Length Specify the number of characters to be displayed P Displays the list of numeral memory table entries or character string memory table entries String Table In indirect designation the list of numeral memory table entries is displayed and in direct designation the list of character string memory table entries String Table is dis played Guidance With a character string display element the memory table designation meth od can be selected as direct designation or indirect designation 207 Character String Display Section 6 7 Example Specifying memory table address 2 Direct designation Indirect designation Character string Numeral Character string memory table memory table memory table String table String table 1 Display 1 1 Display 2 TOOL _ TOOL 2 5 2 TOOL 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 TOOL 208 Reference The contents of the specified Th
249. T20S and NT600S Data receiving starts immediately NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C The dialog box is displayed where the information to be received is specified Only the information for which a check mark is set is received Data receiving starts when is clicked Place the PT in the Transmit mode so that the data can be transmitted to the Support Tool If the PT is not in the Transmit mode a timeout error occurs in about 10 se conds at the Support Tool In this case set the PT in the Transmit mode and click on Ff in the error message dialog box While the data is sent from the PT the progress of data transmission is indi cated by a bar graph To abort the operation click on Cancel Receiving Uploading the History Record Section 11 5 11 5 Receiving Uploading the History Record Reference Operation procedure It is possible to receive upload the display history record data and the alarm his tory record data recorded in a PT at the Support Tool to save them in a file The type of history record data that can be received is indicated in the table be low Screen Display Alarm History History Record Data Record Data PT Model NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S x NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C NT625C NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C O The received history record data is saved in a desired folder by assigning a file name The extension of the file name
250. T30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C the only difference in decimal hexadecimal display of a numeric value is whether or not F at the most 204 Numeral Display Section 6 6 babe significant digit is treated as a sign or a numeral With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C however the stored numeric value is converted for dis play according to the decimal hexadecimal designation For Decimal the number of digits entered in decimal fraction part is specified Since integers are stored in the numeral memory table entry a decimal point is appended according to this setting when a numeral is displayed Numeral memory table If setting for Decimal is 2 1284 12 34 amp o If Display Sign is selected a blank is displayed for a positive value and is displayed for a negative value If a negative value is displayed with Display Sign deselected it is displayed as an absolute value For Format number of numeral digits integer part decimal fraction part set a sufficient value according to the contents of the numeral memory table entry The allowable display range for numeric values is shown below Display Method NT20 NT11S NT11 NT20S NT600S NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Hexadecimal 00000000 to FFFFFFFFH 00000000 to 7FFFFFFFH Decimal signed 9999999 to 9999999 21474836468
251. T620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 It NT600S NT620S ems Ver 5 Ver 4 Function Cursor Move Function Screen Print Function Window Move PC PLC Bit Ad dress Shape Standard Shape Shadow Shape 3 Dimen sion Shape Rectan gle Shape Circle Shape Polygon Shape Sector Frame Color Frame Show ON State Lamp At tribute Color ON Color OFF Max No of Char acters Label Font Type Label Scale Label Smooth ing 1 Can be used only for NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with VO and above 530 Tables of Functions of PT Models Items NT600S Ver 5 NT620S Ver 4 NT620C NT625C Ver 4 Appendix E NT631C Label Attribute Label Color ON Label Color OFF Label Color Back ground Label Insert Mark Label Insert Image Interlock Multiline Label Static La bel Type Numeral String Display Label Type Standard Pen Reco Drawing Width Sampling Cycle Table Entry 100 Table Entry 10096 Value 096 Table Entry 096 Val ue 100 Table Entry 10096 Value 3 Available only V2 and later
252. T631 NT631C screen data the screen data should be converted to the data for system program Ver 3 1 beforehand Applicable PT Models Note Reference The system installer is used to install the system program in the following PT mod els NT11S NT11 NT21 NT30 NT30C NT31 NT31C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C For the individual PC PLC models always install the system program of the specific PT model It is not permissible to install the system program of another PT model The Support Tool is provided with the system programs of the following PT models NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V2 system program Ver 3 1 NT11S NT11 NT21 NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C The system program must be installed with the system installer when installing the Support Tool at your personal computer For details of installation at the personal computer refer to Section 2 Setting Up the Support Tool These system programs can be transmitted to a PT using the system installer supplied with the Support Tool Ver 4 1 Starting and Exiting the System Installer The system installer is started by pressing the Windows start button then selecting Programs Omron Ntst4 8 NT series System Installer as shown below 487 System Installer Operation Appendix B Existing the system installer 488 On Windows 2000 XP Vista or 7 run the Support Tool as a user with administrator rights Example
253. The New Library Entry dialog box is displayed 3 Set the code size colors compression comment of the library data to be newly created then click the Button EXE Connect Window Library Table Table mage Editor Code Size Comments Mark Editor Import I O Comments Validate 12 PT Configuration Comments Coda Find Next Search Direction C Up Down Comments Carel Hep Delete Close Open Setting for New Library Entry dialog box Code Specify the code to which the new library data is regis tered 339 Library Editor Section 8 2 When the dialog box is opened the smallest unused code is set Search Direction Unregistered code can be searched using the Eind Next Button In the Search Direction specify Up to the smaller code or Down to the larger code to designate the direc tion to which search operation is executed Comments Specify the comment for the library data to be created Find Next Searches the unused code Specify the search direction in the Search Direction Displaying library editor 1 Tools menu bar Library Editor The library table is displayed 2 Select the code in the library table and click the Open Button or double click the mouse on the objective code line When two or more codes are selected edit screens editors of all the se lected codes can be opened coll
254. Translation Support Utility Appendix D Lmp Lamp Rec Record in Recipe Entry Param Parameter in Recipe Entry Translation Editor Window You can view the Translation Editor Window in the lower part of the Application Window This is where the translated text can be input When the source text in the source language column in the translation table is selected both panes will be disabled Source text of the Se This is sample Source Text lected label or string Input translated label or string x Copy Sic Next Previous Tent 1 1 1 1 Counter Displays remaining number of characters that can be entered for the selected cell from the selection table It will display O if the current selected cell is on the Source Language column In addition if the length exceeds the limit the counter will display a negative value in the red color Navigate to previous item in selected column Wrap around will be performed in case it reaches the top of the row Navigate to next item in selected column Wrap around will be performed in case it reaches the end of the row Copy source text into the editor Accept changes Enabled only when contents are changed Status Bar The status bar which you can find at the bottom of the translation window is di vided into four panes Importing 35 Touch Switch 1 48 German The progress is the display op Type Category of the Current line Language of eration statu
255. W MENU 8 80 X56 SW MEMO Preview B ColoB0 X56 SW PRINT B Colo80 X56 SW B Colo40 X96 Toggle OFF Edit Deletes cuts copies or pastes the image data of the selected code refer to pages 325 to 327 It is possible to select two or more codes and delete them collectively Goto Code Code number can be specified and the cursor moves to the code The operation method is same as the Goto Entry of a memory table refer to 7 1 6 Table Display Operation by Spec ifying the Table Entry Number Preview Switches the preview window ON and OFF refer to page 325 Open Displays the editing screen image editor of the selected code P331 When two or more codes are selected edit screens of all the selected codes can be opened oollectively New Registers the new image code to the image table refer to page 327 Only the registered image codes are listed on the image table Press this button when you are going to create new image data Image Editor Section 8 1 Delete Deletes the image data of the selected code When two or more codes are selected they can be deleted collectively Close Closes the image table dialog Help Displays Help about the image table dialog box Specifying a code To specify a code for operations click on the objective line image code To specify the continuous codes collecti
256. Windows XP A Activate Windows wo Windows Catalog Windows Update f Accessories I Games 2 Documents OMRON CB NT Transfer Utility Igi Startup Internet Explorer Search MSN Explorer 9 Outlook Express a Translation Support Utility s gt Remote Assistance GA Uninstall NT Transfer Utility Run e Windows Media Player E Uninstall NTST E 8 Windows Messenger Uninstall Translation Support Utility Programs Settings Help and Support Log Off HMI Turn Off Computer uu NT Series System Installer Ver 2 00 Download System Help Drive c ex Program Files BT Model ExXOmron NT31C V3 2j xi Com Port System Program COMI System File s File Name __ Size__ System ProgramName wr You can exit the system installer by using any of the following operations e Select Download System Exit Click on the x button in the upper right section of the main window Double click on the system installer icon in the upper left section of the main window Click on the system installer icon in the upper left section of the main window then select Close in the control menu box Press the F4 key while holding down the Alt key When you exit the system installer the Windows screen is displayed System Installer Operation Appendix B Functions of the Main Window The functions provided by the main window of the s
257. Yes No Interlock Flag will as sume FALSE No Interlock Flag will be set to FALSE and ig nored Yes Yes No conversion required This feature is used by Touch Switch Thumbwheel Switch String Input and Nu meral Input 6 2 Fixed Display Reference 6 2 1 Polyline Operation procedure Fixed display means graphic data that does not have the data communication function with a PC and a memory table Set only general properties Rotation and other processing are not possible for the fixed display For image data rotation and inverse are possible during creation of the image data A straight line is drawn Polylines cannot be used with NT11S NT11 por 1 A continuous line is drawn and changed into a required shape Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display Polyline Selection using the drawing toolbar gt Reference To draw continuous polyline press the Shift key when the drag operation is fin 138 ished Dragging this end point creates a continuous polyline Section 6 2 Fixed Display Terminology Property setting Guidance General Line Style Specify the type of line Solid line dotted line alternate short and long lines alternate two short and long lines Attribute Standard Flash Flash can be set only for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Color Foreground Specify the line color Can only be set for PTs with colo
258. a is deleted from the symbol manager Copy Copies the specified symbol data to the clip board The data remains in the symbol manager Paste Pastes the symbol data stored in the clip board by cut or paste to the active screen Delete Deletes the specified symbol data from the symbol manag er The data is not stored in the clip board Choose Icon Changes the icon design of the symbol data Change Label Changes a folder or symbol name View Status Bar Specifies whether or not the status bar which displays menu item functions etc is displayed un Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Section 6 10 der the window In the menu if there is a check mark to the left of Status Bar the status bar is displayed Help Contents Displays the help information Search for Help on Enables you to display help information on the input word About Symbol Manager Displays information such as the ver sion of the symbol manager Screen Operation anager S File Edit Help Seen Symbols SD High H 0 3D rd 6200 3D Small rd 6200 ABC KeyBoard 6200 Shadow KeyBoard 6200 Shadow Small KeyBoard 6205 Double click on the folder or symbol name and the folder opens to display the list of registered symbol data Double clicking on the folder or symbol name while the list of the registered symbol data is displayed causes the folder to close
259. a is not None Result This button will be used to specify the result This button will be enabled when the selected formula is not None The following choices are available for result loca tion PLC word address Numeral table entry Operand buttons This buttons will be used to specify operands Operand buttons will be enabled according selection of Formula The following choices are available for oper ands Constant value integer only Numeral table entry Direct PLC Address Operators These combo boxes will provide a list of available operators Operator combo boxes will be enabled according selection of Formula Following choices of types of operators will be available 311 Mathematical Table Section 7 9 Numerical Operator Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division result will have the quotient only and Modulo Boolean Operator AND OR amp XOR Bitwise Operator amp bitwise AND bitwise OR and bitwise XOR Comparison Operator gt and 7 9 6 Description of Edit Operand Fields This dialog box will be obtained by clicking of the enable Operand buttons This will be used to specify the operand Operand Type This combo box will specify the type of operand Default is None and OK button will remain disabled unless some other selection is made The following choices are available for the combo box PLC Address Edit Operand x Operand
260. able Specifications 557 558 Control code input 294 Control Menu Box 40 Control Notify Area 51 Copy Increment 276 Copy Increment Setting Operation 276 Correcting colors 467 Correcting the PC PLC addresses On data conversion be tween PT models 468 Correction of alarm list history touch switches 476 Correction of graphic display attributes 475 Correction of image codes 474 571 Index Correction of library codes 474 Correction of smoothing processing for marks 476 Correction of touch switch position and size 477 Correction related the number of digits for numeral display 482 Correction related the number of digits for numeral input 480 Correction related the reference memory tables for numeral input 481 Correction related to a touch switch for which a pop up key board function is set 478 Correction related to analogue meter 482 Correction related to bit memory table 473 Correction related to contents of numeral memory table 473 Correction related to continuous screens 469 Correction related to control touch switch of trend graph 482 Correction related to display range of window keyboard screens 470 Correction related to extended I O input output table 473 Correction related to extended screens 471 Correction related to history screens 472 Correction related to image library codes in character strings 475 Correction related to keyboard screens 470 Correction related to number of w
261. ach record of this recipe entry PLC Address Inputs the starting PLC address for this recipe entry Bit addresses cannot be specified Set Sets the starting PLC address via an address composition dialog 1 0 Comments Inputs comments for the starting PLC address By default the current comment is shown A character string of up to 16 characters can accept 316 Recipe Table Section 7 10 7 10 3 Record Setting Table Start amp ddress 100020 No Record Lock Cheese Water 7 Eun 2 a 2 Hawaiian 3 5 8 3 Vegetarian D 6l 4 3 GoTo Ent Import Export Reset Width Close Search Help This Record Setting Table dialog box permits you to specify the settings for all records of a recipe entry in the recipe table Description of Record Setting Table Controls Start Address Displays the starting PLC address No Displays the record number Record Specifies the name for the record entry A string of up to 12 characters can be used and edited Parameter Title Displays the parameter name i e Param1 and Param2 Default value is Pa ramX where X is a number Up to 8 characters can be used and edited with the column width depending on the parameter values Parameter Displays the numerical data values for each record You can edit data values The Initial value is O Lock Sets the Record as read only
262. acing the mouse cursor at the position where you want to create the specified element The elements shown below can be dragged to change the size of the ele ments instead of clicking the mouse when the element is positioned Circle Arc Sector Polyline Polygon Rectangle Touch switch Standard lamp Bar graph Analogue meter Broken line graph Trend graph After placing the element by clicking or dragging the dialog box for setting the property of the element is automatically displayed The procedure to open the property setting dialog box is omitted In the displayed dialog box set the property of the element Change the size and the shape as required The selection of an element the object to be created is canceled on completion of the drawing of a graphic To draw graphics with the same element continuously you can maintain the ele ment s selected status by pressing the Shift key when releasing the left mouse button after the clicking or dragging The dialog will be displayed each time the element is created even when the Shift key is being pressed to draw the same element continuously In case of Polyline however the dialog will be displayed only for the last element that was created immediately after the Shift key is released 6 1 2 Pop up Edit Menu The Support Tool provides pop up menus where functions used for editing are collected The pop up edit menu is displayed by clicking the right button of the mouse I
263. acter is not found in the Target keycode 063 is chosen How to convert Only for the NT21 and the NT31 631 series with V1 and above The way to convert the Keycode will be as follows 1 Go Tools PT Configuration 2 Change the Font Type 3 Press OK Button Commant Conversion Rule from 1S08859 1 to CP437 Mapping tables for the conversion This conversion will be performed when you try to make the former model screen data such as NT11S NT11 NT20S N30 30C NT600S NT620S 620C NT31 NT631 series System program ver 1 0 by using European Key board 561 Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule Appendix N Also this conversion will take place if you are selecting CP437 in NT31 631 series with V1 and above Note If you have Hardware NT31 631 below V1 and version up the system program of NT31 631 series to V2 system program which is version 3 treat it as NT31 631 series hardware with V2 om LL 9 o0 Windows ISO8859 1 MS DOS CP437 Windows ISO8859 1 MS DOS CP437 Space Space n 128 063 146 039 Space Space P 129 063 147 034 Space Space r1 130 044 148 034 Space f Space 131 159 149 249 132 034 150 045 07 Space Space H 133 063 151 196 134 063 152 126 Space 153 063 Space 5 154 115 Space gt 155 062 Space 2 156 063 Space 157 063 Space 2 158 063
264. ad 82 System Memory 435 438 T Table 15 70 89 435 Table Report 450 Text 147 The relationships between elements and memory tables 136 Thumbwheel Switch 190 Thumbwheel switch 173 Tile 76 Tiling 149 Title 81 Touch Switch 211 Trend Graph 242 Type 231 Types of Screens 18 Types of windows 97 U Ungroup 118 Uninstall 36 unInstallShield 36 Upload PT NT series Support Tool 438 V Validate 72 Validation Report 450 What s This 77 Width Rate 231 2 Zero Suppression 128 Zoom 87 573 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No V061 E1 06 L Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code July 2000 Revised content Original production October 2001 Revisions to add information on the NT21 and clarify terminology January 2004 Revisions to add information on the upgraded version Ver 4 7 of the NT Support Tool for the NT11 June 2004 Page 4 CS1 changed to CS series PLC Page 25 47 and 57 Reference information added Page 27 Model numbers added Page 174 Information on inputting decimal fractions added toward bottom of page Page 219 Note added Page 302 Information added just before 7 7 4 Page 461 Information add
265. ad back the translated text in Excel format to the utility use the Import function in Translation Import Application Window The name of each part and the available functions are described below oe Translation Support Utility mul mmi File Translation Edit View Help S Sa Scor 5 WO Y Label Scr V Lmp Y Label Sera Y Txt Close Main abrir ouvrir Translation i Table Set Temperature Translation Editor window Copy Next Previous b Touch Switch 3 1 lly Main Translation Table The Main Translation Table displays the ID Source Text and Language in col umns for the particular MMI file Sorting preference for display of extracted string contents are as follows Screen number and then the object type sorted alphabetically for that particular screen when there are no header rows identifying the object type Select the cell in the target language into which the source text is to be trans lated You can move around the cells in the translation columns using the arrow keys or the tab key Serll V TSW Y Label Close Scor Label open Sork M Tx Set Temperature Short Form in the ID Column The ID of screen objects are displayed in short form Below are the short forms with their meanings Scr Screen Txt Fixed Display Text TSW Touch Switch 502
266. ails Reports dialog box the Set Margins dialog box and the Header and Footer dialog box refer to 12 2 2 Output to a Printer The operation procedure at the preview screen is shown below Page Prey Page Iwo Page Zoom In Zoom Out Close Print Specify this item to output the data to the printer Next Page Specify this item to display the next page Prev Page Specify this item to display the previous page Two Page Specify this item to display two pages on the screen Zoom In Specify this item to enlarge the displayed image After moving the Q cursor to the desired position click the mouse and the specified area is enlarged Zoom Out Cancels the enlarged display mode Close Closes the print preview screen 12 4 Outputting the Screen Image It is possible to output only the data creation screen in the bit map format The output data can be used in other applications to be displayed or printed The operation procedure for outputting the screen image is shown below 1 Display the screen to be output at the front 2 Select Screen menu bar Copy to Image The file name setting dialog box is displayed 3 Specify the folder and file name and click on Save Save As Tools Connect M sven Qi e a New Ctr HW Delete Ctrl E L NT series Support Tool Modify Parent Femme Save as type Image documents bmp Cancel Open as read only
267. al Position Center point Indicates the position of the center of a circle Size Indicates the radius of a circle Attribute Specify the display attribute Setting is not possible with NT20 NT20S and NT600S Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Color Foreground Specify the line color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Guidance Acircle element be modified in the manner shown below A circle can be modified by dragging a green mark handle 143 Fixed Display Section 6 2 6 2 5 Polygon Operation procedure Terminology Note that a circle cannot be deformed to an oval For modification in the For modification in the upper left direction upper right direction Am vd a 22 Ta For modification in the For modification in the lower left direction lower right direction e To tile a circle paste a tiling element into it 4 Circle Tiling element For details of tiling elements refer to 6 2 8 Tiling A polygon is drawn Polygons cannot be used with NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S 1 After a polygon is drawn it is modified to give the desired shape Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display Polygon Selection using the drawing toolbar Attribute point 144 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Property setting General Attribute Specify the displa
268. al Window IV Auto Arrange This Touch Switch is not attached to any data input object e If a check mark is set for Use Window Keyboard Screen in the cursor moving touch switch setting properties it is possible to display the specified window keyboard at the same time the cursor is moved This feature allows appropriate numeric keys for the input field to be displayed It is possible to create a temporary input field in addition to numeric keys With the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above all objects other than thumbwheel switch and recipe objects can be created on window Window Keyboard Displayed when the input field is touched 179 Data Input Section 6 4 Reference t is possible to create a temporary input field at the same time as numeric keys are arranged in the window keyboard A temporary input field is created using a numeral input element When a numeral input element is arranged in the window keyboard the ele ment is automatically set as a temporary input field Only one numeral input element temporary input field can be created for one window keyboard Setting processing differs as shown below depending on whether or not a tem porary input field is used When a temporary input field is used 2 Storing by pressing Temporary input fiel
269. alf height font 8 x 8 dots Double Width A numeric value is displayed in the double width font 16 x 16 dots 19 10 Half height Standard Scale Specify the character size Only 1 1 Equal and 2x1 Wide can be set for NT11S NT11 1x1 Equal A numeric value is displayed at the original size both in height and width 126 Section 6 1 Common Operation Reference 1 2 High A numeric value is displayed with doubled height and original width 2x1 Wide A number is displayed at the original height and doubled width 2x2 A numeric value is displayed with doubled height and width 3 3 A numeric value is displayed with threefold height and width 4X4 A numeric value is displayed with fourfold height and width 8x8 A numeric value is displayed with eightfold height and width not possible for NT20 NT20S o 0 10 ia 1H Li 1 1x2 2 1 2 2 3x3 4x4 With the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above numbers of 2 x 2 or larger scale are automatically displayed in 32 dot font Smoothing Smoothing processing allows jags to be smoothed when a number is displayed in an enlarged scale Selection of this item is possible for numbers of 2 x 2 or larger Smoothing cannot be selected for NT20 NT20S and NT600S since smoothing processing is always executed for numbers larger than 2 x 2 with these models 1254 1234 Without smoothing With smoothing Attribute This is an at
270. alues as shown below value for 10096 value for 0 value for 10096 DM0005 500 0 500 Bar Graph 2 Displays the value of DMOOO06 in the PC PLC in the form of a bar graph Set the 100 0 and 100 values as shown below value for 10096 value for 0 value for 10096 DMO0006 300 0 300 Menu This is a screen switching button When you touch this button the screen switches to the Menu Screen screen No 1 Set This is a screen switching button When you touch this button the screen switches to the Set Screen screen No 3 e Alarm This is a screen switching button When you touch this button the screen switches to the Alarm Screen screen No 4 354 Example Screen Configuration Section 9 1 Set Screen Set Screen Munera Ino Thunbuhee Numeral Input 1 Used to set the data at two words DM0010 and DM0011 in the PC PLC When you touch the numeral display area numeric keys are displayed pop up window allowing you to input the data Numeral Input 2 Used to set the data at two words DM0012 and DM0013 in the PC PLC When you touch the numeral display area numeric keys are displayed pop up window allowing you to input the data Thumbwheel Used to set the data at DM0014 in the PC PLC String Display Auto Man Step Reset When you touch any of the Auto Man Step and Reset buttons the fol lowing character string is displayed in the Strin
271. alve 0002005 Area 1 Alarm Detection near entry Confirm safety before restarting the line 0002006 Area 2 Alarm Detection near entry Confirm safety before restarting the line 0002007 PC PLC Network Check the PC PLC and the net Error work Menu This is a screen switching button When you touch this button the screen switches to the Menu Screen screen No 1 Monitor This is a screen switching button When you touch this button the screen switches to the Monitor Screen screen No 2 356 Operation Flow Section 9 2 Set This is a screen switching button When you touch this button the screen switches to the Set Screen screen No 3 Required environment The required hardware environment for the creation of the example screens is shown below PT model NT620C 625C Image memory 512 Kbytes Memory table capacity Numeral memory table Character string memory table String table 512 entries 256 entries 9 2 Operation Flow Create the example screens by following the steps shown below Start up the Support Tool v File New v Set PT configuration v Set memory tables v Creating the Menu Screen Create new screen screen No 1 v Set properties for screen No 1 v Create screen title v Create Monitor Screen button v Create Set Screen button v Create
272. amps and touch switches e Background of element tiling patterns Setting the color for text and numerals For text and numerals color setting is possible both for characters and back ground Foreground Specify the color of text and numerals Background Specify the color for the background of text and numerals If Transparent is specified elements arranged behind text is visible pur CDE 4 Background color Foreground color Setting the color for graphics For a graphic the foreground color can be set Foreground Specify the color of lines in a graphic and the color of the graphic itself when the attribute is set to Inverse FE Foreground color Reference Color setting is possible only for color type PT However with NT30 the NT21 and NT31 setting of white and black and trans parent is possible Setting the tiling color When tiling a graphic color designation is possible for the foreground back ground and border Foreground Specify the tiling color Background Specify the background color of tiling color visible through blank areas in the selected pattern If Transparent is specified the background becomes transparent and elements arranged be hind text and numerals are visible Border Specify the border color of tiling area Background Foreground Available ti
273. an administrator 3 Use the Program Compatibility Wizard specify the NT series Support Tool select Run this program as an administrator and then click the OK Button Reference If the Windows Aero theme is used with Windows Vista or Windows 7 the cross hair cursor that indicates positions when editing parts will be displayed in black on a black background making it very difficult to see Set a theme other than Windows Aero 39 User Interface Section 3 2 3 1 2 Exit Procedure To exit the Support Tool use any of the operations shown below e n the menu select File Exit Click the x Button at the upper right corner in the main window Double click the Support Tool icon displayed at the upper left section in the main window Click the Support Tool icon displayed at the upper left section in the main win dow then select the awa Button in the control menu box Press F4 key while pressing down the Alt key If you are going to exit the Support Tool before saving the data of the opened Screen a confirmation message is displayed After you exit the Support Tool the screen returns to the Windows screen 3 2 User Interface 3 2 1 Functions Provided in the Main Window The configuration of the Support Tool operation screen name of each parts and the available functions are described below Title bar Control Menu box n Menu bar e re A z im eja e a j
274. and both mean the same thing First of all the Language Selection list box is enabled so the user can choose from the list of languages available for Import By default all items are selected Press the Start button to initiate the whole import operation Once Start is clicked the Language list box is disabled and the Import operation starts The multi line edit boxes are populated with relevant data The status box displays the start of the import operation by displaying Importing Language At this stage you have the following options Import translation data for all the languages in the Language list box i e accept all translation data as it exists in Excel format by clicking the Import All button By doing this translation data for all languages is processed and imported During this process when all translation data for a particular language is processed im ported that language is removed from the Language list box and the status box displays Done for that language This process is repeated for all languages in the Language list box 509 Translation Support Utility Find Replace Error Warning Messages 510 Appendix D Import translation data one by one by viewing the data in the Excel Text edit box in the Import dialog above to be imported and if necessary edit the data in the Import Text edit box in the Import Dialog above and then click the Import but ton This way you can inspect and also
275. and display attributes for displaying fixed display of text and charac ter strings in a character string memory table string table in the manner shown below The following shows only the common settings for text of fixed display As an example the properties for a text display fixed display are shown below Fixed Display Text x General Description OMRON Insert Mark i 31 E X 120 jet x Standard E Scale 1x1 Equal I Smoothing Attribute Standard Y Colour Foreground Y Background Transparent Cancel Apply Help Font Type Specify the font type for displaying alohanumerics and symbols Standard A character is displayed in standard font 16 x 8 dots Half Height character is displayed in half height font 8 x 8 dots PT PT Half height Standard 124 Section 6 1 PT 1x1 Reference Scale Specify the character size Only 1 1 Equal and 2x1 Wide can be set for NT11S NT11 1x1 Equal A character is displayed the original size both in height and width 1x2 High A character is displayed with doubled height and the original width 2x1 Wide A character is displayed with the original height and doubled width 2 2 A character is displayed with doubled height and width 3x3 A character is displayed with threefold height and width 4X4 A character is displayed with fourfold height
276. and width 8x8 A character is displayed with eightfold height and width not possible for NT20 NT20S PI With the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C V1 and above characters of 2 x 2 or larger scale are automatically displayed in 32 dot high defi nition font Marks inserted into a string are always displayed in 16 x 16 dot font 32 dot font and font type ISO 8859 1 are not available on PT when system pro grams of V1 type and above were installed for NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C below V1 even though other functions will be same as V1 and above type Therefore in this case characters of 2 x 2 or larger scale are displayed in 16 dot font for PT while they are displayed in 32 dot font for Support Tool Also 1508859 1 font type can not be used for PT CP437 font type is applied Smoothing Smoothing processing allows jags to be smoothed when a character is displayed in an enlarged scale Selection of this item is possible for characters of 2 x 2 or larger and for marks 16 x 16 dots With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C smoothing is not performed for marks Smoothing cannot be selected for NT20 NT20S and NT600S since smoothing processing is always executed for characters larger than 2 x 2 with these mod els PT PT Without smoothing With smoothing Attribute This is an attribute to determine how text is displayed Attributes to be displayed here vary somewhat
277. arest multiple of 5 Since there are no problems in actual op eration correction is not necessary Screen is empty downloading may not be possible Create the data in the empty screen or de lete the empty screen Some objects exceed library size in code FA20 The objects will not be down loaded to PT hardware Reduce the size of elements exceeding the library size using the library editor or set a larger library size String Table Table Entry XXX has invalid component code It has been converted from XXXX to YYYY Delete the code from the character string and make corrections so that an equiva lent display can be obtained by displaying and grouping the character string and the fixed display image library data The associated touch switches of the alarm has been discarded and compo nent touch switches have been created Correct the position of the control touch switches as needed If a control touch Switch is not necessary cancel the check for the control touch switch in the alarm list history properties With alarm touch switches for NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631 it is not possible to change the size and label The child screen XXX containing Numer al String Input element s does not have the same key attribute as the overlapping screen In the screen properties set the same Keypad attribute both for the parent and child screens 551 Error Messages Appendix K Error
278. arts Collection Lamps and touch switches combined with image library data are registered in the Parts Collection This is a screen data file in MMI format For details refer to 3 3 7 Using Method of Parts Collection Sample Screen Data This data is provided just as sample screen data It is not created for the pur pose of actual operation on PT after downloading it to PT Symbol manager ISO symbol data For details refer to 6 10 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Op eration The system installer is an application software that sends the system program from a personal computer to PT to update the system program Updating the system program allows communication using a new method or upgrades the PT software However since the system program is specific to each PT mod el the system program that matches the PT model must be downloaded Installing the Support Tool Section 2 2 2 2 Installing the Support Tool To install the Support Tool execute the install program provided in your software package Reference following data is selectable for installation NT series Support Tool Ver 4 System Installer e Sample Collection If you select a Sample Collection data such as Parts Collection Image Library Sample Collection ISO symbol data and Sample Screen Data are installed NT Transfer Utility should be installed separately Please refer to Appendix C NT Transfer Utili
279. as a Display OFF screen it cannot be edited Extended screen Screens reserved for future extension of PT functions Screens should not be registered to the screen numbers of these reserve screens Occurrence history screen An occurrence history screen displays the numbers of screens displayed by Switch screen operations in the order of occurrence Frequency history screen A frequency history screen displays the numbers of screens displayed by Switch screen operations in the order of frequency Password screen This screen exists for the secure protection of a designated screen so that us ers can switch the screen only when the accurate password is input Menu screen Menu screen serves as a control screen to switch to a designated screen through the operation of numeric key Print Format screen If this screen is assigned printing can be done by simple operation Programming Console Screen This screen can be used to execute Programming Console functions with the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C User editing of this screen is not possible Refer to 5 12 Programming Console Screen for details Device Monitor Screen This screen can be used to execute device monitoring functions with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 or higher User editing of this screen is not possible Refer to 5 13 Device Monitor Screen for details 20 Basic Operation Flow Section 1 4 1 4 Basic Operation Flow The procedure
280. as child screens of screen No 2 Screen No 2 is regarded as a parent screen of overlapping screens Refer to 5 3 2 Overlap ping Screens Monitor Screen 1 Select Screen menu bar gt New 2 In the screen type designation dialog box select the Parent Screen and click 3 In the setting dialog box of a parent screen set the displayed items as shown below Parent Screen Screen No 2 Type Overlapping Specify 10 in the standard screen box and click on ree Specify 11 in the standard screen box and click on me Click on 50 9 3 9 Creating the Set Screen Create screen No 3 new screen as the Set Screen F Set Screen Neral 382 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 1 Select Screen menu bar gt New 2 Atthe screen selection dialog box set Standard Screen 3 Atthe new standard screen dialog box set 3 for the screen No Setting the screen properties 1 Select Screen menu bar Properties 2 Setthe screen properties as shown below for screen No 3 Attributes Screen No 3 History Title Set Screen Comment Set Screen Buzzer Load Local 1 Keyboard System Keypad Color Background Black Grid Size Custom Horizontal Spacing 5 Vertical Spacing 5 Display Grid w Snap to Grid Creating the screen title 5 Copying the screen title
281. as shown below PT Model Batch Transmission Individual Transmission NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S NT21 NT600S NT30 NT30C NT620S 430 Preparation for Data Communications with a PT and Data Communication Procedure Section 11 1 PT Model Batch Transmission Individual Transmission NT620C NT625C NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Possible x Not possible Reference The type and content of individual transmission differs between the NT20 NT20S NT600S and the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C For details refer to 11 3 Sending Downloading the Data and 11 4 Receiving Uploading Data In case of NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C screen data file that can be trans mitted is as follows depending on the version of PT hardware and the system pro gram version installed in a PT Use the method below to check the system program version of a PT For details of the operation of a PT refer to the manual of PT 1 Display the system menu on a PT 2 At the upper right position of the system menu screen its version is dis played like Ver 2 10 If you are using NT31 NT31C NT631 or it is also possible to check the PLC vendor by selecting Expansion Mode gt Version Display Type of PT NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Hardware below V 1 1 and above PT model System System System System System System System System selected a
282. ation right click the mouse Remove Node 4 Drag the added green mark to modify the shape of the graphic Example Modification of the shape of polygon 1 2 3 4 A touch switch element can display a label touch switch name 215 Touch Switches Section 6 8 To display a label set a check mark in the check box of the Label property and click on amp amp The dialog box for setting a label is displayed Set the prop erty for the label to be displayed General Description ELEM Insert Mark Position x 70 Y 40 Font Type Standard M Scale 1 1 Equa Smoothing Attribute Standard z Colour OFF Background For the procedure for setting the properties refer to 6 2 7 Text When using the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C it is possible to set different colors for the lamp ON and lamp OFF states With these models however it is not permis sible to insert image data O Comments button in the property dialog can copy the I O comment set to the PLC address as a label In case of Notify Bit function comment of notify bit In case of other function comment of lamp bit To edit the position of a label use the element edit function For details refer to page 112 1 Click on the label while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key 2 Drag the label to change the display position 3 1 E od 282
283. ation is possible only in the following cases Do not apply for other cases e When C200H I F unit is used When the NT21 NT20 NT30 NT30C NT31 NT31C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 or NT631C is used When an NT20S or NT600S that uses the direct connection ver 5 is used With conventional models up to 50 indirect designation settings can be made per screen including both numeral display and character string display For numeral display elements it is possible to select whether numeric values are displayed in decimal signed unsigned or hexadecimal Numeral memory table Display in decimal 23456 23456 Display hexadecimal 5BAO Reference With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C numerals are always stored as signed binary data When allocating numeral memory table entries to PC PLC words it is possible to select whether the data is recognized in BCD or recognized in hexadecimal using the Storage Type property According to the combination of the storage type and display method nu meric values are stored and displayed in the manner shown below PC PLC words Display 2 word allocation Numeral Recognition in BCD memory table Display in decimal 3456 23456 00005BA0 9 0002 Display in hexadecimal Recognition in hexadecimal 5BAO 5BAO 0000 With NT30 N
284. ave a link to de tailed help information are underlined click on such an item to access the detailed information The necessary information will be reached by tracking the items in this way Reference The button or F1 key is also used to display the table of contents for help information Displaying help information by searching for a keyword Help information on a specific topic can be displayed by inputting the related key word 76 Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 Operation 1 Select Help in the menu bar then select Search for Help on The topic search dialog box is displayed 2 Input a keyword When the keyword is input the corresponding help item is highlighted 3 If you find the specified help item click the Button The help information relating to the specified item is displayed Displaying help information by clicking on a screen The Support Tool provides the What s This item that allows you to get help when an item for which you need help is displayed Using this feature you can display the help information in a simple operation without tracking the table of contents or inputting a keyword Operation 1 Select Help in the menu bar then select What s This A question mark is appended to the mouse cursor Clicking the Button in the standard tool bar also displays a question mark at the mouse cursor 2 Click on the item place for which you need help The correspo
285. ay history function records the date time and frequency of screen display for screens for which the History at tribute check box is ticked The recorded display history can be checked on the occurrence history screen and the frequency history screen The event of screen display is recorded in the display history if the check box of the history attribute is ticked if it is not ticked the event is not recorded Title other than NT20 NT20S Specify the title of screens that are displayed in the display history Setting of the title is possible only when the history attribute is selected Comment Set the comment for a screen For the comment characters of up to 24 charac ters can be set Backlight Type Set if the backlight is to light continuously or flash when the screen is turned ON Light When the screen is turned ON the backlight lights Flash When the screen is turned ON the backlight flashes This attributes cannot be set for NT600S NT620S NT620C NT625C Backlight Color only for NT30 Specify the backlight color white or red Buzzer other than NT11S NT11 Specify whether or not the buzzer should sound when a screen is displayed and also the type of buzzer sound If this attribute is selected the buzzer sounds when a screen is displayed The buzzer type can be selected from the following Continuous buzzer sounds continuously Short The buzzer sounds in cycles of 0 5 second beep and 0 5 se cond stop
286. ay will be changed Support Tool has a filter function that can show only the specified object on the Screen It is possible to edit select objects while this function is executed So it will be use ful when you correct or edit complicated screen In addition it is possible to dis play the list of each object by types if this function is used with Select Object func tion For details refer to the Reference Filter function is applied to individual screen To activate this setting follow the procedure below 87 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 1 Select the object to be displayed from the combo box on the utility bar To display all the objects cancel filter function select All Standard Lamp Thumbahee Switch Numeral Input String Input Numeral Display Reference While a filter function is used you can edit only the objects being displayed e f the Select Object dialog box refer to page 109 is displayed by right clicking the object while a filter function is used only the type of object being displayed is shown in the list In this case the type name of the object will not be displayed in the Select Object dialog box and detailed information of objects is shown e f a filter function is used for a Fixed Display Full Tiling menu will be cancelled automatically since the tiled status may not be displayed correctly if the element us
287. ayed in the window title area for standard screens x Standard Screen y x Screen number y Serial number Serial numbers will be assigned in the order the windows are opened If any window presently opened is closed the serial numbers are renumbered au tomatically The Support Tool can open up to ten windows at the same time in addition to the application manager window Operation 1 Specify the screen Click on the screen or double click on the screen icon to open multi windows 2 Select New Window from Window in the menu bar An additional window opens for the screen specified in step 1 Windows can be arranged in any of the following three ways Cascade All windows are cascaded in such a way that window titles are visible All windows are displayed at the same size The order of cascading differs depending on the display position of the win dows before the cascading operation is attempted Tile All windows are arranged over the entire main window area at the same size However the sizes may differ slightly depending on the number of windows The order of tiling differs depending on the display position of windows be fore tiling operation is attempted 75 Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 Arrange Icons The application manager and creation screens shown in icon form are ar ranged in the lower left part of the main window The order in which the icons are displayed
288. be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions ix Safety Precautions Safety related Indications and Their Meanings The following precautionary indications and symbols are used in this manual to aid in the safe usage of the NT series Support Tool for Windo
289. be set to Default 479 Data Conversion Appendix A Correction related to the lamp label ON state If a lamp s label is converted between a conventional and a new model conver sion is executed in the manner shown below due to difference of label color set ting Difference New models ON state and OFF state can be set independently Background color is transparent only Conventional models Only foreground color can be set OFF ON Flash has same color Background color can be set as de sired Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a conventional model Background Any Foreground Any With a new model Background Trans parent OFF State Same This will lead to an invis ible label when the lamp is ON Select the lamp and choose Edit Edit as Foreground ON State Black Object and double click at the label Then change the label ON state color to different color Correction related to the maximum and minimum limit check function for numeral input In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model conver sion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the range of numeral that can be input Difference New models A numeric value of up to 10 digits can be input for the maximum minimum limit Conventional models
290. be stored Right hand side will display the actual function Set Invokes Set Mathematical Dialog Box Specify mathematical function using this dialog box Edit Refer to 7 1 Common Operation Goto Entry Refer to 7 1 Common Operation Move Invokes Move To dialog box Move a table entry using this dialog box Close Closes the dialog box Help Shows help information related to mathematical table 310 Mathematical Table Section 7 9 7 9 5 Description of Set Mathematical Formula Fields This dialog box is to be used to define a new edit an existing mathematical formu la Fomula x lx I x x X m Edit Formula Selected Formula 0000 DO0000 000001 000002 000003 000004 Word Size Result Operand 1 Operand 2 Operand 3 Operand 4 OK Help Formula Shows the list of available formula that can either be arithmetic boolean or bit wise operations This will list out combinations of available operands and opera tors i e type of the function Selected Formula Shows the selected mathematical formula for this entry It is updated whenever there is any change in operands or operators Word Size This is a common setting for Result and Operand It is only valid for PLC Address and constant For Numeral Table entry the word size will follow the setting in the Numeral Table This control will be enabled when the selected formul
291. ber of String Table refer ences exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of XXX by YYY Create the elements within the maximum limit The total number of touch switches ex ceeds the overlapping screen s limit of XXX by YYY Create the touch switches within the limit The total number of Trend graph frame exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of 8 by XXX Create the trend graphs within the limit The total number of Trend Graph line with Data Logging is ON exceeds the ap plication limit of 8 by YYY Create the trend graphs within the limit The total number of vertices in Broken Line Graphs exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of XXX by YYY Create the broken line graphs within the limit This screen does not support XXX It is discarded Correct the system initialization screen so that the same screen as before the con version is created using fixed display ele ments excluding image library data Touch Switch function type is not sup ported It is discarded Correct the position of the control touch switch as needed Touch switch does not have associated alarm object Select the alarm touch switch on the screen choose Draw Associate then specify the element with which the se lected touch switch is to be associated You have already started NT series Sup port Tool To import screen data by starting up two Support Tools select Import Component from the
292. ber of Table Entries is valid for the following PT models NT30 NT30C NT21 NT31 NT31C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C Buzzer Enable Specify whether or not the buzzer function is used To use the buzzer function click the check box to enter the check mark To set the buzzer function to be unused click the check box to clear the check mark To sound the buzzer only at the occurrence of an alarm specify On Error at the drop down list box If Always is selected for the buzzer function the buzzer sounds at following events Occurrence of an error at PT Reception of a command from the host Screen switching Setting of the buzzer function is valid for the following PT models NT30 NT30C NT6208S NT620C NT625C Reference With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C buzzer function settings are made by system menu operation at the PT and setting from the Support Tool is not allowed Buzzer Key Input Click the check box of Key Input to enter the check mark if you want to sound the buzzer in response to the input from a touch switch or the extended I O unit Clear the check mark if the key input sound is not to be used Printer for PT A printer can be connected to PT device for printing screen data if required You have to specify the type of printer being used by the application for the following PT models Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 NT30 NT30C NT620S NT
293. ble or numeral memory table entries Character string displa PT g display Character string memory table String table Y 1 i Screen a Touch switch copy function To set a constant fixed numeral including initial ization and clear using a touch switch Objects Touch Switch Function Copy Setting Set a constant for Code No of Copy From and a numeral memory table entry or a numeral setting input field for Copy to PT Numeral Screen memory l Constant a 123 9 Touch switch copy function To set a constant or a content of a numeral memory table entry for a numeral setting input field 1 Objects Data Input Numeral Create a numeral setting input field 2 Objects Touch Switch Function Copy Setting Set a numeral memory table entry or a constant for Copy From and a numeral setting input field for Copy To PT Screen Constant 123 Numeral setting input field Touch switch copy function Quick Reference Touch Switches To print a hard copy of the screen Operation 1 Tools PT Configuration Set the printer to be connected 2 Objects Touch Switch gt Function Print Screen Create a touch switch for which the print screen func tion is set PT Screen
294. ble Section 7 7 7 6 1 Operation Procedure An extended I O output table entry is displayed by following the operation de scribed below e Select Tools menu bar Table Extended I O Output tab Setting With an extended I O output table entry the objective of an operation is specified by clicking on the line Setting is performed by using the setting dialog box that is displayed by clicking on ES For the operation procedure for Change Address Edit gt Geto Entry refer to 7 1 Common Operation 7 6 2 Description of Extended I O Output Table Fields Numeral String Comments l Extended I O Input Extended 1 0 Output Bit Memory PLC Address vO Comment Change Address Edit gt Set Goto Entry No Extended unit output terminal number PLC Address Specify the PC PLC bit that controls the output terminal of an extended I O unit Comment Specify a comment for a PC PLC bit A comment can comprise up to 16 characters 7 7 1 Comment Table The I O comment table is an area provided in a PT to manage the comment data of all words and bits in a PC PLC that are set by the Support Tool It displays comments on PC PLC words and bits specified by numeral memory table entries character string memory table entries string table bit memory 298 I O Comment Table Section 7 7 table entries extended I O input table entri
295. ble to edit while displaying in full screen Full Screen can be performed as follows 1 Select Full Screen from View menu The current editing screen will be dis played in wide range To recover from this condition click at any place on the screen Zooms the screen to 10096 view Normal 20096 40026 or 80096 If the grid is set it will also be zoomed to the respective size It will help you to operate small elements Zoom can be performed as follows 1 Select Zoom from View menu On this menu current zoom percentage is displayed using check mark Displaying window keyboard Show Window Keyboard 5 1 4 Filter Function Local window Keyboard set for attribute of currently displayed screen can be displayed overlapping on the screen to check the actual status to be displayed on PT Local window 2 is available only with the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with 1 and above Show Window Keyboard command can be performed as follows 1 Open a property sheet of the screen and set a check mark for the window type to be displayed and specify the screen number 2 Select Show Window Keyboard from the View menu and specify the win dow keyboard type to be displayed Local 1 Keyboard or Local 2 Check mark will be set on menu next to the name of the displayed window type Each time you select window the check mark switches to the objective one and according to it window keyboard displ
296. box of the Code for OFF in General and click on Change Image In the image table specify FE20 and click on Set a check mark in the check box of the Code for ON in General and click on Change Image 10 In the image table specify FE21 and click on ok 11 Set the lamp function properties as shown below PC PLC Bit Address Comment 0000005 Image Lamp Light Address Functions 12 Adjust the display position of the image library lamp Reference With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C codes assigned to image data are from 0001 to OFFF However if NT20 30 620 compatible mode is used with the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the image code will be the same as NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C Creating Bar Graph 1 and Bar Graph 2 Creating the title 1 2 3 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Text Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the char acter string of Bar Graph 1 is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner of bar graph Set the properties as shown below Description Bar Graph 1 Position Font Type Standard Scale 1x2 High Smoothing D Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Black 377 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 4 Adjust the position of Bar Graph 1 character str
297. c value character string in a data input field Confirms inputs in a data input field cursor remains in this field Toggles plus and minus sign in a data input field Inputs a decimal point in a data input field Moves the input cursor to the data input field at the upper left area Moves the cursor to the data input field immediately above the present data input field Moves the cursor to the data input field immediately below the present data input field Move the cursor to the left data input field Move the cursor to the right data input field Moves the cursor to the previous data input field in the order Changes the continuous screens to the previous screen Moves the cursor to the next data input field in the order Changes the continuous screens to the next screen Stops Buzzer Displays the System menu After setting the items for the selected function switch screen notify bit control code input click The specified contents are displayed in the extended I O input table entry 7 6 Extended 1 0 Output Table An extended I O output table controls the output terminal of an extended I O unit according the ON OFF status of a PC PLC bit Extended I O units can be used only with NT30 and NT30C PT 0001002 4 Extended I O output table PC PLC address PC PLC External output 297 Comment Ta
298. cation manager provides following operations Opening a data creation screen Creation of new application Copying a screen Deleting a screen Displaying and setting PT configuration Displaying and setting screen properties Editing tables Saving the created data to a file Sending downloading the created data to a PT Icons used by the application manager 66 73 App 1 Name of application folder When a file name has been specified the file name specified by App 1 is used Double clicking of this icon opens a set of sub data box by screen type 13 screen Screen data box Double clicking of this icon displays the screen data boxes classified by group table Table data box Double clicking of this icon shows memory tables classified by icon 9 1 1899 2000 Standard Screen data boxes classified by screen type 1 1899 2000 Indicates a screen number Standard Indicates screen type Double clicking of this icon displays the screen icons in a group The screen number and screen type displayed here differ from PT models Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 1 Screen icon 1 Indicates a screen number Double clicking of this icon opens a data creation screen ff numeral memory table Table data icon Numeral memory table Indicates a table type Double clicking of this icon opens a memory table dialog box setting The type of table to be displayed differs depending on the PT model Wh
299. ch switch for copy setting Numeral setting Touch switch for numeral input Thumbwheel switch Alarm list Alarm history Character string display Character string setting Touch switch for character string input Character string setting Touch switch for inputting control code Character string setting Touch switch for copy setting Standard lamp 4 Image lamp Touch switch for notifying input 1 Numeral setting and character string setting are used in combination with a touch switch 2 A standard lamp and an image lamp reads the specified PC PLC bit direct ly without using a memory table 8 Atouch switch for notifying input directly drives the specified PC PLC bit ON OFF without using a memory table 4 When a Numeral Display or a String Display is specified as the label type the specified memory table will be read Only for NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above 6 1 12 Interlock By setting the Interlock flag the interlock facility will be activated for touch switch thumbwheel numeral input string input and recipe When interlock is set the cor 136 Section 6 1 Operation procedure Property setting Conversion responding object will be enabled disabled according to the interlock bit when the PLC Address set on the Interlock address is ON the touch switch thumb
300. check box in the function setting After that select the message and the image library code to be displayed from the character string memory table string table and the image library table Objects Alarm History Create the alarm history PT Character string memory table Bit memory string table Screen PC PLC Alarm table Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 1 Alarm his 415 Quick Reference 416 To display numeral data Operation Objects Numeral Display Create a numeral display element Section 10 1 Refer to 6 6 Objects Lamp or Touch Switch Create a lamp or a touch switch for which Numeral Display is set as the label type Only for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above 6 5 6 8 To display a bar graph Objects Graph Bar Graph Create a bar graph To display an analogue meter Objects Graph Analogue Meter Create an analogue meter To display a trend graph Objects Graph Trend Graph Create a trend graph To display a broken line graph Objects Graph Broken line Graph Create a broken line graph To display character string data Objects String Display Create a character string display element 6 7 Objects Lamp or Touch Switch Create
301. circle circle graph Also scale display is available 230 Graphs Section 6 9 Operation Procedure Terminology Selection using the menu bar Objects Graph Analogue Meter Selection using the drawing toolbar S Foreground Color Property setting General Position Indicates the display position of an analogue meter The reference point is at the upper left corner of the analogue me ter It changes depending on the other settings Size Center Point Indicates the center point of an arc or a circle of the analogue me ter It is not affected by other settings Radius Indicates the meter radius of an analogue meter It is not affected by other settings Frame Specify whether or not a frame is displayed for a meter of an analogue meter When the frame display is ON select the frame color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Display Sign Specify whether or not a display area for negative value is dis played Direction Specify the positive direction of an analogue meter Clockwise Anti Clockwise Meter Shape Shape Specify the shape of an analogue meter Quarter Semi Circle Circle Direction Specify the display direction of an analogue meter Right 2 Left Up T Down 1 Type Specify the display type of an analogue meter Needle Fill Width
302. cter string Character string memory table Words allocated in PC PLC String table If setting is 2 words ABCDEFG gt CD is not sent If setting is 4 words P E The character string is sent in units of 2 HIJKLMN gt HI characters beginning with the leftmost character in the character string and EL JK allocated to words from lower word to higher word gt LM 00 hexadecimal is entered in blank PLC Address Specify the PC PLC address start address of the area where character string memory table entries string table are allocated Comment Specify a comment for a PC PLC word A comment can comprise up to 16 characters Ref Displays whether the table entry with the specified number is already used or not Yes Already used as an element No Not used If the indication is Yes you can check where the table entry in question is used by clicking Reference Note that this operation is not possible when setting a character string memory table entry string table from the property dialog box of an element For details of Reference refer to 7 1 1 Reference Operation 7 3 4 Inserting Mark Data into a Character String 286 To insert mark data into an initial value follow the steps described below 1 After specifying the Value field move the cursor to the
303. cts Fixed Display Arc Selection using the drawing toolbar Bl perse Property setting 140 General Position Center point Indicates the position of the center of an arc Start point Indicates the position of the start point of an arc Fixed Display Section 6 2 End point Indicates the position of the end point of an arc An arc is drawn anti clockwise from the start point to the end point Size Indicates the radius of an arc Attribute Specify the display attribute Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Color Foreground Specify the line color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Guidance is defined by the center point the start point and the end point The line type is specified using line style attribute Center point Indicates the position of the center of an arc End point Indicates the position of the end point of an arc The end point can be dragged to the desired position Start point Indicates the position of the start point of an arc When the start point is dragged the start point position and arc radius are changed 6 2 3 Rectangle A rectangle is drawn Rectangles cannot be used with NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S 1 A rectangle is drawn The length of a vertical and horizontal sides can be changed Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Obje
304. cts Fixed Display gt Rectangle Selection using the drawing toolbar Bl 141 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Terminology Property setting General Position Indicates the display position of a rectangle Size Indicates the size of a rectangle Attribute Specify the display attribute Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Color Foreground Specify the line color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Guidance e A rectangle element can be modified in the manner shown below A rectangle can be modified by dragging a green mark handle RUM in the in the END in the upper RUM direction direction upper END direction Modified in the n Modified in the left direction 1 right direction E UNI in the T in the EC in the UNI left direction T direction lower EC direction To tile a rectangle paste a tiling element into it Rectangle Tiling element For details of tiling elements refer to 6 2 8 Tiling 6 2 4 Circle A circle is drawn 142 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Circles can be used with all models except for NT11S NT11 1 Acircle is drawn The radius of a circle can be changed Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display Circle Selection using the drawing toolbar e Terminology Center point Property setting Gener
305. current file or not Refer to the message below Translation Support Utility xc Application has changes do you want to update the database wo 7 File save error when saving translated target MMI files Refer to the follow ing image for a sample Translation Support Utility x The following files could not be saved Languages output Filename 4 German 1 ohi_German mmi French C 4pp1 ohi French mmi Help System Function Translation Scope and Policy 1 Only the following kinds of label translation are supported subject to avail ability in the target PT model of the source application 511 Translation Support Utility Translation Management 512 Appendix D e Static label of Touch Switch and Standard Lamp where Touch Switch is a standalone screen object and not any component such as touch switch in Alarm Trend Graph in NT21 NT31 631 models On Off static label of Touch Switch and Standard Lamp where Touch Switch is a standalone screen object and not any component such as touch switch in Alarm Trend Graph in NT21 NT31 631 models Fixed Display Text Input Key String label String Table Initial value Screen History Title Names of Recipe Table Entries their records name only and parameters name only Static label of Touch Switches internal to Recipe Screen Element 2 Multiple language translation is supported by Transla
306. d 1 The data that is input using numeric keys is displayed in the temporary input field 2 Input the J key and the data in the temporary input field is set in the numer al setting input field and stored in the numeral memory table at the same time When a temporary input field is not used 2 Storing by pressing Numeral memory table 1 The data input using numeric keys is directly set in the numeral setting input field 2 Press the J key and the set data is stored in the numeral memory table With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the settings such as the Display Sign cannot be set at setting property of temporary input field These set tings are determined by the numeral input field on a base screen When a nu meral input field is used as a temporary input field for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C specify the required No of digits sign digit integer digit decimal point decimal digit N CAUTION When the numeral values entered are confirmed upper lower limits are checked Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably 180 Data Input Section 6 4 Note 1 The data set in the input field is not stored in the numeral memory table until the Jj key button where the Return key code is set the ENT key is pressed At the end of data input always press the J key or the ENT key 2 To correct the data set in the i
307. d E 9000 Host Connect CX Table B NT31 CParts Collection mmi EI Bit Memory Table 1 62 Screen ERU ERE s E 1 3999 Standard ED IO Commer E 1 3999 Window Keyboard limi Libary Tabl Paste C3 9000 Host Connect Mark T able CN Table IET Numesal T IIT String T able B NT31CParts Collection mmi ojx Table Modify 10 Commen Copy ET Library ba Paste ET Mark T able M Numeral T able EI Sting T able c Copying cutting pasting of a number code between the following table entries Drag amp drop is not possible Between image table entries Refer to NO TAG Operating the Image Table Between library table entries Refer to NO TAG Operating the Library Table Between bit memory table entries Refer to 7 1 4 Edit Operation Between numeral table entries Refer to 7 1 4 Edit Operation Between string table entries Refer to 7 1 4 Edit Operation Between extended I O output table entries Refer to 7 1 4 Edit Operation Between extended I O input table entries Refer to 7 7 4 Edit Operation Library Table Library Table Size Comments d Copying cutting pasting and drag amp drop of objects between editing screens or library editors Drag amp drop can not be performed if the copy destination 60 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 window is hidden under other windows Refer to
308. d font Tool selection Used to specify the range to copy cut move shrink or expand the created graphic The range is specified by dragging the mouse cursor To cancel the range specifying frame select the tools other than Ly Range specifying frame Used to move the graphic that is defined by the range specifying frame The range specifying frame can be dragged or a pop up menu can be displayed by right clicking the mouse Used to draw a point Click the mouse at the position where a point is to be drawn a point is drawn in the size specified by point type selection and in the color speci fied as foreground color NI Used to draw a line By dragging the mouse cursor from the start point to the end point of the line to be drawn the desired line is drawn in the width specified by line width selection and in the specified foreground color mi Used to draw a rectangle By dragging the mouse cursor a rectangle is drawn having opposing corners at the start and the end point of dragging having the line of the specified width line width selection and in the specified foreground col or The inside of the rectangle is tiled with the colors specified as fore ground color and background color in the specified pattern ei Used to draw a circle or an oval By dragging one corner or one side of a rectangle that circumscribes the circle or oval to be drawn the desired circle or oval is drawn with
309. d Display Library data that is cut or copied on the library editor window can be pasted onto the other library editor window or standard editing screen The data can be pasted until another data is stored to the clipboard Also fixed display elements that were cut or copied from standard editing screens can be pasted onto the li brary editor window When more than one library editor window is displayed or when two Support Tools are opened by Import Component from the File menu same PT model setting cut copy and paste operations between these library editor windows are possible For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool Library data Display of library data BE u a i B a 7 EB n Oo E mN a I o A circle extending outside the specifying frame is not displayed as library data Changing the size and display position of the library data specifying frame To change the size of the library data specifying frame or move it follow the steps described below 341 Library Editor Section 8 2 Setting grids Quitting the library editor 342 1 Click the mouse on the dotted lines of the library data specifying frame Green W handles are displayed enclosing the library data specifying frame 2 The size can be changed by dragging a handle Posi
310. d NT631C with V2 or 3 only for numeral display or string display for labels 2 For the NT21 and the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 V3 only when using the interlock function Operation of changing display objects Lamp display The lamp is turned ON OFF when the specified PC PLC bit goes ON OFF PC PLC Screen Lamp lights when bit comes ON Bit address ti 11 General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Touch switch Notify Bit The specified PC PLC bit goes ON OFF when the switch area is pressed Screen PC PLC Notification L Bit address e Touch switch Switch Screen The display screen is switched to another when the switch area is pressed Screen A Screen B Touch switch Input Key Window Keyboard A window Keyboard Screen pops up in the screen when the switch area is pressed Screen Screen Window Keyboard Touch switch Window Move The window is moved by touch panel operation when the switch area is pressed Window Window in a moving status Screen Screen Screen 4 AN y A m Jf Touch switch Input key Control When the switch area is pres
311. d can be set with the Display 96 line property Check mark set A percentage value is displayed Check mark not set A percentage value is not displayed If the setting is for a percentage value to be displayed the size and display position of the value can be modified using the element edit function in the manner shown below For detail of the element edit function refer to page 112 1 Click on a percentage value while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key 2 Drag a percentage value to change the display position Example Modifying the percentage value display position 246 Graphs Section 6 9 8 To change the size of a displayed percentage value double click on the val ue The properties of the percentage value display are displayed Trend Graph lt Display gt General Position x 150 Y 320 Font Type Stand Scale 1x1 Equa gt T Smoothing el Colour 4 Forearound H Background ply Position Indicates the display position of the percentage value The reference point is at the upper left corner of the percentage value Font Type Specify the font of a value to be displayed Standard Half Height Double Width Scale Specify the scale of a value to be displayed 1x1 Equal 1 x2 High 2x1 Wide 2 2 3 3 4x4 8x8 Smoothing Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for a value to
312. d element will be moved Alignment is performed towards the whole area of the element Touch switches may not be aligned to the center properly when Center in a Column or Center in a Row is performed because of the defined touch switch grid size They will be aligned to the nearest center e f alignment function is performed when the filter function is activated the filter function will be cancelled 1 Select multiple elements to be aligned Or select one element that consists of multiple elements and specify the ob jective part after entering the Edit Object mode 2 Specify any of the aligning method after selecting Align from the Edit menu Or right click the mouse and specify the aligning method after selecting Align from the pop up menu Short cut key can also be used Refer to page 116 6 1 7 Grouping Elements Grouping Ungrouping 118 Reference It is possible to group multiple elements into one element When creating a graphic by combining several elements future editing such as copying pasting and moving will be facilitated if they are grouped Grouped elements can be returned to individual elements by ungrouping them In the grouped state it is not permissible to change the element size and property settings To change the size or set properties ungroup the elements When saving screen data using mmi format grid setting information and group ing information will not be stored Refe
313. d screen 2 1 Select Screen menu bar gt New 2 Atthe screen selection dialog box set Standard Screen 3 Atthe new standard screen dialog box set 11 for the screen No Setting the screen properties 1 Select Screen menu bar Properties 2 Setthe screen properties as shown below for screen No 11 Attributes Screen No 11 History a Title Monitor Screen 2 Comment Monitor Screen 2 Buzzer Load Local 1 Keyboard System Keypad Color Background Black Grid Size Custom Horizontal Spacing 5 Vertical Spacing 5 Display Grid in Snap to Grid al Creating the lamps Lamp 1 to Lamp 5 Creating the frame of lamp 1 1 Select Objects menu bar Lamp Standard Refer to 6 5 Lamps 2 At the Lamp 1 display position in the data creation screen drag the mouse to create the lamp frame In this step a rectangular frame is created 373 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 3 Set the properties as shown below Position Size Frame Shape Circle Color Frame White ON White OFF Transparent Light Address PC PLC Bit Address 0000000 Functions Comment Lamp 1 Lamp Attrib ON Type Light ute Label Lamp 1 refer to the follow ing 2 1 For the NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 or later models multiple lines of label On Off static labe
314. data and the background function which continues logging the data while a trend graph is not displayed are available A present value in a numeral memory table entry is displayed in the form of a bar graph Numeral memory tab 100 1 A value in a numeral memory table entry is converted into a percentage val ue in the range from 0 to 100 or from 10096 to 100 and displayed in the form of a bar graph Selection using the menu bar Objects Graph Bar Graph Selection using the drawing toolbar 5 Graphs Section 6 9 Terminology Property setting General Position Size Frame Display Sign Direction Color Indicates the display position of a bar graph The reference point is at the upper left corner of the bar graph Indicates the size of a bar graph Specify whether or not a frame is displayed for a bar graph Specify whether or not a display area for negative values is displayed Setting is not possible for NT11S NT11 Specify the display direction of a bar graph Right 2 Left Up T Down 1 Only Right 2 can be set for NT11S NT11 Frame Specify the color of a bar graph frame if Frame is selected Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Range Specify the color of bar graph displayed for a positive value Can only be
315. data of the period during which the trend graph was not displayed by pressing a touch switch that has the function to display the past data The trend graph element can control data sampling display and other related operations using the special touch switches shown below These touch switches execute their function only once when they are pressed Stop touch switch Stops data sampling Updating of a trend graph display is also stopped at the same time While sampling is halted the touch switch is lit If data sampling is executed by the background function data sampling in the background mode is also halted When the background function is not used if the screen is switched back to the trend graph display screen after halting data sampling and calling other screen the trend graph is redisplayed and logging restarts automatically Restart Continue touch switch Restarts halted data sampling At the same time updating of the trend graph dis play restarts 250 Graphs Section 6 9 DSP CLR LOG CLR K Reference During data sampling the touch switch is lit Display Clear Clear Display touch switch Clears the trend graph display Even if the display is cleared the logged data are not cleared Log Clear Clear Log touch switch Clears all logged data At the same time the trend graph being displayed is cleared This switch clears only the trend graph being displayed The trend graphs regist
316. ddress Setting at Function dialog box History Screen No Switch Screen Screen No String Table Entry Image Library Code Use of image library data Image library code Color Property settings for alarm list element Start Bit Table Entry of Bits Referenced The setting for the Switch Screen bit memory table setting differs between the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C and the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C as shown below NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C Specifies whether or not the screen is switched at the same time the PC PLC bit allocated to bit memory table entry goes ON 165 Alarm Section 6 3 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Specifies whether or not the screen is switched when the message dis played at the alarm list is pressed The following table shows the appropriate setting of the bit memory table for the required alarm processing for your reference NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C Setting for Bit Memory Table Usage of Alarm 8 Function Setting Switch Screen Screen No Alarm Switch Screen To display alarm only OFF 0 To display alarm and Switch to a specified Screen in response to the pressing of alarm message Alarm Switch As desired Screen To switch to a speci fied screen at the Alarm Switch same time the bit Screen goes ON As desired To switch to the pre vious screen at the same time the bit goes
317. del a numeral setting input field or a thumbwheel switch for which a numeric value exceeding 8 digits is input is reg istered to the sym bol manager With a conventional model a numeral setting input field or a thumbwheel switch of greater than 8 digits is dis carded E Numeral Input Total number of in teger and decimal exceeds limit It is discarded Correction related the reference memory table entries for numeral input Create a new numeral setting input field thumbwheel switch Correct the screen data or the program in the host so that a constant of up to 8 digits suffices Refer to 6 4 1 Numeral Input 6 4 3 Thumb wheel Switch In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model conver sion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the numeral memory table entries that can be referred to Difference New models Conventional models Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion For numeral memory table entries No 247 to No 253 reference is not possible for numeral input thumbwheel switch For numeral memory table entries No 247 to No 253 reference is possible for numeral input thumb wheel switch Display only Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a conventional model a numeral setting input field or a thumbwheel switch for which a n
318. depend on the PT model Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash 202 Numeral Display Section 6 6 Color Foreground Specify the numeral color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow When this property page is called from Label of Standard Lamp or Touch Switch when Label Type is Numeral Display Foreground ON OFF color can be speci fied ON Specify the display color of a standard lamp when the PC PLC bit is ON Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow OFF Specify the display color of a standard lamp when the PC PLC bit is OFF Can only be set for PTs with color display Transparent white black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the color of the background in the numeral display area Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Settings Reference Indirect Reference If a numeral in the specified memory table entry is treated as the reference table entry number for indirect reference specify this item Setting is not possible for NT11S NT11 Table Entry Specify the address of the numeral memory table entry to be referred to If Indirect Reference is not selected the contents of this numeral memory table entry are displayed and if Indirect Reference is selected the contents of this numeral memory table en
319. described 61 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 Parts Collection Lamps and touch switches will be graphical and expressive parts when they are combined with image library data or image lamps These graphical lamps and touch switches are registered to the Parts Collection Parts Collection for each PT model is provided Using Import Component command desired data can be copied pasted from Parts Collection to the editing screen easily Reference Parts Collection is supplied only for the Support Tool on CD ROM It can be installed by specifying Sample Collection when installing the Support Tool Parts Collection for NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S is not supplied Parts Collection is created in MMI format It may take time to read out save MMI file If you install the Parts Collection the Parts Collection List which shows how to use the Parts Collection the list of screen images will be automatically installed as well This list is stored in the Parts Collection List folder inside the Sample collection folder Operation Procedure To use the Parts Collection follow the procedure below Here operations such as copying pasting drag amp drop are not described in de tails Please refer to NO TAG Image Editor NO TAG Library Editor and 6 1 5 Co pying Cutting Pasting and Deleting Elements 1 Open the screen data file to which you want to paste data from Parts Collec tion 2 Sel
320. dify the properties as shown below Note that the properties not shown here must be left un changed Light Functions Address PC PLC Bit Address Comment L0000001 Lamp 2 Label Label 1 Press Edit to set the label If the comment is already set for the PLC address of light function clicking ON Gopy Vo Comments button copies the label 12 Create Lamp 3 Lamp 4 and Lamp 5 in the same manner Lamp 2 13 Modify the properties as shown below meeting the individual lamps Lamp 3 Lamp 4 Lamp 5 Light Functions Address PC PLC Bit Address L0000002 L0000003 0000004 I O Comment Lamp 3 Lamp 4 Lamp 5 1 4 Lamp 3 Press Edit to set the label If the I O comment is already set for the PLC address of light function clicking on 0 Comments button copies the label Creating the image library lamp image data Lamp 4 Create two kinds of image data for the image library lamp Create the image data for codes FE20 and FE21 FE20 FE21 Lamp A 375 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 1 Select Tools menu bar Image Editor 2 Click on New 3 Set the properties as shown below click on Code Size 64 48 8 Colors Mode Compression 4 to create the image data For the image da
321. discarded To achieve higher performance close the second Support Tool after you com pleted import operation 59 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 t may take time to read out MMI file since data checking is performed before opening the file Possible Operation between Two Support Tools While screen data files of the same PT model are opened with the two Support Tools following operations are possible a Copying cutting pasting and drag amp drop of a screen between application managers multiple screens can be also handled Refer to 4 2 4 Copying a Screen g NT31CParts Collection mmi x1 NT31CParts Collection 5 43 NT31CParts Collection mmi Ey Screen 4 1 3999 Standard C 1 3399 Window Keyboard BAI NT31CP ts Collection mmi EX Screen C lt 13999 Standard SE C 1 3999 wWindow K eyboard Esl5 SWITCH Delete E CI 9000 Host Connect Fal6 SWITCHE Open Table Es 7 SWITCH Download E CI 000 Host Connect C Table Properties b Copying cutting pasting and drag amp drop of a table data between application managers All the data in a table is handled it is possible to handle a table entry individually or to handle multiple table entries collectively Refer to 4 2 9 Copying the Whole Table WEINT3ICParts Collection 5 3 NT31CParts Collection meni Ay Screen E 1 3999 Standard 1 3999 Window Keyboar
322. displayed NT series Support Tool Setup Customer Information Please enter your information Please enter your name and the name of the company for whom you work User Name IK LInoki Company Name OMRON lt Back Cancel After inputting click the Button The screen for specifying the destination of program installation is displayed 8 Select the directory for installation In the initial state the directory shown below is set as the destination directo ry C Program Files Omron NTST4 8E To change the directory click the sre Button and input the drive and directory If a directory that does not exist in the hard disk is specified the directory is automatically made Ni series Support Tool Setup Choose Destination Location Select folder where Setup will install files Setup will install NTST4 8E in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder Destination Folder C Program Files Omron NTST4 8E After specifying the destination click the Button 33 Section 2 2 Installing the Support Tool 34 The program selection screen is displayed to allow you to select the programs to be installed 9 Click on the check box displayed to the left of the program to be selected to enter a check mark NT series Support Tool Setup Select Components Choose the compon
323. dots Specify the height of the image data as a number of dots The image data size can be set in the range from 8 x 8 dots minimum to the screen size of the PT to be used maxi mum The image data width and height must be specified in units of 8 dots Specify the data format for storing the created image data Check mark set Image data is compressed for storage Check mark not set Image data is stored without being compressed Specify the comment for the image data to be created Searches the unused code Specify the search direction in the Search Direction Displaying image editor 1 Tools menu bar Image Editor The image table is displayed 2 Select the code in the image table and click the Open Button or double click the mouse on the objective code line When two or more codes are selected edit screens editors of all the se lected codes can be opened collectively Image table dialog automatically closes at the same time the editor is displayed Image Editor Section 8 1 Changing the property To change the property of the code that is already registered open the editor and then display the property dialog of the image data as follows 0001 Image Object General 0001 Size Width a Height 52 Mode 8 Colours v IV Compression Double click with tool Double click Cmm or Right click Properties or Right click
324. dresses allo cated to PT status control area PT status notify area and window control area NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Information of the PC PLC addresses allo cated to PT status control area PT status notify area and window control area models with V1 and above 433 Sending Downloading the Data Section 11 3 Reference Operation procedure 434 Data Type Description System Memory The setting contents of System of PT Config uration are sent and set at the PT Table NT20 NT20S and NT600S The following data is sent in a batch Numeral memory table data Character string memory table String table data Mark data NT24 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C The following data can be sent individually Numeral memory table Character string memory table String table Bit memory table Mark data Image data Library data Recipe table 1 With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C individual transmission of system memory is restricted as follows The following data stored in a PT cannot be overwritten Number of numeral table entries Number of string table entries Number of bit memory table entries Screen history setting Alarm history setting Numeral storage type The following data can be overwritten Initial screen number Screen data comment 2 You cannot transmit the mathematical table separately The ma
325. e NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above the contents of a label can be specified for each ON and OFF state The display of the label is changed ac cording to the status of the lamp or the touch switch Display of lamp ON OFF status may differs between the Support Tool and PT for the following cases ON color when lamps touch switches are overlapped ON color of lamp touch switch label when using NT30C NT620C NT625C ON status of lamp touch switch when overlapping with other object other than fixed display To activate this setting follow the procedure below 1 Select Simulate ON OFF from View menu or click on the button In the View menu the check mark is set to ON and OFF each time it is se lected When the check mark is displayed the lamps and touch switches show their ON statuses Each time the Simulate ON OFF button is clicked it changes as follows Lamp ON status being shown fi Lamp ON status not shown Redrawing the editing Screen Refresh 86 In case the screen has disrupted during the edition of the screen Refresh func tion will help you redrawing the screen Redrawing can be performed as follows 1 Select Refresh from the View menu The screen will be updated Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 Displaying Full Screen Full Screen Zoom This is available in case if you want to view the screen in wide range But is im possi
326. e Recipe entry In Settings properties check Show Window Keyboard Screen and set screen number to display keypad Create window screen con taining keypad 419 Quick Reference To modify the size of an image data Operation 1 Specify the area of an image data to be shrunk or ex panded on the image editor 2 Drag one of the green handles W displayed on the range specifying frame to modify the size of an image data Section 10 1 Refer to To display a label in multi ple lines Objects Lamp or Touch switch Create a lamp or a touch switch for which Static or On Off Static is set as the label type NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above To change the contents and the position of a label according to the ON OFF status of the lamp bit 1 Objects Lamp or Touch Switch Create a lamp or a touch switch for which On Off Static is set as the label type 2 Turn the PC PLC bit to which the lamp is allocated ON OFF PT Screen PC PLC ABC If ON Bit DEF N If OFF Lamp or touch switch with On Off static label Only for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above To change the contents of a label according to the values in PLC memory Objects Lamp or Touch switch Create a lamp or a touch switch for which Numeral Display is set as the label type Only for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above Objects
327. e clip board Align Align Top Aligning objects to the top I Align Aligning objects to the bottom I Aligning objects to the left I Align Right Aligning objects to the right I CenterinaRow Aligning objects to vertically center Centerin a Column Aligning objects to horizontally center Delete Deleting an object Select Al Specifying objects collectively I Edit Object Specifying editing an object Select Object Selecting an object 22 Menu Chart Section 1 5 View 2 Full THING aes erae RS TenE SMART LIS Switching tiling display for object to be tiled ShowTag PC PLC Address Changing over the display to one with word numbers t Table No Changing over the display to one with table entry numbers Image and Library Code Changing over the display to one with code numbers Show Local 1 keyboard Displaying not displaying local window 1 keyboard screen Kaiba bocal Displaying not displaying local window 2 tendon PES abend mans Redrawing the current screen Toolbars Standard Bar Displaying not displaying standard tool bar
328. e contents of the specified numeral memory table entry are displayed memory table entry are treated as the table entry address reference value and the contents of the referenced memory table are displayed Indirect designation is possible only in the following cases Do not apply for other cases e When C200H I F unit is used When the NT20 NT21 NT30 NT30C NT31 NT31C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 or NT631C is used e When an NT20S or NT600S that uses direct connection ver 5 is used With conventional models up to 50 indirect designation settings can be made per screen including both numeral display and character string display e f the value set for Length the number of digits to be displayed is smaller than the number of characters in the specified character string memory table entry string table the specified number of characters is displayed from the first character of the character string The remaining characters are not dis played To display mark data or image data specify the address of the mark data or image data as shown below Note that image data cannot be inserted into a character string when using the NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S NT21 20 30 620 mode off NT31 NT31C NT600S NT631 NT631C NT31 C V2 20 30 620 mode off and NT631 C V2 20 30 620 mode off Setting Display ABC IFFFE ABC of Mark data at code FFFE When there
329. e for creating the image data refer to 8 1 Image Editor For the procedure for creating the library data refer to 8 2 Library Editor 201 Numeral Display Section 6 6 6 6 Numeral Display The contents of a numeral memory table entry are displayed Numeral displays can be used with all models Numeral Screen memory table Display field No 1 50 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 1 The contents of the specified numeral memory table entry are displayed Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Numeral Display Selection using the drawing toolbar Terminology Background Display digits of maximum limit Property setting General Position Indicates the display position of the numeral display field The reference point is at the upper left corner of the display field Font Type Specify the font of the numeric value to be displayed Standard Half Height Double Width Only Standard can be set for NT11S NT11 Scale Specify the scale of the numeric value to be displayed 1x1 Equal 1 x2 High 2x 1 Wide 2x2 3x3 4x4 8x8 Only 1 x 1 Equal and 2x 1 Wide can be set for NT11S NT11 Smoothing Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for numeric values to be displayed Setting is not possible for NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S Attribute Specify the display attribute attributes displayed
330. e input touch switches and the system keypad that are displayed with the numeral setting input field This data input field is created by a numeral input element aa X 00000 00 E MT The input field and the control code input touch 2 Mq rus m switch are automatically correlated Carry over is processed automatically ut After creating touch switches control code pang dM S input or a system keypad on the same screen includes a keyboard window pressing the key allocated the control Touch 1 1 code 1 enters 1 in the numeral setting input field If key 2 is then pressed the Touch 2 12 input field shows 12 Press the key to store the data input Touch 12 gt This is stored into the input field in the numeral memory in the memory table table The procedure for creating a control code input touch switch is shown below 1 Set the control code input function for a touch switch 2 Select the code from the control code list 177 Data Input Section 6 4 The control code input function allows an arbitrary name for a label of a touch switch Click the edit Button in the to display the label input dialog box Input a label Touch Switch x General Settings Light Function Function Input Key Control z Confirmation Contro
331. e list Keep pressing the Tab key or Shift key Tab key until the objective graphic is selected Specify the objective type of element on a filter and select the graphic by the method above To display only the se lected type of element to facilitate the screen edit ing of complicated screen Specify the type of element to be displayed using a filter on the utility bar During the filter function only the dis played element can be edited To align the position of the graphics correctly 1 Select all the graphics to be aligned 2 Edit Align and select the aligning method Quick Reference Operations To change the PC PLC words bits in batch Operation Tools Table Change Address Change the word address and bit numbers in a batch Section 1 Refer to 0 1 To use the created data in other applications 1 Window Symbol Manager Start the symbol manager and register the created data 2 Open other applications 3 Window gt Symbol Manager Start the symbol manager and read the registered data File Import Component Start up the second Support Tool Perform copy amp paste operation of graphic between the screen data files Between the files of the same PT model setting only To store large data in a FD File Save or Save As Save data in Memory Map Image File mmi format To use I O co
332. e not displayed If the same data is read from different elements reading of the data is counted separately Refer to the appendix in the NT21 31 631 Reference Manual for the allowable maximum number of data entries that can be read 539 Appendix G New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 1 Here differences between the Support Tool Ver 3 3 and Ver 4 1 and the new functions added to Ver 4 1 are shown in the table Various functions are added to Ver 4 1 to improve operational efficiency NT31 631 V2 Models support Not supported The following PT Models are sup ported NT31 V2 NT31C V2 NT631 V2 NT631C V2 Section Different On off de scription for standard lamp touch switch Not supported The following functions are sup ported On description and Off description of standard lamp touch switch can be different in V2 models Insertion of imagelli brary in character string Not available in new models This option will be available for NT31 C V2 and NT631 C V2 mod els in NT30 620 compatible mode 6 2 7 6 7 7 3 5 Retaining of alarm his tory list associated touch switch attributes when converted from NT30 620 model to new V2 models Not supported Alarm history list associated touch switches will keep its attributes un changed when converted from NT30 620 to V2 models in NT30 620 compatible mode Appen dix A Correc tion of alarm list histo ry touch switches Centraliz
333. e numeral memory table Value Specify this item if a 0 value is set with a constant set the value to be taken as the 0 value 100 Table Entry Specify this item if a 100 value is set with a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral memory table Value Specify this item if a 10096 value is set with a constant set the value to be taken as the 100 value 244 Graphs Section 6 9 Note that specification for 10096 is valid only when Display Sign is selected Guidance Following types of trend graph element are provided 0 to 100 display Direction Right Direction Up NU INI Time Direction Left Direction Down dx Time 100 to 100 display Direction Right Direction Up wa TTime LNG e VV V Time Direction Left Time Direction Down Ay rn e Which of 0 to 10096 and 100 to 100 trend graphs is displayed should be selected with the setting for Display Sign in the general attributes Check mark set 100 to 100 display Check mark not set 0 to 10096 display The following two types of trend graph display are provided Standard The latest drawing position moves in the direction set for Direc tion b drawing drawing position position 245 Graphs Section 6 9 Pen Reco The latest dra
334. e screen saver function at the PT The Backlight OFF function is only for turning off the screen or the backlight If the screen saver function is used it is possible to display a string at a desired position in predetermined intervals in addition to turning off the screen backlight Report NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT600S NT620S Items Ver 5 Ver 4 Cross Reference Direct Connection In formation History Report Image Library Report Mark List Screen Image Screen List Table Report Validation Report x Mathematical Report xixi gt x x X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Recipe Table x 1 This option is available only for V2 models and above 2 This option is available only for V2 System Ver 3 1 models and above Data Transmission Download Upload NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT600S NT620S tems Ver 5 Ver 4 Applica tion e e e Screen e x x Direct Download Access Upload Informa tion System Memory Table Screen Get Histo History ry Log Alarm History Date and Time 518 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E Image Data Library Da
335. ecimal The specified item is identified by the indication of a radio button The setting is valid only for the numeral memory table Address Increment By Specify the incremental amount for table addresses Address Format Specify whether the incremental amount is specified in decimal or hexadecimal The specified item is identified by the indication of a radio button Operation procedure 1 Click on Copy Settings 2 Specify the incremental amount to be added to the initial value in the numer al memory table at Value Increment By 3 Specify whether the notation of the incremental amount set above is decimal or hexadecimal at Value Input Type 4 Specify the table address incremental amount at Address Increment By b Specify whether the notation of the incremental amount set above is decimal or hexadecimal at Value Input Type 276 Numeral Memory Table Section 7 2 6 7 Click on to close the dialog box Click on the table entry number of the copy source table Click on ts or right click the table entry number Select Copy to Next 8 9 Se Numeral String VO Comments Bit Memory 1 0000 2100003 100004 1100005 1100006 200010 2000012 1100014 7 1 6 Table Display Operation by Specifying the Table Entry Number Description of Go to dialog box Cancel Help
336. ecimal or hexadecimal Decimal selection Numbers in the range of 0 to 9 can be set at each digit Hexadecimal selection Numbers in the range of 0 to 9 and A to F can be set at each digit For Decimal property specify the position of a decimal point in the numeral to be displayed Numeric data is written to a numeral memory table entry without a decimal point and input data is stored as an integer gt Numeral 2341 is written to a numeral memory table entry amp o In the sign digit or is displayed To set a positive value specify a blank For a negative value specify N CAUTION When the numeral values entered are confirmed upper lower limits are checked Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably Note 1 Ifyou use athumbwheel switch to input numeric data the set data is written to a numeral memory table entry at each pressing of the or key This means that the values during data setting are also written to the memory table 2 With a thumbwheel type numeric setting input field if n n m m upper limit 1n n lower limit Om m n and m are arbitrary values at each digit carry over and shift to the lower digit are not possible at the highest digit posi tion 192 Data Input Section 6 4 Example When 1200 is set for the Maximum and 201 is set for the Minimum if the initial value is a 3 digit value the setting value can be changed onl
337. ect Import Component from the File menu 3 Dialog box to specify the file to be opened is displayed Open the Sample Collection folder in the folder that Support Tool has been installed into Then open the folder of the required PT model see below Select Memory Map Image File mmi as a file type Parts Collection for each PT model is displayed Specify the Parts Collection of the PT model same as the currently opened screen data file and click the Button Look in Semple Collection e EJ z CNT30 NT30C NT620C NT625C NT620S collections E NT31 NT31C collections NT631 NT631C collections S SAMPLE E Files of type NTST Application onw Cancel Second Support Tool starts up and the selected Parts Collection opens 4 In the screen data file of Parts Collection decide the object that you want to import 5 If the object contains image library data the image library data should be co pied between image library table entries beforehand by copy paste operation if NT series Support Tool version number is lower than 4 6 Follow the proce 62 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 dure below Code number to be copied can be checked in the property of an object Ref erenced image library code is also displayed on the status bar for some ob ject when they are selected If image library copying is not performed beforehand display will not be as intended s
338. ected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key Select Copy from Edit in the menu bar Then select Paste from Edit in the menu bar of another Support Tool In the confirmation dialog box click the Button If a check box for Overwrite PLC Address appeared in the dialog box make the setting as required 4 2 10 Saving the Screen Data Application to a File The procedure for saving the screen data to a file is shown below Operation using the mouse Operation using the menu For details refer to 3 3 3 Saving the Screen Data Application File Please save frequently Support Tool will not save automatically 1 Click right button of the mouse on the screen data file icon then select Save or Save As If you select Save for a file other than a new file the saving operation starts immediately without prompting dialog box Specify the folder and file name of the destination and click the But ton If you specify an existing file a message requesting your confirmation is dis played if it is overwritten Select File in the menu bar then choose Save or Save As If you select Save for a file other than a new file the saving operation starts immediately without prompting dialog box Specify the folder and file name of the destination and click the But ton If you specify an existing file a message requesting your confirmation is dis played if overwriting should
339. ection describes how to start up and exit the Support Tool and the operating procedure for PT screen data files 3 1 Starting up and Exiting the Support Tool 38 3 1 1 Start up sProce dure sc oie bent ente RED EE Ade 38 3 1 2 Exit Procedure RR e E ERE ERE PER EE 40 3 2 User Interface rod ke po a e E SPEED Een eg PERRO ERE RI NEEDS 40 3 2 1 Functions Provided in the Main Window 40 3 2 2 Major Functions of Dialog Boxes 44 3 2 3 Functions of Message Boxes 45 3 3 Operation of Screen Data Application File 45 3 3 1 Creating New Screen Data Application File 46 3 3 2 Reading the Existing Screen Data Application File 54 3 3 3 Saving the Screen Data Application File 55 3 3 4 Closing the Screen Data Application 57 3 3 5 Importing Reading the DOS Version Screen Data Application File 57 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool 58 3 3 7 Using Method of Parts Collection 61 37 Starting up and Exiting the Support Tool Section 3 1 3 1 Starting up and Exiting the Support To
340. ectively The library table dialog automati cally closes at the same time the editor is displayed Changing the property To change the property of the code that is already registered open the editor and then display the property dialog of the library data as follows 1000 Library Object General Code 1000 Size Width Height Comments Double click or Right click Properties Code Displays the code of the selected library data Size Displays the size of the specified library data Size data is not displayed if there are no elements in the library data specifying frame Comments Specify the comment for the library data to be created 340 Library Editor Section 8 2 Screen Configuration of Library Editor Operating the library editor Reference The screen configuration of the library editor is described below Library data specifying frame Edit area Using the library editor you can create a graphic using fixed elements in the same manner as creating graphics in a standard screen The size of the library data specifying frame is taken as the size of the library data The position and size of the library data specifying frame can be changed as needed Only the graphic in the range of the library data specifying frame is registered as the library data For details on how to use fixed elements refer to 6 2 Fixe
341. ed Display Section 6 2 Operation procedure Terminology Property setting Guidance 156 1 The mark data fixed at 16 x 16 dot size is displayed Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display Mark Selection using the drawing toolbar al Foreground color sees MTS General Position Indicates the display position of mark data The attribute point is at the upper left corner in the mark data Code Indicates the character code of the mark data to be displayed Attribute Specify the display attribute Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the Inverse attribute is not supported Scale Specify the character size 1x1 Equal 1 x2 High 2x 1 Wide 2x2 3x3 4x4 8x8 Smoothing Specify whether smoothing processing is executed for mark data Setting is not possible for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Color Foreground Set display color of mark data Background Set the color of background in the mark data display area Change Displays the list for selecting the mark data 1 For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C even under condition that the string has smoothing ON and the mark has inserted it will not work By specifying mark data special characters and symbols can be created on the screen To display a mark specify its code f no mark data has been created for the speci
342. ed as a border is hidden by a filter function Confirmation mes sage is displayed With a filter function only one type of object can be specified It is not possible to select two or more objects such as a Touch Switch and Bar Graph Reference When the operations indicated below are performed while a filter function is be ing used the filter function will be reset and returned to All Operation Remark FilePrint When the user performs this opera tion the screen will refresh and then the operation will be performed File Print Preview Edit Paste Edit Align Draw Associate With Draw Disassociate DrawSet Order Draw Group DrawUngroup All menu items under Object This includes all creation of screen elements using the menus and tool bar except the object specified on the filter Connect Download When the user performs this opera tion the screen will refresh and then Connect Upload the operation will be performed All the references from the table When the user chooses the refer ence from the table the filter will be reset to ALL 88 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 5 1 5 Switching Screens by Extended I O Input at Each Screen It is possible to make a setting so that the specified screen is displayed when the input of the extended I O that is connected to the PT is turned ON The following two setting m
343. ed below 292 Extended I O Input Table Section 7 5 1 Specify the image library code field where the code is set 2 Click Change Library 3 Specify the library data from the list 4 Clickon The code of the specified library data is displayed in the image library code field Insert Library OK button button 7 5 Extended I O Input Table The extended I O input table is used to set functions at the input terminals of an extended I O unit or allocate PC PLC bits to be referred to Extended I O units can be used only with NT30 and NT30C The following functions can be set at extended I O unit input terminals Screen switching PT Extended I O input table Screen 1 Screen switching LM Screen No 2 Screen 2 External input When the input terminal goes ON the screen is switched to the set screen is set the display returns to the previous screen Notify bit PT Extended 1 0 input table Notify bit PC PLC gt address PC PLC 0000002 External input The extended I O input table notifies the PC PLC of the status ON OFF of the input terminals 293 Extended I O Input Table Section 7 5 Control code input PT Extended I O input table Control code it f
344. ed on direct access versions Page 475 Left cell in bottom table changed Page 487 Sentence added at end of Drive information Page 551 and 552 Text added to graphic and note added May 2007 Revisions to add information on the NT20 NT31 31C V3 and NT631C V3 new models July 2010 Revisions to add information and correct mistakes 575 Authorized Distributor
345. ed on it For details of window keyboard screen refer to 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens Load Local 2 NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V1 and above Select whether or not a local window 2 pops up on the screen when standard Screen is opened If the attribute is checked window pops up when the screen is displayed Win dow does not pop up if the attribute is not selected If the attribute is not set when the standard screen is created it can be selected later to display Specify the screen number of window screen to be displayed as a pop up win dow Window is displayed at the position specified when window keyboard screen was created For details of window keyboard screen refer to 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens System Keypad other than NT11S NT11 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Specify whether or not the keypad that is automatically created by the system is used for setting numerals or strings If the attribute is selected the system keypad is used and it is not used if the at tribute is not selected Color Background NT30 NT30C NT31C NT620C NT625C NT631C 5 1 2 Grid Setting 82 Set the background color Specify the grid used for drawing The grid is used as the guide when drawing an element When the grid is se lected dots are set in the specified spacing The grid can be set so that the specified points of an element being drawn are positioned at grid points To display the attributes fo
346. elect the code from the control code list 8 The control code input function allows an arbitrary name for a label of a touch switch Click the Es Button in the Genesi Tab to display the label input dialog box Input a label Touch Switch x General Settings Light Function Eunetion Input Key Control E Confirmation Control Key Confirm input and focus remains at this field love input focus to the left input field Move input focus to the right input field CA Confirm input and focus remains at this field innit farus ta the order innit field Cancel The number of characters that can be input depends on the setting for the Length property Even if multiple input fields are arranged in a screen input is possible only for one character string input field Therefore it is necessary to create a touch Switch cursor moving touch switch or arrow symbol touch switches that is used to select the desired character string input field If the Focus Frame 186 Data Input Section 6 4 property is selected a cursor moving touch switch is automatically created overlapping a character string input field The cursor moves when the input field is pressed Data input field Cursor moving r f amp r No 1 touch switch ABC If the touch switch on inp
347. eled Paste data that has been copied or cut is pasted Copy graphic in the specified range is copied Cut graphic in the specified range is cut Register mark data is registered Open mark data list dialog box is opened Drawing toolbar Toolbar Used to move the graphic defined by the range specifying frame By positioning the cursor on graphic defined by the range specifying 345 Mark Editor Section 8 3 frame after positioning the cursor on it and dragging the graphic is moved Used to specify the range of a created graphic to copy cut or move By dragging the cursor from one corner to the diagonally opposing corner the range specifying rectangle frame is defined To cancel the range specifying frame select the tools other than Range specifying frame Used to tile dots After placing the cursor on a dot to be tiled left click the mouse To cancel tiling place the cursor on a tiled dot and right click the mouse Used to draw a line By dragging the mouse cursor from the start point to the end point dots arranged on a line are tiled Used to draw a rectangular frame By dragging the mouse cursor the dots on a rectangle that has its diagonally opposing corners at the start and the end point of the drag ging route are tiled By dragging the mouse cursor between two diagonally opposing corners of a rectangle that circumscribes the desired circle or oval frame t
348. emory table entry in the alarm area PT Screen Character string _ memory table Bit memory Nam M Stringtable table Alarm w Alarm fie PC PLC Alarm 2 Alarm fie Alarm list Stores alarm messages 2 Section 10 1 Refer to To display alarm related information details and corrective action by touching an alarm mes sage Tools Table String Create the alarm message Tools Image Editor or Library Editor Register the alarm related information details and cor rective action Tools Table Bit Memory Allocate the PC PLC bit a character string memory table entry string table storing an alarm message and image library code to the bit memory table entry Objects Alarm List Create the alarm list and specify the bit memory table entry in the alarm area set a check mark for image li brary display in the alarm list properties PT PC PLC Screen Screen Temp PLEASE CALL No 0120 To store the ON OFF sta tus of a PC PLC bitas a history and check the his tory on the screen Tools Table Bit Memory Click the function button and choose alarm function Allocate the PC PLC bit to the bit memory table entry Then set a check mark in the History
349. en by dragging it If Ctrl key is being pressed while dragging an element will be copied instead of being moved f two Support Tools are started up copy cut paste are drag amp drop operations can be performed between Support Tools For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool Deleting an element The procedure for deleting an arranged element is described below Since the delete operation does not store the element in the clip board the de leted element cannot be restored by the paste function 1 Select an element Selection of multiple elements collectively is possible 2 Select Edit menu bar then select Delete This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse on the element and select Delete in the menu View Draw Object Undo OvMz Cut Ctrlex Copy c ii Paste 157 Align Delete Del Select All Cra Select Object_ Moving an overlapped element to the front or back If multiple elements are overlapped it is possible to move a selected element to the front or back of other elements This command is valid between same kinds of elements only Therefore it is not possible to change the laying order of touch switch and lamp for example 115 Section 6 1
350. en you click on displayed to the left of a 7 icon icons existing under the clicked icon are displayed Clicking on hides these icons 4 2 Operating the Application Manager The procedure for operating and setting the data using the application manager is shown below Two types of operations mouse operation and menu operation are possible For the menu driven operation short cut keys keys used to call menu functions may be used instead of displaying the menu 4 2 1 Opening a Data Creation Screen The procedure for opening a creation screen of existing data is shown below Operation using the mouse 1 1 Double click the screen icon Operation using the mouse 2 1 Click the right mouse button at the screen icon 2 Select Open 4 2 2 Closing a Creation Screen The procedure for closing a creation screen is shown below Operation using the mouse 1 Click the x Button at the upper right corner in the data creation screen 4 2 3 Creating a New Screen The procedure for opening a new screen is shown below Operation using the mouse 1 Click the screen data box icon or right click the mouse on the screen data box classified by group 2 Select New choose the screen type then click the Button 3 Input a screen number and a comment then click the Button Operation using the menu 1 Select New from Screen in the menu bar 2 Select the screen type then click the Button 67 Operating the
351. ences in the library codes between them Difference New models Conventional models Conversion result error message and corrective action 1000 to 3FFF hexadecimal FDFF hexadecimal FA20 to FAFF FB20 to FBFF FC20 to FCFF FD20 to Data Conversion Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Appendix A Corrective Action Conventional model Assume the code is X New model The code is X EA20 E Library Table Entry has been con verted The code for screen element Object Name has been converted from XXXX to YYYY New model Assume the code is Conventional model The code is Y EA20 if the con verted code is out side the usable range the code is fixed as FA20 The code for screen element Object Name has been converted from XXXX to YYYY If the code after conver sion differs from the li brary code to be used change the code to the correct one Refer to 8 2 Library Editor Correction related to image library in character strings When an image library in a character string is converted between a conventional and a new model conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to dif ferences in handling of the image library between them Difference New models Conventional models Status before Conversion Insertion of an image library into a character string is impossible except for NT21 NT31 6
352. endix A Difference New models Control touch switches are annexed to alarm lists his tories correction is possible only with regard to the position of the touch switches When converted to the NT21 NT31 631 V2 or later models NT20 30 620 compatible mode ON associated touch switches will keep other properties as it is only thing is that it cannot be edited separately Conventional models Control touch switches can be handled as indepen dent touch switches to be associated with alarm lists histories Their position size label etc can be edited as desired When converted to the NT21 NT31 631 V2 models 20 30 620 mode on associated touch switches will keep other properties as it is only thing is that it can not be edited separately Switches Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a conventional model an alarm list history is registered for a screen and touch switches are associated with it With a new model the associated touch switches are deleted and the control touch switches in the ini tial state are auto matically created When converted to the NT21 NT31 631 V2 or lat er models NT20 30 620 com patible mode on associated touch switches will be converted to control touch switches oth er properties re maining the same E Touch Switch func tion t
353. ening the screen By this method window is displayed at the position that was specified when win dow screen was created This type of window will be local window For details of the setting refer to 5 1 1 Setting the Screen Attributes Screen 5 Screen 23 Window Opening Closing and moving a window by touch switch operation To create input key window keyboard touch switch on a screen or a window en ables to open close specified window By this method window is displayed at the position set for touch switch property This type of window will be local window Screen Screen Local Window Also by creating window move touch switch on window it is possible to move window by touch panel operation at PT Window Window in a moving status ei Screen n 2 X 35 7 For details of touch switch settings refer to 6 8 Touch Switches It is not possible to control global window by touch panel operation Opening Closing and moving a window by the operation of Window Control Area Window Control Area is added for the NT21 and the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above as a direct access area 98 Extended Screen Section 5 5 While running PT by writing window screen number or x
354. enta green cyan yellow OFF Specify the display color of a touch switch that is OFF Can only be set for PTs with color display Transparent white black blue red magenta green cyan yellow 211 Touch Switches Section 6 8 Settings Function Specify the touch switch function Select from the following nine functions Notify bit Switch screen Input key Control Input key Window Keyboard Input key String Copy setting Cursor move Window move Only available on Window Keyboard Screen Print screen The setting contents differ depending on the selected touch switch function For details of setting refer to Guidance Light Function Touch switch also has the light function like a lamp Address PC PLC Bit Address Specify the bit at the PC PLC that drives a touch switch ON OFF Comment Specify the comment of the PC PLC bit that drives a touch switch ON OFF Lamp Attributes ON Type Specify the status of a touch switch that is ON Light Flash Reference To check lamp ON status on the editing screen select Simulate ON OFF from the View menu Additionally to view flashing display of lamp attribute select Simulate Flash from the View menu For details refer to 5 1 3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool Label Label Specify whether or not a label is appended to a touch switch Label Type Specify the type of the Label when Label is selected Fol lowing selections w
355. entries screen overlapping screens Registration is possible only on one child screen NT631 NT631C 256 entries screen overlapping screens Registra tion is possible only on one child screen Data Input String 256 entries screen overlapping screens 3 Registration is possible only on one child Screen Alarm List 4 groups screen max 32 groups in overlapping screens Alarm History Alarm history One group each for occurrence order and frequency order in standard child screen Recipe 1 2 3 4 1 frame screen overlapping screens max 8 frames Limits on numbers of elements on a window keyboard screen is same as on a standard screen Limit check is not performed for overlapping screens at the Support Tool Analogue meter can be used only with the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and above Either of numeral input numeric key type or string input can be registered on a window keyboard screen Thumbwheel type numeral input can not be registered on a window key board screen Limits on Numbers of Elements Appendix F Limits on display For elements limits are also applied to display in addition to the limits on the numbers shown above Limits on reading the data For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the allowable number of data entries that can be read at the same time is set and read elements exceed ing this limit ar
356. ents Setup will install y s Select the components you want to install clear the components you do not want to install NT series Support Tool ver 4 8 Description System Installer Main program files of NT series Support Tool Sample Collection 38054 K penton Fifa Space Required C 102840 K Space Available C 7453124 K lt Back Next gt Cancel The following data and software will be installed depending on the options that are selected Option Data software that is installed NT series Support Tool ver 4 8 The Support Tool keyboard tenkey library and color pallette symbols approx 23 MB System Installer Only the System Installer access the system programs directly from the CD ROM approx 20 MB Sample Collection Lamp touch switch parts library parts library list sample screen data and ISO parts library approx 30 MB Click the Next Button The screen for specifying the destination for registering the start menu is displayed 10 In the start menu of Windows specify the folder where the short cut to the Support Tool is created In the initial state the following folder is selected Start Program OmronNTSTA4 8bE Installing the Support Tool Section 2 2 If you want to change the folder select the desired folder from the Existing Folders or directly input the folder name If a folder that does not exist in the hard disk is specified the specified folder i
357. er be specified by pressing Specification of Screen Image If you specify Screen Image for Report Type a dialog for setting and select ing the range and print items is displayed Screen all Enter screen numbers and or Screen ranges separated by commas For example 135 12 Screen Image Attribute Include 3 Inverse Print V Hide Screen Grid 9 fv Screen Show Dotted Line Frame EE Sereen Information Lamp Touch Switch Number Memory Table Number Image Library Number 453 Printing Reports Section 12 2 Screen Image Attribute Inverse Print Specify this item when you want to inverse black and white for printing When this item is selected the screen image will be monochrome even when color printer is used With the color type PT the screen image will be turned to gray and the screen will be inverse for printing Hide Screen Grid Specify this item when you do not want to in clude screen grid for printing With the default status check mark is set If it is unchecked the grid is printed according to the grid setting of each screen s property Show Dotted Line Frame Specify this item when you want to include the dotted line frame for the following objects e Dotted line frame indicating the position of string input and string display Dotted line frame indicating the t
358. eral and String display to create the format ma I hd 22 Print Format Screen 5 12 Programming Console Screen The Programming Console Screen is used to access the Programming Console functions built into the PT Displaying the Programming Console Screen during PT operation enables using the Programming Console functions without dis playing the System Menu PT operation however will stop while the Program ming Console Screen is displayed Refer to the User s Manual or Reference Manual for your PT for details on the Programming Console functions The Programming Console Screen can not be edited on the Support Tool 103 Contrast and Brightness Adjustment Section 5 14 PT Screen No NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S NT600S None NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C 9020 Reference The Programming Console Screen is supported only by the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C 5 13 Device Monitor Screen These are system defined screens and cannot be created or viewed in NTST Application manager will not list out these screens Screens available are DAC Function Name NT31 631 31C 631C V 2 Function Name 9021 I O Monitor Registration Monitor 9022 DM Monitor Continuous Monitor 9023 Reference These screen numbers can be referred by the following functions 1 Touch switch Switch screen 2 Bit memory table Switch screen function 3 Bit memory table Alarm function These
359. ered on other screens are not cleared This switch is valid only when the data logging function is used Previous Page Rewind touch switch Displays the logged past data older than the time range of the presently dis played graph This switch is valid only when the data logging function is used Next Page Forward touch switch Displays logged data that is newer than the time range of the presently displayed graph This switch is valid only when the data logging function is used If the latest data is displayed while the data is being logged updating of the trend graph display automatically restarts Concerning the previous page touch switch and the next page touch switch the one pressed later is lit When the data of trend graph made with NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C were converted to the use for NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C if touch switches for controlling trend graph is added after that the Label of the touch switch may not be appeared or some other marks may be appeared This is because the method of using marks of to FFF5 hexadecimal code differs between NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C and NT31 NT631 NT631C With NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C they are used for touch switches for controlling trend graph Resetting the each mark of FFEF to FFF5 code with mark editor enables the cor rect display For details refer to Correcting the Screen Data Conversion Correc tion related to control t
360. eric value in hexade cimal Format Integer Specify the number of digits of the integer part of the input data Decimal Specify the number of digits of the decimal fraction part of the input data Limit Setting is not possible for NT11S NT 11 Maximum Specify the upper limit of the input data Minimum Specify the lower limit of the input data 3 Zero Suppression Specify whether or not leading zeros are suppressed to display the input data Display Sign Specify if a sign is displayed for a negative value Focus Frame Specify whether or not the frame that indicates the data in put objective is displayed Setting is not possible for NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S Focus Attribute Specify how the input data is displayed before it is con firmed Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash 1 Setting is not possible when a numeral input is used as a temporary input field for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C 2 When a numeral input is used as a temporary input field for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C only No of digits sign digit integer digit decimal point decimal digit can be specified since the digits such as deci mal digits are determined by the numeral input field on a base screen 8 An input method for a negative value in decimal differs between the following types of PT With NT20 NT20S NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C and NT625C Input F to indicate a negative value in the
361. erty setting General Position Indicates the display position of the numeral setting input field The attribute point is at the upper left corner of the input field Font type Specify the font for the numerals to be input Standard Half Height Double Width Only Standard can be set for NT11S NT11 Size Specify the size of numerals to be displayed 1x1 Equal 1 x2 High 2x 1 Wide 2x2 3x3 4x4 8 x 8 Not supported for NT20 NT20S Only 1 1 Equal and 2x1 Wide can be set for NT11S NT11 Smoothing Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for numerals Setting is not possible for NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S Attribute Specify the display attributes attributes to be displayed depend on PT models Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Color Foreground Specify the numeral color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the color of the background in the numeral display area Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Settings Table Entry Specify the table entry number of the numeral memory table where input data is stored 175 Data Input Section 6 4 Display Type Only Decimal can be set for NT11S NT11 Decimal Specify this item to display the input numeric value in decimal Hexadecimal Specify this item to display the input num
362. es extended I O output table entries and elements in the form of list The displayed comments can be edited VO Comment Ref Close Reference Search Help Reference If is displayed for PLC Bit Address when its Ref is Yes object without PLC address exist Clicking on _ Reference to know which objects is created without PLC ad dress 7 7 1 Operation Procedure Setting Reference An I O comment table entry is displayed by following the operation described be low When allocating PC PLC address by the setting of lamps and touch switches Click on in the I O comment field of the properties displayed for each ele ment Specify the edit field Click on Se Example Address PLC Bit Address 0010015 Set I O Comments E Click Tools menu bar Table I O Comments tab Specify the edit field gt Set When only editing an I O comment of a PC PLC address allocated to an ele ment call out the I O comment table entry from the property dialog box of the element To set an I O comment for multiple PC PLC addresses select the Tools menu then select Table To edit an address or a comment display the setting dialog box by clicking on Set or edit directly on a table entry For the operation procedure for Reference se and Edit gt refer to 7 1 Common Operation Note that _ Reference cannot be used if it is displayed by the
363. esult is PLC address a reference is created to the corresponding ad dress entry in I O comment table Comments Displays screen comments corresponding to a screen number No of References Displays the number of appearances of the screen or the table entry Operation 1 Click on the table entry number of the reference memory table entry 2 Click on Reference List of referenced screen table entry number is dis played 3 In the reference dialog box specify the objective screen table entry number and click on As an alternative to the operation above you may double click on the objec tive element The specified screen automatically opens to display the specified element 7 1 2 Search Operation You can locate specific data set in a table by using the search operation and also replace the found data with the desired data Search and replacement is possible for the following types of memory table Note that search and replacement is always executed toward the end of a table This means that search and replacement is possible within the range from the present cursor position in the table to the last entry number in the table Table Type Objective of Search Replacement Numeral memory table PC PLC address initial value Character string memory table PC PLC address contents of initial val String table ue Bit memory table PC PLC address image library code 269 Common Operati
364. et the start memory table entry number and the number of memory table entries so that the displayed range is not exceeded While an alarm list element is displayed the status of the bit memory table entries in the specified range is always checked and the element displays the message or image library data that is set for the bit memory table entry when a bit memory table entry is turned ON Allocation of a PC PLC bit to a bit memory table entry is specified at the bit memory table Specified character string memory table entry string table and image library data code are also specified at the bit memory table Bit memory table PC PLC The alarm range i e the start address No in the bit memory table entry and the size is specified by the alarm list element If a bit memory table entry for which a check mark is set for the history property goes ON the date time and the number of going ON events are recorded in an alarm history An alarm history element displays the recorded bit table entry num bers in the order of occurrence or frequency when the element is displayed An alarm history element can also display the contents alarm message of the character string memory table entry string table and the image library data that are allocated to the bit memory table entry Screen Bit memory table Character string memory table string table Alarm warnine history
365. ethods are provided to switch the screen by extended 1 0 input Note that this setting is possible only for NT30 and NT30C Common setting for all screens Regardless of the screen presently displayed the specified screen is always displayed when the extended 1 0 input is turned ON Select Table from Tools in the menu bar Then click the tab of Extended I O Input to set the Switch screen Setting for the individual screens It is possible to set the screen to be displayed in response to turning ON of the extended I O input for each screen For this setting select Extended 1 0 from Screen in the menu bar For example this setting allows the display screen to change sequentially from screen No 1 to screen No 2 then to screen No 3 in response to turning ON of the extended I O input If the extended I O input O goes ON while screen No 1 displayed the screen switches to screen No 2 then if the extended I O input 0 goes ON while screen No 2 displayed the screen switches to screen No 3 To allow screens to be changed in this way set Switch Screen No 2 for Ex tended I O at screen No 1 and Switch Screen No 3 for Extended 1 0 at screen No 2 Here only the setting for screen switching at the individual screens is described Operations of the Extended I O Input table and the common setting to all screens are described in 7 5 Extended I O Input Table The procedure for setting the screen to be displayed on turni
366. etion operation right click the mouse Remove Node 4 Drag the added green lil mark to modify the shape of the graphic Example Modification of the shape of polygon RS aat Ae E wich i g oso ET ae L m D e D A standard lamp element can display a label lamp name To display a label set a check mark in the check box of the Label attribute and click on The dialog box for setting a label is displayed Set the prop erty for the label to be displayed General re Insert Mark Position x Y 120 Font Type Standard e Scale 1 1 EquaD Smoothing Attribute Standard Colour Hd NEN Background Transparent For the procedure for setting the properties refer to 6 2 7 Text For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C it is possible to set different colors for lamp ON and lamp OFF by setting Color OFF and Color ON instead of setting label color However background color is fixed to transparent for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Use the copy VO Comments button in the property dialog to copy the I O comment set to the lamp bit as a label To edit the position of a label use the element edit function For details refer to page 112 1 Click on the label while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key 198 Lamps Section 6 5 2 Drag the label to change the display positio
367. existing file the overwrite confirmation message is dis played For details of the file name setting dialog refer to 3 3 3 Saving the Screen Data Application File Reference The screen data file received from a PT can be edited using the Support Tool 500 Appendix D Translation Support Utility The Translation Support Utility is utility software that runs on Windows 95 98 Me 2000 Xp and Windows NT Ver 4 The Translation Support Utility was developed to help in translating a language to another supported language Currently translation for label contents in NTST can only be performed manually by opening and editing individual visible string contents in NTST before down loading applications to a different language PT Therefore the purpose of this utility is to provide a translation support utility that enables you to load the memory map image file MMI for the source language and be able to translate the new string contents of the application and generate independent memory map files MMI for the specified target language The string data can be exported to Microsoft Excel files and from there you can edit change the string data outside the Translation Support Utility You can also im port the string data in Microsoft Excel format to Translation Support Utility Installing the NT Translation Support Utility The basic installation method is the same as that for the NT Transfer Utility Refer to Installing the NT Transfer Ut
368. eycode Tables and Conversion Rule MS DOS CP437 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 AO BO CO DO EO FO 20 ey PPP erPE Q e e gt T e a t D e lt 5 560 Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule Appendix N Keycode Conversion Rules When you are using the European keyboard please read the following keycode conversion rules Also PT Hardware NT21 and NT31 V1 NT31C V1 NT631 V1 NT631C V1 and above are supporting both Keycodes 1508859 1 and CP437 This section will describe the rule for Keycode conversion between 1508859 1 amp Latin US CP437 and vice versa Above mentioned will be explained in following order 1 2 o ms ol 4 When the conversion will be performed Basic Policy of the Conversion How to Convert Conversion Rule from 1508859 1 to CP437 Conversion Rule from CP437 to IS08859 1 When the conversion will be performed The conversion will take place during the following cases 1 By changing to a different keycode from an existing application From Tools PT Configuration This is only for the NT21 and the NT31 V1 31C V1 631 V1 631C V1 and above 2 Drag Drop of Symbols with different keycode 3 Key input Old amp new models from 1508859 1 437 Basic Policy Basic Policy If the Char
369. f a recipe element frame and touch switches 1 Select the Recipe element 2 Select Edit Object from the Edit menu or right click the mouse button and select Edit Object from the pop up menu This is the first level edit mode The recipe touch switches now behave like normal touch switches The touch Switches can be resized and moved When an internal touch switch is being se lected Edit Mode will be available again for you to manipulate the components of the internal touch switch by means of activating second level edit mode That is the Edit Object menu item both in pop up menu and main menu will not be checked and by selecting it the touch switch can be switched to edit mode You may also switch to edit mode using the Ins key In short using the Edit Object menu item or the Ins key will allow you to toggle between edit mode and selection mode or second edit level and first edit level If any of the editable components is selected the screen element will go to se cond edit level In that level the editable component will be selected Only when the recipe screen element is in edit level one can the internal touch switches be resized Appearance of Resize Handles When the second edit mode is active the red handles surrounding the recipe screen element are switched from solid red handles to red outlined handles while the handles of the internal touch switch change from green to red solid and 111
370. fied code a blank is displayed e To change the mark data to be displayed click on cane in the property set ting dialog box and select the desired mark data in the list Fixed Display Section 6 2 The procedure for selecting the desired mark data is shown below 1 Click on Chane the attribute setting dialog box to display the mark data selection dialog box Sho Table Application z 27 a Vitib es Cancel Gear Help 2 Specify the mark data to be displayed The specified field is displayed en larged Or input the character code that corresponds to the mark data to be displayed into the Code input field 3 Click on to close the dialog box For the procedure for creating mark data refer to 8 8 Mark Editor 6 2 11 Library Object Data Library data is displayed There are two types of library data One type of library data references the fixed code directly the other type uses indirect reference Indirect reference is a func tion that can change the library data to be displayed by writing the library code to the numeral table entry just like the indirect reference of numeral string display This enables the animation display by switching the display contents using a sim ple program For details of the PT models that can use indirect reference refer to Appendix E Table of Functions of Each PT Model Library data cannot be used for NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S 1 Lib
371. folder line Among the folders that are open the folder at the bottom line is selected System File s The system programs in the specified folder and those for the specified PT model are displayed Specify the system program that is to be installed at the PT from among the displayed programs The extension of a system program file name represents the PT model 489 System Installer Operation Extension Appendix B PT Model 20 NT20 System 20M NT20 Extended 21 NT21 31 NT31 NT31C NT31 V3 NT31C V3 NT631 NT631C NT631C V3 NT11S NT11 NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C Specifying the System and Extension These selection items will be displayed if the NT20 is selected for the PT mod el For the NT20 the system program will be divided into the following two items System Program itself Extension Resource data for each display language Select which of the two will be transferred The system program is installed when this button is clicked Installing the System Program The procedure for installing the system program is shown below 1 490 Specify the PT model for which the system program is installed for PT Mod el in the main window Specify the system program to be installed by setting the information at Drive Look in and System File s in the main window Specify the RS 232C por
372. for 119 Section 6 1 example when the label is edited after the creation of lamp touch switch Touch switch has two kinds of areas one is the displayed figure and the other is the touch sensing area Centralize Label is performed toward the touch sensing area 1 Select the lamp touch switch you want to centralize Multiple selection is also possible However Centralize Label cannot be performed if no lamps or touch switches are included in the selected ele ments Centralize Label can be performed also when elements other than lamp or touch switch are included in the selected elements Nothing is performed for elements other than lamp or touch switch 2 Select Centralize Label from the Draw menu or click on the button or press Ctrl key L DETE Objects Screen Tools Selector Group CtritG S m Er OU m Ho CE NN Bring to Front CtrI F S mg Send To Back Ctrl B c N 1 Label Goa Label s z 1 z cs AAP Enter Centralize Label Ctrl L Centralization of lamp touch switch label can be also performed by alignment function Center in a Column in Edit Object mode However the result may differ since the alignment function is performed towards the whole lamp touch switch area If Center in a Row is performed for a label in Edit Object mode the label is centralized vert
373. for refer to 1 6 Usable Hardware Combinations Referto Appendix A Data Conversion to reuse or convert screen data from previous PT models 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool Select Import Component from the File menu and you can start up the second Support Tool and open a different screen data file By reading out the different screen data files with the two Support Tools data copying pasting can be per formed easily between the files 58 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 Reference When you select Import Component a dialog box to specify the file to be read is displayed For details of this dialog refer to 3 3 2 Reading the Existing Screen Data Application File pen Look in Sample Collection c E NT30 NT30C NT amp 20C NT amp 25C NT820S collections 3 NT31 NT31C collections NT631 NT631C collections SAMPLE E onw File name sam PLE E onw Files of type NTST Application hd Cancel After specifying the folder file name and file type click the Button The second Support Tool starts up and the application manager of the read out screen data is displayed t is not possible to start up the second Support Tool from the Start button of Windows Error message will be displayed Be sure to select Import Compo nent from the File menu in the main window of the first Support Tool
374. for creating a screen using the Support Tool is shown below CAUTION Carefully check the operation of all screen data and host programs before using them If incorrect the system may operate unpredictably Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably 21 Menu Chart Section 1 5 1 5 Menu Chart The pull down menu commands provided by the Support Tool and the function of each menu item are shown below File SS NOW ee ERES Creating new screen data I ODpen coweoRERET cs Reading created screen data eens Ending creation of screen data SAV Saving screen data being created to a file r Registering screen data being created under new file name Import Component Importing data from different screen data file I Import Reading the data created by DOS version Support Tool Printing screen data Print Preview Displaying print format of screen data Print Setup Setting the printer RecentFile s Recently used files C vo LES eta Exiting the Support Tool Edit Undo ore Canceling the last operation RBedOo osse p RES Returning the screen status to the status before Undo Cutting an object to the clip board Sei Copying an object to the clip board P Paste o eR RSS Pasting an object from th
375. for inputting numeral string or an operational help etc overlapping a display screen For NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C this screen can also be used as a standard screen if it is not used as a keyboard screen For NT21 19 General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C a keyboard screen cannot be displayed independently With the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and above all objects other than thumbwheel SW can be registered With other models only fixed display and touch switch used to input numeral string and temporary input field can be registered This type of window is called a Keyboard Screen With the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C and NT631C with V1 and above up to 3 window keyboard screens can be opened at the same time With other models only 1 window keyboard can be opened For details refer to 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens Host connect screen System initializing screen This screen is displayed at the start of PT operation until the connection to a PC PLC is completed If a Host Connect screen is not registered the default screen that shows the host connection message is automatically displayed when the PT power is switched on or when the PT mode transfers to the run mode Display OFF screen no display screen This screen is used when nothing is to be displayed on the screen Since this Screen is reserved by the system
376. for the graphics in the range specifying frame To save the graphic to the bit map file follow the procedure below 1 2 Specify the area to be saved in a file with a range specifying frame Select Copy To from the Edit menu The dialog box to specify the file name is displayed Set the folder and file name and click the Button Graphics in the range specifying frame is saved in a file 3 Edit View Tools Conn You can read out the graphics saved in a bit map file and paste them onto the image editor The graphics can be pasted onto the image editor that is currently activated To paste the graphic from the bit map file follow the procedure below 1 Select Paste From from the Edit menu The dialog box to specify the file to be read is displayed 2 Specify the folder and file name and click the Open Button Read out graphic is pasted onto the image editor enclosed with a range specifying frame 3 Select Clip from the Edit menu Image data size is changed to the read out image size Instead of the procedure 3 it is also possible to drag the read out image to the required position View Tools Conn Open Undo oie Look in CN Sample Collection z ek zm NT30 NT30C NT620C NT625C NT620S collections 0004 Cut Ctriex a ir ae 1 NT31C collections 0005 H NT631 NT631C collections 9 0006 Paste Ctrl 0007 Delete Del d 0008 90009 irl Properties Files of
377. fore if an error is detected display the error log win dow immediately to determine the details of the error Since errors occurring during data conversion in particular may not reoccur if you try to check them later they must be checked at their occurrence Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 The results of the error check can be printed or saved in a file For details refer to Section 12 Making Reports The procedure for displaying the error log window is shown below 1 Select View in the menu bar then choose Error Log The error log window opens og App5 E Control Area not specified With some types of errors double clicking on the error message will display the screen s where the error has occurred For the meaning of error message and the solution to be taken to correct the er ror refer to Appendix A Data Conversion and Appendix H Error Messages 4 2 12 Sending Downloading the Data to a PT Operation using the mouse The data created using the Support Tool can be sent downloaded to a PT It is possible to send the screen data collectively or only the data of the specified Screens or memory tables Here only the procedure is described For details refer to 11 3 Sending Downloading the Data Before sending the data set the communication conditions communication port and communication speed Baud Rate by selecting Connect menu bar and Comms Setting Sending Down
378. from screen No 1 Menu Screen 1 Copy the Menu Screen character string and its frame rectangle on screen No 1 and paste them onto screen No 3 2 Adjust the display position of the pasted character string and frame to the desired position Modifying to Set Screen 3 Double click the Menu Screen character string and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged 4 Adjust the size of the frame rectangle Creating the data input field Numeral Input 1 Input 1 383 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Setting the title 1 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Text 2 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the data display field title is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner 3 Set the properties as shown below Description Numeral Input 1 Position Font Type Standard Scale 1x2 High Smoothing D Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Transparent 4 Adjust the position of Numeral Input 1 on the data creation screen by dragging it Creating the data input field 5 Select Objects menu bar Data Input Numeral Refer to 6 4 1 Numeral Input 6 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the data input field is to be displayed at the intended upper left c
379. fy the file name and save it If you click the exe Button in the file name specifying window the symbol folder closes without being saved If you click the ws Button the symbol folder closes without being saved Registered symbol will be discarded For details on saving refer to Saving a folder file on page 258 Create a new folder to register the symbol data by the procedure shown below By collecting symbols related with each other in the same folder the screen data creation operation can be facilitated since searching for symbol data is simple Select File in the menu bar then select New Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Section 6 10 A new folder is named as No description Edit View He Changing folder name To change the folder name to one that is easy to understand follow the opera tion shown below 1 Select the folder name that should be changed The folder name is dis played in reverse video 2 Select Edit in the menu bar then select Change Label The label name change dialog box is displayed 3 Set the desired folder name and click the Button Vien Hep Cut CtrieX Symbol Manager SymFile1 S Copy Ctrl C File Edit View Help Paste p Label description em 9 2 CeleurPalatte Delete Del LJ GROUP1 Cancel J Supplement Symbols Choose Icon Change Label Registering the symbol data A graphic consisting of
380. fy this item if a 0 value is set with a constant set the value to be taken as the 0 value 238 Graphs Section 6 9 100 Table Entry Specify this item if a 10096 value is set with a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral memory table Value Specify this item if a 10096 value is set with a constant set the value to be taken as the 100 value Note that specification for 10096 is valid only when Display Sign is selected Guidance The following types of broken line graph element are provided 0 to 100 display Direction Right Direction Up N Higher digit word Higher digit word Direction Left Direction Down Ea Higher digit word lt Higher digit word 100 to 100 display Direction Right Direction Up Higher digit word EA F VV M BE RE Higher digit word Direction Left Direction Down C Higher digit word hi rn lt Higher digit word Which of 0 to 10096 and 100 to 10096 broken line graphs is displayed should be selected with the setting for Display Sign in the general properties Check mark set 100 to 100 display Check mark not set 0 to 10096 display f you specify a broken line graph element only one broken line is displayed To modify the settings for the broken line select the broken line to be modified and click on tine Property The line properties are displayed 239 Graphs Section 6 9
381. fying PT information to a PC 51 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 52 PLC and for window control area controlling a window NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V1 and V2 only PT Type System Control Notify Area PT Control Area PLC Address m z sj PT Notify amp rea PLC Address Window Control Area PLO Address PT Control Area PC PLC Address Set the type of words at the PC PLC and the first address word number of the area used as the PT Status Control Area The PT Status Control Area differs depending on the PT model and it occupies the following number of words NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C For V1 models and V2 models without NT20 30 620 Compatible mode 5 words For V2 models with NT30 620 Compatible mode 4 words NT21 Without NT20 30 620 Compatible mode 5 words With NT20 30 620 Compatible mode 4 words Other models 4 words Comments Set a comment concerning this area As a comment up to 16 character can be set PT Notify Area PC PLC Address Set the type of words at the PC PLC and the first address word number of the area used as the PT Status Notify Area The PT Status Notify Area differs depending on the PT model and it occupies the following number of words NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C For V1 models and V2 models without NT20 30 620 Compatible mode 2 words For V2 models with NT20 30 620 Compatible mode 3 w
382. g Display filed Auto button Automatic Man button Manual Step button Step Reset button Reset Start This is a momentary type button When you touch this button L000100 in the PC PLC goes ON If LO00200 in the PC PLC goes ON the button lights Stop This is a momentary type button When you touch this button L000101 in the PC PLC goes ON If 000201 in the PC PLC goes ON the button lights Menu This is a screen switching button When you touch this button the screen switches to the Menu Screen screen No 1 e Monitor This a screen switching button 355 Example Screen Configuration Section 9 1 When you touch this button the screen switches to the Monitor Screen screen No 2 e Alarm This is a screen switching button When you touch this button the screen switches to the Alarm Screen screen No 4 Alarm Screen Alarm list and contents Allocate 0002000 to 0002007 in the PC PLC as alarm bits If any of the allocated bits goes ON the corresponding alarm message is dis played When you touch the alarm message the corrective action and details of the alarm are displayed in the alarm content display area Bits Alarm Message Alarm Content Display 0002000 Line 1 Error Set line 1 0002001 Line 2 Error Set line 2 0002002 A spot Screw Error Check torque screw 0002003 B spot Screw Error Check torque screw 0002004 Low Pressure Check pipe and v
383. g input field If the Create Cursor Move Touch Switch check box is ON when creating the input element a cursor moving touch switch is automatically created overlapping a numeral setting in put field By simply pressing this input field the cursor is moved Data input field Tu m 4 Cursor moving No 1 touch switch Numeric keys AS AA gae ure cm Ux minimum M 178 Data Input Section 6 4 If a touch switch on input field No 2 is pressed the No 2 input field becomes the objective field for data input The data input using the numeric keys is stored in input field No 2 A cursor moving touch switch is created using the dialog box that is displayed when creating a numeral input element The properties for the cursor moving touch switch can be set in the same manner as for a standard touch switch How the properties for a touch switch are set is shown below For details of Settings refer to 6 8 Touch Switches General Settings Light Function r Position Size x 61 Y 141 Width 99 Height 39 Label Settings v Label Label Frame Shape Standar E Show ON State Colour Frame Transparent V General Settings tient Function Function Use Windows Keyboard Screen r Screen No locali Keyboard 4 y Window Position Bottom Left E a Replace Loc
384. g is speci fied for a mark Fixed Display Mark smoothing not sup ported It is ignored Correction related to the system keypad If a system keypad is converted between a conventional and a new model con version is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the handling of the system keypad between them Difference New models The system keypad cannot be set Conventional models Numeric keys can be created automatically by setting a system keypad Conversion result error message and corrective action Status after Conversion Status before Conversion Corrective Action Error Message With a new model the system keypad is invalid and thus not displayed With a conventional model a system keypad is automati cally created with a numeral setting in put screen Either copy the regis tered keyboard from the symbol manager refer to 6 10 Registering Created Elements Sym bol Manager Opera tion or create numeric keys that are equivalent to a system keypad us ing the touch switch control code input func tion refer to 6 8 5 Con trol Code Input Touch Switches Correction of alarm list history touch switches If a touch switch for alarm list history is converted between a conventional and a new model conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differ ences in the handling of this kind of touch switch between them 476 Data Conversion App
385. g the screen data without modifying the contents NT Transfer Utility can handle only the file in mmi format It is not possible to read or write the file in onw format which is a standard format of the Support Tool Therefore please be sure to save the screen data in mmi format when you use the NT Transfer Utility For details of the restriction of the file types and mmi format refer to 3 3 3 Saving the Screen Data Application File NT Transfer utility downloads uploads the screen data in the application unit It is not possible to perform individual transmission such as the transmission in the screen unit Equipment necessary for using the NT Transfer Utility Hardware Operating System The following indicates the equipment necessary for using the Support Tool e Recommended CPU Pentium 100 MHz or faster CPU Personal Computer Use an IBM personal computer or 10096 compatible Recommended Memory 32 Mbytes minimum Free Area in Hard Disk At least 3 5 Mbytes The NT Transfer Utility runs on Microsoft Windows 95 Microsoft Windows 98 and Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 Version 4 05 or higher of the NT Transfer Utility also runs on Microsoft Windows 2000 and Microsoft Windows XP Version 4 80 or higher of the NT Transfer Utility also runs on Microsoft Windows Vista and Microsoft Windows 7 The NT Transfer Utility will not run on Windows 3 1 Operation on a 64 bit OS or server OS is also not supported 493 NT Transfer Utilit
386. ge Length 1 39 Message Smoothing Message Scale Display ImageLib Color Frame Color Back ground ON Color Back ground OFF Image amp Library Color Foreground 522 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT11S NT600S NT620S Items NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Image amp Library Color Back ground Line Scroll Touch Switch Page Scroll Touch Switch Shape Rectangle Shape Circle Shape Polygon Shape Sector Frame Color Frame Lamp At tribute Color ON Color OFF Label Max No of characters Label Font Type Label Scale Label Smoothing Label At tribute Label Color ON Label Color OFF Label Color Back ground Label Off Description 523 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT11S NT600S NT620S E NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Ver 4 Label On Description e Multiline Label Static La bel Type Numeral String Dis play Label Type 1 Fixto transparent 2 Fix to black 8 Available only in V2 and later models With the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C
387. ge data cannot be used for NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S 1 Image data created in the bit map BMP format is displayed Note Bit map data created by general application software running on Windows can be displayed Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display gt Image Display Selection using the drawing toolbar Terminology Foreground color Background color 152 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Property setting Guidance General Position Indicates the display position of image data The reference point is at the upper left corner in the image ele ment Size Indicates the size of image data Reference Type Direct Set the image code directly Code Indicates the code number of the image data to be displayed Mode Indicates the color mode of the image data 2 colors 8 colors Comment Displays the comment that is set for the image data Indirect Set this item when the value for the specified numeral table entry is treated as image code and referenced indirectly Table No Specify the numeral table entry to be referenced When using the indirect reference set the storage type of allo cated numeral table entry to Binary Also when specifying the image code from a program etc use hexadecimal value since the image table code is in hexadecimal Color Foreground Set the display color of image data Setting is possible o
388. ght corner of the image table dialog 8 1 2 Creating Image Data Using Image Editor Registering new image data 1 Select Image Editor from the Tools menu The image table is displayed 2 Click the x Button The New Image Entry dialog box is displayed 3 Set the code size colors compression comment of the image data to be newly created then click the Button EZ ce Window Help Table CUT Image Editor Library Editor Mark Editor Comments Import YO Comments Change Address Validate 12 Configuration New Image Entry Eind Next Size Search Direction Width 200 C Up Height 152 Mode BCobws IV Compression Comments Cancel Delete Close Setting for New Image Entry dialog box Code Specify the code to which the new image data is regis tered 327 Image Editor Section 8 1 328 Colors Search Direction Width Height Compression Comments Eind Next When the dialog box is opened the smallest unused code is set Specify whether the image data is created in 2 Colors monochrome or 8 Colors color Unregistered code can be searched using the Eind Next Button In the Search Direction specify Up to the smaller code or Down to the larger code to designate the direc tion to which search operation is executed Specify the width of the image data as a number of
389. given below The list is by no means exhaustive as more may be added Also there may be differences with the exact messages that are shown 1 Fonts with the following character sets are not available on your local ma chine Not all languages can be shown with the required character set 2 Only with the NT30 620 series when saving once the translation is com pleted a warning message will be displayed to prompt you to open the trans lated MMI file in NTST and validate the application to ensure proper behav ior This is due to the paging memory constraints for those PT Models 3 Database file cannot be found No access rights for database file Database file cannot be opened 4 Export Import successful unsuccessful as appropriate Translation Support Utility Appendix D 5 When closing the source MMI file or exiting the Translation Support Utility if you have made some translation changes that have not been committed to MMI files corresponding to target languages the Translation Support Utility will prompt you to generate the corresponding MMI for the target languages if any Refer to the message below Translation Support U tility 2 Generate MMI for various Languages No Cancel 6 Ifthe current source MMI file is newer than the one registered in the MDB database or it has contents that are different from the MDB database file then it prompts you whether to update the database with the information of the
390. gram at the host may have to be modi fied Modify the program by referring to Correcting the Screen Data Conver sion page 466 Correcting the Screen Data Conversion 466 This section describes how the screen data should be corrected after it has been converted If the screen data cannot be converted correctly an error message is displayed on conversion of the data when changing a PT model or PLC Vendor or register ing a symbol from the symbol manager If an error message is displayed it will be necessary to correct the screen data or the program Data Conversion Appendix A Correcting the NT11 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C screen data after conversion If the screen data is converted to the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C the following modification of the screen data and program is needed according to the source destination PT model NT30 NT30C NT31 NT31C e f image library is inserted into a lamp touch switch label or a character NT620S NT620C NT631 NT631C with string modification of screen data is needed For how to perform the NT625C SU correction refer to Correction of image codes page 474 or Correction of library codes page 474 Word configuration of PT control notify area differs between the source and destination PT model Check the program at the host and make corrections For details refer to Appendix A NT20 30 620 compatible mode If a keyboard screen is used the size of the keyboard scree
391. gram version to that for the higher system program version freely regardless of the PT models e g from V1 to V2 or from V2 to V2 System Ver3 1 However conversion towards the opposite direction is not possible ex PT mod els with V1 PT models without V1 or higher system program version lower Data Conversion Reference Appendix A system program version When the PT models with the large screen size are converted to those with the smaller screen size ex NT631 NT31 the elements exceeding the screen size after conversion are deleted Note that when the screen data is converted user group and grid information will be lost The data conversions shown above indicate the conversion of entire screen data files If an element registered to the symbol manager is registered for a screen of another PT model the data is converted In this case conversion is performed in element units For data conversion in element units the restrictions shown above are not applicable and element data can be converted between any com bination of PT models You cannot convert both the PT Model and PLC Vendor at the same time an error message will be displayed First change either of them and then perform conversion a second time Data Conversion Procedure Reference The data conversion procedure is shown below 1 Open the existing screen data file Open the existing screen data file that is the source
392. h are a part of an alarm list element Therefore they cannot be modified as a touch switch They can be moved only when the alarm list is modified For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the line and page scroll touch switch can be moved by clicking the desired touch Switch while holding down the Shift key and Ctrl key Edit Object from the Edit menu or pop up menu and Ins key can also be used for this operation With NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C however a line scroll touch switch and a page scroll touch switch are independent elements and their position size and label can be changed as required However the touch Switch function and the lamp setting should not be changed otherwise the switch and the lamp will fail to function correctly on PT To display the image library data set a check mark in the check box of Display Image Lib in the Property setting dialog box The procedure for editing the image library data display area is shown below 1 Specify only the image library data display area dotted line frame while holding down the Shift key and Ctrl key automatically enters to Edit Object mode Green W marks handles are displayed surrounding the image library data display area There are other methods to enter Edit Object mode For details refer to Specifying an element consisting of multiple elements on page 110 2 Specify the display size of the image library data display area and move i
393. h time a string input object is newly created a string table entry number where input data is stored is automatically set as 01 52 incrementally table entry number after the last set one will be the next default number A Data Input Section 6 4 string table entry number can be changed by displaying the property setting dialog box It is also possible to change it later A character string input element itself creates a character string setting input field It is always used with a control code inputting touch switch control code input function or a system keypad Data is input to a character string setting input field using the control code input touch switches and the system keypad which are displayed with the character string setting input field This data input field is created by a character string input element odes The input field and the control code input touch B l J gS switch are automatically correlated Insertion of a character string is automatically processed 7 y Control code Character string After creating touch switches character inputting touch setting input field string input and control code input or a switch system keypad on the same screen in 5 cludes a pop up window pressing the key MPa allocated label A enters A in the charac Touch B AB ter string setting input field If the t
394. han 640 x 480 part of the window of Support Tool may stick out of the screen In this case change the resolution setting of desktop area to the higher one with the control panel property of Windows Mouse Serial mouse or bus mouse The NT series Support Tool runs on Microsoft Windows 95 Microsoft Windows 98 and Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 Version 4 05 or higher of the NT series Sup port Tool also runs on Microsoft Windows 2000 and Microsoft Windows XP Version 4 80 or higher of the NT series Support Tool also runs on Microsoft Win dows Vista and Microsoft Windows 7 The NT series Support Tool will not run on Windows 3 1 Operation on a 64 bit OS or server OS is also not supported Device necessary for transmitting screen data RS 232C cable For cable specifications refer to Appendix K Connecting Cable Specifications 1 3 General Configuration of the Support Tool 1 3 1 Outline of Screen Data The screen data of the Support Tool consists of multiple screens that are linked with each other Screens are managed by screen numbers The range of usable screen numbers varies according to the type of the PT connected to the Support Tool The screen display is switched by pressing a touch switch or giving an instruction from the PC PLC General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Display objects Input objects PT Model Range of Screen Numbers NT11 NT11S 1 to 25 NT20 NT20S 1 to 250 256 to 500 NT600S 1 to
395. he Support Tool Please do not forget to save the screen data frequently Refer to 3 3 3 Saving the Screen Data Application File The sample screen data to be created in this section is supplied by the CD ROM version Support Tool Use this data to check the setting status etc This data is provided just as a sample screen data It is not created for the purpose of actual operation on PT after downloading it to PT 9 Example Screen Configuration 00 ra eee ce eens 352 9 1 1 Screen Configuration 0 cee cee eee ence eens 352 9 1 2 Screen Transfer among Example Screens 353 9 2 Operation RR be Role aE CRS a eee Ou Le NN ERE WI REESE ER 357 9 3 Creating the Sample Data nn 360 9 3 1 Starting up the Support Tool 0 360 Rage wea 360 9 3 3 Setting the PT Configuration 360 9 3 4 Setting Memory Tables ssseeeeeee III 361 9 3 5 Creating the Menu Screen 363 9 3 6 Creating the Monitor Screen Child Screen 1 367 9 3 7 Creating the Monitor Screen Child Screen 2 373 9 3 8 Creating the Monitor Screen Parent Screen 382 9 3 9 Creating the Set Screen zio aane RN Een ar AERE A
396. he application in file units 437 Receiving Uploading Data Section 11 4 With the Support Tool on CD ROM NT Transfer Utility which is exclusively used for downloading uploading the screen data is supplied For details refer to Appendix C Operation procedure 1 3 438 Select Connect menu bar Upload PT NT series Support Tool The menu is displayed allowing you to select the data to be received The items that can be selected vary according to the PT model Pressing Ctrl key Shift key U executes Application uploading Select the data to be received The data receiving timing is determined according to the type of data se lected to be received Data Type Description Application in file units Data receiving starts immediately Screen If a parent screen is included in the screens selected to be received a dialog box is displayed requesting you to specify whether child screens are to be received with the parent screen To specify multiple screens in batch speci fy the screen numbers in the manner 1 3 5 7 delimiting them with commas and hyphens Set a check mark for the Include Child Screen item if you want to receive the child screens with the parent screen Data receiving starts when is clicked Direct Access Information Data receiving starts immediately System Memory Data receiving starts immediately Table NT20 N
397. he check box for Switch Screen 9 3 5 Creating the Menu Screen Create the Menu Screen Menu Screen Monitor Screen Set Screen amp larm Screen Display the data creation window for screen No 1 which is displayed at the start up of the Support Tool at the front Setting the screen properties 1 Select Screen menu bar Properties 2 Set the screen properties as shown below for screen No 1 Refer to 5 1 1 Setting the Screen Attributes Attributes Screen No 1 History val Title Menu Screen Comment Menu Screen Buzzer Short Load Local 1 Keyboard System Keypad Color Background 363 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Grid Size Custom Horizontal Spacing 5 Vertical Spacing 5 Display Grid al Snap to Grid 4 Creating the screen title Menu Screen Menu Sc Setting the characters 4 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Text Refer to 6 2 7 Text Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the screen title is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner of text Set the properties as shown below Description Menu Screen Position Font Type Standard Scale 2x2 Smoothing al Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Transparent Adjust the position of the Menu Screen on the data creation screen by dragging it
398. he dots on the circle or oval are tiled Used to draw a tiled rectangle By dragging the mouse cursor the dots inside a rectangle that has its diagonally opposing corners at the start and end point of the dragging route are tiled Used to draw a tiled circle or oval By dragging the mouse cursor between two diagonally opposing cor ners of a rectangle that circumscribes the desired circle or oval frame the dots inside the circle or oval are tiled Used to move the entire drawn graphic Drag the edit area and the graphic drawing position moves 5 Used to draw a circular or oval frame eJ 346 Mark Editor Section 8 3 I Used to turn the entire drawn graphic through 90 Left clicking on the edit area turns the graphic clockwise and right clicking turns the graphic counterclockwise Left click Right click Referring to graphics The mark editor allows you to refer to or reuse the existing graphics or sample characters to draw desired new marks Click on Reference button and the reference graphic display area is displayed Mark Editor lel pim ol B lel 4 Reference e maus Reference graphic display area Oy N a o m e n button again To close the reference graphic display area click on Referring to the existing mark data To display the existing mark data as reference for creating a new mark click on
399. he file of the Screen to be copied Edit Copy Edit Paste Specify the copy destination screen number Refer to Display the copy source screen Edit Select AII Edit Copy Open the copy destination screen Edit Paste If screen data of the same PT model setting is opened by Import Component from the File menu copy amp paste operation above is possible between the Support Tools To copy image library data 1 Selected the code to be copied on the image library table entry 2 Edit Copy 3 Select the code to be pasted 4 Edit Paste If screen data of the same PT model setting is opened by Import Component from the File menu copy amp paste operation above is possible between the Support Tools To group several graphics into one graphic 1 Select all graphics to be grouped 2 Draw Group Note Use the following commands to ungroup the grouped graphics Draw Ungroup To specify the graphic that is behind another ele ment graphic Click the different position so that the graphic at the back side is selected Note The element with the smallest area enclosing the point of selection will be selected Select the graphic at the front side Draw Send to Back Specify the graphic brought to the front side Select the graphic at the front side Edit Select Object Select the graphic to be specified in th
400. he label and the size cannot be changed Only the position can be adjusted 12 Press edit the general property of a touch switch and set the la bel properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged Foreground Color 13 Adjust the position of the label graphic by dragging it aan Setting the page down page up and line scroll up touch switches 14 Modify the page down page up and line scroll up touch switches in the same manner as the line scroll down touch switch Refer to the screen in page 395 to check the position of each touch switch Modify the properties of the individual touch switches as shown below Page down Page up Scroll up Position Size Frame Shape Standard Standard Standard Show ON State _ _ _ Color Frame White White White ON White White White OFF Transparent Transparent Transparent 397 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Settings Function Page down Input Key Control Page up Input Key Control Scroll up Input Key Control Control Key Light Function Address PC PLC Address I O Com ments Lamp General Attribute Label Light Light Light lt FFF7 gt lt FFF6 gt lt FFF8 gt 15 Modify the foreground color of the label graphic to cyan as with the line
401. he mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the Se lect character string is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner of text In the character string setting Fixed Display text dialog box set Select 17 Set the properties as shown below Description Select Position EE Font Type Standard Scale 1x1 Equal Smoothing i Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Black 18 Adjust the position of the Select character string on the data creation screen by dragging it 19 Specify the Select character string then select Draw menu bar Bring to Front The Select character string is brought to the front of the title bar Creating the Menu button Monitor button and Alarm button Copying and pasting the buttons from screen No 11 1 Copy the Switch Screen character string frame rectangle Menu but ton Set button and Alarm button collectively and paste them to screen No 3 2 Adjust the display position of the pasted character string frame rectan gle and buttons Modifying to the Monitor button 8 Double click the Set button and change the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged Settings Screen No 2 Label Label Monitor 1 393 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 1 Press Edit to set the label 4 Resize the Monito
402. he property size colors compression com ment of the image code is changed to that of the new one 1 Select Image Editor from the Tools menu The image table is displayed 2 Select the code of the image data to be pasted Select only one code When two or more codes are selected paste opera tion can not be performed 3 Click the edit Button or right click on the selected code 326 Image Editor Section 8 1 4 Select Paste Paste can not be selected if the image data to be pasted is not stored in the clip board After clicking the Button in confirmation dialog box image data will be pasted to the selected code Code Comp Mode Size Comments 24 X24 Circle Imp OFF BColo32X32 Circle Imp OFF min fim Colo24 X24 Circle Imp red min Colo 48 X 48 Circle Imp yllw S frm BColo40X48 SW up red BCole40X48 SW down red IBColo48X40 SW right blue Code Comp Mode Size Comments 0001 No B Celo24 X24 Circle Imp OFF min 0005 No Colo32X32 Circle Imp OFF min frm 0006 No 8 Circle Imp red min nofrm SW down red right blue AS Delete Cut CubX New Delete Close Quitting the image table You can quit the image table in any of the two ways described below e Clicking the cise Button of the image table dialog e Clicking the Button at the upper ri
403. hich the screen switching func tion is set Screen Screen No n To switch the displayed screen according to a PC PLC bit status Tools Table Bit Memory Set the bit memory table screen switching function PT PC PLC Screen No 1 LY Screen No 2 411 Quick Reference Section 10 1 Operation Refer to Screen To switch the displayed 1 Objects Touch Switch Function Input Key display screen using an arrow Control symbol key Create the T and J touch switches or Screen gt Properties System Keypad Tick Display the and 1 keys of the system keypad 2 Screen New Parent Screen Continuous Specify the screen to be switched to when or key is pressed Note With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C it is not possible to create continuous screens There fore set the screen switching function for the touch Switches created in step 1 PT Screen No 1 Screen To switch the displayed Tools Table Extended I O input using an external Set the extended I O input table screen switching function PT Screen No 1 Screen No 2 O To display a pop up 1
404. hing Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for char acters to be displayed Setting is not possible for NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S Attribute Specify the display attribute attributes displayed depend on the PT model Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Color Foreground Specify the character color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow When this property page is called from Label of Standard Lamp or Touch Switch Foreground ON OFF color can be specified for Label of type String Display 206 Character String Display Section 6 7 ON Specify the display color of a standard lamp when the PC PLC bit is ON Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow OFF Specify the display color of a standard lamp when the PC PLC bit is OFF Can only be set for PTs with color display Transparent white black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the color of the background in the character string dis play area Can only be set for PTs with color display Transpar ent white black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Settings Reference Indirect Reference If the numeric value in the specified memory table entry is treated as the reference table entry number and used for indirect table reference specify this item Setting is not possible for NT11S N
405. ibrary Display of Image Lib Specify if the image library data is displayed Color Specification of color is valid only when 2 color mode image data is dis played by a color type PT Foreground Specify the display color of image data Background Specify the background color of the image data display area Reference With NT30 NT620S NT620C and NT625C a dialog box is displayed to set if the line scroll touch switch and page scroll touch switch are used With NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C whether or not the line scroll touch switch and page scroll touch switch are used is determined in the alarm list history properties Settings List Setting 163 Alarm Section 6 3 Start Bit Table Entry Specify the start number of bit memory table entries that are checked by the alarm list element No of Bits Referenced Specify the number of bit memory table entries that are checked by the alarm list element Guidance 164 Using a line scroll touch switch and a page scroll touch switch you can scroll messages in units of a line or a page within the alarm list display area With NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C to display a line scroll touch switch and or a page scroll touch switch set a check mark in the line scroll touch Switch and or a page scroll touch switch check box in the Property setting dia log box With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C a line scroll touch switch and a page scroll touch switc
406. ic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written per mission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is sub ject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication Trademarks Microsoft MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or Trademarks of Micro soft Corporation in the United States and or other countries PLC names of MELSEC FX A series and FX 2PIF of MELSEC F series are registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Hewlett Packard HP PCL and Laser Jet are registered trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRONS s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRE
407. ically If Center in a Column is performed for a label in Edit Object mode the label is centralized horizontally By selecting multiple lamps touch switches you can center labels collectively 6 1 10 Setting Properties 120 For each element properties are set to characterize the individual elements Ba sically following two types of properties are set General General settings such as display color and character size Settings only for elements that have a specific function Settings related to data conversion such as PC PLC address and memory table address In addition to the properties shown above some elements have the following properties Light Function only for lamps and touch switches Section 6 1 Setting of bits lamp bits for control that are used when changing display Label only for lamps and touch switches Setting of label that is displayed on lamps or touch switches e Interlock only for touch switches numeral input string input thumbwheel and recipe in the NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above Setting of interlock bit that is used for controlling whether the corresponding object is enabled disabled Logging Data Logging property only for trend graph Setting of the data logging function that records data The following explains only the basic settings For details of the properties of each element refer to 6 2 Fixed Display and later
408. icking the new Button a library code with no data be added to the list You can first insert this library code to a string and then register the library data afterward Use the library editor to create library data 7 4 Bit Memory Table A bit memory table is an area that operates like flags to execute preset functions when the specified bits go ON A bit memory table entry provides a screen switching function that switches the screen when the specified PC PLC bit goes ON and an alarm function that dis plays the alarm message or logs the event of alarm occurrence if the specified PC PLC bit goes ON By allocating a bit memory table entry to a PC PLC bit data can be shared be tween a PC PLC and a PT 288 Bit Memory Table Section 7 4 Screen switching function Bit memory table Screen switching Screen No 2 Screen 1 PC PLC Specified PC PLC bit Allocated bit ON address NA Screen 2 Alarm function Displayed in Character string Alarm list Bit memory table Specifying item memory table 24 oig Gharacter sting lt tobe called String table memory table String table No 10 ABE 11 DEF 12 GHI PC PLC address 0001000 13 JKL N Specifying item Image library code FE20 to be called Image data Displayed FE20 x in respo
409. ied as the data input string For details refer to 6 8 3 Character String Input Touch Switch Launch the system installer It is possible to launch the system installer from Connect Launch System In staller in the menu bar Addition of NT30 620 series system programs The system programs for NT30 620 are included Main Differences of V4 6 NT21 New System Program Support Starting with NTST EV4 6 the NTST supports creating screen data for the NT21 NT31 V2 System Ver 3 1 data and NT21 data can be converted for mutual compatibility NT20 data can be converted to NT21 data NTST EV4 6 can transfer screen data to the NT21 in high speed mode Refer to NT21 31 631 Reference Manual for details Pick Comments from a CX Server Database name in CX Server data can be used as PT I O comment When a PLC address is defined in the dialog an I O comment can be picked up from CX Server PLC point data in a cdm file The Pick CX Server point button is enabled only when CX Server is installed When the I O comment table is edited multiple I O comment data can be picked up from CX Server PLC point data in the cdm file The Import button is enabled only when CX Server is installed Equipment Necessary for Using the Support Tool Section 1 2 Each I O name will be imported as a PT I O comment within 16 characters Property Dialog for Grouped Objects Grouped object attributes can be edited by double clicking or right clicking
410. ied out by following this help information When you are unsure of the operating procedure while using the Support Tool or you need to check detailed settings refer to this manual The explanations in this manual center on the Support Tool itself It does not include detailed explanations on the operation of the PT Therefore refer to the following manuals also This manual also explains the operation of NT Transfer Utility which is exclusively used for downloading and uploading the screen data The NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 can be used with the latest direct access versions of the following PT models Details are given in this manu al NT11 NT11S NT20 NT20S NT21 NT30 NT30C NT31 NT31C NT600S NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C For information on PT functions operations and restrictions NT11 Programmable Terminal User s Manual VO84 E1 1 NT11S Programmable Terminal User s Manual V029 E1 NT20 Programmable Terminal User s Manual VO91 E1 NT20S Programmable Terminal Operation Manual V020 E1 NT600S Programmable Terminal Operation Manual V022 E1 NT30 NT30C Programmable Terminal Operation Manual VO34 E1 1 NT620S NT620C NT625C Programmable Terminal Operation Manual V033 E1 L NT21 Programmable Terminal Setup Manual VO068 E1 J NT31 31C Programmable Terminal Setup Manual V062 E1 NT631 631C Programmable Terminal Setup Manual VO63 E1 NT21 31 631 Programmable
411. ies for which a check mark is set for the alarm history property are subject to alarm history recording 172 Data Input Section 6 4 6 4 Data Input For inputting numerals and character strings in a PT the following three data in put elements are provided Numeral input A numeric value is input into a numeral setting input field using touch switches to which numerals are allocated and the input from an extended I O connected to a PT Character string input A character string is input to a character string input field using touch switches to which characters are allocated and a bar code reader connected to a PT Thumbwheel switch Touch switches that increase or decrease a numeral are provided at each digit of an input field a numeric value can be input by simply pressing the and touch switches String input is not possible for NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S 6 4 1 Numeral Input You can write numeric data to a numeral memory table entry using touch switches and extended inputs Touch switches must be allocated numerals or the copy function beforehand For extended inputs numerals must be allocated beforehand Input using touch switches control code input function PT Numeral memory table Input field 4 key No 1 50 No 2 LM No 3 No 4 Writing No 5 Numeric keys System keypad 1 Create numeric keys using the touch switch control code input function or create a system keypad using
412. ifying a numeral display String Display EE Specifying a character string display Graph Specifying a bar graph Analogue Meter Specifying an analogue meter I Broken line Graph Specifying a broken line graph Trend Specifying a trend graph Alarm Specifying alarm list History sore Specifying alarm history New rirerire ninaa aa Adding a new screen Delete Deleting a screen Modify Parent Setting continuous overlapping screens Copytolmage Saving screen data in image BMP format file Extendedl O Setting an extended I O table setting a table common to all screens Setting grid Properties Setting screen attributes Menu Chart Section 1 5 Tools Table Setting memory tables Image Editor Editing image Library Editor Editing library Mark Editor Editing marks Mathematical Table Editing mathematical functions m Recipe Table Setting recipe data I Import comments Importing comments from ladder program I Change Address Changing PC PLC addresses set for objects and memory tables collectively I Validate Checking errors PT Configuratio
413. ilable for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Background Specify the color of the background in the text display area Insert Mark i Insert Image Guidance Can only be set for PTs with color display Transparent white black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Select the mark data to be pasted into a character string Select the image data to be pasted into a character string Only for NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C and NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above with NT20 30 620 com patible mode set The maximum number of characters that can be input displayed is NT11S NT11 20 characters 148 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Image data 6 2 8 Tiling NT20 NT20S NT21 32 characters NT30 NT30C NT31 NT31C 40 characters NT600S NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C 80 characters To display input two characters without a blank like V It is possible to insert mark data image data into a character string For NT20 NT20S NT600S mark data can be used only in strings Note that insertion of image data is possible only for the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT21 NT20 30 620 compatible mode NT31 C V2 NT20 30 620 compatible mode and NT631 C V2 NT20 30 620 compatible mode Although the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C support image data it cannot be inserted into a character string The procedure for inserting mark data image data into a character string is shown bel
414. ile RTF Reference Reports can be output to a file in the rich text format The operation for outputting the reports to a file is basically the same as that for printing them The rich text format is a file format used for document data in this file format in formation such as characters and indents is retained The data saved in this for mat is highly interchangeable among Windows 95 98 applications Operation procedure to output to a file is shown below 1 Select File menu bar Print The Report dialog box is displayed page 453 BS Set Rich Text Format for Destination To specify the print position of the paper click on Set Margins The Set Margins dialog box is displayed After setting the items in this dialog box click ex The Reports dialog box is displayed again 4 To set the header footer click on the Header Footer The Header and Footer dialog box is displayed After setting the items in this dialog box click on The Reports dialog box is displayed again 457 Displaying the Print Image Preview Section 12 3 b After completing the setting click on in the Reports dialog box IEEE Edit View Draw Objects Screen New Ctri Nn Reports Open Close Save Cris Report Type nggtesprmmm E Save As P Destination Rich Text Format z Cancel Import i Import Component Header Footer Print Setup M Header z TTA EEN
415. ility in Appendix C Setup exe for NT Translation Support Utility is in the Translation Support Util ity disk1 folder in the Support Tool CD ROM By double clicking the Setup exe icon you can start the installation program Follow the instructions on the setup screen to install the NT Translation Support Utility Flow of Operations An NTST application needs to be saved in MMI format before it can be used in Translation Support Utility 1 Load MMI files using File Open 2 Use Translation New to create a new language column More than one target languages may be created 3 Strings in target language text are translated using the translation editor win dow Select the cell in the target language in which the source text is to be trans lated The source text is displayed in the upper pane of the editor translation window You can input the translated text in the lower pane and confirm by clicking the button 4 Repeat the steps for each of the strings to be translated b Select Translation Delete operation if you wish to remove any of the tar get languages 6 Use File Generate MMI to save all the languages to their respective MMI files 7 If you wish to perform the translation using an Excel sheet rather than in the utility itself use the Export function in Translation Export to export the strings to XLS format 501 Translation Support Utility Appendix D 8 To re
416. ill be available for the NT21 and NT31 631 V2 models Static Static On Off Numeral Display and String Display For the other PT models this option is disabled and set to Static default Refer to Guidance sec tion for details of individual label type description To display a label set a check mark in the check box of the Label attribute in La bel page and select an option of the available options from the Label Type com bo box Label Type Static m Static On Off Static Numeral Display String Displav 0 212 Touch Switches Section 6 8 For non NT21 and NT31 631 V2 models this combo box will have only one choice Static and this will remain disabled Static For this option the On label and the Off label will be same On Off Static For this option On Off labels may be different Numeral Display Displays the numeral value by referencing the specified table entry Indirect reference is also possible String Display Displays the character string by referencing the specified table entry Indirect reference is also possible To display the settings for a label click the amp amp Button The dialog box for setting a label is displayed Use the copy Comments button in the property dialog to copy the I O comment set to the PLC address as a label In case of Notify Bit function 1 O comment of notify bit In case of other function comment of lamp bit The property setting dial
417. imported 2 The following will be displayed for selection and navigation by the user Listing and selection of source column headers in Excel to be imported Display of corresponding target column headers into which the column data from Excel will be imported Read only Listing of source text for selected items in selected language and corresponding translation text existing in Translation Support Utility tables read from the database Display of text that is being exported corresponding to selection made above with facility for editing Navigational buttons for moving up and down each data item for the se lected language 3 Import AII facility will also be provided 4 Import of Excel data into Translation Support Utility will be a controlled check in with key code conversion being performed if necessary b If you attempt to change the item data during import validation is performed for length limit limit for number of rows and columns for multi line data etc before the changed text can be accepted for import Launching and Closing Launching the Translation Support Utility To Launch the Translation Support Utility Select Launch Translation Support Utility in the Tools Menu in NTST This option is not available when no application is loaded in NTST When launching the translation Support Utility the current application in NTST will close The user can easily reopen the file by selecting it from recent file lis
418. ince the image library allocated to the code is not copied even if the object itself is copied Procedure a Open the property of an image lamp or image library data to be imported and check the referenced image library code Select Image Editor or Library Editor from the Tools menu and copy Edit Copy the code to be imported on the image library table Open the image library table of the screen data file of copy destination and paste the image library data that has been copied This time if the copy destination code number is different from the copy source code number display will not be correct when the object is pasted Register the same code number as copy source by clicking the New But ton 6 Drag amp drop the object that you want to import from the screen data file of Parts Collection to the screen data file of copy destination Copy Paste in the Edit menu can be used also 63 SECTION 4 Application Manager This section shows how the application manager is used when checking the created data copying screen data setting a memory table operating a window 4 1 What Is the Application Manager 0 0 cece cee eee 66 4 2 Operating the Application 885 67 4 2 1 Opening a Data Creation Screen 67 4 2 2 Closing a Creation Screen iles 67 4 2 3 Creating a New Screen 67 4 2 4 C
419. indow keyboard screens to be opened 470 Correction related to overlapping screens 469 Correction related to sampling cycles of trend graphs 483 Correction related to the 100 value 0 value and 10046 value of a graph 483 Correction related to the lamp label ON state 480 Correction related to the maximum and minimum limit check function for numeral input 480 Correction related to the number of memory tables 472 Correction related to the system initial screen Host Connect screen 471 Correction related to the system keypad 476 Correction related to the touch switch for which the copy function is set 478 Cursor Position 41 cursor position 41 data conversion 465 Data creation screen 40 device monitor 485 dialog box 44 Dialog Box Settings in the PT Configuration 46 Direct access PLC vendor 463 direct connection type 48 Edit Operation 274 Enable 50 Error Messages 549 550 551 Exit 40 Extended I O Input Tables 293 File types 56 floating palette 43 History Setting 49 I O Comment Tables 298 Comments 54 Import 465 Import I O Comments 303 Importing I O Comment from Ladder Program 301 Initial 280 Initial Screen 49 Inserting Image Data 287 572 Inserting Library Data 288 Inserting Mark Data 286 Installing the System Program 490 interlock function 481 Key Input 50 Limits on display 539 Limits on Numbers of Elements 537 538 539
420. ing Up the Second Support Tool The procedure for cutting an arranged element to the clip board then pasting it at another position in the screen is shown below The attributes set to the cut source element are also copied The pasted element is displayed at the upper left section of the screen The element cut to the clip board can be used for pasting as many times as de sired until another element is copied or cut Pasting a cut element to another screen is also possible 1 Select an element Selection of multiple elements collectively is possible 2 Select Edit menu bar then select Cut This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse on the element and select Cut in the menu 3 Select Edit menu bar then select Paste Section 6 1 This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse on the element and select Paste in the menu Cut element is pasted at the upper left section of the screen Copy Paste Align Align i T Delete Delete it T a Ering To Front Bring To Front gt L Send To Back Send To Back bak Select Object Select Object Properties Properties Use As Default Use As Default Reference If multiple data creation screens are displayed an element can be moved over to another data creation scre
421. ing on the data creation screen by dragging it Creating the bar graph frame 5 Select Objects menu bar Graph Bar Graph Refer to 6 9 7 Bar Graph 6 Drag the mouse cursor at the position where bar graph 1 is to be displayed drag between diagonally opposing corners to create the frame of Bar Graph 1 7 Setthe properties as shown below Position Size Frame Display Sign Direction Color Frame Range Range Value Table Entry Display 100 Table Entry Display 96 0 Table Entry Display 100 Table Entry Display Setting the display 8 After specifying the bar graph select Edit menu bar Edit Object 9 Double click on 096 and set the properties as shown below Standard 1x2 High Foreground Background Adjusting the size and position of bar graph frame and 96 display 378 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 10 Specify 0 at the upper left of the trend graph and drag itto the display position 11 Specify the bar graph frame and adjust the size and position of bar graph frame Creating bar graph 2 12 Specify all of label bar graph frame and 96 display of Bar Graph 1 and copy and paste them onto the data creation screen 13 Move the pasted bar graph 1 element which was pasted at the upper left area in the data creation
422. ing pressed The PC PLC bit goes OFF when the touch switch is released 6 8 2 Switch Screen Touch Switch Function Switch screen Settings Screen No Specify the screen number of the screen to which the display is to change when the touch switch is pressed Guidance The switch screen touch switch changes the displayed screen at a PT to the spe cified screen 6 8 3 Character String Input Touch Switch Function Input key String Settings Input Key String Indicates the character string that is input into the charac ter string input field when the touch switch is pressed This control is enabled for the PT models NT21 and NT31 631 only Insert Mark Select the mark data to be pasted into a string Copy from Label Copies the contents of Touch Switch s label to the Input Key String label This will be enabled only if the label type of a Touch Switch is Static or On Off Static Related elements and setting Character string input element Objects Data Input String Refer to 6 4 2 Character String Input 217 Touch Switches Section 6 8 Guidance The character string input touch switch is used for inputting a character string to a character string input field The character string to be input is set for a label in the General attributes It may be a single character or multiple character strings Numeric keys can be created on the screen by combining character string in
423. ing screen is converted conversion is executed as shown below due to differences in screen numbers and elements that can be registered between conventional and new models Difference New models Conventional models Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Screen No 9000 Only fixed display elements excluding image data and library data can be registered Screen No 1999 All kinds of element can be registered Some elements that need communications with a host may not be displayed correctly Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a conventional model elements that cannot be reg istered on a new model are regis tered With a new model the screen No is modified to 9000 Elements that can not be registered for a new model are re moved This screen does not support XXX It is discarded Correct the screen so that the same screen as before the conversion is created using fixed dis play elements excluding image library data Re fer to 5 8 Host Connect Screen System Initializ ing Screen Correction related to extended screens When an extended screen is converted an error message may be displayed due to differences in the handling of an extended screen between conventional and new models Difference New models Conventional models Conversion result error message and corrective action
424. ing the Label of Lamp and Touch switch in both horizon tal and vertical direc tion Label is centralized only in horizontal direction Label is centralized both horizontal and vertical direction 6 1 9 9 3 12 Mathematical Table Not supported A different memory table is sup plied to input mathematical func tions Interlock Not supported This facility is provided to activate or deactivate the associated object Only when interlock is ON the ob ject will response to the user touches deactivated otherwise New Words Added to OMRON Not supported Words for EM Bank O F Time Up Flag Counter Up Flag Task Flag and Work Area are added Device monitor screen Not supported New Device monitor screens 9021 23 are available switch screen functionality of touch switch bit memory table 541 New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 1 542 Comments Import Not supported Appendix G Comments in TAB delimited text file can be imported to NTST Section 7 7 4 Multiline Label Not supported Labels ON OFF Descriptions can be entered in multiple lines 6 5 1 6 8 NT30 620 Compatible Mode Not supported With this option it can be chosen between the existing 31 631 mod el s 5 2 control Notify structure or the 30 620 model s 4 3 control notify structure 3 3 1 App A Correct ing the Control Notify Area Conver sion Numeral S
425. ings Printing of Display Screen Start Specify when starting printing of screen hard copy Abort Specify when aborting printing Guidance e A print screen touch switch is used to print the image hard copy of the pres ently displayed screen Printing of a hard copy can be aborted by pressing the abort touch switch if it is selected in Settings The print screen function cannot be used with the NT20 NT20S NT21 and NT600S With conventional models where the same memory area is shared by the print screen function and the input key window keyboard function it is not possible to print a hard copy while a window keyboard is displayed 225 Graphs Section 6 9 6 9 Graphs 6 9 1 Bar Graph Operation procedure 226 Graphs can be used to display the contents of a numeral memory table entry The Support Tool provides four types of graph as indicated below Bar Graph A present value in a numeral memory table entry is displayed in the form of a bar graph Analogue Meter A present value in a numeral memory table entry is displayed in the form of quarter semi circle and circle graph Broken line Graph Present values of several consecutive numeral memory table entries are displayed in the form of a broken line graph Trend Graph Numeral memory table entry contents that change with time are displayed in the form of a trend graph The graph moves as time passes The data logging function which logs the past
426. ings tab The string can be either a character or a character string consisting of multi ple characters When a touch switch is pressed the character string set as the Input Key String is set to the character string input field When label is set pressing the Copy From Label button copies the label as an Input Key String When the label type is On Off Static the Off label will be used When multiple lines of label have been set only the first line will be used If more than 40 characters are set for a label only the first 40 characters will be set General Settings Light Function Label Interlock Function Input Key String Input Key String 1 Insert Mark L Gop The number of characters that be set for a character string input touch Switch and the number of characters that are actually written to a character string input field differ depending on the PT model as shown below Number of Characters Number of Characters PT Model Label Written to Input Field NT30 NT30C Max 40 characters Max 40 characters NT620S NT620C NT625C Max 80 characters Max 40 characters With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C a maximum of 40 characters can be used for string input function regardless of the PT model The procedure for creating a control code input touch switch is shown below 1 Set the control code input function for a touch switch S
427. initial value will be overwritten but the PLC address setting remains the same Note that I O comments are not copied even if the PLC address is overwritten If you need the same I O comment copy the I O comment Bit memory table Extended 1 0 output table Numeral table String table F Key input notify table Operation using the mouse 1 1 Specify the table data icon Multiple tables can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key 2 Click right button of the mouse on the selected table data icon then select Copy 3 Click right button of the mouse on the desired table in the table data icon dis play area of another Support Tool then select Paste 4 In the confirmation dialog box click the Button If a check box for Overwrite PLC Address appeared in the dialog box make the setting as required Operation using the mouse 2 70 1 Specify the table data icon Multiple tables can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 Operation using the menu 2 3 S Gg Drag the selected table data icon to the table data icon display area of anoth er Support Tool In the confirmation dialog box click the Button If a check box for Overwrite PLC Address appeared in the dialog box make the setting as required Specify the table data icon Multiple tables can be sel
428. ion 4 eee eee eee nee 344 8 3 2 Creating Marks Using the Mark Editor 344 323 Image Editor Section 8 1 8 1 Image Editor Reference The procedure for creating images of any required shape in the bit map BMP format is described below The bit map format graphic data that has been created using a Windows based general purpose application software can be pasted onto the image creation screen by using the image editor via the clip board Created image data can be inserted into a character string in an image library lamp display alarm list display alarm history display or character string display With the NT21 and NT31 631 without NT20 30 620 compatible mode it is not possible to insert image data into a character string Image editor has the following features You can draw any graphics in the bit map format freely It is possible to import Image data from the different screen data file Selected image data can be expanded or shrunk The bit map file can be pasted onto the image editor Copy cut paste operation of image data is possible Preview display of selected image data is available on the image table 8 1 1 Operating the Image Table 324 Image table dialog is configured as follows Mode Size Comments No Colol80 X 56 Edit gt 8 Colo80 X56 SW HELP 8 ColoB0 X56 SW POINT Goto Code B ColoB0 X56 S
429. ion None Switch screen OFF Screen 0 Change function to Alarm if you want to dis play the alarm Refer to 7 4 Bit Memory Table Switch screen OFF Screen As desired Function Alarm Switch screen ON Screen As desired Correction is not neces sary Switch screen OFF Screen 0 Function Alarm Switch screen ON Screen 9999 Correction is not neces sary Switch screen ON Screen As desired Function Alarm Switch screen ON Screen As desired Change the function to Switch screen Refer to 7 4 Bit Memory Table Correction related to extended 1 0 input output table When an extended 1 0 input output table is converted the data is converted in the manner shown below due to differences in the handling of an extended I O input output table between NT30 NT30C and other models Difference NT30 NT30C Other models Extended I O input output table can be used Extended I O input output table cannot be used 473 Data Conversion Appendix A Correction of image codes Correction of library codes 474 Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With an NT30 an ex tended 1 0 input output table is set With a PT model other than NT30 NT30C the setting of an exte
430. is set 478 Create the window key board screen for a screen number in the range 1900 to 1979 and correct the window key board screen number set for the touch switch accordingly Refer to 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens and 6 8 4 Pop up Window Keyboard Function Touch Switch If a touch switch assigned the copy function is converted between a conventional and a new model conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to dif Difference New models Conventional models ferences in the range of numeric values that can be input As a constant for the copy setting function a numeric value of up to 10 digits can be input As a constant for the copy setting function a numeric value of up to 8 digits can be input Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a new model a touch switch for which the copy set ting function is set with a numeric val ue greater than 100000000 or smaller than 10000000 speci fied is registered to the symbol manag er With conventional model a value greater than 100000000 is cor rected to 99999999 or a value smaller than 10000000 is corrected to F0000000 Constant Value is out of limit Maxi mum value re stored Correct the screen data or the program in the host so that a constant of up to 8 digits suffices Refer to 6 8
431. isplay Sign Frame Color Frame Color 4 Range Color Range Display 96 Display 96 Font Type Display 96 uA Scale Display 96 Smooth ing Display 926 Col or Fore ground Display 926 Col or Back ground 534 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT11S NT600S NT620S Items NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Frame x x x AH Color x x x x Frame Display Sign Direction Meter Shape Meter Direction Meter Type Meter Width Rate Scale Distance Scale Length No of Di vision Scale Color Color Fore ground Color Back ground Color Range Color Range Value Table Entry 1 Can be used only with NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and above 535 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT11S NT600S NT620S Items NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Display Label 100926 Table Entry 100926 Value 096 Table Entry 096 Value 10096 Table Entry 10096 Value x A Display 96 Font Type Display 96 Scale Display 96 Smooth ing Display 96 Fore grou
432. isplay a triangle poly gon trapezoid or dia mond Objects Fixed Display Polygon To display a circle Objects Fixed Display Circle To display an arc Objects Fixed Display Arc To display a sector Objects Fixed Display Sector To tile a graphic Objects Fixed Display Tiling 1 Window gt Symbol Manager Start the symbol manager and register the created data from color palette symbol To display bit map data Tools Image Editor Create the image data Objects Fixed Display Image Display Display the created data To display a special sym bol character Tools Mark Editor Create the mark data Objects Fixed Display Mark Display the created data To display the same graphic in different posi tions and or different Screens Tools Library Editor Create the library data Objects Fixed Display Library Display Display the created data To switch the graphic dis play according to the PC PLC bit status Tools Library Editor or Tools Image Editor Create the graphic to be displayed Objects Lamp gt Image Display the created data To move a graphic ac cording to shift of the PC PLC bit status Tools Library Editor or Tools Image Editor Create the graphic to be displayed Objects La
433. isplays the character string by referencing the specified table entry Indirect reference is also possible To display the settings for a label click the Eat Button The dialog box for setting a label is displayed Use the copy VO Comments button in the property dialog to copy the I O comment set to the PLC address of the lamp bit as a label The property setting dialog for both Static and On Off Static labels is shown be low For Static the label can be set by changing description of Off Label group box of Standard Lamp Label dialog box On Label group box will be disabled For On Off Static the Off Label and the On Label can be set by changing descrip tion of corresponding text boxes Standard Lamp lt Label gt x Off Label Description Off Label Inserat On Label Description n Label Set Lines Line Spacing 2 I Font Type Standard Smoothing Scale fist Equal Attribute Standard Colour OFF 7 EEEN Background Transparent Apply Help Off Description Specify the text of the label that will be displayed when lamp bit is OFF On Description Specify the text of the label that will be displayed when lamp bit is ON Line Spacing Determines the space between two lines in both the Off De scription and the On Description Insert New Line Inserts a new line character in the description to bring
434. ize of all entries Equals sum of all Occupied Bytes Available Displays the table s maximum byte size less the used byte size This is the total recipe size minus total occupied size Number 1 Pizza Comment Recipe for Pizza No of Records 3 r No of Parameters Storage Type System H Address PLC Address L00020 Set 140 Comments n Cancel 315 Recipe Table Section 7 10 This Recipe Setting dialog allows you to specify the settings for an entry in the recipe table Description of Recipe Setting Dialog Controls Number Displays the recipe number in the recipe table When creating a new entry the lowest available number is suggested The maximum recipe number is 200 Name Specifies the name of the recipe entry A character string of up to 12 characters can be accepted Insert Mark Insert a mark object in recipe name Comment Specifies a comment for recipe entry A character string of up to 24 characters can be accepted No of Records Inputs the number of records required for this recipe entry If this entry is being created default value is 2 Allocate up to a maximum of 200 digits No of Parameters Inputs the number of parameters required for this recipe entry If this entry is be ing created default value is 2 Allocate up to a maximum of 200 digits Storage Type Sets the numeral data type for parameter values in e
435. l numeral string display label can also be set 2 Click the edit Button to set the label If the comment is already set for the PLC address of light function clicking the Vo Comments Button copies the label After completing the setting go to the next step with clicking the Button Setting the label for lamp 1 4 Press Edit in the general property of a lamp and set the label prop erties as shown below Lamp 1 Standard 1x2 High Dd Standard Foreground White Background Transparent Click on 5 0 returns to lamp property then click on again Reference With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Color ON and Color OFF can be set independently for a label so that the lamp can be displayed in different colors in the ON and OFF states 374 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Adjusting the size and position of the lamp S 6 Specify the Lamp 1 Select Edit Object from Edit menu For methods of specifying an element consisting of multiple elements refer to 6 1 3 Selecting an Element Specify the Lamp 1 and adjust the size and position of the lamp frame Adjust the position of the Lamp 1 character string by dragging it Creating lamp 2 9 Copy Lamp 1 and paste it onto the data creation screen 10 Move the pasted Lamp 1 to the Lamp 2 position 11 Double click the mouse on the pasted Lamp 1 and mo
436. l Key Confirm input and focus remains at this field input focus to the left input field Nove input focus to the right input field Ek Confirm input and focus remains at this field M Stop buzzer Cancel A system keypad is created in the manner shown below With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C a system keypad cannot be created 1 Select Screen menu bar then select Properties This operation is also possible by selecting Properties after displaying the pop up edit menu which is displayed by right clicking the mouse or by double clicking the mouse with the mouse cursor placed at a position other than an element 2 Seta check mark for the system keypad in the screen properties Numeral input element 00000 000 aj t System keypad Note A system keypad is automatically displayed when a numeral setting element or a character string setting element is created in the same Screen BBHBEHBHEHBHNEC The allowable maximum number of input digits is determined by the setting for the Format and Display Sign properties Even if multiple input fields are arranged in a screen input is possible only for one numeral setting input field Therefore it is necessary to create a touch Switch cursor moving touch switch or arrow symbol touch switches that can be used to select the desired numeral settin
437. l can be pasted onto the library table of another Support Tool PT model setting of the two screen data files should be the same For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Com ponents from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool 1 Select Library Editor from the Tools menu The library table is displayed 2 Select the code of the library data to be cut or copied Select only one code When two or more codes are selected cut copy op eration can not be performed 3 Click the edit Button or right click on the selected code 4 Select Cut or Copy Library data of the selected code will be stored to the clipboard In case of cut confirmation dialog box will be displayed After clicking on but ton cut code will be deleted from the library table Size Comments Size Comments 120 190 250 X 160 250 X 160 145 X 89 145X89 50 X 50 naxs Delete CtrisL Cut Ctri X Copy Paste Ctrl V Pasting the library data To paste a library data that is stored in the clipboard by cut or copy operation follow the procedure below Reference When two Support Tools are started up by Import Component from the File menu the data that is cut or copied on the library table of one Support Tool can be pasted onto the library table of another Support Tool PT model setting of the two screen data files should be the same For details refer to
438. l properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged Scale 2x2 Smoothing _ Click on returns to touch switch property then click on again Adjusting the size and position of the 0 key 5 Specify the 0 key and select Edit menu bar Edit Object 6 Adjust the size and position of 0 key frame 7 Drag 0 to adjust the display position Reference The explanation above described the procedure for creating numeric keys using the touch switch control code input function The Support Tool however pro vides numeric keys as symbol data and you do not have to create numeric keys by using the pre registered numeric keys in the menu bar select Window gt Symbol Manager and drag the numeric keys appropriate for your PT model from the symbol file Supplmnt sbl The selected numeric keys can be regis tered on the screen For details refer to 6 10 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Creating other keys 8 Copy the 0 key paste it onto the screen and move the pasted 0 key to the position of the key to be created 1 to Once the 0 is copied to the clipboard it remains on the clipboard until the next cut or copy operation 9 Set the properties as shown below for the individual keys SR UND IE DEI NT PCI pws ee mg g MH BH _ Ls nd es je es e77 wm Rh
439. l switch Small Medium Large Attribute Specify the display attribute attributes displayed depend on the PT model Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash End Plate Specify whether or not end plates are displayed at the ends of the thumbwheel switch Thumbwheel Color Frame Specify the color of thumbwheel switch frame Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Foreground Specify the foreground color of the thumbwheel switch Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the background color of the thumbwheel switch Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Character Color Foreground Specify the foreground color of the numeric value displayed in the thumbwheel switch 190 Data Input Section 6 4 Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the background color of the numeric value displayed in the thumbwheel switch Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Settings Table Entry Specify the table entry number of the numeral memory table entry where input data is stored Display Type Decimal Specify this item to display the input numeric value in decimal Hexadecimal Specify this item
440. l table will be displayed Numeral Screen table Reference 1234 gt Display 1234 Numeral display String display The string display object displays the data in a string entry Screen 2m d Reference ABC 41 Display String display Graph display The graph display object displays the data in a numeral table entry Numeral Screen table ud 100 Reference 41 60 D Display Bar graph display Data Input numeral input and string input These input objects write data into a table Numeral Input field Numeral Table String Input field String Table Numeral Screen table Input field 50 4 50 0 Writing Numeral data input Data Input Thumbwheel switch The Thumbwheel Switch object stores the numeric values to a numeral table entry through transaction of Thumbwheel Switch Numeral Screen table L3 4 34 9 1234 E E 14 General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Reference Reference 1 3 3 Tables Data Input Recipe The recipe objec
441. lamp Set the light function PC PLC address PT Screen j4 If ON A If OFF 1 1 Graphic image data To switch the text to be displayed according to the PC PLO bit status Objects Lamp or Touch Switch Create a lamp or a touch switch for which On Off Static is set as the label type Turn the PC PLC bit to which the lamp is allocated ON OFF PT Screen If ON ABC DEF j If OFF Lamp or touch switch with On Off static label Only for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above 1 2 3 Tools Library Editor Register the text as the library data Objects Lamp Image Create a lamp that displays the registered text Turn the PC PLC bit allocated to the lamp ON OFF PT Screen ABC 4 DEF 4 Image Quick Reference PC PLC Bit Status Display To display an alarm mes sage according to the PC PLC bit status Operation 1 Tools Table Bit Memory Allocate the PC PLC bit and a character string memory table entry string table storing an alarm message to the bit memory table entry Tools Table String Create the alarm message Objects Alarm Alarm List Create the alarm list and specify the bit m
442. lay attribute attributes displayed depend on the PT model Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Color Foreground Specify the character string color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the color of the background in the character string display area Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Settings Table Entry Specify the table entry number of the character string memory table entry string table where input data is to be stored Length Specify the number of characters to be input Focus Frame Specify whether or not the frame which indicates the data input objective is displayed Focus Attribute Specify how the input data is displayed before it is confirmed Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash 1 Setting is not possible when a string input is used as a temporary input field for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Interlock Refer to 6 1 12 Interlock Guidance 184 Note ceca _ When a character string input element is specified the dialog box is displayed to set whether the cursor moving touch switch is automatically created or not It is possible to create a touch switch to which a cursor moving key is allocated later String Input Create Cursor Move Touch Switch Specify whether or not a cursor moving touch switch is automatically created Eac
443. lds that are not selected Image amp Library Display of Image Lib Specify if the image library data is displayed Color Specification of color is valid only when the image data of 2 color mode is dis played by a color type PT Foreground Specify the display color of image data Background Specify the background color of the image data display area Reference With NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C a dialog box is displayed to set if line scroll touch switch and page scroll touch switch are used With NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C whether or not the line scroll touch switch and page scroll touch switch are used is determined by the setting for the use of control touch switches in the alarm list history properties Settings History Info Specify whether or not an alarm message is displayed with date time of occur rence or frequency of occurrence If a check mark is set for this item the date time of alarm occurrence is displayed with an alarm message for display in order of occurrence or the frequency of occurrence is displayed with an alarm 169 Alarm Section 6 3 Guidance 170 message for display in the frequency of occurrence The display format of the date time of occurrence is set for Info Type If the date time or frequency of occurrence is displayed the number of alarm message display characters is reduced accordingly Order Type Order of Frequency Alarm messages are displayed in the orde
444. le B Bit Memory Table 3 2 2 Major Functions of Dialog Boxes 44 A dialog box is a window that is displayed in a fixed size The purpose of a dialog box is to set data that is required to execute the functions of the Support Tool The following types of dialog boxes are used and the procedure for setting the data differs according to the type of dialog box Option button This represents a selection item with O displayed to the left of the item name Only one of the displayed items can be chosen The item is identified by a black circle r Numeral Storage Type BCD Binary Check box This represents a selection item with L displayed to the left of item name Items can be selected by giving a check mark in this box Resume Function Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 Text box This text box is an input field to set characters Comments List box A list box displays a list of data the data to be set is selected from the list Standard Combo box A list of selection items appears in the dropdown list box format The data to be set is selected from the list PT Model PLO Vendor NT631C V1 NT631 V1 3 2 3 Functions of Message Boxes Message boxes display details of errors that occur during Support Tool operation and messages that request your confirmation of attempted operations When a message box shows up operation can be continued
445. le lines The following table shows the specification for each PT model Maximum Maximum Number Remarks number of number of of lines charac charac permitted ters ters per line NT21 1t08 Maximum number of characters per line include the n char NT31 31C 128 40 1to 15 Maximum number of characters per line include the n char acter NT631 631C 256 1to 30 Maximum number of characters per line include the n char acter Set Lines button will display On Off Description Settings dialog box in which the On Off description can be entered in multiple lines by pressing Enter Key When Numeral Display or String Display is selected as Label Type For NT31 631 V2 Models only Indirect Reference If a numeral in the specified memory table entry is treated as the reference table entry number for indirect reference specify this item Table Entry Specify the address of the numeral or string memory table entry to be referred to If Indirect Reference is not selected the contents of this numeral or string memory table entry are displayed and if Indirect Reference is selected the contents of this numeral memory table entry are treated as the reference table entry number and the contents of the reference memory table entry are dis played Edit Displays the Numeral Display or String Display property page For description on property settings refer to Section 6 6 Numeral Display and 6 7 String Display 214
446. lected code When two or more codes are selected the preview of the code selected last will be displayed in preview window The preview window can be switched ON and OFF using the Breview gt Preview Buttons Deleting the library data To delete a library data follow the procedure below Deleted library data will not be stored to the clipboard and its code itself will be also deleted When two or more codes are selected they will be deleted collectively 1 Select Library Editor from the Tools menu The library table is displayed 2 Select the code of the library data to be deleted When two or more codes are selected they can be deleted collectively 3 Perform one of the following operations Edit button Delete e Right click on the selected code Delete Delete button Selected code will be deleted after you click the 7 firmation dialog box j Button in the con Cutting copying the library data To cut or copy a library data follow the procedure below The cut copied library data will be stored to the clipboard and can be pasted to the other codes In case of cut cut code will be deleted from the library table In case of copy copied code remains in the library table 337 Library Editor Section 8 2 Reference When two Support Tools are started up by Import Component from the File menu the data that is cut or copied on the library table of one Support Too
447. lection of Full Tiling Selection of Full Tiling u To execute tiling specify the same color for the border of area and the border of a tiling element Tiling is executed in the enclosed area for which the same color as the color set for the border is set If an enclosed area with the same color does not exist the tiling extends outside the enclosed area e f the tiling area is not an enclosed area the tiling spills out the specified area The patterns are displayed in the actual status of tiling according to the setting for the foreground and background color The available tiling patterns are shown below e Transparent background can be set for tiling objects However it will not be dis played as transparent on the Support Tool When the screen is downloaded to a PT it will be displayed as transparent 1 Double click the screen to display the screen property To Set Red for screen background color Register a tiling object on the screen and set Transparent for the back ground and for Pattern Check ON the View Full Tiling command Tiling will be executed and the screen background color red will be invisible figure a below GS 6 When this screen data is downloaded to a PT background color for tiling ob ject will be transparent figure b below It will not be trans
448. lick the mouse the selection box moves to the point type at the cursor location indicating that the point type is selected Line width selection Selection box Move the cursor to the desired line width type and left click the mouse the line width type display at the cursor location will be highlighted indicating that the line width type is selected Font designation Font 2 Eont Font style Size System Bold 2 OK Tahoma Bold Italic Cancel Jp Times New Roman T Times New Roman MT Wingdings H Wingdings z d Set Font a Sample AaBbYyZz sal Displays sample characters Click the Set Font Button and the font selection dialog box is displayed After selecting the font the style and the size click the Button 331 Image Editor Section 8 1 Reference Zooming the edit area Modifying Graphics 332 Modifying the size of an image data Specify the range to be modified using the 1 3 Button and drag one of green marks handles that enclose the range specifying frame Position the mouse cursor on a green handle and the shape of mouse cursor changes as shown below The arrow indicates the same direction as the arrow mark in the handle o gt WH Drag the mouse cursor in the indicated direction to modify the size of an image data R5 Drag To shrink the size of an image data shrink it by one
449. ling patterns are shown below oooo oooo When tiling a graphic the color of border should be set to the same color as set for graphics that surround the tiling element If a different color is specified or there is a gap in the border the tiling fills out the specified area 122 Section 6 1 Reference The Color Palette Symbol for which tiling patterns and color combinations registered is supplied with Support Tool as symbol data Using color palette sym bol enables you to register required tiling objects on screen while checking their display status Color palette symbol does not have transparent background pat terns Border colors are set to White Change the setting as required when using it For details refer to 6 10 5 Operating Procedure of Color Palette Symbol Setting the color for lamps and touch switches When specifying the color for lamps and touch switches it is possible to specify the color for the frame color when ON and color when OFF Frame Specify the frame color if an element is displayed with a frame ON Specify the color that represents the lamp touch switch ON status OFF Specify the color that represents the lamp touch switch OFF status If a lamp or a touch switch is set to flash the ON color and OFF color are dis played alternately Lamp touch Lamp touch Lamp touch switch ON switch OFF switch flashing ON color
450. llow any of the operations indicated below e Attributes of screen property gt a Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 Screen menu bar Gig Horizontal Spacing Vertical Spacing 10 C Touch Switch Grid IV Display Grid IV Snap to Grid Grid Size Custom Set the grid spacing in the horizontal and vertical directions to create the grid of the desired spacing respectively Horizontal Spacing Specify the grid spacing in the horizontal direction as a number of dots Vertical Spacing Specify the grid spacing in the vertical direction as a number of dots Grid Size Touch Switch Grid If this attribute is selected grid spacing equivalent to the size of a touch switch is set The actual size differs depending on the PT model Display Grid Specify whether or not the grid is displayed To display the grid tick the check box of this attribute If you want not to display the grid cancel the tick in the check box Snap to Grid Specify if the specified position of an element being drawn is automatically ad justed so that it coincides with a grid position To adjust the element position tick the check box of this attribute If adjustment is not necessary cancel the tick in the check box Reference When saving screen data using mmi format grid setting information and grouping information will not be stored Refer to 3 3 3 Saving the Screen Data A
451. loading the whole data file 1 Right click the mouse on the screen data file icon then select Download If the screen data is free of errors sending of the data starts immediately A message is displayed if the data has an error Sending Downloading specified screen 1 Specify the screen icon Multiple files can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key 2 Make a right click on the selected screen icon then choose Download 3 Specify if child screens of continuous overlapping screens are also to be sent then click the Button If the screen data is free of errors transmitting of the data starts immediately A message will be displayed if the data has an error 73 Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 Sending Downloading specified Table 1 2 Right click the mouse on the table data box icon then select Download The dialog box used for specifying the table to be sent downloaded is dis played for PTs that allow table data to be sent in table individually With PTs that do not allow table data to be sent table by table sending of the data starts immediately Specify the table to be sent downloaded then click the Button Reference It is not possible to send download the direct access information or system memory individually Please use the menu operation Operation using the menu Sending Downloading the whole data file
452. low Item Description COM Port Specify the RS 232C port to be used Specify either COM1 or COM2 Baud Rate Set the data communication rate If High is set high speed data communication is pos sible Not available for NT11S NT11 It is recommended to specify Standard to ensure er ror free communication if a communication error oc curs due to an inadequate communication environ ment Data communication at the Standard setting will take about twice the time required in the High setting 3 After completing the setting for all items click on Sending Downloading the Data The screen data file saved in mmi format is sent downloaded to a PT Reference When data is sent from the NT Transfer Utility to a PT the existing data in the PT is lost Therefore make sure that the existing data in the PT is backed up by the Support Tool or by the NT Transfer Utility before executing data transmis sion from the NT Transfer Utility to the PT NT Transfer Utility can send only the file in mmi format Operation Procedure 1 Select Download from the File menu The dialog box to specify the screen data file mmi format to be sent is dis played see below This dialog box can be called also by pressing the Ctrl key Shift key D key ee 21x Look in My Documents zl lt E3 Pictures Screen data mmi File name Screen data mmi Open Files of
453. lt Up T Down 1 Specify the graph updating time interval NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C 0 1 second unit NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C 0 5 second unit Color Frame Spec Can ify the color of the trend graph frame if Frame is selected only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Range Spec Can ify the color of trend graph displayed for a positive value only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Range Spec Can Valid ify the color of trend graph displayed for a negative value only be set for PTs with color display only when Display Sign is selected White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Settings Delete Line Line Property i Logging Prope Specify this when displaying multiple graphs lines The line properties Line are displayed Specify this when deleting a graph line Specify this when modifying a graph line The line properties Line are displayed rty only for NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Data logging Specify whether or not the data logging function is used Background Specify whether or not the background function is used 243 Graphs Section 6 9 Touch switches for logging Next Page Specify whether or not a touch switch used to Forward move the display range in the direction of newer records is u
454. m the control menu box of the library editor Library Editor Section 8 2 Double clicking the control menu box of the library editor Control menu box Bf 1000 Library Object Move Size Minimize Maximize Close Ctl FA Next 6 343 Mark Editor Section 38 3 8 3 Mark Editor Special symbols and marks can be created by tiling selected dots in a 16 x 16 dot area For NT11S NT11 it is 8x 16 dot The created mark data can be inserted into mark data displays and character string displays Reference The NT series Support Tool cannot handle marks of 32 x 32 dots and 64 x 64 dots If marks created by the DOS version Support Tool are imported 32 x 32 or 64 x 64 dot size marks must be represented by dividing and grouping them as 16x16 dot size mark data 8 3 1 Screen Configuration The screen configuration of the mark editor is shown below Mark Editor x BS Standard toolbar Image display area Edit area Drawing toolbar al N a o m e s n Cancel Help Reference 8 3 2 Creating Marks Using the Mark Editor Displaying the mark editor 1 Tools menu bar Mark Editor The mark data list dialog box is displayed In the mark data list dialog box the mark data registered for the codes are displayed 2 Select the code the mark data list dialog box and click ex or double click the area corresp
455. menu bar then choose Modify Parent or select Modify in the pop up menu The parent screen modify dialog box is displayed The procedure for modifying the setting is the same as setting for new parent screen information Refer to 5 3 1 Continuous Screens or 5 3 2 Overlap ping Screens If a parent screen is copied on the application manager child screens are also copied When two Support Tools are started up the same operation is possible between the Support Tools For details of screen copying refer to 4 2 4 Copying a Screen 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens 5 4 1 Window Keyboard Screens A window keyboard screen is used as a window screen for the pop up window keyboard function It means a partially display window that contains a keypad or other elements to overlap on the base screen Note that window keyboard screen cannot be used with NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S 94 Section 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens Reference With NT30 NT30C NT620S NT625C and NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C be low V1 only one window can be opened at a time and objects that can be regis tered are limited mainly to those used for inputting numeral string as follows with these PTs this window is called a keyboard screen Fixed displays Touch switches Notify bit cursor move and print screen functions are not per mitted Numeral string setting input filed Only one input field can be set Other elements are not displayed
456. meral tab For numeral memory table entries the objective of an operation is specified by clicking on a line The necessary setting can be made by input using a keyboard or by selection using a drop down list For the operation procedure for Reference Search Change Address Edit gt _ Gepy Settings and Gotoeny refer to 7 1 Common Operation Note that _ Reference cannot be used if it is displayed by the operation using an element property For PT models other than NT20 NT20S and NT600S numeral memory table entries No 247 to No 255 are used by the clock function and therefore cannot be allocated to a PC PLC 7 2 2 Related Elements 278 When reading numeral data from a numeral memory table entry Numeral display element Objects Numeral Display Bar graph element Objects Graph Bar Graph Analogue meter element Objects Graph Analogue Meter Broken line graph element Objects Graph Broken line Graph Trend graph element Objects gt Graph Trend Graph Numeral Memory Table Section 7 2 Image object Indirect reference Objects Fixed Display Image Display Library object Indirect reference Objects Fixed Display Library Display Standard lamp Label type Numeral display Objects Lamp Standard Edit in the Label property of standard lamp Touch switch Label type Numeral di
457. mments in ladder program Tools Import I O comments Import I O comments file of ladder program To check the flash display on the screen View gt Simulate Flash Elements with a flash attribute flashes To check the lamp ON status of lamps touch switches on the screen View Simulate ON OFF Lamp ON status of lamps touch switches is displayed Simulate Flash mentioned above can be used at the same time To specify whether or not to inverse the screen color or to print screen grid dotted line for Screen Image printing without changing the screen property In Screen Image Attribute of Screen Image printing set Inverse Print Hide Screen Grid or Show Dotted Line Frame items as required To display time Objects Numeral Display Specify numeral memory table entries No 247 to No 253 time data to display the time To set the time to be displayed 1 Objects Data Input Numeral Set the time to be written to a numeral memory table entry 2 Objects Touch Switch Function Copy Setting Copy the memory table contents where the time is set to numeral memory table entries No 254 and No 255 time setting To display the display history of PT The display history is displayed by calling the following screen numbers NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C and NT625C No 1997 No 1998 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C
458. mmunication Method Host NT Link Mitsu Mitsu Link 1 1 1 N E j bishi A bishi FX NT11S SF121 NT11 SF O 1 1 x x 121 1 1 only NT20 ST 1210 NT20S ST 121D V1 NT20S ST 1210 NT20S ST 122L I V1 NT20S ST 161 EV3 NT30 NT30 ST13 10 NT30C NT30C ST 1410 E O 1 1 only O x x eo e eo eo eo NT600S NT600S ST 1210 V1 NT600S ST 1210 NT600S ST 211D V1 NT600S ST 211 EV3 NT6208 NT620S ST 2110 NT620S ST 212 E NT620C NT620C S 1410 NT625C NT625C S T152 27 Usable Hardware Combinations Section 1 6 Communication Method Host NT Link Memory Mitsu Link 1 1 1 N gt vs C C200H Link bishi A X NT21 ST121 NT31 ST121 NT31 ST121 NT31 ST121 1 NT31 ST123 NT31C ST141 NT31C ST141 NT31C ST141 1 NT31C ST143 NT631 ST211 NT631 ST211 NT631 ST211 NT631C ST1441L NT631C ST141 NT631C ST141 NT631C ST151 NT631C ST151 NT631C ST151 1 NT631C ST153 x x XIXI X X x x x x xk xk X XI X O OC CO OF CO
459. models 531 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 It NT600S NT620S ems Ver 5 Ver 4 Line Style Line Color Direction Display Sign Frame Color Frame Color Range Color Range Display 96 Display 96 Font Type Display 96 N Scale Display Smooth ing Display 96 Col or Fore ground Display 96 Col or Back ground 532 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 It NT600S NT620S ems Ver 5 Ver 4 Broken Start line Table Points 100 Table Entry 100 Value 096 Table Entry 0 Val ue 10096 Table Entry 10096 Value Line Style Line Color Direction Display Sign Frame Color Frame Color Range Color Range 533 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT11S NT600S NT620S Items NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Table Entry 10096 Table Entry 10096 Value 096 Table Entry 096 Val ue 10096 Table Entry 10096 Value Direction D
460. most significant digit e g F0000008 With NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Input negative sign in the most significant digit e g 8 When setting values with decimal fractions such as 0 1234 1 234 or 123 4 for upper limits or lower limits input only the 4 digit integer Interlock Refer to 6 1 12 Interlock Guidance When a numeral input element is specified a dialog box is displayed to set whether the cursor moving touch switch is automatically created or not 176 Data Input Section 6 4 Note It is possible to create a touch switch to which a cursor moving key is allocated later Numeral Input x Create Cursor Move Touch Switch Specify whether or not a cursor moving touch switch is automatically created Settings may not be possible for some PT models Each time a numeral input or thumbwheel object is newly created a numeral table entry number where input data is stored is automatically set as 012 incrementally table entry number after the last set one will be the next default number A numeral table entry number can be changed by displaying the prop erty setting dialog box It is also possible to change it later A numeral input element itself creates a numeral setting input field It is always used with a control code inputting touch switch control code input function or a system keypad Data is input to a numeral setting input field using the control cod
461. mp Image Arrange the image on the locus of the graphic and dis play the same graphic according to bit shift of the PC PLC bits To switch the graphic dis play according to the sta tus Tools Library Editor or Tools Image Editor Create the graphic to be displayed Objects Fixed Display Image Display or Li brary Display Display the graphic using indirect reference Write the image library code 1 in hexadecimal value to the numeral table entry set the storage type to Binary referenced at 2 according to the status Quick Reference Displaying graphics To use the same graphic in multiple application data Operation Window Symbol Manager Start the symbol manager and register the created data at the symbol manager Open other screen data Window Symbol Manager Read the registered data Section 1 Refer to 0 1 File Import Component Start up the second Support Tool Perform copy amp paste operation of graphic between the screen data files Between the files of the same PT model setting only 409 Quick Reference Section 10 1 Operation Refer to Displaying To display text that will not 1 Objects Fixed Display Text character change strings texts To switch the character 1 Objects Lamp or Touch Switch string according to the status of a PC PLC bit Create a tex
462. mum number of characters Set the character string within the limit Object name refers to invalid numeral table entry The referenced table entry is reset to entry O Correct the table entry number to a num ber within the valid range If the table entry number is specified in a program correct the program also Object Name Invalid PLC address It is reset to default Reset the word number to a number of up to 4 digits If this PC PLC address is re ferred to from the program it is necessary to correct the program accordingly Object Name inverse attribute not supported Foreground and Background colors interchanged Since foreground color and background color are automatically interchanged no special correction is required display at tribute is set to default standard Overlapping screen has more than 1 child screen containing Thumbwheel Nu meral String Input elements Overlapping screens do not allow the set ting of multiple input functions Correct the child screens Please make sure this parent screen have at least 2 children Select the parent screen then right click the mouse and select Modify Insert at least 2 child screens for the parent screen Sampling cycle less than the minimum value Minimum value is restored Since there are no problems in actual op eration correction is not necessary Sampling cycle not multiple of 5 Value rounded off to ne
463. munications at Support Tool Set the RS 232C port and baud rate at the Support Tool personal computer l Set PC PLC to Transmit mode Place the PT in the Transmit mode to allow communications of the data be tween the PT and the personal computer For details of this procedure at PT refer to the User s Manual of your PT Selecting the data to be sent received From the menu at the Support Tool select the direction of data transmission download upload and the kind of data to be transmitted Depending on the data more detailed selection may be possible After the data has been determined data transmission will start 11 2 Communication Setting at the Support Tool Set the baud rate and communication port at the Support Tool personal comput er Operation procedure 1 Select Connect menu bar Comms Setting The communication dialog box is displayed Port pote Rate 96 Kbps Standard 384 Kbps High C 115 Kbps verit Cancel Help 2 Setthe data for the displayed items The meanings of the items are described below 432 Sending Downloading the Data Section 11 3 COM Port Specify the RS 232C port to be used Specify either COM1 COM2 or COM4 Baud Rate Set the data communication rate If 38 4 Kbps High is set high speed data communica tion is possible Not available for NT11S NT11 It is recommended to specify 9 6 Kbps Standard
464. n Setting PT type system settings PT Status Control Area PT Status Notify Area settings changing PT type data conversion Connect Comms Setting methods for communicating with the PT I Download Application Sending downloading all screen data to the PT Support Tool to PT SCrOOn cane ee oA HR Eig Sending downloading screen data to the PT in units of screens Direct Access Information Sending downloading direct connection setting data to the PT I System Memory Sending downloading system memory data to the PT Table on e ge Sending downloading memory table data to the PT Upload Application Reading uploading all screen data from the PT PT to Support Tool P SCION Reading uploading screen data to the PT in units from the screen Direct Access Information Reading uploading direct connection setting data from the PT I System Memory Reading uploading system memory data to the PT Table rose prre EDS Reading uploading memory table data to the PT Log 4 Screen History Reading uploading screen history data from the PT Alarm History Reading uploading alarm history data from the PT ate and Time
465. n Color Foreground Color Back ground Color Border 1 Foreground color for switch 2 Background color for switch 3 This option will be available for corresponding V2 and later models in NT30 620 compatible mode 4 Awailable only in V2 and later models 5 This option is available in NT20S compatible mode 528 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT600S NT620S Items Ver 5 Ver 4 Mark Code x x Fixed Display Scale e e Attribute x x e e Smooth e e ing Color Fore ground Color Back ground Image Display Fixed Display Indirect Refer ence Color Fore ground Color Back ground Library Display Fixed Display Indirect Refer ence Touch Function Switch Notify Bit Function Switch Screen Function Input Key Control Function Input Key Window Keyboard Function Input Key String Function Copy Setting 1 For NT20 NT20S NT600S smoothing is always ON 2 Can be used only NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with system Ver 2 1 and above or with V2 or V3 3 Input character strings different from the label characters can be specified 529 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E N
466. n a Label m Tabe 1 2 When displaying a string as a label mark data and image data can be inserted into a string by clicking the Insert Mark Button or the Insert Image Button On the NT21 and NT31 631 without NT20 30 620 compatible mode image data cannot be used in a string Reference With a standard lamp only the lamp color and the label color change To change the contents of a label create image library lamps and display different image library data according to the status of the lamp Example ON 4 p OFF Image library lamp With the NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above you can also change the contents of a label by specifying ON OFF Static as label type With the NT21 and NT31 631 without NT20 30 620 compatible mode image data cannot be inserted into a label 6 5 2 Image library Lamps Different image library data are displayed according to the status of a PC PLC bit Bit status Display when Display when the bitis OFF the bitis ON 1 The image data or the library data is switched to be displayed according to the status of the allocated PC PLC bit Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Lamp gt Image 199 Lamps Section 6 5 Selection using the drawing toolbar Terminology Image library data Property setting General OFF State
467. n 6 5 Guidance For image library lamp element the image library data that is displayed when the PC PLC bit is ON and the image library data that is displayed when the PC PLC bit is OFF are specified independently General Light Function OFF State Change Image 3 Ys 160 Width 16 Height 16 Change Library Foreground Background Transparent ON State M Code 0001 p x 30 he 160 Width 16 Height 16 Foreground X Background Transparent To display the image data or the library data only when the PC PLC bit is ON or OFF cancel the check mark in the check box of the bit status for which the image library data is not to be displayed e To select the image library data to be displayed click on change imaze _ Change Library and select the desired image library data from the list Code Comp Mode Size GOI No BC 4X24 Circle Circle Imp red min nofrm Circle Imp OFF S Circle Imp red S Circle Imp OFF min frm ircle Imp yllw min frm Circle Imp OFF S frm Circle Imp yllw S frm Comments mp OFF min Click the line of the desired data to display the line in reverse video and click the Button Clicking the i Button enables the direct display of the specified code e f the data is not registered to the specified code the mark shown below is dis played on the screen x For the procedur
468. n No 2 3 Dimension 181 141 500 200 No Light White Transparent White White 230 155 Standard 2x2 Yes Standard White Transparent Monitor Screen 181 221 500 280 Switch Screen No 3 S Dimension 181 221 500 280 Yes Light White Transparent White White 265 235 Standard 2x2 Yes Standard White Transparent Set Screen 181 301 500 360 Switch Screen No 4 S Dimension 181 301 500 360 Yes Light White Transparent White White 250 315 Standard 2x2 Yes Standard White Transparent Alarm Screen Screen numbers and comments are printed or displayed Screen List Fi lense SA E E SAMPLE DATA Comments Buzzer Hist KeyPsd EkGd Colour History Title l Kevbosrd 2 Menu Screen Set Screen 1 Soreen Rb L 1 o 3 o 4 o 10 o Moni tor Soreerr1 o Monitor Soreer 2 o Pop up Nureric Keys o HE x o Srort No No No No No No Yes No Bleck Menu Screen Yes No Black Set Screen Yes No Beck Al arm Soreen Yes No Bl Monitor Soreen i ves No Beck Nonitor Soreen 2 No Bil sk No s Bi 449 Report Types Section 12 1 12 1 8 Table Report The setting contents of memory tables are printed or displayed Table Report Nuteral Merory Table Fi lenge SMALE SAMPLE DATA 98 12 25 9 29 P 1 Init Value Word FAC Address IO Camrents 1 000000 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No
469. n be set only with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 3 Can be set only with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 4 Can be set only with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and V2 System Setting PT Configuration NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT11S NT600S NT620S NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Initial Screen Enable Buzzer Key Input a Resume Function Backlight OFF 128 x x x x x Number of Table 512 Entries Numeral 1000 Table 2000 Number 128 of Table 256 Entries String 1000 Table 2000 xixixi x x x x xlex xxje x oe Number of Table 256 Entries Bit Memory Table x xi x x e x x x 517 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT11S Nreoos NTe2os NT620C NT625C NT631C NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Ver 4 Printer Printer for PT Mode History Alarm Setting Screen Numeral Display Type 1 Setting is not possible from the Support Tool Set these items at the PT 2 For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C set th
470. n frame needs to be checked adjusted For how to perform the correction refer to Correction related to keyboard screens page 470 Word configuration of PT control notify area differs between the source and destination PT model Check the program at the host and make corrections For details refer to Appendix A NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode Some changes will occur on the screens such as in the sizes of touch switches and the positions of objects check all converted screens and correct them as necessary NT30 NT30C NT31 NT31C If a keyboard screen is used the size of the keyboard screen frame NT620S NT620C NT631 NT631C with needs to be checked adjusted For how to perform the correction refer NT625C V2 or V3 2 to Correction related to keyboard screens page 470 NT31 NT31C NT31 NT31C Not needed NT631 NT631C with NT631 NT631C with 2 or NT31 NT31C NT31 NT31C Not needed NT631 NT631C with NT631 NT631C with 2 or 1 When converting the screen data from NT30 620 series to NT31 631 se ries we recommend converting to NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with 2 using NT30 620 compatible mode This requires less modification of screen data and is easy to perform In this case check if the system pro gram installed in the PT is Ver3 or Ver 4 For details of how to install the system program refer to Appendix B System Installer Operation 2 On con
471. n select Change Label The label name change dialog box is displayed 3 Set your desired symbol name and click the Button Help it 2tr fm Symbol Manager SymFilel SBL Str to File Edit View Label Datal File Edit Vi He Paste Ctrit 7 CeleurPalette jel a 3 GROUP rx gt BEN Cancel bata LL Supplement Symbols JElete Changing the symbol icon It is possible to change the icon of the symbol data to a desired one To change the icon follow the procedure shown below The data that can be used for an icon is bit map data 1 Select the symbol for which the icon should be changed The symbol name is displayed in reverse video 2 Select Edit in the menu bar then select Choose Icon The data selection dialog box is displayed 3 Specify the bit map data that should be used as an icon and click on IDE Help Trees isis zu Cut CtrleX ans Copy Ctrl C ou Paste 424 GROUP Delet Data Erg L Supplement Symbols J Supplement Symbols Change Label Reference For an icon 16 x 16 dot 8 color bit map data can be used Although bit map data larger than 16 x 16 dots can be used only the 16 x 16 dots at the upper left area of such data is used Saving a folder file After registering the symbol data save the registered data to a file by the opera tion shown below Select File in the menu bar then select Save
472. nce Search Help As the reference of bit memory table setting please refer to 6 3 Alarm When converting the bit memory table from NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C to NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C the function setting is not the same with before converting To adjust the setting of this bit memory table please refer to Data Conversion Bit memory conversion in Appendix A Items set to use the screen switching function To use the screen switching function follow the procedure below 1 Input PLC address directly on a PLC address field on a bit memory table entry or click on Set and input PLC address on a PLC address dia log Refer to Word setting for an element on page 129 Input I O comment if required Click on 7 Select Switch Screen from function combo box Setting items for screen switching function are displayed BS to display function dialog 4 Set screen number to be switched for Screen No Settings to make at the Set dialog PLC Address Specify the bit in a PC PLC whose status is reflected by the bit memory table entry Comment Specify a comment for a PC PLC bit A comment can comprise up to 16 characters Settings to make at the Function dialog Function Select Alarm Switch Screen for NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C and select Switch Screen for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C 290 Bit Memory Table Section 7 4 Switch Screen
473. nd Display 96 Back ground Object 1 Can be used only with NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and above 2 Can be used only with NT31 631C System Ver 3 1 and above 536 Appendix Limits on Numbers of Elements Limits with Conventional Models For 20 NT20S NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C and NT625C the limits on the use of elements are indicated below for each PT model Item Limit Numeral Display 50 entries screen String Display NT20 NT20S 32 entries screen Other models 50 entries screen Bar Graph 50 entries screen Broken line graph NT20 NT20S NT600S Not supported Other models 1 frame screen 256 lines frame Trend Graph NT20 NT20S NT600S Not supported Other models 1 frame screen 50 lines screen data file Lamp NT20 NT20S 128 entries screen NT600S 255 entries screen Other models 256 entries screen Touch Switch NT20 NT20S 72 entries screen NT600S 128 entries screen Other models 256 entries screen Data Input Numeral Data Input String 50 entries screen overlapping screens Registration is possible only on one child Screen Alarm List Alarm History NT20 NT20S NT600S Not supported Other models 4 groups screen max 32 groups in overlapping screens 537 Limits on Numbers of Elements New Models 538 Item Appendix
474. nd OFF refer to page 337 Open Displays the editing screen library editor of the selected code P343 When two or more codes are selected edit screens of all the selected codes can be opened oollectively New Registers the new library code to the library table refer to page 339 Only the registered library codes are listed on the library table Press this button when you are going to create new library data Delete Deletes the library data of the selected code When two or more codes are selected they can be deleted collectively Close Closes the library table dialog 336 Library Editor Section 8 2 Help Displays Help about the library table dialog box Specifying a code To specify a code for operations click on the objective line library code To specify the continuous codes collectively click on the first code to be se lected and then the last code to be selected while pressing the Shift key If you click on a code while pressing the Ctrl key the code will be selected or deselected alternately each time it is clicked Size 1000 120 X 190 250 X 150 Com 145 X 88 _ 50 x 50 Shift Click 180 X 150 Code Size 1000 1120 X 19 1002 50 X 50 Ctrl Click 180 X 150 d Preview Function Support Tool provides a preview function that can display the contents of the se
475. nd paste it onto the data creation screen 9 Move the Auto button pasted at the upper left area of the screen to the Man button position 10 Double click the moved button and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged Copy From Numeral Table String Table Code Entry Text Box Creating the Step button and the Reset button 11 Create the Step button and the Reset button in the same manner as the Man button For the Step button and the Reset button change the properties as shown below Step but Reset ton button Copy From Numeral Table String Table 4 Code Entry Text Box 13 Reset Creating the button group title bar 12 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Polyline 13 While pressing the shift key drag the polyline from start point to the se cond vertex and then from the second vertex to the third vertex Repeat this procedure to create the desired form Release the Shift key just before reaching at the last point 392 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Reference To draw continuous polyline press shift key when drag operation is finished Dragging this end point creates continuous polyline 14 Use the properties as they are Creating the Select character string 15 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Text 16 Click t
476. nded I O input output table is discarded Correct the screen data and a host program so that unusable table entries can be replaced with inputs outputs of a host etc Refer to 7 5 Extended I O Input Table and 7 6 Extended I O Output Table When an image code is converted between a conventional and a new model conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the image codes between them Difference New models Conventional models Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion 0001 to OFFF hexadecimal Status after Conversion FE20 to FEFF hexadecimal Error Message Corrective Action Conventional model Assume the code is X New model The code is X FE1F E Image Table entry has been con verted The code for screen element Object Name has been converted from XXXX to YYY New model Assume the code is Y Conventional model The code is Y FE1F if the con verted code is out side the usable range the code is fixed as FE20 The code for screen element Object Name has been converted from XXXX to YYY If the code after conver sion differs from the image code to be used change the code to the correct one Refer to 8 1 Image Editor When a library code is converted between a conventional and a new model con version is executed in the manner shown below due to differ
477. nded to the ad dresses before the change are also appended to the addresses after the change 6 Clickon Setting the current object status as the existing value Register the status of the selected object as the existing value of the same kind of object This feature allows the status of the object when it is registered to the screen to be changed eliminating the operation steps to modify the property of the object Note that the PC PLC address and reference memory table entry cannot be registered as the existing value 1 Specify the object to be registered as the existing value select only one ob ject 2 Draw menu bar Use as Default Or select Use as Default from pop up edit menu 135 Section 6 1 The current set status of the specified object is registered as the existing val ue of the same kind of object 6 1 11 Relationships between Elements and Memory Tables The relationships between elements and memory tables are shown below When creating an element attend carefully to the memory table address capac ity etc Reading from a memory table Writing to a memory table Character String Memory Table Bit Memory Table String Table Numeral Memory Table Numeral display Bar graph Analogue Meter Broken line graph Trend graph Numeral setting Touch switch for inputting control code Numeral setting Tou
478. ndicates Right left handle Up down handle Apex handle 1 i 96 Window Keyboard Screens Section 5 4 3 To move the pop up frame drag any position in the dotted lines other than handles When the mouse cursor is positioned on dotted lines other than at handles the shape of mouse cursor changes as shown below The pop up display frame moves when the mouse cursor is dragged in this state I EN 4 4 After the size and the position of the pop up display frame are determined click on an arbitrary point in the screen other than the pop up display frame The size and the position of the pop up display frame are set and the han dles are cleared To change the size and the position of the pop up display frame repeat the procedure shown above from step 1 Reference The size and position of the pop up display frame can be specified as follows NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C Specify by 1 dot unit NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Specify by 20 dot 5 4 2 Improved Input Key window Keyboard Function This section describes input key window keyboard function that was improved for the NT21 and the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above Types of windows Following two types of windows are available Global window This window can be kept displaying all the time regardless of the screen dis played on PT Global window stays at the same position even when the displayed screen is switched
479. nding help information is displayed Checking the input method of PLC address PLC address dialog box is displayed when an address is allocated to an object If PLC Address Help is selected in the Help menu the help about the PLC ad dress dialog box that shows the input method of PLC address is displayed Checking the Support Tool version If About NT series Support Tool is selected in the Help menu the dialog box that shows the version of the Support Tool is displayed If you have questions on the Support Tool please check the version of your Sup port Tool before contacting 77 SECTION 5 Screen Types This section deals with the types of screens that can be created by the Support Tool 5 1 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations 80 5 1 1 Setting the Screen Attributes llle 80 951 2 Grid Sette tke ean a daran nra 82 5 1 3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool 83 5 1 4 Function sueseeeeeseeeeee ehm hh ht 87 5 1 5 Switching Screens by Extended I O Input at Each Screen 89 5 1 6 Saving the Screen Image gt cece eee eect eens 90 572 Standard Screen upset oy a whet eles adits Oe Geese whe 90 5 3 Continuous Overlapping Screens 60 0 91 9 3 1 Continuous Screens ida Ag ose aa ERR age A E 92 5 3 2 Overlapping Screens sse 93 5 3 3 Edi
480. ng ON of the ex tended I O input at each screen is shown below 1 Select the screen for which Extended 1 0 is to be set to place the screen in edit enabled state 2 Select Screen in the menu bar then select Extended 1 0 An extended I O input table dialog box is displayed Description Goto Entry 3 Select the extended I O input row where setting is to be done and click on Set 89 Standard Screen Section 5 2 An extended I O input setting dialog box is displayed Extended I O Input Setting Cancel Help Function Screen No 4 Set Switch Screen for Function and the screen number of the screen to be displayed for Screen 5 1 6 Saving the Screen Image The Support Tool provides a function to save the displayed screen image in a bit map file as it is The grid display status and Show Tag can be also saved The following describes the procedure for saving the screen image 1 Select the screen that is going to be saved in a file so that it can be edited 2 Select Screen in the menu bar then select Copy to Image A dialog box is displayed to set a file name 3 Set the folder and file name then click on se The screen image is saved to the specified file 5 2 Standard Screen A standard screen is the base screen for the display at a PT Screen numbers of standard screens differ depending on the PT model The table belo
481. ng display objects created on the lamp touch switch 1 Itis also possible to use the screen data after conversion without perform ing the above modification Conversion from V2 V3 models to conventional models Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a V2 V3 mod el a lamp touch switch allocated a newly added func tion is registered in the symbol manag er According to the status before con version the label will be converted to a default status La bel or OFF label see below See below Create a fixed display object or a numeral string display object on a lamp touch switch use Group function if needed so that it matches the status be fore conversion Label error messages following conversion from V2 models to conventional model Label Type Static not supported Label will be set to Off Description Label Type Static not supported Label will be set to default On Off Static Off label one line Label Type On Off Static not supported Label will be set to Off Description Off label two or Label Type On Off Static not supported Label will be set to Default more lines Numeral Display Label Type Numeral Display not supported Label will be set to Default String Display Label Type String Display not supported Label will
482. ng the Date and Time It is possible to set the date and time to PT from the Support Tool or to read the date and time from the PT to display them at the Support Tool Operation procedure 440 The functions that can be used are indicated below PT Model Setting Date Time Reading Date Time NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S NT600S x x NT21 x x NT30 NT30C 6205 NT620C NT625C O O NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C 1 2 x x 2 The NT21 can read clock data from the PLC PT has the clock function For displaying and setting the date time at a PT use the System Menu Select Connect menu bar Date and Time The date and time dialog box is displayed Current Date amp Time Date 19 Mar 1998 Thursday 25 Time 152647 Set ate ear Get Current Date amp Time Displays the date and time at the time the dialog box is displayed Date This area is used for sending receiving date data to from a PT To set the date at a PT set Year Month Day and Day of Week here and execute sending downloading Click the Set button to download it to the PT To read the date data of a PT execute receiving uploading and the result is displayed here Click the Get button to upload it from the PT At first the same contents as displayed at Current Date amp Time are dis played Time This area is used for sending receiving the time to from a PT Setting and
483. nly when 2 colors is set for the color mode Background Set the color of background in the image data display area Setting is possible only when 2 colors is set for the color mode EH Displays the list for selecting the image data when Direct is specified Displays the list for referencing the numeral table entry when Indirect is specified When the image data is firstly specified the data of character code FE20H for the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C and NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above with NT20 30 620 compatible mode or the data that corresponds to image library code 0001H for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C without NT20 30 620 compatible mode is arranged as default The mark shown below will be displayed if image data has not been created for the specified code x To change the image data to be displayed click on in the property and se lect the desired image data or numeral table entry from the list If you are using the NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C V1 and above and its system program version is 2 1 and above Indirect reference can be set The procedure for specifying the desired image data is shown below Direct Specify the code of the image data to be displayed directly 153 Section 6 2 Fixed Display 154 1 Click on __ at the right side of the Code field after checking the Direct but ton in the property setting dialog box to display the image data selection dia log b
484. nly with NT31 NT31C NT631and NT631C with V1 and above AB and GE can be set only with NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C below V1 Siemens can be set only with NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 Re fer to page 27 OMRON Mitsubishi A Mitsubishi Fx MEMLINK AB GE Siemens Font Type If you are using NT31 V1 NT31C V1 NT631 V1 NT631C V1 and above hard ware or had NT31 NT31C NT631and NT631C and been updated the system program to the V2 System Ver 3 1 system program which is attached to this Support Tool it is possible to select the Font Type ISO8859 1 or CP437 If you are using the European Keyboards please refer to Appendix K for more details Reference Specify OMRON as the PLC type when using memory links between the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C Comment Set the comment that is appended to the screen data file An arbitrary character of up to 28 characters can be set Reference The PT model of the screen data that is opened can be changed If it is changed the data is converted automatically Note that changing of PT models is allowed only for the restricted combinations shown in Appendix A Data Con version Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 System page The System page is displayed when users click on the System tab Fundamental operating functions can be set in this System page PT Configuration PT
485. nput field use the CLR key the BS key and the DEL key 3 When a numeral setting input field is moved the touch switch is also moved automatically To modify or move a numeral setting input field and a touch switch independently cancel the check mark set for Auto Arrange in the Settings page of the touch switch properties 4 The cursor can also be moved using an arrow symbol key touch switch The cursor moves in the order the numeral input elements were created this or der can be changed after creating the elements 5 With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C when hexadecimal val ue is input it is regarded as signed binary data and upper lower limit check is performed Therefore if the top bit is 1 it is regarded as negative value and input will be prohibited when the minimum limit was set as O In this case set those value such as 80000000 2147483648 for minimum limit setting to prevent it from being checked Reference At the numeral setting input field the written numeric value in the numeral memory table is displayed when the J key is pressed Since this is different from the one read from the numeral memory table entry it is necessary to use another numeral input element to read out the data from the same address of the numeral memory table entry Numeral input element Screen Set numeral Numeral memory table 1 2 Set numeral
486. nse to touching a message Specified PC PLC bit Stored in alarm history P ABC 96 04 10 The range of bit memory table entries used for checking bit status is set by the alarm list 7 4 1 Operation Procedure The bit memory table setting dialog box is displayed by following either of the op erations described below At the properties of the alarm list element click on the table entry number field e Select Tools menu bar Table then click Bit Memory tab Setting For bit memory table entries the objective of the operation is specified by clicking on a line The necessary setting can be made by input using a keyboard or by selection using a drop down list For the operation procedure for Reference Search Change Address Edit gt and refer to 7 1 Common Operation Note that Reference Cannot be used if bit memory table entry is displayed by the operation using an element property 7 4 2 Related Elements Alarm list element Object Alarm List Alarm history element Object Alarm History 289 Bit Memory Table Section 7 4 7 4 3 Description of Bit Memory Table Fields Numeral String Comments Bit Memory No Function Description PLC Address 1 0 Commer Change Address Function Edit gt Set Goto Entry Close Refere
487. nt File Management Export Import Management Appendix D 7 Italian 8 Spanish Character set A character set is an ordered set of characters in which a numeric index code point value is associated with each character Different languages and locales may be used in different character sets Character sets to choose from are provided based on the language selected However for the Translation Support Utility the following are the character set shown 1 Japanese Shift JIS 2 Simplified Chinese GB 2312 3 Traditional Chinese BIG 5 4 Latin ISO 8859 1 CP437 Filename An output filename is provided as a default The filename can be edited All translation data for each of the source applications with their respective translation will be stored in a Microsoft Access relational database which has to be retained for later retrieval of translated data for modification etc You can update the database with the latest application information When updating the database Translation Support Utility checks for changes made at the source file Items will be added removed or updated depending on the current file As a result there may be new text requiring translation or already translated text that is obsolete in the database Upon opening a source application MMI file for translation the user will be prompted to inform the utility about the language character set pertaining to the application that is going t
488. number of window keyboard screens to be opened When a window keyboard screen is converted conversion is executed as shown below due to differences in number of window keyboard screens that can be dis played at the same time Difference New models NT21 NT31 631 V1 and above Up to three window keyboard screens can be opened at the same time 1 Global Window and 2 Local Win dows With a screen attribute up to two local windows can be specified as pop up windows to be displayed when the screen is opened With a touch switch cursor move and input key win dow keyboard function specification of local win dow 1 or 2 is possible Conventional models New models NT31 631 Only one window keyboard screen can be opened Local window 1 keyboard only With a screen attribute only one window can be spe cified as a pop up window to be displayed when the screen is opened With a touch switch cursor move and input key win dow keyboard function specification of only local window 1 keyboard is possible Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a new model with V1 and above local window 2 is specified for the attribute of touch switch And the touch switch is reg istered to the sym bol manager Minimum value is restored for window keyboard screen number Correction related
489. nute Comments 1 4 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 Ij BAHRAHRAAHAHARAHAHAAAHAAALA Screen History of Frequence Screen Comments 1 10 HISTORY TITLE 2 10 HISTORY TITLE 2 12 1 4 Image Library Report A list of the image data and the library data is printed or displayed Image Library List ri 98 04 30 22 01 P 447 Type Code Compression Color Mode Size Comments Image 1 Yes 8 Colors 64x48 Image 2 Yes 8 Colors 64x48 Library 1000 200x200 Library 1001 200x200 Library 1002 200 200 Library 1003 200x200 Library 1004 200x200 Library 1005 200x200 447 Report Types Section 12 1 12 1 5 Mark List A list of mark data is printed or displayed Mark List 98 04 30 22 01 P 448 FF2 FF3 FF4 FF5 FF6 FF FF8 FF9 FFA FFB FFC FFD FFE FFF HSUP4 4 2 27AYtiecnJ C39 C9 C9 C9 C9 c9 0000 fd 1
490. nversion Error Message The sampling cycle can be set in the range from 0 1 to Corrective Action With a conventional model the sampling cycle is set in units other than 0 5 s With a new model the sampling cycle is corrected to 0 5 s unit cycle corrected to the nearest val ue Sampling cycle less than minimum val ue Minimum value restored Sampling cycle not multiple of 5 Value rounded off to near est multiple of 5 Correction related to the 100 value 0 value and 100 value of a graph Since there are no prob lems in actual operation correction is not neces sary In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model conver sion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the range of numeral that can be input 483 Difference New models Conventional models Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Data Conversion Appendix A A numeric value of up to 10 digits can be input for a 96 value value Status after Conversion Error Message A numeric value of up to 8 digits can be input for a Corrective Action With a new model a graph for which a value greater than 100000000 or smaller than 10000000 is set for a 6 value is reg istered With conventional model if a value is outside the allow able range it is re placed as shown below for a 10096
491. o be opened for translation At any given time only one application can be opened Standard file operations are available for the user to close files save files and exit the utility which will prompt you to save if any changes have been made The following are the file types involved in translation management for this utility MMI files Memory Map Image file corresponding to NTST data mdb files Microsoft Access database storing translation data for source and target e xls files for Export Import functionality Export 1 All language column headers excluding the source will be displayed for selection of export and the user will be able to select one or more languages for export from among them 513 Translation Support Utility Appendix D 2 The ID for screen objects containing the label and the source text will be mandatory export fields and therefore will be exported automatically 3 For multi line text new lines will remain unchanged and also image library and mark codes will remain in binary when exported 4 Non translated text will be exported as blank 5 Column widths will take the default for Microsoft Excel after export The ex ported format in Excel will resemble that of the Translation Table Import 1 You are allowed to export translated string data for one or more languages of your selection and also will be able to view and change each data item under a language before it is
492. o be related to a corresponding function key 7 8 1 Operation Procedure An F Key Input Notify Table is displayed by following the operation described be low e Select Tools menu bar Table F Key Input Notify tab Specify the edit field Set 307 Mathematical Table Section 7 9 7 8 2 Description of F Key Input Notify Table PLC Bit Address Comment Table Entry Number The table entry number field or the No column is not editable All table entries are listed in ascending order of their entry numbers starting from zero to one less than the maximum number of entries Table Entry No F Key Input 0 F1 F2 F3 F4 PLC Bit Address Specify the PC PLC bit that you want to link with the Function Key Comment Specify a comment for a PC PLC address or bit A comment can comprise up to 16 characters 7 9 Mathematical Table Mathematical table is only available for the NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above The table may contain 0 to 255 entries and each entry can be assigned a mathemati cal formula The result of each calculation can be stored in either a Numeral Table entry or a PLC address 7 9 1 Operation Procedure The mathematical table setting dialog box is displayed by following either of the operations described below Select Tools menu bar Mathematical Table Double click on Mathematical Table from application manager window 7 9 2 Supported Objec
493. o show the object contents For newly installed symbol data with V4 6 the preview is immediately available Old data can be reused into this version but a preview is not applicable To make Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Section 6 10 a preview of old data copy the data to the screen on V4 6 and then copy it back to the symbol manager to register the preview information E Symbol Manager 1507000 40700 0 E3 File Edit View Help 0714 Paper jam in sorter 0715 Paper jam in original master fe 0716 Call for key operator assistanc 0717 Call for maintenance 0718 Add sheet paper material 0719 Add roll paper material 0720 Add dry toner 0721 Add ink W 0722 Add liquid toner T Preview File configuration The symbol manager is controlled in a data file that is separate from the screen data file The symbol data file configuration is shown below NTST4 7 Symbol SPPLMNT SBL File storing the keyboard and keypad data Color PL SBL File storing tiling objects SYMFILE1 SBL SYMFILE2 SBL Group of files storing newly registered symbols A file is created for each symbol SYMFILE3 SBL Reference For the Support Tool keyboard data for each PT model color palette and ISO elements are provided as symbol data 253 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Section 6 10 6 10 2 Basic Symbol Manager Operation Starting up the symbol manager Basic operation
494. ock is allocated to disable the input PT Constant Screen 123 a i Disable the input PC PLC Numeral setting input field Touch switch copy function Only for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above Extended Input Out put NT30 NT30C only 424 To switch the displayed screen using an external switch Tools Table Extended 1 0 input Set the screen switching function for an extended I O input table entry PT Screen No 1 Screen No 2 Quick Reference Extended Input Out put NT30 NT30C only To notify the PC PLC of the ON OFF status of an external switch Operation Tools Table Extended 1 0 input Set the Notify Bit Function for an extended I O input table entry PT PC PLC gt Extended I O table gt Extended input l O 4 Section 10 1 Refer to To input a numeric value using an external switch numeric keys etc 1 Objects Data Input Numeral Create a numeral setting input field 2 Tools Table Extended I O input Set the control code input function for an extended I O input table entry PT Extended inpu control code input function 8 9 5 16 213 T
495. of this numeral or string memory table entry are displayed and if indirect Reference is selected the con tents of this numeral memory table entry are treated as the reference table entry number and the contents of the reference memory table entry are displayed Edit Displays the Numeral Display or String Display property page For description on property settings refer to 6 6 Numeral Display and 6 7 Character String Display To check lamp ON status on the editing screen select Simulate ON OFF from the View menu Additionally to view flashing display of lamp attribute select Simulate Flash from the View menu For details refer to 5 1 3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool The following kinds of standard lamps are provided Rectangle Circle Polygon Sector 197 Lamps Section 6 5 The shape of a lamp can be modified when you select polygon or sector Use the element edit function to modify the lamp shape For details refer to page 112 1 Click on a line of a polygon or a sector while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key 2 Drag a green mark to modify the graphic 3 To add a green W mark addition of a vertex position the mouse cursor on the line in a graphic and execute the vertex addition operation right click the mouse Add Node To delete a green mark deletion of a node position the mouse cursor the green mark to be deleted and execute the vertex del
496. ofessional Edition and XP Pro Home Edition Automatically Adjusted Screen Size when Editing Starts In response to the high resolution of personal computers recently the screen size is now automatically enlarged when editing screens Main Differences of V4 8 Support for the NT20 PTs has been added to version 4 8 of the NT series Support Tool for Windows e The NT20 system program has been added e The system installer has been updated to support the NT20 system program 1 2 Equipment Necessary for Using the Support Tool The following indicates the equipment necessary for using the Support Tool Hardware Recommended CPU Pentium 100 MHz or faster CPU Personal Computer Use an IBM personal computer or 10096 compatible Recommended Memory General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Operating system 32 Mbytes minimum Free area in hard disk At least 52 Mbytes is required to install everything The following options can be selected at installation Support Software Approx 23 Mbytes System installer Only system installer Approx 8 Mbytes With support programs Approx 30 Mbytes Samples parts parts list etc Approx 40 Mbytes CD ROM drive At least one drive is required if the Support Tool is provided on CD ROM Display VGA compatible display When creating screen data for a PT that has a color display a color display is required When the resolution setting of desktop area is low lower t
497. og for both Static and On Off Static labels is shown be low For Static the label can be set by changing description of Off Label group box of Standard Lamp Label dialog box On Label group box will be disabled For On Off Static the Off Label and the On Label can be set by changing descrip tion of corresponding text boxes Touch Switch lt Label gt General m Off Label Description E Insert Mark m On Label EN Description ss Insert New Line E Set Lines Line Spacing 2 d Font Type Standard Smoothing Scale 1x1 Equal M Attribute Standard m Colour OFF 7 EEN Background Transparent Cancel Apply Off Description Specify the text of the label that will be displayed when lamp bit is OFF 213 Touch Switches Section 6 8 On Description Specify the text of the label that will be displayed when lamp bit is ON Line Spacing Determines the space between two lines in both the Off De scription and the On Description Insert New Line Inserts a new line character in the description to bring the fol lowing characters to the next line On the Label Description edit box the new line character will be shown as n Set Lines Displays the On Off Description Settings dialog box This dialog is for entering Off Description and On Description with multiple lines In all NT31 631 V2 models Labels can be entered in multip
498. ol The procedure for starting up the Support Tool installed in your personal comput er and exiting it is shown below 3 1 1 Start up Procedure To start up the Support Tool select Programs Omron gt NTST4 8E gt NT Series Support Tool beginning with the Windows start button Programs fa OMRON 25 NT Transfer Utility Accessories NT series Support Tool Documents gt if Games py NT series System Installer Startup T Readme 8 Internet Explorer a Translation Support Utility Search gt MSN Explorer Uninstall NT Transfer Utility fe Outlook Express Uninstall NTST Remote Assistance Uninstall Translation Support Utility e Windows Media Player 33 Windows Messenger Settings Help and Support Run Log Off HMI Windows XP Professional Turn Off Computer After the start up of the Support Tool the main window shown below is dis played File View Connect Help a e For Help press 1 Reference Up to two Support Tools can be started up at the same time You can copy and paste the screen data or table data between them by open ing the two different screen data files To start up the second Support Tool se lect Import Component from the File menu in the main window of the first Support Tool It is not possible to start up the second Support Tool from the Start menu of Windows For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from
499. olor palette symbol is set to White Change the border color of tiling object by displaying property sheet if required Note that the transparent background color is not registered for color palette symbol Change the property afterwards when you want to apply transparent background 6 11 Recipe Screen Element 6 11 1 Recipe Screen Element Recipe screen element provides you with an interface to apply a set of data val ues from the recipe table to the PLC It can only be placed on a standard screen and it can be displayed in the parent screen The screen element property dialog box has 4 pages general touch switch setting and interlock Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Data Input Recipe Selection using the drawing toolbar Terminology Parameters Tare _ ELCHE mai usen aad Touch Switch Page amp Line Scroll Touch Switch Records Description of Recipe Screen Element Components Name Specifies the recipe name 261 Recipe Screen Element Section 6 11 262 Number Color Displays parameter names Object A Object C Displays record names 100 4 Displays record numeral data Write Transfer data to PLC Read Transfer data from PLC 2 Scroll 1 page up Y Scroll 1 page down Scroll 1 page left id Scroll 1 page right Scroll 1 line up Scroll 1 line down Scroll 1 line left
500. on Section 1 Refer to 0 1 Writing Data to the PC PLC To disable the input ac cording to the ON OFF status of a PC PLC bit 1 Objects Data Input Numeral String Recipe or Thumbwheel Switch Create a data input object and set Interlock on 2 Turn OFF the PC PLO bit to which the interlock is allocated to disable from inputting Numeral setting input field Disable the input PT Screen we 4 7 I B Numeral memory table 4123 PC PLC E Bit Touch switch control code input or system keypad Only for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above It is possible to disable the input into a data input object by using Numeral Character string input flag in PT status con trol bits Except NT20 NT20S and NT600S To store calculated result in numeral table entry 1 Tools Mathematical Table Click on Set button to specify the formula for calculation and set result to specific Numeral table entry To store calculated result in a specified PLC ad dress 1 Tool Mathematical Table Click on Set button to specify the formula for calculation and set result to specific PLC address To store more than one value in a specified PLC address 1 Tools Recipe Table Create Recipe entry 2 Objects Data Input Recipe Create Recipe object referring to th
501. on Section 7 1 Table Type Objective of Search Replacement I O comment table comment Extended I O input table Extended I O output table Description of search dialog box 270 PC PLC address Initial value or contents of initial value Search By inital vare 2 Search By Find What Close Close PLC Address d Set Replace All 128 Replace All Replace With ase Replace PLC Address 456 Ss Help Image library code comment Search Search By image Library code Search By fio Comment z Find What ose Find What Close 0001 Replace All Line Replace All Css ud Replace Replace With ga Process Search Specify the objective data for the search or replacement operation PC PLC address Data set for addresses of table entries Initial value contents Data set for the initial values of a numeral memory table entry or character string memory table entry string table Image library code Image library codes set for a bit memory table entry comment I O comment in I O comment table Find What Set the data to be searched for or replaced Replace With Set the new data to replace the data set for Find What Clicking this button starts search processing When the specified data is found the cur
502. on 7 Memory Table Setting or Section 8 Editing Graphic Data Operation using the mouse 1 Double click the icon of the table data to be edited Operation using the mouse 2 Operation using the menu Make a right click on the icon of the table data to be edited then select Modify 1 Select Tools in the menu bar then choose Table Image Editor Library Editor or Mark Editor 2 If Table is chosen select the tab of the table to be edited 4 2 9 Copying an Entire Table Caution Reference An entire table can be copied between the screen data files of the same PT mod el by starting up two Support Tools Copying of tables screens and objects between two screen data files involves addition or overwriting of PLC address Please check the movement sufficiently before shifting to actual operation To start up second Support Tool select Import Component from File menu For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool f the whole table is copied all the contents in the specified table are copied collectively For method to copy the individual data in a table refer to Section 7 Memory Table Setting or Section 8 Editing Graphic Data A check box for Overwrite PLC Address appears when copying the whole table indicated below If this check box is checked PLC address setting is over written If not checked settings such as
503. on related to the number of memory tables 472 The screen no xxx was a history occur rence frequency Screen that is not supported in this model It is dis carded Since the number of entries that can be used in the memory tables depend on the PT model conversion is executed in the manner shown below Difference NT11S NT11 NT600S NT21 NT620S NT31 NT620C NT31C NT625C NT631 NT631C Numeral memory table 512 1000 or 2000 512 or 1000 Character string memory table String table 256 1000 or 2000 256 or 1000 Bit memory table 256 or 256 1000 Extended I O input table Extended I O output table F key input notify table Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Conversion result error message and corrective action Error Message Corrective Action A memory table number that is out side the allowable range for the memory table is used for display or input The memory table number is reset to 0 Object Name re fers to invalid nu meral table entry The referenced table entry is reset to entry O Correct the memory table number to the one that is in the valid range If the memory table number is specified in a program correct it also Refer to Dialog Box Settings in the PT Con figuration on page 46 Data Conversion Appendix A Correction related to contents of
504. onding to the code in the list 344 Mark Editor Section 38 3 A code can be selected either from the displayed list or by specification in the Code field If a code is selected in the list the specified part is displayed enlarged Mark Editor x S how Marks 8 Code 20 he EE Connect Window Table Image Editor Library Editor Mark Editor Import I O Comments id Validate 12 PT Configuration Cancel Reset 7 N n o m e Cancel Help Reference Operating the mark editor Using the mark editor you can create a mark by tiling dots arranged in a matrix To tile a dot position the cursor on it and left click the mouse To cancel tiling right click the mouse on a tiled dot Created graphics can be copied or pasted using the standard toolbar and lines rectangles and circles can be easily created using the drawing toolbar Reference When two Support Tools are started up by Import Component from the File menu the data that is cut or copied on the mark editor of one Support Tool can be pasted onto the mark editor of another Support Tool PT model setting of the two screen data files should be the same For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Com ponents from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool Standard toolbar ZJE A A A Redo operation canceled by undo is executed again Undo previous operation is canc
505. only for NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C To make the screen switching function valid click on the check box to display a check mark in it If you click on the check box when it already has a check mark in it the check mark is cleared and the screen switching function is made invalid For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C whether or not the screen switching function is used is determined by the setting for Function Screen No Specify the screen No of the screen to which the screen switches when the bit memory table entry goes ON Items set to use the alarm function To use the alarm function follow the procedure below 1 Input PLC address directly on a PLC address field on a bit memory table entry or click on Em and input PLC address on a PLC address dia log Refer to Word setting for an element on page 129 Input I O comment if required Click on Select Alarm or Alarm Switch Screen from function combo box Setting items for Alarm function are displayed BS to display function dialog 4 Make the settings for the alarm function See below Settings to make at Set dialog PLC Address Specify the bit in a PC PLC whose status is reflected by the bit memory table entry Comment Specify a comment for a PC PLC bit A comment can comprise up to 16 characters Settings to make at Function dialog Function Select Alarm Switch Screen for NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and
506. ontents of the character string memory table entry string table are written to the allocated words in the host when the PT is Switched on or reset or the mode is changed from the System Menu to RUN The term initialize means the processing to initialize the content of words in the host with the content in a character string memory table entry string table The setting for Initial is not valid if a character string memory table entry string table is not allocated to a host word To make Initial valid click on the check box to display a cross mark x in the box If the box is clicked on while it is in the valid state Initial is made invalid The content of character string memory table entries string table at the start of PT operation is as shown below according to whether or not a character string memory table entry string table is allocated to the host the Initial setting for the character string memory table entry string table and whether or not the resume function is used Allocation to Initial setting Host Initial setting Used Not Used Initial value of the char acter string memory table entry string table also for the word in the host Initialized valid Allocated Existing character string memory table string table content retained also for the word in the host Content of the character string memory table entry string table if it is initialized by System Menu ope
507. onversion Rule from CP437 to I808859 1 This conversion will be performed at the time when you try to change the PT Type to the NT21 and NT31 V1 31C V1 631 V1 631C V1 and above with Font Type ISO8859 1 128 199 153 214 129 i 154 220 233 155 162 a 226 156 163 132 228 157 165 s ele Ta 133 224 158 063 gt Tae 134 229 159 063 135 2 160 225 o as 234 161 237 i 235 162 243 158 232 163 250 139 299 164 241 rm 238 165 209 CARNE SUE EN 141 236 ids ii 142 196 186 E 197 168 m hs ee 230 198 147 244 246 565 Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule Appendix N MS DOS CP437 176 ER 177 m 178 a N 180 181 182 4l 4 u _ N o f zi N p o N 19 197 p N N Em a LT N 199 E 566 Windows 1508859 1 gt 187 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 2 063 063 2 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 2 063 2 063 063 063 063 063 063 MS DOS CP437 EN 200 N N 25 ou BK EN lt A N N N A A A AB N oa L 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 21 063 2 063 2 063 063 063
508. ool Be sure to set image library data display area so that image library data fits inside it For an alarm history element the property settings bit memory table entry and character string memory table entry string table are related to each other as shown below History data H0001512 97 02 12 10 51 Displayed at ON Character string Alarm list Bit memory table memory table tring tabl Character string memory lt String table table entry String table o 10 ABC Image library data FE20 1 DEF PC PLC address 0001512 12 13 JKL ABC V orto P PM Image data T Specified PC PLC bit Number of bits Set for No of Bits Referenced table entry No Set for Start Bit Table Entry An alarm history element is used in combination with the bit memory table entry How they function is shown below Setting at bit memory table entry Setting at Set dialog box PLC Address Setting at Function dialog box History Screen No Switch Screen Screen No 171 Alarm Section 6 3 String Table Entry Image Library Code Use of image library data Image library code Color Property settings for alarm history element History Info Order Type Order of Frequency Order of Occurrence All bit memory table entr
509. operation using an element property 299 Comment Table Section 7 7 7 7 2 Description of I O Comment Table Fields Displaying specified word and bit I O comment 2 Editing and adding I O comment Numeral String VO Comments Bit Memory PLC Bit Address VO Comment Ref VO Comments FE Lem He Displaying I O comment for specified word and bit The items displayed on an I O comment table are shown below Address Displays the PC PLC word or bit address that corresponds to the comment 1 0 Comments Displays the comment for the PC PLC word or bit Reference Displays if the word is already used or not Yes Already used in an element or a table No Not used If the indication is Yes you can check where the word in question is used by click ing on Reference For details of the Reference button refer to 7 7 7 Reference Operation For details of the button refer to 7 1 2 Search Operation Editing or adding an I O comment Editing modifying an I O comment To edit modify the I O comment already set click on the table entry number then click Set or edit directly on a table entry PLC Bit Address O Comment 10000400 Trend Graph2 0000500 Graph1 10000600 Bar Graph2 0001000 Numeral D001200 Numeral2 Thumbwheel Swit Thumbwheel Swit 0001400 0010000 300 Comment Table Section 7 7
510. operties as shown below for screen No 10 Attributes Screen No 10 History VE Title Monitor Screen 1 Comment Monitor Screen 1 Buzzer Load Local 1 Keyboard System Keypad Color Background Black Grid Size Custom Horizontal Spacing 5 Vertical Spacing 5 Display Grid Snap to Grid i Creating the screen title Monitor Screen 367 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Copying the screen title from screen No 1 Menu Screen 1 Copy the Menu Screen character string and its frame rectangle on screen No 1 and paste them to screen No 10 2 Adjust the display position of the pasted character string and frame to the desired position Modifying to Monitor Screen 3 Double click the Menu Screen character string and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged If selection of the Menu Screen character string is not easy select Edit menu bar Select Object then click on the fixed display text 4 Adjust the size of the frame rectangle Creating the data display field Numeral Display 1 lhmeral Display il 0 lera Display 4 Setting the title 1 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Text 2 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the nu meral display field title is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner of text
511. opy source screen is displayed as a duplicated number and in the new screen number field the smallest number of the available screen numbers is displayed If you input an existing screen number a confirmation message is displayed to overwrite it Operation using the menu 1 Specify the screen icon Multiple screen icons can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key BS Select Copy from Edit in the menu bar Then select Paste from Edit in the menu bar Input a screen number then click the Button The screen number of the copy source screen is displayed as a duplicated number and in the new screen number field the smallest number of the available screen numbers is displayed If you input an existing screen number a confirmation message is displayed to overwrite it 68 Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 4 2 5 Deleting a Screen The procedure for deleting a created screen is shown below Operation using the mouse 1 Specify the screen icon Multiple screen icons can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key 2 Click right button of the mouse on the selected screen icon then choose Delete The message requesting your confirmation is displayed Operation using the menu 1 Specify the screen icon Multiple screen icons can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift
512. opying a Screen sser iarere nea Eina ana a eE a een eens 68 4 2 5 Deleting a Screen c i RT ERR aee EUR eR AE eae EA 69 4 2 6 Displaying and Setting the PT 69 4 2 7 Displaying and Setting Screen Properties 69 4 2 8 Editing a Tables csc tect sks tM TREO a oe le D MER ete den 69 4 2 9 Copying an Entire Table lseseeeeeeeeee III 70 4 2 10 Saving the Screen Data Application toa File 71 4 2 11 Error Check Validation osses eenaa eea eee eee eee eee 71 4 2 12 Sending Downloading the Data toa PT 73 4 2 13 Window Menu eee cece m n eens 74 4 2 14 Help eee Hi I ey ER EE ERRARE NR TREE gee ene 76 65 What Is the Application Manager Section 4 1 4 1 What Is the Application Manager A screen data application file holds a variety of data The application manager is a data management tool used for managing the various types of screen data Since the application manager displays the data in tree style you can check the created data or read the necessary data easily 1 42 App J 9000 Host Connect LL Table The number and type of screens and tables displayed in the application manag er vary according to the setting made for PT Model of PT Type in the PT config uration Bit map shown above is in case of NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C The appli
513. or later models it is possible to set an interlock bit that can enable dis able the operations 8 Adjust the position of the thumbwheel switch on the data creation screen by dragging it Creating the Start button and the Stop button 387 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Creating the Start button frame 1 Select Objects menu bar Touch Switch 2 Create the Start button frame by dragging the mouse at the button dis play position 3 Set the properties as shown below Position Size Label Start refer to the following 1 Frame Shape Shadow Show ON State Color Frame White ON White OFF Transparent Function Notify Bit Address PC PLC Address L0000100 Comments Start Switch Action Type Momentary Address PC PLC Address 0000200 Comments Start lamp General Light Lamp Attrib ute 1 Press Edit to set the label After completing the setting go to the next step without clicking on button 4 Press edit the general property of a touch switch and set the la bel properties as shown below Start Position Standard Scale 1x2 High Smoothing i Attribute Standard Color White Black Description Font Type Foreground Background Click on returns to touch switch
514. or later models it is possible to set an interlock bit that can enable dis able the operations e Setting the touch switch label 4 Press Edit in the general property of a touch switch and set the la bel properties as shown below Description Monitor Screen Position nins Font Type Standard Scale 2x2 Smoothing Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Transparent 365 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Click on ex return to touch switch property then click on again Adjusting the size and position of the touch switch b Adjust the size and position of the frame of Monitor Screen button 6 Specify the Monitor Screen button 7 Select Centralize Label from Draw menu The label is centralized Creating the Set Screen button Copying and pasting the Monitor Screen button 1 Specify the Monitor Screen button 2 Select Edit menu bar Copy Refer to 6 1 5 Copying Cutting Past ing and Deleting Elements 3 Select Edit menu bar Paste Refer to 6 1 5 Copying Cutting Past ing and Deleting Elements 4 Drag the Monitor Screen button displayed at the upper left area in the data creation screen to the position where you want to create the Set Screen button Modifying to the Set Screen button 5 Double click the moved button and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties m
515. or and or replace specified text m Edit Translation Item or Ins Move focus to the lower pane of Translation Window for user input m Next Item Navigate to previous item under selected column It will wrap around when it reaches the last row Previous Navigate to previous item above se lected column It will wrap around when it reaches the top row m Toolbar Displays or hides toolbar Status Bar Displays or hides status bar m Contents Opens the Online Help About Displays the version number The Standard Tool Bar displays the functions that are used most frequently In the Translation Support Utility the standard toolbar options are Open and Save 504 Translation Support Utility Appendix D These functions can be called easily without selecting the function item from the menu bar File Open A File Open dialog box is a window that is displayed in a fixed size To Open a MMI file select Open in the File Menu of the Application window The File Open Dialog box will be displayed so that the user can select the MMI file that will be opened Click the after selecting the MMI file A Translation Dialog Box will be displayed for the user to enter the language and character set of the file being opened However this translation dialog will not be shown when MMI files are opened subsequently as the languages information will be stored in the data
516. ords NT21 Without NT20 30 620 Compatible mode 2 words With NT20 30 620 Compatible mode 3 words Other models 3 words Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 Comments Set a comment concerning the area set as the PT Status Notify Area As a comment a character string of up to 16 characters can be set Window Control Area PC PLC Address Set the type of words at the PC PLC and the first address word number of the area used as the Window Control Area Window Control Area differs depending on the PT model and it occupies the following number of words NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V1 or V2 9 words Other models can not be used Comments Set a comment concerning the area set as the Window Control Area As a comment a character string of up to 16 characters can be set Note Set memory addresses so that the PT Control Area PT Notify Area and Window Control Area do not overlap PC PLC Address dialog box Clicking on the Set button in the PT Control Area PT Notify Area or Win dow Control Area displays the PC PLC Address dialog box In the PC PLC Address dialog box the PC PLC address of the PT Status Control Area the PT Status Notify Area and the Window Control Area can be Set by specifying the area type and address individually The setting made in the PC PLC Address dialog box will be reflected on the setting made in the PC PLC Control Area PT Notify Area or
517. ore than 12 characters only the first 12 characters from the left will be shown Accepts a character string of up to 8 characters Lock Shows the second value in the CSV file This is the master record flag Only the first character from the right of the value is shown Can only accept 0 or 1 0 unchecked 1 checked Parameter data Show the other values in the CSV file These are the parameter data values If the imported value has more than the number of characters allowed the value will be set to 0 Ignore Ignore this improper line and proceed to import the rest of the lines in the file Ignore All Ignore all improper lines and proceed to import the rest of the lines in the file 321 SECTION 8 Editing Graphic Data The graphic data edit function creates images in the bit map data format library data using fixed elements and marks that display special characters and symbols Sele Image Editor other ewm accent Face A e La oec a 324 8 1 1 Operating the Image 5 324 8 1 2 Creating Image Data Using Image Editor 327 8 2 Tabrary Bditor S Ses xt ce ex ea eder tei I E de IE 336 8 2 1 Operating the Library 336 8 2 2 Creating Library Data Using Library Editor 339 8 3 MarK Editor is ur RAE TUE TAI THERE HER IRE TREE E ste ec 344 8 3 1 Screen Configurat
518. orner 7 Atthe cursor moving touch switch use selection dialog box set the dis played items as shown below Create Cursor Move Touch Switch Setting the numeral input field 8 Set the properties as shown below 384 Position Font Type Standard Scale 2x2 Smoothing Dd Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Black Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Table Entry 10 Display Type Decimal Format Integer 8 Decimal 0 Limit Maximum 99999999 Minimum 0 Zero Suppression 4 Display Sign Focus Frame Focus Attribute Standard 1 Forthe NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 or later models it is possible to set an interlock bit that can enable dis able the operations Setting the cursor moving touch switch 9 Double click on the touch switch area dotted line frame created at the numeral input field position and set the properties as shown below If selection of the touch switch is not easy choose Select Object from the Edit menu and select the touch switch from the list Position Size Frame Shape Standard Show ON State Color Frame White ON White OFF Transparent Function Cursor Move Use Window Keyboard Screen Screen No 1900 Auto Arrange 1 Address PC PLC Address Comments
519. ory table entry if the Storage Type is hexadecimal Example In PC PLC Word F123 1 BCD FFFFFF85 in decimal 123 1 word Binary FFFFF123 in decimal 3805 F1234567 2 words BCD FFED2979 in decimal 1234567 2 words Binary F1234567 in decimal 249346713 1 word BCD 000011D7 in decimal 4567 1 word Binary 00004567 in decimal 17767 1 word BCD FFED2979 in decimal 1234567 1 word Binary FFED2979 in decimal 1234567 Write To No of Words Storage Type In Numeral Memory Table Note lfonly one word is allocated although two words are necessary to express a nu meric value only the lower 4 digits of a numeric value are read or written A suffi cient number of words must be allocated for reading writing a numeric value PLC Address Specify the PC PLC address start address of the area where numeral memory table entries are allocated Comment Specify a comment for a PC PLC word A comment can comprise up to 16 characters 282 Character String Memory Table String Table Section 7 3 Ref Indicates whether the table entry with the specified number is already used or not Yes Already used as an element No Not used If the indication is Yes you can check where the table entry in question is used by clicking on Reference For details of Reference refer to 7 1 1 Reference Operation 7 3 Character S
520. ory types and characters are as follows available only for NT31 631 models 6 ers ibaa O Specification possible x Specification not possible AL AQ T S SA SB SC G Input a Data Offset as a 4 digit number leading zeros can be suppressed PLC Vendor Siemens Possible memory types and characters are as follows available only for NT31 631 V1 models mme 08 5 Lr e Low qm 9 P Siwe o fod ww Word emery o pc a wm o 9 uw ww o x Lr me fo Specification possible x Specification not possible Input a address number as a 4 digit 5 digit in case of DB number leading zeros can be suppressed and a bit number as a 1 digit number Batch address change operation Reference The set PC PLC addresses can be changed into the required addresses in a batch Since the change source can be specified as a range processing such as changing the address range DM 1000 to DM 01499 to the address range DM 1800 to DM 2299 is possible at one time Shifting in bit units is also possible Batch address change operation is possible using either the dialog box displayed by Tools Table or the function called by Tools Change Address De pending on how the address change operation is called the objective addresses 133 Section 6 1 134 diffe
521. ose Search 318 This dialog permits users to specify the setting for all parameters of a recipe table entry When the Words field is changed from 2 to 1 you will be prompted with a mes sage that some data will be lost with this conversion If the value is less than Recipe Table Section 7 10 32 768 or greater than 32 767 the value will be set to 0 Otherwise if the sum of Integer and Decimal digits exceed the maximum limit the number of Decimal digits will be reduced For example given a parameter with settings Dec 4 In teger and 4 Decimal and value 54 3675 when word size is reduced to 1 set ting will become 4 Integer and 1 Decimal and value will be 54 3 When entering values into the Integer and Decimal fields the following validation will occur When Dec Hex is decimal and Integer or Decimal is set so that their sum is greater than the maximum digits allowed once the cell loses the fo cus the following occurs If the entered value is less than or equal to the maximum digits allowed it is accepted Any other value is reduced so that their sum is not greater than the maximum digits allowed b Otherwise the entered value is set to the maximum digits allowed and the oth er value is set to 0 The maximum digits allowed is 5 1 word or 10 2 words Description of Parameter Setting Table Controls Import No Displays the parameter entry number Parameter
522. ossible to disassociate the touch switch with the elements e f the Auto Arrange check box is ticked in the Setting property of cursor move touch switch the cursor move touch switch will always be moved together with the attached data input object So it is not possible to move or resize the cursor move touch switch itself independently To move or resize it first of all cancel the Auto Arrange check box then move or resize it For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the touch switch of trend graph and alarm list history is built into each element It is only possible to change the location of the touch switch Size cannot be changed 1 Select the touch switch that you want to associate Select only one ele ment The touch switches that can be associated to an element should be page or line scroll touch switch 2 Select Associate With from the Draw menu Dialog box that prompts the user to select the elements to be associated will be displayed 3 Choose the data input or Alarm that you want to associate Then click 1 Select the touch switch you want to disassociate Select only one element BS Select Disassociate from the Draw menu Touch switch disassociation will be performed 6 1 9 Centralizing the Label of Lamp and Touch Switch With the Support Tool the label of lamp touch switch can be centralized within the element both vertical and horizontal directions This function is useful
523. ossible to view Inverse Flash state also 85 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 Simulate Flash is applied to each screen individually To activate this setting follow the procedure below 1 Select Simulate Flash from the View menu or click on the Z but ton In the View menu the check mark is set to ON and OFF each time it is se lected When the check mark is displayed the objects that have Flash or Inverse Flash attribute show their flashing status Each time the Simulate Flash button is clicked it changes as follows 26 Flash status being shown Z Flash status not shown Lighting and flashing the lamps touch switches Reference For lamps and touch switches it is possible to specify PLC address for lamp set ting Lamps and touch switches light flash according to the status of the host bit When the PLC address for lamp setting goes to 1 ON they light or flash Whether they light or flash is determined by the lamp attribute set to the object With the Support Tool ON status of lamps and touch switches can be checked on the screen The Simulate ON OFF setting is applied to all the screens being displayed In case of image lamp ON state image and dotted line indicating the position of OFF state image is shown when the state is ON and OFF state image and dotted line indicating the position of ON state image is shown when the state is OFF With th
524. ouch sensing area of touch switch Dotted line frame indicating the display position of image library data of an image lamp The status of an image lamp to be printed depends on the Simulate ON OFF set ting of the View menu With lamp ON sta tus display position of image library data for OFF state is shown with the dotted line frame and with lamp OFF status display position of image library data for ON state is shown with the dotted line frame Screen Specify the screen to be printed All Select this item to print all screens Range Select this item if you want to print only specified screens Specify the screen numbers using a comma as a delimiter By joining two page number with a hyphen you can specify the range 5 12 for example indicates the range from screen No 5 to screen No 12 Include Specify the items to be printed It is possible to select all items Screen Image Specify this to print the screen image Screen Information Specify this to print the detailed screen setting information Lamp Touch Switch Number Specify this when there is a lamp and or touch switch on the screen and you want to print the allo cated bit number of a lamp and or touch switch Usually in the case of a touch switch the allocated bit number specified when setting a lamp is 454 Printing Reports Section 12 2 printed If the notify bit function is set however the notify bit number is printed
525. ouch Switch Function Copy Setting Copy text to a character string memory table entry string table using a touch switch for which the copy function is set 2 Objects String Display Display the contents of the copy destination character string memory table entry string table PT Character string memory table String table gt Constant ABC ABCY Character string display Touch switch copy function Refer to To display a character string in which a special symbol or character is in serted Objects Fixed Display Text Specify the mark or image library code Specification ABC lt 20 gt DE Display ABCXDE To insert image data and library data into a string with NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above Tool PT Configuration Set NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode on The range of image library data is as the same as NT30 620 series in NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode Screen display To display a blank screen Specify screen No 0 at the first word in the PT status con trol area Note With NT20 NT20S NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C NT625S if screen No 0 is set for the touch switch assigned the screen switching function the previous screen is displayed instead of a blank Screen To switch the screen using a touch switch Objects Touch Switch gt Function Switch Screen Create a touch switch for w
526. ouch key allocated B is then pressed the input field shows i l p 2 Touch gt This is stored Press the to store the data input to the input field in the character string memory table memory table string table string table The procedure for creating a character string input touch switch is shown be low NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C 1 Setthe character string input function for the touch switch function 2 Seta check mark for the Label property in the Label tab 8 Click the amp amp Button and input the character string as a label A label may be either a character or a character string consisting of multiple characters When a touch switch is pressed the character string set as the label is set to the character string input field When a lamp bit with an I O comment is set pressing the Copy I O Com ments button copies the I O comment as a label Property setting for input key string touch switch Example General Settings Light Function NT31C Position E x 181 w 9 Width 99 Height 79 Label Settings Dialog box for Fe Labe all inputting a label Edit Description r Position x 210 9 v Frame NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C 1 Set the character string input function for the touch switch function 185 Data Input Section 6 4 2 Specify a string to be input for the Input Key String in the Sett
527. ouch switch of trend graph in Appendix A 251 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Section 6 10 6 10 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation The created graphic data can be collectively registered as an element by using the Symbol Manager The graphic data registered collectively in a group is called symbol or symbol data By registering data that is often used by the Support Tool it is possible to use the same data among multiple screen data Application Since the graphic data for creating a keyboard and keypads for each PT model and color pattern combinations of tiling objects are registered and provided with the Support Tool you can save time when creating graphics 6 10 1 Screen Configuration of Symbol Manager 252 The symbol manager screen configuration is shown below E Symbol Manager SymFilel SBL OE XI Menu bar File Edit Help E 3 Group1 Symbol icon KeyPad 3D High 51 420 Supplement Symbols Folder Folder name Symbol name A folder represents one symbol data file and symbols displayed under the folder represent the individual symbol data registered in that file The name of the selected folder or the name of the file that stores the selected symbol is displayed in the title column of the Symbol Manager window Starting with V4 6 there is a Preview pane to show an overview picture and a Listing pane t
528. ound Black 399 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Y Adjust the Set Line 1 character string display position by dragging it 8 After creating the library data of code FA20 click x at the upper right section in the FA20 library editor to close it Creating the library data of code FA21 to FA25 9 Create the library data of code FA21 to code FA25 in the same manner If character string occupies more than one line create the character string line by line Reference It is possible to copy library data FA20 to other code so that it can be reused Fol low the procedure below a Specify FA20 and select Copy by pressing button b Specify the code to be pasted and select Paste by pressing gm button 9 3 12 Creating the Pop up Display Numeric Keys Create the numeric keys displayed in the pop up window at screen No 1900 Reference With NT30 30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C screen numbers of the screen where a window keyboard screen can be created are restricted to 1900 to 1979 With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C however a window key board screen can be created for any screen number as with a standard screen 1 to 3999 Creating the window keyboard screen For details of window keyboard screen refer to 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens 1 Select Screen menu bar gt New 2 Atthe screen selection dialog box set Window Keyboard Screen 3 Atthe new standard screen dialog bo
529. ouse then specify Cut Copy or Paste Edit wWiew Tools Conne Undo 1 2 Cuts the graphic in the range specifying Redo Cte frame and stores it in the clip board cone Ctr c Copies the graphic in the range specifying pue Cry frame onto the clip board Delete Del E Pastes the graphic in the clip board to the specified position Deletes the graphic in the range specifying Clip frame Rotate or Flip gt To Paste From Properties Reference Image data that is cut or copied on one image editor window can be pasted onto the other image editor window The data can be pasted until another data is stored to the clipboard 333 Image Editor Section 8 1 Saving to the bit map file Pasting from the bit map file 334 09 Save in E e aj Cut Ctriex Copy Ctr Paste Ctrlev Delete Del gt Paste From Clin PEGE Rotate or Flip gt File name ee RS Properties Save as type Image documents amp bmp e cum When more than one image editor window is displayed or when two Support Tools are opened by Import Component from the File menu same PT model setting cut copy and paste operations between these image editor windows are possible For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool You can save the created graphic to the file in bit map format This operation is valid
530. ow 1 In the character string input field move the cursor to the mark image data insertion position 2 Select Insert Mark Or Insert Image the dialog box The mark selection dialog box or image selection dialog box is displayed Select the mark data image data to be inserted and click on Mark data FF20 to FFFFH FF20 to EF5FH for NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S Only for the NT30 NT3OC NT620S NT620C NT625C NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above with NT20 30 620 compatible mode FE20 to FEFFH Example Mark data Table Application v EP AP M Vt ties 8 The code of the specified data is displayed at the data insertion position in the character string input field 4 Click on to close the character string attribute The set mark data image data or library data is displayed in the character string displayed on the screen The closed area of the graphic inside the border will be filled with some pattern and color 149 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Tiling cannot be used for NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S 1 The area inside the border is tiled according to the specified color and pat tern Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display Tiling Selection using the drawing toolbar Terminology Foreground color Background color Property setting General Position Indicates the position
531. ow 1 Create child screens using standard screens 2 Specify Parent Screen from New command in the Screen menu 3 In the parent screen setting dialog box set a parent screen number child screen numbers and whether or not a page number is displayed scs Standard Child Screen No 1 CES Type 8 PE Continuous v Show Page Number Move Downy C Overlapping HemovE Help a Setthe number of the parent screen for Screen No in Parent If the number of screen data has been already created it cannot be regis tered as a parent screen b Select Continuous C If necessary tick Show Page Number d Specify child screens Select screens that are specified as child screens by selecting them from the Standard field then click on ns The selected screen moves to the Child field If a wrong number is moved click on gms the screen returns from the Child field to the Standard field Continuous Overlapping Screens Section 5 3 Two to eight screens can be registered as child screens e Modify the screen switching order Child screens are displayed in the order they are set in the Child field The setting order of the child screens can be modified using Move Down f Click on after the completion of child screen setting When creating continuous screens with NT20 NT20S and NT600S it is rec ommended to create Switch Screen touch
532. ows 95 98 and NT Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 and Xp Screen size at start of 10096 fixed For NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT21 Screen editing magnification of 10096 20096 or 40096 is automatically selected to match the resolution of the personal computer being used 545 Appendix J New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 8 Version 4 8 supports NT20 e Support for NT20 A system program for the NT20 has been added Functionality for transferring the system program to the NT20 has been added to the system installer 547 Appendix Error Messages The error message that may be displayed while using the Support Tool and the action to take in response to them are shown below The indications W and E given at the beginning of an error message classify the level of errors as indicated below W Minor error permits transmission and execution of screen data E Major error disables transmission of screen data Error Message display or other element s cannot overlap with the Trend Graph Corrective Action A display or other element is overlap ping the trend graph Move the element outside the trend graph frame Application version mismatched Com munication aborted System program version installed in a PT maybe a lower one For details of the com bination of system program version that can be transmitted and the PT model set ting at the Support Tool refer to 11 1 2 Available
533. ox Code Comp Mode Size Comments No Bt 24 X 24 circle Imp OFF min 0 Colo24 X 24 Circle Imp red min nofrm 040 X 40 Circle Imp OFF S nofrm 20 40 X 40 Circle Imp red S Circle Imp OFF min frm irche Imp min frm Circle Imp OFF S frm ircle Imp yllw S frm ing the scroll bar at the right side of the screen or click on open the code input dialog box Input the code of the desired image data and click on mam By pressing cursor keys 7 on keyboard the contents of the code can be checked in the preview window one by one 3 Select the code of the desired image data to be displayed The selected line will be highlighted 4 Click on to close the dialog box Indirect Specify the numeral table entry to be referenced With indirect reference the contents for the specified numeral table entry are treated as an image code and the corresponding image data is displayed This is useful when you want to change the image data to be displayed according to the statuses Set the storage type of numeral table entry to be referenced by indirect reference to Binary and specify the value image code to be stored in hexadeci mal since the image code is in hexadecimal Numeral Table Image Display 001D 001C Hexadecimal 001D 001E 001F Set the numeral table entry number to be referenced in the table entry number field
534. parent It will be transparent red a Support Tool screen b PT screen 151 Fixed Display Section 6 2 f Full Tiling is performed performance of Support Tool may be slower In this case clear the check mark for Full Tiling from the View menu Full Tiling is automatically cancelled when a filter function is performed for a Fixed Display The Color Palette Symbol for which tiling patterns and color combinations are registered is supplied with Support Tool as symbol data Using color palette symbol enables you to register required tiling objects on screen while checking their display status Color palette symbol does not have transparent back ground patterns Border colors are set to White Change the setting as re quired when using it For details refer to 6 10 5 Operating Procedure of Color Palette Symbol 6 2 9 Image Object Data Image data is displayed There are two types of image data One type of image data references the fixed code directly the other type uses indirect reference Indirect reference is a func tion that can change the image data to be displayed by writing the image code to the numeral table just like the indirect reference of numeral string display This enables the animation display by switching the display contents using a simple program For details of the PT models that can use indirect reference refer to Appendix D Table of Functions of Each PT Model Ima
535. part of alarm list history elements These touch switches can be created automatically when creating an alarm list history Scrolls up alarm list history display page page scroll Scrolls down alarm list history display page page scroll Scrolls up alarm list history display page line scroll Scrolls down alarm list history display page line scroll PT control Stops buzzer Displays system menu Any required character string can be used as the label of a control code input touch switch For example SET can be used as the label of a control code touch switch Click the amp amp Button in the Generai Tab attributes to display the label setting dialog box Input a label in the displayed dialog box 221 Touch Switches Section 6 8 6 8 6 Copy Setting Touch Switch Function Copy setting Settings Copy From Numeral Table String Table Code Data setting field Copy To Numeral Table String Table Cursor Position Data setting field Guidance Specifies a numeral table entry for the copy source Specifies a character string memory table entry string table for the copy source Specifies copying a constant numeric data Specify the memory table entry number when a numeral table entry or a character string memory table entry string table is specified When code is specified specify a constant here Specifies a numeral table entry for the copy destination S
536. pecifies a character string memory table entry string table for the copy destination If this is specified the numeral input field or the character string input field which is the active input objective is se lected for the copy destination Specify the memory table entry number when a numeral table entry or a character string memory table entry string table is specified If Cursor Position is selected this field is invalid Displays the list of numeral character string memory table entries string table A copy setting touch switch is used in the cases shown below Copying the data in a memory table entry to another memory table entry Character string memory table String table parti SET SET 2 e parti hd 2 gt 3 By setting the data in several memory table entries beforehand the necessary data can be copied to the work area as needed Note Data copying from a memory table entry to a memory table entry is possible only between memory table entries of the same type from numeral memory table entry to numeral memory table entry and from character string memory table entry string table to character string memory table entry string table 222 Touch Switches Section 6 8 Note Copying a constant to a numeral memory table entry setting
537. pes to be im ported is given below CIO has the highest priority With comments of more than 3000 entries D will be cut first CIO Bit L Bit H Bit TIM CNT A Bit CIO Word L Word H A Word D Word The I O comments table displays comments in numerical alphabetical order Using CX Programmer Use the following procedure to import the I O comments from the CX Program mer 1 Copy the symbol table in the CX Programmer and paste it into Excel 2 In Excel delete columns 2 and 5 to that the names addresses and com ments are lined up across the sheet Ei Microsoft Excel Book jg Edit view Insert Fo Te B xi a ejo Br eNO gt D F G H Formula E 12104 Search 0 Dap NE zA2 05 Origin Compensation 121 06 Origin Search Completed 207 Origin 21 08 0 rgin Completed z Aza Wait 122 03 Stopped 123 5 423 01 Drop 22123 02 Screw MSS Screw 5 423 04 41 pi Sheet K Sheet 7 Sheet Dans sw ETE A Ready Delete columns 2 and 5 Comment Table Section 7 7 3 Select Save as and save the sheet as tab delimited text 4 Select Import I O Comments from the Tool Menu in the Support Tool and select the file saved in step 3 The comments will be imported 7 7 4 Importing I O Comment from Tab delimited Text File Import Procedure 1 Select
538. play Sign is selected Setting of 0 and 100 is not possible with NT20S and NT600S The following types of bar graph element are provided 0 to 100 display Direction Right l Direction Left Direction Up Direction Down 100 to 100 display Direction Right El Direction Left Direction Up Direction Down Which of 0 to 100 and 100 to 100 bar graphs is displayed should be selected with the setting for Display Sign in the general attributes Check mark set 100 to 100 display Check mark not set 0 to 10096 display In the default setting a percentage value is displayed Whether or not a percentage value is displayed can be set with the Display 96 property Check mark set A percentage value is displayed Check mark not set A percentage value is not displayed If the setting is for a percentage value to be displayed the size and display position of the value can be modified using the element edit function in the manner shown below For detail of the element edit function refer to page 112 Graphs Section 6 9 1 Click on a percentage value while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key 2 Drag a percentage value to change the display position Example Modifying the percentage value display position 2 8 To change the size of a displayed percentage value double click on the val ue The properties of a percentage
539. played should be selected with the setting for Display Sign in the general attributes Check mark set 100 to 100 display Check mark not set 0 to 100 display N FF N FF N FF present value is displayed as follows according to the types Needle Fill 608 60 Y 233 Graphs Section 6 9 Meter shape is displayed as follows according to the width rate Width Rate 10 Width Rate 50 Width Rate 100 Scale position and its shape are displayed as follows depending on the set tings of Distance Scale Length Scale Distance 096 Distance 10096 Distance 15096 Length Scale is always displayed at the front of meter Therefore when type is set to a Needle the needle may be invisible if meter and scale are overlapped When the Display Sign is set to ON specified No of division is applied also for a negative range Therefore actual numbers of division differs as follows de pending on the presence absence of display sign even if the specified number of divisions is same Example n case No of division is 5 Display Sign ON Display Sign OFF n the default setting a percentage value is displayed Whether or not a percentage value is displayed can be set in the Display La bel property Check mark set A percentage value is displayed Check mark not set percentage value is not displayed e f the setting for a percentage value is displayed the size and display
540. point of selection will be selected However if you want to select an element A that is enclosed by other element like in the figure below it is not pos sible to select element A if the element enclosing it is already selected In this case click any position on the screen where no element is registered to cancel the selected status and then select element A I seme T H Section 6 1 For a complicated screen element select operation will be easier if a filter func tion refer to 5 1 4 Filter Function is used to limit the display objects 1 Select the element at the foremost position 2 Select Edit menu bar then select Select Object This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse and choose Select Object in the menu The list of elements behind the element selected first is displayed Detailed information of the objects are displayed in the list However part of the information may not be displayed for some objects such as lamps touch Switches with long label 3 Select the desired element from the list 4 Click on cs ES Draw Object Undo 2 16 m E af Fixed Display Circle Inverse Cut Ctx Fixed Display Rectangle Standard Copy Paste 4 Align gt Delete Del Select All CtritA 1 2 3 4 Reference The element selected in
541. position of the value can be modified using the element edit function in the manner shown below For detail of the element edit function refer to page 112 1 Click on a percentage value while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key 2 Drag a percentage value to change the display position 234 Graphs Section 6 9 E g Modifying the percentage value display position n m v BUR s a ff 2 3 To change the size of a displayed percentage value double click on the val ue The properties of a percentage value display are displayed Analogue Meter lt Display gt General Position x 360 140 Font Soale r Smoothing Colour Foreground Background Position Font Type Scale Smoothing Attribute Color Foreground Background Indicates the display position of the percentage value The reference point is at the upper left corner of the percentage value Specify the font of the value to be displayed Standard Half Height Double Width Specify the scale of the value to be displayed 1x1 Equal 1 x 2 High 2x 1 Wide 2x 2 3x3 4x4 8x8 Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for the value to be displayed The display attribute can not be set fixed as standard display Specify the color of the percentage value Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue
542. position where the mark data is to be inserted 2 Click on Insert Mark The Show Mark dialog box is displayed 3 Specify the mark data in the list of mark data 4 Click on 50 Character String Memory Table String Table Section 7 3 The code of the specified mark data is inserted to the Value field The mark itself is not displayed here Numeral String VO Comments Bit Memory Value Initial Wor bcde tFF20 Fehi 5k 1 Lo p 2 Lo 3 Lo o Insert Mark button OK button Screen Screen abcdefghiJjk abcdeeetghijk Mark data 7 3 5 Inserting Image Data into a Character String To insert image data into an initial value follow the steps described below Note that insertion of image data into a character string is possible only with the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT21 NT20 30 620 compatible mode NT31 C V2 NT20 30 620 compatible mode and NT631 C V2 NT20 30 620 compatible mode 1 After specifying the Value field move the cursor to the position where the image data is to be inserted 2 Click the Insert Image Button The Image Table dialog box is displayed 3 Specify the image data in the list of image data 4 Click the Button The code of the specified image data is inserted into the Value field The image data itself is not displayed here Numeral Se Vo Comments B amp Memory Numeral Sting
543. pped 3 Click on the Start button of Windows and select Run A Documents Settings Search Help and Support B Log Off HMI 9 Turn Off Computer g start c 2 a o _ n x z NT Transfer Utility Appendix C 4 Input a setup in the input field in the specified window For the drive specify the drive containing the CD ROM For example if the CD ROM is in drive E enter eAsetup To use a floppy disk click the Bewe and specify the SETUP EXE file that was copied from the NT Transfer Utility folder to the floppy disk Type the name of a program Folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it For you Open D SETUP 5 Click on c9 The installation started 6 When the setup screen of the NT Transfer Utility is displayed click on The screen for specifying the destination of program installation is dis played Y Specify the directory for installation In the initial state the directory shown below is set as the destination directo ry C Program Files Omron Ntst4 8E Transfer Utility If you want to change the directory click on _ Browse and input the drive and directory If a directory that does not exist in the hard disk is specified the directory is automatically made NT Transfer Utility Setup Choose Destination Location Select folder where Setup will install files Setup will install
544. pping screens The parent screen of the continuous Screens is deleted The screen no XXXX was a Con tinuous Parent Screen that is not supported in this model It is dis carded Use a touch switch to Switch screens If the program is created to display the parent Screen of continuous Screens correct the pro gram so that the first child screen is dis played Refer to 6 8 2 Switch Screen Touch Switch When overlapping screens are converted an error may occur due to differences in the handling of overlapping screens between conventional models and new models Difference New models A window keyboard screen cannot be specified as a child screen Conventional models window keyboard screen can be specified as a child screen Conversion result error message and corrective action 469 Data Conversion Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Appendix A Corrective Action With a conventional model a window keyboard screen is specified as a child Screen With a new model a window keyboard Screen is removed from child screens The screen no XXX of type YYY is not supported as a child so the parent Copy the contents of the window keyboard Screen to a standard Screen and specify that standard screen as a child screen Refer to 5 3 2 Overlapping Screens child association is discarded Correction related to
545. pplication File e t is possible to select whether to print screen grid or not when printing screen image Refer to 12 2 2 Output to a Printer If grid is to be printed the grid setting of each screen will be included in the screen image 5 1 3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool The procedures for changing the screen display method and displaying the in formation on elements are indicated below Reference In addition to the display methods indicated below Support Tool has a filter func tion that displays only the elements of the selected type Refer to 5 1 4 Filter Function Confirming full tiling status When Full Tiling is selected in the View menu with a tick mark entered on the left side of the menu item the element is displayed on the Support Tool screen in the tiled status 83 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 Reference There may be differences in element display order and details in display be tween the Support Tool and a PT Therefore results of tiling may be different in the display obtained at a PT and that confirmed by the Support Tool When filter function is used for a fixed display Full Tiling will be automatically cancelled confirmation message will be displayed since the tiled status may not be displayed correctly if the object used as a border is hidden by a filter function Displaying element information Show Tag The Support
546. property then click on again Adjusting the size and position of Start button b Specify the Start button and select Edit menu bar Edit Object 6 Adjust the size and position of Start button frame 388 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Y Adjust the position of the label Start by dragging it Creating the Stop button 8 Copy the Start button and paste it on the data creation screen 9 Move the Start button pasted at the upper left area of the screen to the Stop button position 10 Double click the moved button and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged Address PC PLC Address L0000101 Comments Stop Switch Address PC PLC Address L0000201 Comments Stop lamp Label Stop 1 Press Edit to set the label Creating the character string display field String Display String Display String Display Setting the title 1 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Text 2 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the String Display character string is to be displayed at the intended upper left cor ner of text 3 Set the properties as shown below Description String Display Position Font Type Standard Scale 1x2 High Smoothing a Attribute Standard White Background Black Color
547. put element on the same screen including the window keyboard and the base screen these touch switches can be used to input data into the input field Numeric keys and other data input devices can be created by combining these items m Inputs numeral in a data input field F Inputs numeral 1 in a data input field E Inputs numeral 2 in a data input field E Inputs numeral 3 in a data input field El Inputs numeral 4 in a data input field Inputs numeral 5 in a data input field 8 Inputs numeral 6 in data input field Fi Inputs numeral 7 in a data input field Inputs numeral 8 in a data input field E Inputs numeral 9 in a data input field EX Inputs hexadecimal A in a data input field i Inputs hexadecimal B in a data input field e Inputs hexadecimal C in a data input field Is Inputs hexadecimal D in a data input field E Inputs hexadecimal E in a data input field Ii inputs hexadecimal F in a data input field El Moves cursor in a data input field one character left D Moves cursor in a data input field one character right Deletes numeric value character string in a data input field Hil Cancels inputs in a data input field H Backspaces a cursor to delete a character in a data input field na Deletes the character at the cursor location in a data input field 220 Touch Switches Section 6 8 E mx EH E mei E Confirms inputs in a data in
548. put field cursor remains in this field Confirms inputs in a data input field cursor moves to the next input field Toggles plus and minus sign in a data input field Inputs a decimal point in a data input field Moves the input cursor to the data input field at the upper left area Moves the cursor to the data input field immediately above the present data input field Moves the cursor to the data input field immediately below the present data input field Move the cursor to the left data input field Move the cursor to the right data input field Moves the cursor to the previous data input field in the order Changes continuous screens to the previous screen Moves the cursor to the next data input field in the order Changes continuous screens to the next screen 1 When moving the cursor with the cursor keys the cursor may not move in the expected order if the X Y coordinates are not aligned in the upper left corners of the input fields Reference With and Ed keys the cursor moves between the data input fields in the order the data input fields were made However the order of moving the cursor can be changed with Set Order of the Draw menu Reference 2 Combination with alarm list elements and alarm history elements This control code can be selected only with NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C these touch switches are a
549. put touch switches and control code input touch switches For details of character string input elements refer to 6 4 2 Character String Input Note Character string input touch switches are always used in combination with character string input elements 6 8 4 Pop up Window Keyboard Function Touch Switch Function Input key Window Keyboard Settings Screen No Specify the window keyboard screen type Local 1 or Local 2 and screen number of the window keyboard screen that is displayed when the touch switch is pressed Window Position Specify the bottom left co ordinate of window to be dis played Action Type Specify how the window keyboard is displayed when the touch switch is pressed Open Close Toggle Replace Local Window Specify the behavior of windows when another window of the same type Local 1 Local 2 is already displayed when open ing a window Guidance The input key window keyboard touch switch is used for displaying the window keyboard screen overlapping the presently displayed screen base screen This touch switch function can not be used with NT20 NT20S and NT600S Settings shown below can be made only with the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C V1 and above Local 2 Window Position Replace Local Window Display methods of window keyboard varies depending on PT models NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C and NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C below V1 How the window keyboard is di
550. quency history screens Host connect screens system initializing screens The screen attributes and grid can be set for each screen individually Password screens Menu screens Print format screens Device monitor screens Contrast tuning screens 5 1 1 Setting the Screen Attributes 80 All screens have screen attributes used for setting the screen display specifica tions The information to be set as attributes specific to the individual screens includes screen number screen comment recording in display history backlight and buzzer control To display the attributes follow any of the operations indicated below e Screen menu bar Properties e Right click on a screen data icon in the application manager Properties e Right click at an arbitrary position on the screen Properties Double click at an arbitrary position on the screen Standard Screen Attributes Screen History Grid THE Comment Backlight Type Light Flash Buzzer continuus z Load Local 1 Keyboard v Load Looal 2 ri par Colour Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 Screen No Specify a screen number The screen number of an existing screen may be changed History other than NT20 NT20S Specify whether or not the event of screen display is to be recorded in the display history record Screen history Log The displ
551. r PT Configuration 2 Click the Control Notify Area tab and set the properties as shown below For details of Control Notify area refer to 3 3 1 Creating New Screen Data Application File PT Control Area PC PLC Address D00100 Comments Control Area PT Notify Area PC PLC Address D00110 Comments Notify Area Downloading to the PT 1 Place the PT in the transfer mode by the system menu operation 2 Atthe Support Tool select Connect menu bar Download NT series Support Tool PT Application 404 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Downloading of the screen data starts During screen data download the screen as shown below is displayed Download Application Communication in progress please wait 10 For details of the screen data download refer to 4 2 12 Sending Downloading the Data to a PT and 11 3 Sending Downloading the Data 405 SECTION 10 Quick Reference This section enables you to access the information you require easily using what you want to do as the key 10 T Ou ick Reference aine b ete Re eet eere Pee he Oe oa ee oma e 408 407 Quick Reference 10 1 Quick Reference Displaying graphics 408 To display a polyline or a broken line Operation Objects Fixed Display Polyline Section 10 1 Refer to To display a rectangle Objects Fixed Display Rectangle To d
552. r in the operation using the edit dialog box of the memory table addresses in the table being edited are objective while all addresses in the entire screen data are objective of the operation if the operation is performed using the Tools menu The explanation below is given for the batch address change operation where the entire screen data is the objective of the operation For the procedure to per form the operation using the edit dialog box of the memory table refer to 7 1 3 Batch Address Change Operation Description of batch address change dialog box Find Channel VO Area 7 Cancel Start Range End Range io TE Change To Channel Bit I m Change Comment Find Channel Word Specify the channel type of the batch change source Find Start Range Specify the start address of the source range for the batch address change Find End Range Specify the end address of the source range for batch address change The address to be set for End Range must always be larger than or equal to the address set for Start Range Change to Channel Word Specify the word type and start address after the change Addresses are changed within the number of specified points from the start ad dress number of points from Start Range to End Range Change Comment Specify whether or not the same I O comment appended to an address before the change
553. r button larger than others 9 3 10 Creating the Alarm Screen Create screen No 4 new screen as the Alarm Screen 1 Select Screen menu bar gt New 2 Atthe screen selection dialog box set Standard Screen 3 At the new standard screen dialog box set 4 for the screen No Setting the screen properties 1 Select Screen menu bar Properties 2 Set the screen properties as shown below for screen No 4 Attributes Screen No 4 History Title Alarm Screen Comment Alarm Screen Buzzer Load Local 1 Keyboard System Keypad Color Background Black Grid Size Custom Horizontal Spacing 5 Vertical Spacing Display Grid Snap to Grid Creating the screen title Alarm Screen Copying the screen title from screen No 1 Menu Screen 1 Copy the Menu Screen character string and its frame rectangle on screen No 1 and paste them onto screen No 4 394 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 2 Adjust the display position of the pasted character string and frame to the desired position Modifying to Alarm Screen 3 Double click the Menu Screen character string and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged 4 Adjust the size of the frame rectangle Creating the alarm list Alam list Alarm List Setting the title 1 Select Objects menu bar
554. r OMRON and Mitsubishi A When both direct accesses and PT model are different convert data to that of the same PT model first see figures in next page and then convert the direct access type Conversion between conventional PT models Between same direct access NT20S NT20 NT600S NT620S NT620C NT625C 4 NT30C Conversion from conventional PT model to new PT model Between same direct access NT30 v LL NT31C V2 NT31 1 9 NT31 V2 NT31C V1 NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 7 NT631 V2 NT631C V1 9 NT631C V2 NT20S NT11S NT21 NT11 Conversion between new PT models Between same direct access 464 NT31 gt NT31C NT31 V1 NT31C V1 NT31 1 NT31C V1 m Y i Y NT631 NT631C NT631 V1 INT631C V1 NT631 V1 INT631C V1 System Program Ver 2 0 System Program Ver 2 1 iii V2 NT3 3 NT631 V2 NT631C V2 V3 System Program Ver 3 1 NT21 NT31 V2 System Program Ver 3 1 It is possible to convert the screen data for the lower system pro
555. r be ber 9023 is not sup ing 9023 device ported monitor screen In the case of Bit Memory Table it will be reset based on the following table Default Screen PT Models Number NT30 NT30C NT620C 625C NT620S NT20S NT21 NT31 NT31C NT31C V1 NT31C V1 System Ver 2 1 NT31 V1 NT31 V1 System Ver 2 1 NT600S NT631 NT631C NT631C V1 NT631C V1 System Ver 2 1 NT631 V1 NT631 V1 System Ver 2 1 NT20 30 620 compatible Mode Reference For the NT21 and the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 or V3 NT20 30 620 compatible Mode can be set Using this mode requires less modifi cation of screen data and programs and is easier following conversion of screen data between the NT21 and NT20S and between V2 models and NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C If NT20 30 620 compatible mode is used the functions of the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 or V3 will differ as described below For details of the each function refer to the NT21 31 631 Series Reference Manual VO69 E1 Except for the following points the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V2 V3 functions can be used as they are in NT20 30 620 compatible mode When trying to convert the screen data from NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C or NT625C to NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C with V2 or V3 or from the NT20S to the NT21 NT20 30 620 compatible mode will be automatically ON in the defaul
556. r details of the PT models that can use this function refer to Appendix E Sys tem Setting PT Configuration History Setting This item specifies the method for processing when the Log memory of the alarm history function and History screen function becomes full Alarm Use Ring Buffer Same meaning with FIFO First In First Out Alarm FIFO system is applied for this function if the log memory area is full When new alarm occurs the oldest record data will be deleted so that the new data can be stored there 49 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 50 If the Alarm function is not chosen newly coming data is not acceptable to re cord when the memory space is full Screen Use Ring Buffer Same meaning with FIFO First In First Out When the new screen history occurred the oldest record data will be deleted so that new data can be stored there This is so called FIFO If this check box is not ON newly coming data is not acceptable to record when the memory space is full Either the Alarm and the Screen data is available for the following PT models NT30 NT30C NT21 NT31 NT31C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C For NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C both Alarm and Screen set tings are available Number of Table Entries Specify the number of numeral memory table entries character string memory table entries String Table and bit memory table entries Setting of the Num
557. r display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow For line type the following four choices are provided Solid Dash Dot dash Dot dot dash The line type is specified using the line style property When creating a polyline draw a continuous line first then add vertices in the edit operation to change the drawn continuous line into the desired broken line Vertices can be set at up to 254 positions To add a vertex follow the steps shown below 1 Draw a continuous line 2 After locating the cursor at a position where a vertex is to be added right click the mouse and select Add Node in the pop up menu Cut il i E Copy Paste Delete Bring To Front Send To Back Edit Select Object Properties Use As Default 139 Fixed Display Section 6 2 6 2 2 Arc Operation procedure Terminology 3 Drag the vertex to the desired position Cursor position Cut Delete a Bring To Front Send To Back s Remove Node ane Object executed Properties Use As Default To remove a vertex locate the cursor on the vertex to be removed and select Remove Node in the pop up menu An arc is drawn Arcs cannot be used with NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S 1 An arc is drawn The radius of an arc can be changed Selection using the menu bar Obje
558. r of occur rence frequency Order of Occurrence Alarm messages are displayed in the order of occur rence from the oldest record or from the newest re cord The order in which the alarm messages are displayed depends on the system memory setting Info Type If the setting is so made to display the date time of alarm occurrence the dis play format of the date time is specified for this item The setting for this item is invalid if the date time is not displayed with an alarm message Y M D h m 14 digits M D h m 11 digits h m 5 digits Using a line scroll touch switch and a page scroll touch switch you can scroll messages in units of a line or a page within the alarm list display area With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C to display a line scroll touch switch and or a page scroll touch switch set a check mark in the check box for the line scroll touch switch and or a page scroll touch switch in the Prop erty setting dialog box With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C a line scroll touch switch and a page scroll touch switch are a part of an alarm list element Therefore they cannot be modified as a touch switch They can be moved only when the alarm list is modified To move a line scroll touch switch or a page scroll touch Switch click the desired touch switch while holding down the Shift key and Ctrl key Edit Object from the Edit menu or pop up menu and Ins key can also be used for this operation
559. r string data They are used to share data for the functions assigned to ob jects and communicate with a PC PLC If a word address of a PC PLC is set in a table data communication processing between the PT and PC PLC is executed automatically in predetermined cycles The following types of tables are provided Numeral table String table Bit memory table Extended I O Input table Extended I O Output table Comment table 15 General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 F key Input Notify table Mathematical table Recipe Table The number of memory table entries varies according to the model of PT con nected NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Numeral 512 512 table 1000 1000 S560 String 256 table pu 1000 or 2000 Bit 256 Memory or table 1000 Extended Input table Extended Output table F key In put Notify table Mathe matical table NT620S NT600S NT620C NT625C Recipe table t This option is available only for V2 and above 2 This option is available only for V2 System Ver 3 1 and above Numeral Table The Numeral table stores numeral data This table is set when using Numeral Display objects Graph objects and Nu meral Data Input For details of table setting refer to 7 2 Numeral Memory Table String Table The String table stores text data This table is set when String Di
560. r string memory table entry string table 2 If the setting for bar code reading operation is manual confirm the data set in the input field is written to the specified character string memory table entry string table when the touch switch allocated the J key code is pressed For details of memory switch setting refer to the operation manual for PT Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Data Input String Selection using the drawing toolbar 8 Related elements and settings Touch switch character string input Objects Touch Switch gt character string input function Touch switch control code input Objects Touch Switch gt Control code input function Touch switch copy setting Objects Touch Switch gt Copy setting Terminology Background Cursor focus moving touch switch Suppor t Co Focus cursor frame Property setting General Position Indicates the display position of the numeral setting input field The attribute point is at the upper left corner of the input field Font type Specify the font of the character string to be input Standard Half Height 183 Data Input Section 6 4 Size Specify the size of character string to be displayed 1x1 Equal 1 x2 High 2x 1 Wide 2x2 3x3 4x4 8 8 Smoothing Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for char acter strings Attribute Specify the disp
561. r to 3 3 3 Saving the Screen Data Application File 1 Specify the elements to be grouped 2 Select Draw menu bar then select Group This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse and select Group o Screen Tools Selector Group REA x los Bring to Front Send To Back Vo o Sm Te Bac 5 z x Dicsccoctete E 1 Select an element in the grouped elements Select only one grouped ele ment 2 Select Draw menu bar then select Ungroup Common Operation Section 6 1 This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse and select Ungroup EZB o Screen Selector i AN Bring to Front VT d E 1 Send To Back c t 6 1 8 Associating Elements with the Touch Switch Association Disassociation Reference If the cursor move touch switch has been created independently later than a cer tain element this touch switch has to be associated with this element in order to specify the data input field when the touch switch has been pressed on PT For NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C it is possible to associate the control code input touch switches page and line scroll touch switches with the alarm list and history It is also p
562. ra tion also for the word in the host Not initialized Content of a word in the host invalid Invalid Initial value of the char acter string memory table entry string table Not allocated Existing character string memory table string table content retained Content of the character string memory table entry string table if it is initialized by System Menu opera tion Words Specify the number of words in the PC PLC to be allocated to the character string memory table entry string table The number of allocated words varies depending on the PT model as shown be low PT Model No of Allocated Words NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S NT30 NT30S NT21 NT31 NT31C NT600S NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C 1 to 10 words 1 to 20 characters 1 to 16 words 1 to 32 characters 1 to 20 words 1 to 40 characters 285 Character String Memory Table String Table Section 7 3 Note One word corresponds to 2 characters A character string is allocated to the PC PLC words in units of 2 characters be ginning with the leftmost character from lower digit words to higher digit words The data type is 1 byte or 2 byte If the number of characters in a character string memory table entry string table is larger than the number of words used the number of characters equal to the number of specified words is sent to the PC PLC beginning with the start of the chara
563. racter string memory table string table bit memory table extended I O input table extended I O output table and elements in list form The displayed comments can be edited For details refer to 7 7 Comment Table The F Key Input Notify table assigns to a function key in a PT device Host bits are allocated to the function keys By switching the function key ON and OFF the corresponding bit is turned ON and OFF For details of table setting refer to 7 8 F Key Input Notify Table Mathematical functions can be formed through this table and associated to any numeral table entry PLC address location For details refer to 7 9 Mathemati cal Table The Recipe Table will set the parameters of designated memory areas of the address For details refer to 7 10 Recipe Table 17 General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 1 3 4 Types of Screens A PT displays two types of screens user screens that are created by arranging objects as desired and system screens for which a specific function is preset The types of screens displayed on a PT and screen numbers assigned to the each screen are shown below NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C NT625C user Standard Hu Screens 1899 Screens 2000 1 to 1899 2000 Continuous 1 to screens 1899 1900 to 1979 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C NT11S Screen Types NT11 1 to 3999 1 to 3999 Overlapping Screens Window Key board screens
564. rary data consisting of fixed display elements is displayed Note registering a graphic created using multiple fixed display elements as the li brary data the same graphic can be arranged in different positions Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display gt Library Display 157 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Property setting Guidance 158 Selection using the drawing toolbar General Position Indicates the display position of library data The attribute point is at the upper left corner in the library data Size Indicates the size of library data frame size of the library data Reference Type Direct Set the library code directly Code Indicates the code of the library data to be displayed Comment Displays the comment that is set for the library data Indirect Set this item when the value for the specified numeral table entry is treated as library code and referenced indirectly Table No Specify the numeral table entry to be referenced When using the indirect reference set the storage type of allo cated numeral table entry to Binary Also when specifying the library code from a program etc use hexadecimal value since the library table code is in hexadecimal Displays the list for selecting the library data when Direct is specified Displays the list for referencing the numeral table entry when Indirect is specified When the library data is specified
565. rding to the button operation is shown below Menu Screen Monitor Screen Monitor Screen button Switches the screen to the Monitor Screen screen No 2 Set Screen button Switches the screen to the Set Screen screen No 3 Alarm Screen button Switches the screen to the Alarm Screen screen No 4 Monitor Screen D bu Lamp Numeral D Image Lamp E Numeral Display 1 Displays the value of 000 in the PC PLC Numeral Display 2 Displays the value of 32 bit data the sum of DM0001 and DMO0002 in the PC PLC Trend graph Displays the value of DM0003 and DM0004 in the PC PLC in the form of a trend graph Set the 100 0 and 100 values as shown below value for 10096 value for 0 value for 10096 DM0003 800 0 800 DMO0004 0 1200 e Lamp1 to Lamp 5 Displays the ON OFF state of L000000 to L000004 in the PC PLC 353 Example Screen Configuration Section 9 1 When L000000 is ON OFF Lamp 1 goes ON OFF When L000001 is ON OFF Lamp 2 goes ON OFF When L000002 is ON OFF Lamp 3 goes ON OFF When L000003 is ON OFF Lamp 4 goes ON OFF When L000004 is ON OFF Lamp 5 goes ON OFF mage Lamp Displays the ON OFF state of L000005 in the PC PLC Display when L000005 is ON Display when L000005 is OFF Bar Graph 1 Displays the value of DM0005 in the PC PLC in the form of a bar graph Set the 10096 0 and 10096 v
566. reading the content of the allocated word the read content is stored in a numeral memory table entry without change When writing a numeric value to the allocated word the content of the numeral memory table entry is written as it is If the number of digits in the content of a numeral memory table entry is greater than the number of digits of the allocated word in the PC PLC only the numeric value is written from the least significant digit value System Conforms to the setting for Numeral Display Type of System in the PC PLC Configuration Words Specify the number of words to be allocated to a numeral memory table entry The possible specifications are 1 and 2 If the setting is 1 word the 4 digit BCD or binary data is shared by the PT and PC PLC If the setting is 2 words the 8 digit BCD or binary data is shared by the PT and PC PLC When the setting is 2 the 1st to 4th digit data is allocated to the lower digit word in the PC PLC and the 5th to 8th digit data is allocated to the higher digit word PT models other than the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C If the setting has been made to display a sign one digit bit 4 in the most signifi cant digit position is regarded as representing a sign if F 1111 in binary is set the numeric value is regarded as negative and if any other code is set the numer ic value is regarded as positive Therefore if the numeric value is displayed with a sign
567. red with their tiling patterns foreground and background colors respectively combined You can select required tiling objects while checking the tiling status on screen Color palette symbol is separated into tiling patterns and each pattern is set as one symbol as shown below Combinations of foreground and background col ors are registered for each symbol lili Symbol Manager ColourPL File Edit View Help E ColourPalette Palette 1 Palette 3 Palette 4 NS Palette 5 iit Palette 6 Palette 7 Palette 8 u Palette 9 J Supplement Symbols 260 Recipe Screen Element Section 6 11 Operation procedure Follow the procedure below to use color palette symbol 1 Open new screen to place color palette on it 2 Drag required tiling pattern symbol from palette symbol and drop it on the screen created in 1 3 Select Ungroup from the Draw menu to cancel the grouped status default status after confirming that the dragged symbol is in selected status 4 Clear the check mark for Full Tiling from the View menu to select the tiling object easily after you decided which one to use then drag it to the objective screen while depressing Ctrl key or perform copy amp paste To check the til ing status select Full Tiling from the View menu However in this status the position of tiling object will not be clear Cancel the Full Tiling status when required 5 Border color of tiling objects in c
568. remains in the source folder Pastes the symbol stored in the clip board by the cut or copy function to the currently selected folder Deletes the specified symbol The symbol is not stored in the clip board Cut Ctrl C Paste Delete Del Choose Icon Change Label Move or copy of a symbol is also possible by dragging the symbol using the mouse e If a symbol is dragged to another folder the symbol is moved If a symbol is dragged to another folder while the Ctrl key is held the symbol is copied In these operations the mark is displayed at the mouse cursor 6 10 4 Pasting a Symbol to Screen To paste a registered symbol to the data creation screen of the Support Tool se lect the symbol and drag it to the desired position on the data creation screen then release the mouse The symbol is copied to the data creation screen E Symbol Manager SymFilel S File Edit View Help ColourPalette JAI GROUP I Datal k 1 l LL Supplement Symbols Drag the symbol to the data creation screen and release the mouse The symbol copied to a data creation screen can be used in the same manner as other elements 259 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Section 6 10 Reference Symbols created by different PT models can be pasted to a data creation screen In this pasting operation the symbol data is au
569. rmation Direct connection information is printed or displayed This report is available only when the direct connection setting data has been set Direct Connection Infomation Fi lenge SARE SAPE DATA 8 12 25 8 53 P 1 FT Speci fication of Ares Gontrol Area 10 Oomrents Notify Ares 10 Orsrents Wid Ctrl Area O Coorents mow Control Ares 000110 Notify Area Nureral Merory Table hb Init Value Init Storsge Word ALC Address IQ Gomrents Yes 1 Mer Num disp 1 Yes Mer Nun disp 2 Ys Mer Trd graph 1 Mer Trd graph 2 Mer Bar graph 1 Mer Bar graph 2 Set Num input 1 Set Num input 2 Set Thurbiheel FO FO fO fO FO fO fO fO fO PP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 String Mrrory Table 10 Autamtio 1 Minual 446 Report Types Section 12 1 12 1 3 History Report By specifying the display history record file or the alarm history record file sent from a PT the history record data can be printed or displayed The history record that can be read by the Support Tool depends on the PT model as shown below refer to 11 5 Receiving Uploading the History Record NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C NT625C Screen display history record NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Screen display history record Alarm history record Screen History Report H 98 05 01 12 51 P 447 Screen History of Occurrence Screen No Month Day Hour Mi
570. rt and decimal fraction part Integer Specify the number of digits entered in the integer part Decimal Specify the number of digits entered in the decimal fraction part 123 05 Integer part Decimal part Zero Suppression Specify whether leading zeros should be suppressed Ticked Leading zeros are suppressed Not ticked Leading zeros are not suppressed QUB12345 12345 Without zero suppression With zero suppression Display Sign Specify if a sign is displayed 128 Section 6 1 Reference Word setting for an element When a negative numeric value is displayed with this item selected a negative sign is displayed preceding a numeral Since this sign is included in the num ber of digits in the integer part the maximum digit number is reduced by 1 When this item is not selected a negative numeric value is displayed as an absolute value Ticked Numeric values are displayed without a sign Not ticked Numeric values are displayed with a sign 0912345 0012345 Without a sign With a sign How a numeric value is displayed according to the setting for Integer Decimal Zero Suppression and Display Sign is shown below Data Stored Display Sign in Numeral Display on Integer Decimal Suppression Table the Screen Not ticked Check mark not set 12 012 Not ticked Check mark not set 12 012 Ticked Check mark not set 12 12 Ticked Check mark not set
571. ry E table String table Storing by pressing ABCDEF 188 Data Input Section 6 4 1 The input character string is directly set in the character string input field 2 Press the J key and the set data is stored in the character string memory table string table Reference When there are no string to show string input will be invisible Therefore with Support Tool dotted line frame is displayed in character fore ground color enclosing string input This frame will not be displayed on PT This frame can not be set to off However the dotted line frame can be set to ON and OFF when printing screen image refer to page 427 Note 1 The data set in the input field is not stored in the character string memory table string table until the key button where the Return key code is set or the ENT key is input if manual confirm is set for the bar code read opera tion set using the PT memory switches If manual confirm is set always input the J key or the ENT key at the end of data input To correct the data set in the input field use the CLR key the BS key and the DEL key When a character string input field is moved the touch switch is also moved automatically To modify or move a character string input field and a touch switch independently cancel the check mark set for
572. ry table 0 ox 1 JENA Table Enty s E 2 3000 C Value rei 3 0 4 5 i 2000 mai EG C Table Entry fa Ef Value 100 Changes in the contents of a numeral memory table entry with time are displayed in the form of a trend graph Trend graph Numeral memory table 1 The value in a numeral memory table entry is converted into percentage val ues at the set intervals in the range from 0 to 100 or from 100 to 100 and displayed in the form of a trend graph Selection using the menu bar Objects Graph Trend Graph Selection using the drawing toolbar Display and control touch switches Only NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C 242 Graphs Section 6 9 Property setting General Position Size Display Type Drawing Width Frame Display Sign Direction Sampling Cycle Indicates the display position of the trend graph The reference point is at the upper left corner of the trend graph Indicates the size of the trend graph Specify the trend graph display type Standard Pen Reco pen recording Specify the amount of graph shift when the display is updated Specify whether or not a frame is displayed for the trend graph Specify whether or not a display area for negative values is displayed Specify the direction of trend graph movement Right 2 Left
573. s Storage Type Start Address 0 Pizza 2 3 3 6 System 1 3 3 3 3 System Recipe Table Entry 1 Record Table No Hame Lock 1 Hawaiian 2 Cr ispy 0 Parameter Table No Name Address Words Dec Hex Sign No of Int No of Dec 0 alt 1 0 0 5 0 1 Cheese 1 0 0 0 2 Flour 1 0 0 5 0 12 2 Printing Reports This section describes the procedure for printing reports screen data memory table use status etc using a printer 12 2 1 Printer Setting To print a report using a printer it is necessary to set the type of printer and print mode To set the printer information display the Print Setup property by selecting File menu bar Print Setup Edit View Draw Objects Screen Print Setup New Printer eu Sd Name HP LaserJet 5L T Properties Status Default printer Save Cths tatus efault printer Ready Type HP LaserJet 5L JAPAN Where Bravo ford hp Import eme Comment Import Component Save As p Paper Orientation Spe 210 x Portrait dia Source C Landscape 8 Conc Printer Set the information of the printer you are going to use Name Specify the printer by selecting the printer name from the list of registered printer names Status Displays the status of the selected printer and the number of files in the queue Type Displays
574. s automatically made NT series Support Tool Setup Select Program Folder Please select a program folder Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below ou may type new folder name or select one from the existing folders list Click Next to continue Program Folders NOMRONSNTSTA 8E Existing Folders Accessories Administrative Tools Games Startup lt Back Cancel After specifying the folder click the 3 Button Installation of the specified programs is implemented files are copied During program installation the progress of the processing is indicated as a percentage 11 After step 10 a dialog to select restart non restart will come out for Win dows 95 98 NT4 0 2000 or XP NT series Support Tool Setup InstallShield Wizard Complete The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed NTST4 7E Before you can use the program you must restart your computer C No will restart my computer later Remove any disks from their drives and then click Finish to complete setup C Back Bancel Restarting your machine is recommended because important information is registered after the restart If you select to restart later the registration will be performed at this next restart and installation is completed Click the Button to finish or restart Restart is not required for Windows2000 35 Installing the Support Tool Section 2 2 2 2 3 Uninstall An
575. s for individual elements click on in the table entry number field e Select Tools menu bar Table then click String tab For character string memory table entries string table the objective of opera tion is specified by clicking on a line The necessary setting can be made by input using a keyboard or by selection using a drop down list 283 Character String Memory Table String Table Section 7 3 insert Inserts mark data Insert Image Inserts image data Insert Library i Inserts library data For the operation procedure for Reene Search Address Edit gt _ Copy Settings and sew refer to 7 1 Common Operation Note that _ Reference cannot be used if it is displayed by the operation using an element property 7 3 2 Related Elements When reading from a character string memory table entry string table Character string display element Object String Alarm list Object Alarm List Alarm history Object Alarm History When writing to a character string memory table entry string table Character string input element Object Data Input String When copying character strings between character string memory table entry entries string table Touch switch copy setting Object Touch Switch Copy Set ting 7 3 3 Description of Character String Memory Table String Table Fields 2
576. s for time consuming object to which and total num the current and intensive operations like sav the selected label text ber of lines active ing target language MMI files item belongs Text Table translation Importing to Excel etc window only Menu Bar The menu bar shows the names of each function The pull down menu com mands provided by the Translation Support Utility and the functions of each menu item are shown below 503 Translation Support Utility File or ALT F File or ALT T Edit or ALT E View or ALT V Help or ALT H Standard Toolbar Appendix D Open or Ctrl O Opens the source MMI file m Close Close current Application m Generate MMI or Ctrl S Save current Application in MMI format Exit Exit Utility Recent File List Displays recently opened file list m New or Ctrl N Creates a new target translation column Import Import from Excel m Export Export to Excel m Settings or Ctrl T Opens the translation setting dialog m Delete Deletes the selected translation column This option will only be enabled if there is at least one target language Update Database or Ctrl U Refresh database if time stamp of the source MMI file is different from the source application thereby indicating that the source application has changed Find Replace or Ctrl F Search f
577. s received in a batch Numeral memory table data Character string memory table String table data Mark data NT24 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C The following data can be received individually Numeral memory table data Character string memory table String table data Bit memory table data Mark data Image data e Library data Recipe table 1 With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C individual transmission of system memory is restricted as follows The following data stored in the Support Tool can not be overwritten Number of numeral table entries e Number of string table entries Number of bit memory table entries Screen history setting Alarm history setting Numeral storage type The following data can be overwritten nitial screen number Screen data comment 2 Itis not possible to perform individual transmission of the mathematical table The mathematical table will be transmitted only when application transmission is performed Reference When the Support Tool receives data from a PT the data being edited at the Support Tool is lost Therefore make sure that the edit data is saved in a file before executing data receiving from the PT to the Support Tool With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C individual uploading of tables is possible However it may take time to upload the bit memory table In this case perform batch transmission of t
578. screen to the position of Bar Graph 2 14 Double click the label Bar Graph 1 which has been moved to the bar graph 2 position and modify the properties as shown below Bar Graph 2 15 Double click on the frame of bar graph 2 and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged Value Table Entry Display 100 Table Entry Display 0 Table Entry Display 100 Table Entry Display Creating the Menu button Set button and Alarm button Swi te e Creating the Menu button frame 1 Select Objects menu bar Touch Switch 2 Create the Menu button frame by dragging the mouse at the button dis play position 3 Set the properties as shown below 379 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Position Size Frame Shape 3 Dimension Show ON State ad Color White White Transparent Function Switch Screen Screen No 1 Address PC PLC Address Comments Lamp Attribute Attribute Light Label 1 Press Edit to set the label After completing the setting go to the next step without clicking on button Setting the label of Menu button Menu refer to the following 1 4 Press edit in the general property of a touch switch and set the la bel properties as shown below Description
579. scription of Extended 1 0 Input Table Fields Numeral String VO Comments Extended V O Input Extended I O Output Bit Memory Chel Function Description E e No lo None HEIEEIEEIESTES Goto Entry En cbe pues 3 Help Extended I O unit input terminal number Cncl Presence absence of the backlight OFF cancelling attribute Make this setting at Set dialog Function Function set for the input terminal Notify bit Switch Screen Input Key Control Make this setting at Set dialog Description Contents set at Function are shown Make this setting at Set dialog Cancel Backlight Off Specify whether or not the backlight OFF state is to be canceled To set the Cancel Backlight Off function click on the check box to set a check mark in it If you do not want to set the Cancel Backlight Off function clear the check mark in the check box This setting is valid when None or Notify Bit is set for Function The Cancel Backlight OFF function is automatically provided for the screen switching function and the control code input function Function Specify the input terminal function None Switch Screen Notify Bit Input Key Control When Switch Screen is specified Help Screen 1 Screen No Specify the screen No of the screen to which the screen should be switched when the input terminal goes ON 29
580. sections Displaying the Property Setting Dialog Box Setting the line type Setting the display color The property setting dialog box is displayed in any of the following operations Using the mouse 1 1 Double click an element Using the mouse 2 1 Right click the mouse on an element then select Properties Using the menu 1 Specify the element for which you want to display properties specify only one element 2 Select Draw menu bar then select Properties Using the keyboard 1 Specify the element for which you want to display properties specify only one element 2 Press the Enter key while holding down the Alt key You can select the type of line for polylines broken line graphs and trend graphs Solid Dash Dot dash Dot dot dash The line type is set in a property of individual elements Set the display color of elements Color setting is possible with NT31C NT620C NT625C and NT631C The colors that can be used are shown below White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow For some elements Transparent may be specified to display a transparent background Note that Transparent can be specified only for the elements shown below e Background of fixed display text Either foreground or background has to be other color 121 Section 6 1 Background of label of lamps and touch switches OFF state color of l
581. sed Previous Page Specify whether or not a touch switch used to Rewind move the display range in the direction of older records is used Log Clear Specify whether or not a touch switch used to Clear log clear all logged data is used Touch switches for display function Restart Specify whether or not a touch switch used to restart Continue the halted data sampling is used Stop Specify whether or not a touch switch used to halt data sampling is used Display Clear Specify whether or not a touch switch used to clear Clear display the graph display is used Note that the log data is not cleared by this switch Line Value Table Entry Specify the table entry number of the numeral memory table entry whose contents are displayed in a trend graph Display 96 Specify whether or not a percentage value is displayed on the screen Line Color Specify the graph line color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Style Specify the line type Solid Dash Dot dash Dot dot dash 10096 Table Entry Specify this item if a 10096 value is set with a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral memory table Value Specify this item if a 10096 value is set with a constant set the value to be taken as the 100 value 0 Table Entry Specify this item if a0 value is set with a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of th
582. sed the processing assigned to the specified con trol code is executed Screen 12 General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Touch switch Input Key String When the switch area is pressed the characters of the label set for the switch are displayed in the string input field and stored in the string table String input field Screen Screen gt ARC ABC JI A Touch switch Copy Setting When the switch area is pressed data is copied The following types of copying can be designated Data in Numeral table Numeral table Data in Numeral table Numeral Input field Data in String table String table Data in String table String Input field Constant Numeral table Constant Numeral Input field Screen paa p Ne Input box P e Touch switch Cursor Move The cursor moves from Numeral Input to Numeral Input fields when the switch area is pressed Screen Em 234 5678 e Touch switch Print Screen A hard copy of the screen will be printed when the switch area is pressed Screen 13 General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Numeral display The data in a Numera
583. set data No 5 1 Copy the preset data character string memory table entry string table to the input field using the copy function allocated to a touch switch 2 Press the touch switch for which the J key code is allocated by the control code input function to write the data that was copied set into the input field to the specified character string memory table entry string table Reference To copy in the character string memory table entry string table and display a character string by a single key operation without using the J key code use a touch switch copy function and a character string display element Character string memory table Sereen String table Display field No 1 Part type 1 No 2 No 3 Part type A d Part type A No 4 Copy No 5 Data Input Section 6 4 Input using a bar code reader PT Character string Screen memory table String table No 1 Input field jm aL ABC 2 I No 3 No 4 No 5 Bar code reader 1 By reading out a bar code using a bar code reader the bar code data can be input to the character string setting input field If automatic confirm is set for bar code reading operation by the memory switch of a PT the read out char acter string is automatically written to a characte
584. sired numeral table entry is not found in the list scroll the list using the scroll bar at the right side of the screen or click on See Entry to open the entry input dialog box OO Cancel Input the number of the desired numeral table entry and click on 3 Select the desired numeral table entry be referenced The selected line will be highlighted 4 Click on to close the dialog box For the procedure for creating library data refer to 8 2 Library Editor 160 Alarm Section 6 3 6 3 Alarm 6 3 1 Alarm List Note Alarms are elements that check the status of a bit memory table entry and change the contents of the display according to the detected status Alarm ele ments consist of alarm lists and alarm histories Alarm list When a bit memory table entry in the specified range goes ON the alarm list displays the corresponding message or image library data Since the bit memory table entries to be checked are set for the individual alarm lists it is possible to check different ranges of bit memory table entries with different alarm table entries Bit memory table entries in the specified range are checked only while an alarm list is displayed and the message and image library data are dis played in accordance with the bit memory table entry that is ON Alarm history When a bit memory table entry for which a check mark is set for the history property goes ON the date time
585. so that only the folder name is displayed indicates that symbol data is registered for the folder is displayed when the folder is open Clicking on this has the same effect as double clicking on the folder name Reference Folders are displayed in the alphabetical order of the folder names In a folder the list of symbol data displays the symbol data in the alphabetical order of the symbol names 6 10 3 Operating the Symbol Manager Opening a folder file Reference Open a folder in which symbol data is registered By opening the symbol collections supplied with the Support Tool or the files saved by the symbol manager P274 it is possible to display the opened data in the symbol manager and to use the required one for screen creation The following symbol data files are supplied with the Support Tool Color Palette Symbol ColorPL SBL Keyboard Keypad Collection Spplmnt SBL ISO Symbol Collections ISO7000 XXXX XXXX SBL CD ROM version only The opened folders symbol data files in the symbol manager remain dis played until they are closed The symbol manager memorizes the folder con figuration when you quit the symbol manager last time and displays the same state when you next start the symbol manager The symbol registration state in the folder is the state when the folder was saved last While registering a symbol from a screen or pasting it to a screen the folder to
586. sor in the table automatically moves to the found table entry number Search for the next appearance by clicking on this button again Replace Clicking this button starts replace processing The data specified for Find What is searched for and replaced with the data set for Replace With Common Operation Section 7 1 When the specified data is found the cursor in the table automatically moves to the found table entry number Search for the next appearance by clicking on this button again Replace All Clicking this button starts replace processing The data specified for Find What is searched for and replaced with the data set for Replace With All appearances are replaced with the specified data at one time Operation procedure search 1 Specify the table address the start position of the search range 2 Click ss 3 Select the objective of the search in the Search By box 4 Specify the search objective data in the Find What box 5 Click on Essex Numeral strine VO Comments Bit Memory Initial Storage Type Wor rn Syste QD system 21000003 ds PLC Addres I O 1000004 1000005 1000006 91000010 E 2 D00012 Seach By madres SC i 1 1000014 jind Wht Close Address Numeral String VO Comments Bit Memory Replace Ali Replace With I PLC Address Sep 21000010 r e 2 00012
587. splay Objects Touch Switch Edit in the Label property of touch switch When writing numeral data to a numeral memory table entry Numeral input element Objects Data Input gt Numeral Thumbwheel switch element Objects Data Input Thumbwheel Switch When copying numeral data between numeral table entries or when setting a constant for a numeral memory table entry Touch switch copy setting Objects Touch Switch Settings Copy Setting in property sheet 7 2 3 Description of Numeral Memory Table Fields Value Initial TypeWords PLC Address I O Comment A Copy Settings Change Address Edit gt Set Reference Search Help The display format varies slightly depending on the PT model The example screen shown above is for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Value Specify the initial value to be set when the power is switched ON the PT is reset or the mode is changed from the System Menu to RUN The range of values that can be input in this field is shown below PT Model Input Type Input Range Other than NT21 NT31 BCD F9999999 to 99999999 NT31C NT631 and NT631 Hexadecimal 00000000 to FFFFFFFF NT21 NT31 NT31C Decimal 2147483648 to 2147483647 NT631 and NT631 Hexadecimal 00000000 to FFFFFFFF 279 Numeral Memory Table Section 7 2 Reference 280 1 Finthe mos
588. splay field INumeral Display 2 e Copying and pasting the numeral display field Numeral Display 1 1 Copy the Numeral Display 1 character string numeral display field and its frame rectangle 2 Paste the copied contents and move them to the desired position for dis playing Numeral Display 2 Display 2 Modifying to Numeral Display 2 3 Double click the Numeral Display 1 character string and modify the prop erties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged 369 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Modifying the numeral display field 4 Double click the numeral display field 0 displayed and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left un changed Reference Indirect Reference Table Entry Integer Decimal b Drag the numeral display field 0 to the desired display position e Modifying the frame 6 Specify the copied frame rectangle and adjust the size and the position Creating the trend graph Data 4 ncc scura i iN i T Ji tg E in EMI H D str Setting the graph 1 Select Objects menu bar Graph Trend Graph Refer to 6 9 4 Trend Graph 2 Atthe trend graph display position drag the mouse to set the trend graph display area as desired 3 Set the general properties as shown below 370 Creating
589. splay object and String Input object are used For details of table setting refer to 7 3 Character String Memory Table String Table Bit Memory Table The Bit Memory table stores status of a PC PLC memory bit This table is set when using the alarm list history function 16 General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Extended I O Input Table Extended I O Output Table Comment Table F Key Input Notify Table Mathematical table Recipe Table It is also used when switching the screen by the operation at the PC PLC For details of table setting refer to 7 4 Bit Memory Table The Extended Input table sets the usage of input terminals of an extended I O unit e g B7A Unit For the individual input terminals a function is set or a PC PLC bit to be refer enced is allocated For details of table setting refer to 7 5 Extended I O Input Table The Extended I O Output table is used to allocate the PC PLC bits that control the output terminals of an extended I O unit The output terminals of the extended I O unit are controlled according to the statuses ON OFF of PC PLC bits For details of table setting refer to 7 5 Extended I O Output Table The I O Comment Table is an area provided in a PT to manage the comment data of all words and bits in the PC PLC that are set by the Support Tool It displays comments on PC PLC words and bits specified by the numeral memory table cha
590. splayed is determined by the setting for Action Type Action Type Open Displays the specified window keyboard If another window keyboard is already displayed it is closed and then the specified window key 218 Touch Switches Section 6 8 board is opened If the specified window keyboard is already dis played no operation is executed Close Closes the presently displayed window keyboard No operation is executed if no window keyboard is displayed Toggle Closes the presently displayed window keyboard and opens the speci fied window keyboard If the specified window keyboard is already opened the window keyboard closes NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C V1 and above How the window is displayed is determined by the settings for Action Type and Replace Local Window Action Type Open Displays the specified window If another window of the same type Lo cal 1 Local 2 is already displayed follows the setting for Replace Lo cal Window If the specified window is already displayed in specified type no operation is executed Close Closes the presently displayed window with specified type Local 1 Local 2 and number No operation is executed if specified window is not displayed in specified type Toggle Closes the window with specified type Local 1 Local 2 and number if it is presently displayed and opens the specified window if it is not opened If another window of the same type is already displa
591. ssible For details of NT20 30 620 compatible mode refer to Appendix A NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode For details of the modification of screen data and program at the host refer to Correcting the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C screen data after conversion on page 467 465 Data Conversion Appendix A 3 Change the allocated bits and words If necessary change the allocated bits and words Usually it is not necessary to change the allocated bits and words since their settings in the conversion source data are reflected in the converted data However if the data is converted from the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C to a conventional model in element units or if the data is converted between different direct access types modification of the allocated bits and words may become necessary since the range of usable word addresses differ For details refer to Correcting the PC PLC addresses on page 468 4 Correct the screen data If the data is converted from a PT model to another PT model that has small er screen than the source PT model it is necessary to modify the screen data in accordance with the screen size If data is converted between a conventional model and a new model the data must be corrected in accordance with the conversion destination be cause there are many differences between a conventional model and a new model Refer to page 466 5 Modify the program If the screen data is corrected the pro
592. stering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation 6 14 Recip Screen Elem nt usce rele re vH Xu p WP TRUM SECTION 7 Memory Table Setting 7 1 Common Operation ccc e 7 2 Numeral Memory Wes Wee EEN eve pep eee gs 7 3 Character String Memory Table String 74 Bit Memory uere eH as cea Ta Extended VO Input ssi y gy ee PER EE EG PER ER EE 7 6 Extended I O Output Table gt e 7 71 YO Comment Table ERI ea REL RR RE RT 1 8 Key Input Notify Table ic edere cow s Seas Su aw PRESUR 7 9 Mathematical Raya eR per ra x e eaa 7 10 Recipe Table i ee Ree eae dete hha I Due p e Oben ue ORC SECTION 8 Editing Graphic Data e 00 0 0000 0000 0 0009 000090 9 9 9 Sek Image cue ue DERI RO CUR Ue ERU ER RTT 8 2 Labr ry BditoE I B RR RACER td 83 Mark Editon o vob ewan Se ens a rege HIM cate du SECTION 9 Example Screens 0 00 0 00000 000 000 0000909 0 00009009 09 9 9 9 Example Screen Configuration en 9 2 Operation FloW iili e reru be rk e RR RR DRY RR EGO ER REIR RO Ed 9 3 Creating the Sample Data lt riaan sana eaa k Aa
593. sting I O comments in Support Tool in I O comment table Word Bit Comment 000603 BBB comments in ladder program to be imported os _ 0006 comments in Support Tool I O comment table after importing PLC Bit Address VO Comment 0000500 Yes 0000512 EEE No 0000800 No 0000603 BBB Yes 0000613 GGG No 0000700 CCC Yes 0000708 HHH No 0000800 111 a Existing I O comment in Support Tool in comment table Comment Table Section 7 7 Handling of I O comments of Timer Counter Timer Counter do not have their own number They share common Timer Count er number However with an I O comment table at Support Tool it is possible to input Timer and Counter separately So when the Timer Counter number is imported I O comment table stores the same comment both for timer and counter of the same number In case I O comment table at Support Tool has an existing I O comment for either of timer and counter existing comment Support Tool in comment table takes priority and imported I O comment will be stored only for an empty one Example Existing I O comment in Support Tool in I O comment table Word Bit Comment cNTOD ENTOG 1 O comments in ladder program to be imported Word Bit Comment TIM CNTOOO Existing I O comments in Support Tool in I O comment table after importing PLC Bit
594. stored when the bit memory table entry goes ON or the bit memory table entry registered for the alarm history is displayed Image Library Code If you want to display image data or library data when a message is selected set a check mark in the check box and specify the image library code after clicking on Change Image Or Change Library Color Foreground Specify the color in which the message display field is displayed when a mes sage is selected Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Code setting in the image library code field When setting a code in the image library code field the desired code can be selected from the list as an alternative to direct input of a specified code using a keyboard Setting the image data To set an image code in the image library code field by selecting image data from the list follow the procedure described below 1 Specify the image library code field where the code is set Click on Change Image 3 Specify the image data from the list 4 Click on The code of the specified image data is displayed the image library code field Hl e Insert Image OK button button Setting the library data To set a library code in the image library code field by selecting library data from the list follow the procedure describ
595. t Create a lamp or a touch switch for which On Off Static is set as the label type 2 Turn the PC PLC bit to which the lamp is allocated ON OFF PT Screen If ON 4 DEF 4 If OFF Lamp or touch switch with On Off static label Only for the NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above Tools Library Editor Create the text to be displayed as the library data Objects Lamp Image Display the created data Turn the PC PLC bit to which the image library lamp is allocated ON OFF PT Screen If ON 4 DEF If OFF Image display Objects String display Display the contents of a character string memory table entry string table Change the contents of the word allocated to the char acter string memory table entry string table with the PC PLC ladder program PT PC PLC Screen Character string memory table String table Ladder program ABC ABC DEF I ABC DEF DEE Character string display 410 Quick Reference Displaying character strings texts To switch the displayed character string according to the touch switch input Section 10 1 Operation 1 Objects T
596. t Closing the Translation Support Utility 514 To close the Translation Support Utility use any of the operations shown below n the menu select File Exit Click the EJ Button at the upper right corner in the main window e Double click the Translation Support Utility icon displayed in the upper left sec tion in the main window Control Menu Translation Support Utility Appendix D Click the Support Tool icon displayed in the upper left section in the main win dow then select lese l amp F in the control menu box Press the F4 key while holding down the Alt key If you are going to exit the Translation Support Utility a confirmation message will be displayed for you to generate MMI files for the particular languages After you exit the Translation Support Utility the screen will return to the Windows screen 515 Appendix E Tables of Functions of PT Models The functions that can be set by the Support Tool are summarized below for each PT model Some functions can be set at the PT side even if they cannot be set by the Support Tool PLC Vendor PT Configuration PT Type NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT11S NT600S NT620S NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Items OMRON e e e Mitsubishi A Mitsubishi Fx Memory Link AB GE Siemens Modicon t Can be set only with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and above 2 Ca
597. t as desired e If the size of the image library data is smaller than the display area the image library data is displayed taking the lower left corner of the display area as the reference M Image library data display area Image library data Reference With NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C if image library data is larger than the image library data display area the area exceeding the display area will not be Alarm Section 6 3 displayed on PT while the whole data is displayed on the Support Tool Be sure to set image library data display area so that image library data fits inside it For an alarm list element the property settings bit memory table and charac ter string memory table string table are related to each other as shown below Character string Alarm list NS Bit memory table memory table Character string memory lt String table table entry String table 10 ABC Image library data FE20 N DEF PLC address 0001000 JKL Image data e Specified PC PLC bit Number of bits Set for No of Bits Referenced Table Entry No Set for Start Bit Table Entry An alarm list element is used in combination with bit memory table entries How they function is shown below Setting at bit memory table Setting at Set dialog box PLC A
598. t at PT side can be enabled dis abled using the PT con trol bit in PT control area also Modify the pro gram according to the setting 481 Data Conversion Appendix A Correction related the number of digits for numeral display In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model conver sion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the range of numeric values that can be displayed Difference New models A numeric value of up to 10 digits can be displayed Conventional models numeric value of up to 8 digits can be displayed Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Status after i i rrective Action Conversion Conversion Error Message Corrective Actio With a new model With a conventional Numeral Display Create a new numeral a numeral display model a numeral Total number ofin display element Correct element for which display element of teger and decimal the screen data or the numeric value ex greater than 8 digits exceeds limit It is program at the host so ceeding 8 digits is is discarded discarded that a constant of up to displayed is regis 8 digits suffices Refer tered to the symbol to 6 6 Numeral Display manager Correction related to analogue meter In the conversion of the data between new models with V1 and above and other PT models conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to presence
599. t or whose data is not valid Any incorrect value in a CSV line is shown in red in the Original row as shown in the diagram below The Import row will display the adjusted values You can change the values high lighted in red to the desired ones In the Name field if the string consist of more than the allowed number of charac ters the data will be truncated from the right In the Lock field O means unchecked and 1 means checked Anything other than that is considered invalid This value will be reset to uncheck In the Parameter fields any non numeric data is considered invalid The values will be reset to 0 Recipe Table Section 7 10 Example For example if the imported data is this is only for testing and only 11 characters are allowed then the grid cell will show this is only in red for testing will be truncated 12 js not valid for the Lock field and is thus highlighted in red So are and 62 78 for parameter values which are both reset to O Description of Improper Line Dialog Controls Improper Line You cannot edit this Improper Line edit box Displays the improper line in the CSV file Detail Original Shows the original CSV line It cannot be edited and these invalid val ues will be displayed in red Import Shows the default values and you can modify the default values Name Shows the first value in the CSV file This is the record name If the value has m
600. t program program Pm program REI Support Tool NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C without V1 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C V1 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C V1 System Ver 2 1 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C V2 System Ver 3 1 Downloading Uploading is possible Both Batch Transmission and Individ ual Transmission are possible x The message shown below is displayed on transmitting Application version mismatched communication aborted Ay Message warning you about 32 dot font and font type ISO 8859 is displayed on transmitting If this combination is selected 32 dot font and font type 150 8859 are displayed on a PT but they are not available on the Support Tool Ao Message warning you about 32 dot font and font type ISO 8859 is displayed on transmitting If this combination is selected 32 dot font and font type 431 Communication Setting at the Support Tool Section 11 2 150 8859 are displayed on the Support Tool but they are not available on a PT 16x16 font and CP437 font type are used on the PT Note If the vendor manufacturer of the PLC you are using and the PLC ven dor setting of the created screen data is different transmission is not pos sible The following message is displayed Memory access mismatched communication aborted 11 1 3 Data Communication Procedure The procedure for transmitting data between a PT and the Support Tool is indi cated below Setting for com
601. t reads writes numeric values that were set using NTST from to the PC PLC when the write read touch switch is pressed Screen PC PLC 10 25 315 Recipe Alarm When bit in a bit memory table is ON OFF the object displays the data in a string table entry and stores it in the alarm history When the displayed data of the string table is touched the object displays image library data switches the screen to the specified screen Ej Bit memory table Alarm list display Temp Alarm w String table Temp Alarm Touch display Image Library table Library data Alarm history display Lp Temp Alarm 96 11 06 16 02 Pres Alarm 97 01 06 18 25 If an Indirect Reference is used with image library data data to be displayed can be changed according to the change in the contents of numeral table The NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with System Ver 2 1 and above only The NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 or V3 provide an interlock function that can be used to enable disable operations or inputs using touch switches numeral inputs string inputs or thumbwheel switch based on the sta tus of specific bits in the PLC Tables are areas secured in the PT to store data such as numeral data and char acte
602. t significant digit position 8th digit indicates a negative value 2 With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C a hexadecimal num ber can be input by entering at the beginning of a numeric value The input hexadecimal value is converted to decimal for display For PT models other than the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the input 8 digit hexadecimal value is simply stored as it is there are no distinctions between BCD and hexadecimal for these models If the input numeric value is displayed in BCD format F in the most significant digit position 8th digit is treated as a negative sign With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the input numeric value is stored after conversion to signed binary data 2 words Setting of an initial value is valid when the resume function is not selected and the Initial item is selected for the numeral memory table entry and in this case the content of the numeral memory table entry is returned to the initial value If the PT has the memory table initialization function this function can also be used to re turn the content of a numeral memory table entry to the initial value Initial Specify whether or not the content of the numeral memory table entry is written to the allocated word in the host when the PT is switched on or reset or the mode is changed from the System Menu to RUN The term initialize means the processing to initialize the content of a word in the host with the
603. t status If you do not want to use NT20 30 620 compatible mode disable the NT20 30 620 compatible mode Configuration PT Type NT20 30 620 compatible mode can be set only when NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C V2 V3 is selected as a PT Model In NT20 30 620 compat ible mode the following points will be the same as for the NT30 620 series Image library can be inserted into a lamp touch switch label or a character string Image library code Word configuration of PT control notify area 485 Reference Appendix B System Installer Operation The Support Tool is provided with a system installer which installs the system program at a PT Version up of the PT system program or installation of new communication pro grams in a PT are possible by installing the system program Version up of NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V1 system program Ver 2 1 or below is possible by installing the system program that is supplied with the Support Tool Ver 4 00 For details of the conversion method refer to Appendix A Data Conversion In this case however the following function can not be used 32 dot high definition font Refer to Settings for text display in 6 1 10 Setting Properties Font type ISO8859 1 Refer to Font Type in 3 3 and Appendix Memory unit system transmission Refer to operation manual of NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V2 To reuse the existing NT31 NT31C N
604. t used for the communications with the PT for Com Port Make the PT ready for installation of the system program The operation required at the PT varies depending on the PT model Basi cally execute the processing for deleting the system program then that for setting the PT in the state in which it waits for the reception of the system program For details refer to the manual for your PT Go Click on gt in the main window System Installer Operation Appendix B The system program is installed While the system program is being installed the progress of the operation is displayed in graph form At the completion of system program installation the corresponding mes sage is displayed Read the message and click At the PT press the touch switch that acknowledges the end of system pro gram installation The PT re starts by the installed system program 491 Reference Appendix C NT Transfer Utility With the Support Tool on CD ROM the NT Transfer Utility which can transmit screen data to a PT easily on site is supplied It can download the screen data file in mmi format to a PT and can save the screen data uploaded from a PT to a file in mmi format Screen data file in mmi format is less than 1 44 Mbytes So it is useful when you save the file in a floppy disk to transfer the data to and from a PT on site NT Transfer Utility is a software that is exclusively used for downloading uploadin
605. ta and Marks NT11S Items NT11 NT600S Ver 5 NT620C NT6209 NT625C Ver 4 NT31C NT631C Total No 224 224 4095 Code FE20 to FEFF FE20 to FEFF 0001 to OFFF Comp Mode 8 Colors Comment Total No 896 896 12288 Library Code FA20 to FAFF FB20 to FBFF FC20 to FCFF FD20 to FDFF FA20 to FAFF FB20 to FBFF FC20 to FCFF FD20 to FDFF 1000 to 3FFF Comment Total No 224 224 224 Code Memory Tables NT11S NT11 FF20 to FFFF NT600S Ver 5 FF20 to FFFF NT620C NT625C Ver 4 NT620S Ver 4 FF20 to FFFF NT631C No 128 512 1000 512 512 1000 512 1000 2000 Value e Initial e Table Words Numeral pc PLC Address Com ment No 256 1000 1 256 1000 1 256 1000 2000 2 Value 8 40 40 40 Initial Words PC PLC Address Com ment 1 String Table entry no from 256 to 999 are the entries that only the initial value can be stored and can not be changed 2 String Table entry no from 500 to 1999 are the entries that only the initial value can be stored and can not be changed 3 Image library data can be inserted in the following models NT30 C NT620 C NT625C NT21 NT20S compatible mode NT31 C V2 or later models NT30 62
606. ta creation procedure refer to 8 1 Image Editor b Close the image editor 6 Call the image editor again and create the image data for code FE21 Reference It is possible to copy image data FE20 onto FE21 on the image table so that it can be reused Follow the procedure below a Click on New and register the code FE21 Properties other than code need not be changed b Specify FE20 and select Copy by pressing edit button c Specify FE21 and select Paste by pressing Edit button Creating the Image Lamp Image Lamp Image Lamp Creating the title 1 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Text 2 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the label Image Lamp is to be displayed 3 Set the properties as shown below 376 Description Image Lamp Position Font Type Standard Scale 2x2 Smoothing D Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Transparent Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 4 Adjust the position of Image Lamp character string on the data creation screen by dragging it Setting the image library lamp S 6 Select Objects menu bar Lamp Image Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the image library lamp is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner Set a check mark in the check
607. ta in DOS format Once you read the data that was created using DOS version Support Tool by NT series Support Tool for Windows do not upload the data with DOS tool Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 even if it has been download to PT Downloading will be possible however the data may not be used with DOS version Support Tool correctly ST D OS version Support Tool Ko Upper N NT20 NT20S NT30 aim PT NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C Windows version Support Tool With mmi file format error check is executed before saving By this error check data that cannot be downloaded to PT will not be stored With the Support Tool on CD ROM the NT Transfer Utility which transmits file to the PT is supplied For details refer to Appendix C NT Transfer Util ity 3 3 4 Closing the Screen Data Application File It is not possible to open two or more screen data files with one Support Tool So when you want to edit different screen data file you need to close the currently opened file or start up the second Support Tool using the Import Component command from the File menu For details of Import Component refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool To close application select Close from File in the main window menu If the screen data application has not been saved a message requesting con
608. ta log ging function and the background function are used is shown below Regard less of the use of these functions the trend graph element always starts draw ing a graph from the initial state when the screen is changed to the trend graph display screen Without logging and background functions Switching pg the screen Returning D Trend graph screen Other screen Trend graph screen starts drawing a graph newly De oe aaa Dt 7 249 Graphs Section 6 9 With data logging function but without background function Switching PEN EJ sereen screen ee Trend graph screen Trend graph screen Other screen starts drawing a dee newly Previous data are re displayed by pressing The trend graph is drawn newly when the screen is switched back to the trend graph display screen However it is possible to redisplay the past data drawn in the trend graph previously by pressing a touch switch that has the function to dis play the past data In this case however the data are not logged while a trend graph is not displayed With logging and background functions Switching E screen Bui Trend graph screen Other screen Trend graph screen Data is always logged Past data are re displayed continuously by pressing 4 page return Although the trend graph starts displaying new data when the screen is Switched back to the trend graph display screen it is possible to display the
609. tems displayed in the pop up edit menu are common to most of all elements 1 Select an element 107 Common Operation Section 6 1 2 Right click the mouse Cut Copy Paste Align Delete Bring To Front Send To Back 3t Edit Object Select Object Properties Use As Default 6 1 3 Selecting an Element Reference To edit or move an element select the created element When an element is selected W marks handles are displayed to enclose the selected element 14 Selection mark handle it Arrows in the handle indicate the direction to which the size of the element can be changed When the mouse cursor is set on the handle the shape of the cursor is changed to an arrow of the same direction Selecting an element using a mouse Click the element you want to select Selecting an element using a Tab key Each time the Tab key is pressed elements are selected one by one according to the display order If no elements are selected the element of the highest display order will be in selected status when the Tab key is pressed When the Shift Tab keys are pressed together the selection order will be re versed Selecting an element from among overlapped elements 108 Reference When elements are overlapped complicatedly use the element selection func tion below When you click on the overlapped elements the element with the smallest area enclosing the
610. ter lle pem TOUR UR Left Center Right Page numbers date time and file name can be printed automatically To select the item to be printed as a header or a footer move the cursor to the 456 Section 12 2 Printing Reports Print dialog box print location and click on the corresponding button pae No Date Time Filename Printer Set the printer to be used Range Specify the pages to be printed All All pages are printed Pages Only the specified pages are printed The pages to be printed are specified as a range AI C Pages from 1 tof The pages to be specified here are actual print pages and it must be taken into consideration that one screen data does not always corre spond to one print page If you want to print the screens partially use the Print Preview function to check the correspondence between pages and screens to specify pages Print to File Specify this item to output the contents to be printed to a file The file format differs depending on the printer used After setting a check mark in the check box click ex the file name setting dialog box is displayed Copies Specify the number of copies to be printed Number of copies Set the number of copies Collate Specify if the same page is printed in a group when printing multiple copies The same page is printed in a group if a check mark is set in the check box 12 2 3 Output to a F
611. the Sample Data Section 9 3 Position Size Frame Shape Shadow Show ON State Color Frame White ON White OFF Transparent Function Copy Setting Copy From Numeral Table String Table Code Entry Text Box Numeral Table String Table Cursor Position Entry Text Box Address PC PLC Ad dress Comments Lamp Attribute On Type Light Label 1 Press Edit to set the label After completing the setting go to the next step without clicking on button Setting the label of Auto button Auto refer to the following 4 Press edit in the general property of a touch switch and set the la bel properties as shown below Description Auto Position Font Type Standard Scale 1x2 High Smoothing al Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Black Click on returns to touch switch property then click on again Adjusting the size and position of Auto button b Specify the Auto button and select Edit menu bar Edit Object 391 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 6 Adjust the size and position of Start button frame 7 Adjust the position of the label Auto by dragging it Creating the Man button 8 Copy the Auto button a
612. the form of a list and the screen or element that corresponds to the specified table entry is displayed Reference Reference operation is valid only when a memory table window is opened with the Tools Table operation If the memory table window is called from the ele ment property dialog box reference operation is not possible Description of reference dialog box Table Entry 0 Screen Table Comments Cancel Help Table Entry Displays the selected table entry number Screen Table Displays the screen number or the table entry number where the specified table entry is used Whether the displayed number is a screen number or a table entry number can be determined from the displayed number as shown below For screen numbers only a number is displayed 268 Section 7 1 For table entry numbers a number is preceded by a code that represents the table type The codes representing table types are summarized below Table type Numeral memory table Character string memory table String table Bit memory table Extended 1 0 input table Extended I O output table Mathematical table Reference operation is slightly different for mathematical table When a math ematical table entry is created with numeral table entry as either operand or re sult a reference is created to the corresponding entry in numeral table When operand r
613. the touch switch grid size and just enough to accommodate the cell data display An example recipe frame will have the frame lines exactly over the touch switch grid The width of a 2 character wide cell will be exactly 1 touch switch grid wide Position Displays the position of the top left corner of the screen element Size Displays the size of the screen element Show Parameter Displays parameter when checked Show Serial No Displays serial number when checked 263 Recipe Screen Element Section 6 11 264 No of Parameters Sets the number of parameters to display on the Screen Display Line Qty Sets the number of record rows to display on the Screen Param Column Width Sets the width of each parameter column All columns have the same width The actual width in pixels will be in terms of touch switch grid size Record Name Width Sets the width of the record name column All columns have the same width The actual width in pixels will be in terms of touch switch grid size Scale Defines the font size for alphanumeric characters Smoothing Defines whether alphanumeric characters have smoothing effect Frame Colour Defines the frame color of the screen element Record Name Colour Foreground Defines the foreground color of the serial numbers recipe name and record names part of the screen element Background Defines the background color of the serial numbers recipe name and record names part of
614. thematical table will be transmitted only when application transmission is performed When data is sent from the Support Tool to a PT the existing data in the PT is lost Therefore make sure that the existing data in the PT is backed up by the Support Tool before executing data transmission from the Support Tool to the PT With the Support Tool on CD ROM NT Transfer Utility that is exclusively used for downloading uploading the screen data is supplied For details refer to Ap pendix C 1 Select Connect menu bar Download NT series Support Tool PT Sending Downloading the Data Section 11 3 The menu is displayed allowing you to select the data to be sent The items that can be selected vary according to the PT model Selection of Screen is not possible if screen data is not selected Pressing Ctrl key Shift key D executes Application downloading 2 Select the data to be sent Data transmission timing is determined according to the type of data se lected to be sent Data Type Description Application in file units Data transmission starts immediately Screen If a parent screen is included in the screens selected to be sent a dialog box is displayed requesting you to specify wheth er child screens are sent with the parent Screen Set a check mark for the Include Child Screen item if you want to send the child screens with the parent screen Data transmission starts when 9
615. ting a Parent Screen Modification 94 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens 0 eee 94 5 4 1 Window Keyboard Screens 0 0 94 5 4 2 Improved Input Key window Keyboard Function 97 5 5 UExtended Screenis Shes sia tals ta ed e dettes 99 5 6 Occurrence History Screen 1 0 cece eect eben eens 100 5 7 Frequency History Screen 0 cece cee eee eet hn n 101 5 8 Host Connect Screen System Initializing Screen 101 529 Password uer vio Phos Seiad gaat eka tek Re Re abr add 102 5 10 Menu Screen cce RP nA os OS Ra OSA DT VEO Wala wens bo Ded een SS 103 5 11 Print Format Screen 5 eG ea eee ey 103 5 12 Programming Console Screen 2 0 eee 103 5 13 Device Monitor ee be heh ne hh Eee eee eee 104 5 14 Contrast and Brightness Adjustment 0 0c cee eee ce eee ee eens 104 79 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 5 1 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings Operations The Support Tool provides various types of screen The screens that can be created using the Support Tool are shown below The screens that can be used differ depending on the PT model Standard screens Continuous overlapping screens Window Keyboard screens Extended screens Occurrence history screens Fre
616. ting and Reading the Date and Time 430 430 430 432 432 433 436 439 440 429 Preparation for Data Communications with a PT and Data Communication Procedure Section 11 1 11 1 Preparation for Data Communications with a PT and Data Communication Procedure 11 1 1 Connection to PT To send receive data between a PT and the NT series Support Tool personal computer connect them with a cable Cable The recommended communication cable supplied by OMRON has a 25 pin RS 232C connector at the end for connection to a personal computer To con nect to a PC AT compatible personal computer that has a 9 pin female con nector use a 25 pin to 9 pin conversion adapter available on the market Recommended cable is in the Appendix J Connection Connect the RS 232C connector at the personal computer to the Support Tool connection port at the PT For the location of the connection port in the PT refer to the Appendix of the User s Manual of the PT With some models of PT it is necessary to disconnect from the host before connecting the Support Tool An example of connection is shown below assuming NT31 NT31C 11 1 2 Available Data Communication Methods by PT Models Data communication is possible by the two methods indicated below Batch transmission of all screen data Data transmission in screen and data units individual transmission Whether or not individual data transmission is possible depends on the PT model
617. tion 38 3 Copying the reference graphics To reuse the existing graphic displayed in the reference graphic display area specify the range to be copied and click on amp above the reference graphic dis play area After copying the graphic click on above the edit area Paste button Copy button Mark Editor lal Hee e m cn 8 Specifying the copy range Cancel Quitting the mark editor To quit the mark editor click on the button of the mark editor If you click on the created mark data is discarded before you quit the mark editor Mark zu jal B OT OK button t Cancel Help IE 349 Mark Editor Section 8 3 Deleting mark data To delete the mark data specify the mark data to be deleted in the mark data list dialog box and click on S how 8 Code FF20 Show Code FF20 LI 4 4 YAYtic Cancel LET P 4 2 XAYVYttiec 4 Cancel Reset Help Reset Reset button 350 SECTION 9 Example Screens This section is intended to familiarize you with the operation of the Support Tool through actual operation The operational procedures for creating example screens are explained step by step Please follow the steps shown in this section and create example screens in order to understand the functions and the features of t
618. tion Support Utility 3 Automatic generation of translated MMI file Default target filename with country language name as qualifier is used to store the translated MMI file 4 Contents not translated are displayed as blank and changes will not be tracked b The length limit of label is constrained by the target PT Model 6 Code that corresponds to an image mark library entry will be displayed in its original form ASCII representation i e it will not be tagged by the NTST opening token and closing token 7 Touch Switch and Standard Lamp with dynamic labels only or those with no label at all will not be extracted for translation 8 The validations performed are the number of row column and the length limit of the label according to PT Model Additionally with the NT30 620 series during saving once the translation is completed a warning message will be displayed to open the translated MMI file in NTST and validate the application to ensure proper behavior 9 Translation Support Utility will also take care of key code conversion 1508859 1 CP437 results wherever necessary and also restricted Chi nese Input for NT20S Languages The following is a list of commonly used languages available for selection You can also specify a language not in the list 1 English 2 Japanese 3 Simplified Chinese 4 Traditional Chinese 5 German 6 French Translation Support Utility Database Manageme
619. tion dialog box Button in the con Cutting copying the image data To cut or copy an image data follow the procedure below The cut copied image data will be stored to the clipboard and can be pasted to the other codes 325 Image Editor Section 8 1 In case of cut cut code will be deleted from the image table In case of copy copied code remains in the image table Reference When two Support Tools are started up by Import Component from the File menu the data that is cut or copied on the image table of one Support Tool can be pasted onto the image table of another Support Tool PT model setting of the two screen data files should be the same For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Com ponents from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool 1 Select Image Editor from the Tools menu The image table is displayed 2 Select the code of the image data to be cut or copied Select only one code When two or more codes are selected cut copy op eration can not be performed Click the edit Button or right click on the selected code Select Cut or Copy 9 Image data of the selected code will be stored to the clipboard In case of cut confirmation dialog box will be displayed After clicking the j Button cut code will be deleted from the image table Code Comp Mode Size Comments Code Comp Size Comments _ Circle Imp OFF min
620. tion the mouse cursor on a green handle the shape of the mouse cursor changes as shown below Drag the mouse cursor in the indicated direction to change the size of the library data specifying frame Right left handle Up down handle Apex handle bh 4 bh 8 The library data specifying frame can be moved by dragging the frame at positions other than handles When handles are displayed position the mouse cursor on the dotted line at a position where there is no handle the shape of mouse cursor changes as shown below Drag the mouse The frame moves as it is dragged I E 4 After changing the size and the position of the library data specifying frame click on the screen at a position other than on the frame The size and the position of the library data specifying frame is determined and the handles are cleared To change the size and the position of the library data specifying frame re peat the procedure above from step 1 To set a grid on the library editor screen select Screen menu bar and Grid The necessary settings for displaying grids are same as those for a standard screen For details refer to 5 1 2 Grid Setting EE Tools Connect v Ctrl Vertical Spacing 10 C Touch Switch Grid IV Display Grid IV Snap to Grid You can quit the library editor in any of the three ways described below Clicking the x Button at the upper right area of the library editor e Selecting Close fro
621. tions Floating palette The standard toolbar draw bar utility bar and alignment bar can be moved as a floating palette to a convenient place for your operation ST alaja a 22 17 vel gt amp Eae sf or 101 FETTE S SD EUNT Object information on the status bar The information for the selected object that will be displayed on the status bar is indicated in the following table No information will be displayed when multiple objects are selected Information to be displayed may be cut depending on the resolution of the screen or the selected object Screen Element Selected item Fixed Display Object Fixed Display Object Name Attribute Fixed Display Mark Mark Object 1 Fixed Display Image Image Object Reference Type Code Comment Size Compression Information to be displayed Fixed Display Library Library Object Reference Type Code Comment Image Lamp Image Lamp PLC Address ON code OFF code ON comment if check else OFF com ment Standard Lamp Standard Lamp PLC Address Label Touch Switch Touch Switch Function PLC Address Label If function type is Notify Bit display Notify Address else display Lamp Address 43 User Interface Section 3 2 Screen Element Selected item Thumbwheel Information to be displayed Thumbwheel PLC Address Table
622. to 2147483647 Decimal unsigned 0 to 99999999 0 to 2147483647 Since a negative value is also displayed as a positive value when Display Sign is deselected 2147483648 is displayed as 2147483648 even though the maximum value that can be stored in the numeral memory table is 2147483647 205 Character String Display Section 6 7 6 7 Character String Display The contents of a character string memory table entry are displayed Character string displays can be used with all models PT 1 The character string stored in the specified character string Character string memory memory table entry string table is displayed Screen table String table Display field No 1 TOOL No 2 No 3 TOOL No 4 Read No 5 Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects the String Display Selection using the drawing toolbar Terminology Background ABCD f Property setting General Position Indicates the display position of the character string display field The reference point is at the upper left corner of the display field Font Type Specify the font of characters to be displayed Standard Half Height Only Standard can be set for NT11S NT11 Scale Specify the scale of characters to be displayed 1x1 Equal 1x2 High 2x1 Wide 2x2 3x3 4x4 8x8 Not possible for NT20 NT20S Smoot
623. to display the properties for grouped objects The properties show the tree the ob jects included in the group Choose each object in the tree to edit the structure Preview in Symbol Manager Registered symbols can be previewed on the symbol manager Previous sym bols can be previewed after they are copied onto the NTST EV4 6 screen and copied back to symbol manager to create preview images Or those symbols can be reused without preview as they are Copying Image Library Mark with contents When copying Image Library Mark objects NTST EV4 6 will copy them with contents and registered them in each table If the same code is already used in the table the NTST will display a dialog to show the next unused number as a substitute The functionality does not recursively apply to references in the Image Library Mark object For example when copying a library object that refers to library entry and the content of the entry contains text with a mark reference then the corresponding mark content will be ignored It also does not apply to when Screens are copied in Application Manager for pasting into a second instance of NTST Main Differences of V4 7 NT11 V1 New System Program Support Starting with NTST EV4 7 the NTST supports creating screen data for the NT11 V1 NT11S data can be converted to NT11 V1 data Refer to NT11 User s Manual for details Supported Windows OS Starting with NTST EV4 7 the NTST supports Windows Me 2000 Pr
624. tomatically converted and if an error occurred in data conversion an error message is displayed For details refer to Appendix A Data Conversion Concerning image library data only the code is registered at the symbol man ager Therefore if the image library data is pasted to another screen data file the image library data of that code in the file to which the data was pasted is displayed If the ISO symbols supplied by the CD ROM version Support Tool are used with NT20 NT20S or NT600S those symbols that consist of elements that are not supported may not be displayed correctly Image library collection supplied by the CD ROM version Support Tool can be used only with models that can use image library Pasting an ISO symbol To paste an ISO symbol to the data creation screen of the Support Tool select the symbol and drag it to the desired position on the data creation screen then re lease the mouse Same operation as the other symbols Sy mbo Manager 000 file Edit rectilresr Bg 0022 Limited rectilinear Drag the symbol to the data creation screen and release the mouse Reference It is not possible to change the colors and size of ISO symbols since the ele ments are registered in the grouped status 6 10 5 Operating Procedure of Color Palette Symbol Color palette symbol Color palette symbol is a symbol for which tiling objects are registe
625. tribute to determine how a numeric value is displayed Attributes to be displayed here vary somewhat according to the PT model Standard The numeric value is displayed in the specified color and spe cified background color Inverse The numeric value and background are displayed in colors that are the reverse of the specified colors Flash The numeric value flashes when displayed If this attribute is selected standard display and no display background color only are alternated Inverse Flash The numeric value is displayed by alternating standard display and inverse display 127 Section 6 1 Reference To check Flash and Inverse Flash display on the screen specify Simulate Flash from the View menu For details refer to 5 7 3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool Numeral Display x General Settings Referer dn an Table Entry fo El r Display Decimal C Hexadecimal Format Integer Decimal p o Zero Suppression Display Sign Cancel Apply Help Display Type Specify the notation in which numeric values are displayed Decimal Numeric value is displayed in decimal Hexadecimal Numeric value is displayed in hexadecimal The display will differ according to the specified notation even if the same content is displayed 23456 SBA Decimal Hexadecimal Format Specify the number of digits in the integer pa
626. tring Display Label Type Not supported Enables dynamic labeling as Label can be taken from Numeral or String table 6 5 1 6 8 Input Key String function Touch Switch of NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Description of label is always used as a char acter string to be input When a touch switch is pressed a label will be input Character strings can be specified individually Addition of Copy From Label button When a touch switch is pressed set character string will be input regardless of the label 6 8 3 Start up of system in staller from the Sup port Tool Not supported Can be started using Windows Start button only System installer can be started di rectly by selecting Connect Launch System Installer It can also be started up from Windows System programs to be attached NT31 631 series sys tem programs System programs of conventional models such as NT30 620 series are also included in a CD ROM Recipe Not supported This is available only for NT31 631 V2 System Ver 3 1 Brightness and Con trast Adjustment Screen Not supported This is available only for NT31 631 V2 System Ver 3 1 Multi Edit Mode Not supported Available only for recipe object Appendix New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 6 Some User Interface functionality was added to Ver 4 6 to improve operation efficiency NT21 Model support Not supported
627. tring Memory Table String Table The character string memory table String table is an area provided in a PT to store character string data A character string memory table entry string table is allocated to 1 to 20 words in a PC PLC and character string memory table entry string table used for dis play can be shared by the PT and the PC PLC It is possible to insert mark data image data or library data into a character string Note that however NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S do not have image data and library data With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with out NT20 30 620 compatible mode it is not permissible to insert image data and library data into a character string With elements such as character string display and character string input read ing writing of character string data is executed by specifying the character string memory table entry string table number PT Character string memory table Character string OMRON String table display element Read Initial value Character string PT Initialization input element Write No of words 7 Shared PC PLC address 0 Shared comment PLC a Reference la ahr 7 3 1 Operation Procedure Setting A character string memory table entry string table is displayed by the operation described below At the property setting
628. try are treated as the reference table entry number and the contents of the reference memory table entry are displayed Display Type Only Decimal can be set for NT11S NT11 Decimal Specify this item to display the input numeric value in decimal Hexadecimal Specify this item to display the input numeric value in hexade cimal Format Integer Specify the number of digits of the integer part of the input data Decimal Specify the number of digits of the decimal fraction part of the input data Zero Suppression Specify whether or not leading zeros are suppressed to dis play the input data Display Sign Specify if a sign is displayed for a negative value Displays the list of numeral memory table entries Guidance With a numeral display element the memory table designation method can be selected as direct designation or indirect designation 203 Numeral Display Section 6 6 Example Specifying numeral memory table address 2 Direct designation Indirect designation Numeral Numeral memory table memory table 1 Display 1 Display 2 5 5 2 9 123 3 3 4 4 5 s 123 6 The contents of the specified The contents of the specified memory table entry are displayed memory table entry are treated as the table address reference value and the contents of the referenced memory table entry are displayed Indirect design
629. ts The following objects are affected or have an effect on the Mathematical Table Numeral Display Numeral Input Thumb wheel switch Bar Graph Analogue me ter Broken Line Graph Trend Graph 308 Mathematical Table Section 7 9 7 9 3 Supported PLC Addresses The supported addresses for the operand and result based on the PLC vendor type are as follows Omron na DM 00000 to 32767 decimal 00000 to 32767 decimal 00000 to 32767 decimal 00000 to 32767 decimal 00000 to 32767 decimal 00000 to 32767 decimal 00000 to 32767 decimal 00000 to 32767 decimal 00000 to 32767 decimal Memory Link Wod Rane CIO 00000 to 32767 decimal Mitsubishi A Range 0000 to 2700 0000 to 2700 hexadecimal 0000 to 9984 decimal 0000 to 9984 decimal 0000 to 2700 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 decimal 0000 to 270F hexadecimal 0000 to 9999 decimal 0000 to 9999 hexadecimal hexadecimal decimal decimal Mitsubishi Fx 0000 to 9984 decimal 0000 to 9999 decimal 0000 to 9999 decimal 0000 to 9999 decimal 309 Mathematical Table Section 7 9 7 9 4 Description of Mathematical Table Fields Mathematical Table x Description The mathematical function specified in each table entry will be displayed here in the form of a simple equation Left hand side of the equation will indicate the location where result calculated from the function will
630. ty NT Translation Support Utility should be installed separately Refer to Appen dix D Translation Support Utility Data can be added afterward by executing the installation program again In this case when an item that is already installed is specified it will not be over written Also the data will not be uninstalled even if its check mark was set to OFF when the data is already installed To delete data that has already been installed delete all data by uninstalling it and then perform installation again 2 2 1 Basic Installation Operation The buttons that are displayed during the course of installation are shown below Clicking on this button confirms the settings in the displayed window and displays the next window lt Back Clicking on this button cancels the settings in the displayed window and displays the previous window Cancel Clicking on this button causes the window to close The status set in the window is canceled This button stops Support Tool installation if it is clicked at the program install win dow In this case a message is displayed requesting confirmation that installa tion is to be stopped Browse Clicking on this button displays the actual folder configuration in tree form You can select the folder in this display to install the Support Tool 2 2 2 Procedure The following procedure uses Support Tool version 4 8 as a example 1 Start up Windows When using Windows 2000 Windows X
631. type Memory Map Image File mmi X Cancel Click on Open and the dialog to confirm the screen data to be trans mitted is displayed 2 Place the PT in the Transmit mode so that the data sent from the NT Transfer Utility can be received 3 Click on after confirming the screen data to be transmitted in the dialog shown below Downloading of data is started 498 NT Transfer Utility S Receiving Uploading the Data Appendix C If you want to change the screen data to be transmitted click on at the right side of the file name and select the file you want to download MMI Fie Screendatamm 6 Application Information PT Model NT31C PLC Vendor Omron File Size 30740 Cancel If the PT is not in the Transmit mode a timeout error occurs in about 10 se conds at the NT Transfer Utility In this case set the PT in the Transmit mode and click on 3 in the error message dialog box While the data is being sent to the PT the progress of data transmission is indicated by a bar graph To abort the operation click on mere After data transmission is completed click on in the message box The NT Transfer Utility receives uploads the data stored in a PT and saves it in mmi file format Operation Procedure 1 Select Upload from the File menu The dialog box to specify the PT model is displayed see below This dialog box can be called also by
632. type Image documents bmp Cancel Image Editor Section 38 1 Changing the image data size The image data size can be changed in either of the following two ways Changing the size by property setting Changing the size to the range specifying frame size Changing the size by property setting Change the setting for Size in the image editor property settings to change the size of the image data The image data size is changed according to the new setting the reference point of the size change is at the upper left corner of the present size If the size is reduced part of the created graphic may be cut Changing the size to the range specifying frame size The size of the image data can be changed to fit the size of the specified range specifying frame Select Edit in the menu bar then select Clip IDE wiew Tools Conn Undo 1 2 Redo Ctr rey Cut Ctr ox Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctr bei Delete Del Copy To Paste From Clip Rotate or Flip gt Properties Quitting the image editor You can quit the image editor in any of the three ways described below e Clicking the x Button at the upper right corner of the image editor Selecting Close from the control menu box of the image editor Double clicking the control menu box of the image editor Control menu box 10001 Image Object Restore Move Size Minimize Maximize Close Ctrl F4 Next
633. ultiple lt n gt lines With a V2 or earlier model standard lamp touch switch label set to Label Default IW Label Type Static not supported La bel will set to de fault From a 31 631 V2 model application copy Touch Switch Standard Lamp with Label Type set to Numeral Display or String Display and paste in an applica tion for a model ear lier than V2 Label properties are set to default W Label Type Nu meral Display not supported Label will set to default Or W Label Type String Display not supported Label will set to default Correction related to switch screen screen numbers In the conversion of the data between a V2 or later model and a V1 or earlier mod el conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the new device monitor screens available in V2 or later models 484 Data Conversion Appendix A Difference V2 or later models New device monitor screens available Other models Device monitor screens are not supported Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Status after Conversion Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a V2 or later With a model earlier E None model a touch than V2 touch Invalid screen num Switch of switch Switch will be dis ber in Touch Switch screen type is carded because Switch Screen created with switch switch screen num screen numbe
634. umeral memory table in the range No 247 to No 253 is referred to is reg istered to the sym bol manager With a new model the reference nu meral memory table No is corrected to 0 Thumbwheel switch refers to reserved numeral table entry The referenced table entry is reset to 0 Make corrections so that the contents of a numer al memory table in the range No 247 to No 253 are displayed ina numeral display Refer to 6 6 Numeral Display Correction related to an interlock function of a touch switch numeral string input or thumbwheel In the conversion of the data between a V2 V3 model and a non V2 V3 model conventional model conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to an interlock function that has been added to V2 V3 models Difference V2 V3 models Operations Inputs can be enabled disabled according to the status of the host bit interlock bit Conventional models non V2 V3 models Interlock bit can not be set Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With V2 V3 models an object allocated an interlock function is registered in the symbol manager With non V2 V3 models convention al models an inter lock bit setting will be discarded Interlock not sup ported Interlock setting will be dis carded Screen switching nu meral string inpu
635. uncti 2 ata input field K 1234 k External input When the input terminal goes ON it has the same effect as pressing of the control key Canceling backlight OFF PT Extended I O input table Backlight amu s K OFF Backlight ON External input When the input terminal goes ON the backlight which has been turned OFF by the Cancel Backlight Off function set by a memory switch is turned ON to redis play the screen A backlight OFF function releasing attribute is automatically pro vided for the screen switching function and the control code input function N WARNING Do not use the input function of PT extended I O input for applications that could cause fatal injury and or serious damage or as an emergency switch function 7 5 1 Operation Procedure An extended 1 0 input table entry is displayed by following the operation de scribed below Select Tools menu bar gt Ml Extended I O Input tab Clicking on table entry No gt 7 Setting Settings for the extended I O input table fields can be made by using the setting dialog box that is displayed by clicking on For the operation procedure for change Address mo refer to 7 1 Common Operation 294 Extended I O Input Table Section 7 5 7 5 2 De
636. uninstaller uninstall software is supplied with the Support Tool If you want to remove the Support Tool from your personal computer run the uninstaller to delete the Support Tool program files and installation information Note that the data created by the Support Tool is not deleted Starting the uninstaller from the Windows start menu Select Uninstall NTST in the same folder where the short cut to the Support Tool is stored Example Assuming the short cut to the Support Tool exists in the Start Pro gram Omron NTST4 8E Select the uninstaller by the following operation Start Program gt Omron gt NTST4 8E Uninstall NTST After the start up of the uninstaller follow the instructions displayed on the screen 2 2 4 Using the Help File on Windows Vista or Windows 7 36 Help files with an hlp file name extension cannot normally be used on Windows Vista and Windows 7 Microsoft however provides a tool that will allow you to use a help file with an hlp file name extension This tool can be used to enable accessing the help file If you attempt to open the help file while connected to the Internet the download page will be displayed automatically The tool to access the help file can also be downloaded from the following URL http support microsoft com kb 917607 en us Web page last confirmed in March 2010 SECTION 3 Support Tool Starting up and Exiting Procedure and File Operation This s
637. ups The menu bar shows the names of these function groups and the functions in each group are displayed in pull down menus Standard Toolbar Functions that are used frequently such as file reading writing copy and paste undo redo and print are assigned to the buttons in the standard tool bar These functions can be called easily without selecting the function item from the menu bar New Save Print Cut Paste Redo preview Open Print New Copy Undo Whats This Screen Draw Bar Functions to draw objects are assigned to buttons in the draw bar 41 User Interface Section 3 2 These functions can be called easily without accessing the commands from the menu bar Image Polyline Rectangle Text object Library object Polygon Selector Arc Circle Sector Tiling Mark Recipe Lo de deese cd s z m e 4 amp e Por d d o Ne NUN Standard lamp Touch Numeral Numeral Bar Trend Alarm switch input display graph graph history Analogue Meter Image lamp Thumb String String Broker Alarm d input display line list switc graph e Utility Bar Buttons for centralizing label of touch switch or lamp refer to 5 1 3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool simulation for flash attribute in fixed display objects refer to 5 1 3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool lamp ON facility refer to 5 1 3 Changing the Display Method on the Sup
638. using an earlier version of NT series Support Tool It is not possible to read screen data created by NT series Support Tool for Win dows Ver 4 7 with an earlier version of NT series Support Tool With MMI files the screen data created by the Support Tool Ver 4 can be read using Support Tool Ver 3 long as the PT model is supported with Ver 3 With MMI format user group and grid information will be lost e g NT30C MMI file created with Ver 4 Can be read with Ver 3 NT31C V2 MMI file created with Ver 4 Cannot be read with Ver 3 3 3 3 Saving the Screen Data Application File After creating the screen data save it to a file The procedure for saving the screen data to a file is File main window menu Save or File main window menu Save As Save The existing screen data of the opened file is overwritten by the new screen data 55 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 56 Reference If the file was opened using New the operation to be followed is the same as for saving a file by selecting Save As Save As The created or edited screen data is saved by specifying the folder and the file name File name setting dialog If you select Save when creating new screen data or Save As the file name setting window Save As opens Save As Save in Screen 7 e E3 30FUM
639. ust be left unchanged Label al Description Set Screen Screen No 3 1 Press Edit to set the label Creating the Alarm Screen button Alarm Screen Copying and pasting the Monitor Screen button 1 Specify the Monitor Screen button 2 Select Edit menu bar Copy 3 Select Edit menu bar Paste 4 Drag the Monitor Screen button displayed at the upper left area in the data creation screen to the position where you want to create the Alarm Screen button Modifying to the Alarm Screen button 5 Double click the moved button and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged 366 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Label Description Alarm Screen Screen No 4 1 Press Edit to set the label 9 3 6 Creating the Monitor Screen Child Screen 1 The monitor screen consists of overlapping screens with screen Nos 10 and 11 as its child screens When creating overlapping screens create the child screens first Here create screen No 10 as child screen 1 Monitor Screen 1 Select Screen menu bar New Refer to 4 2 3 Creating a New Screen 2 Atthe screen selection dialog box set Standard Screen 3 Atthe new standard screen dialog box set 10 for the screen No Setting the screen properties 1 Select Screen menu bar Properties 2 Setthe screen pr
640. ut File Name Modify the path or name of the output file of the translated language This option is used to display translation settings such as language character set database file source file output file name of the source file and the target file You can also use this setting to change the output file name of the target lan guage Select Settings in the Translation Menu of the Application window The Source Translation Setting Dialog box will be displayed Translation Settings X Language con0 s Character Set Latin T50 8859 1 CP437 Help Source File Files Omron app_Enelish mmi Database File O Proeram Files Omron app_Enelish MDB Translation Support Utility Appendix D If you change the source language to the target language the source translation dialog box will become the target translation dialog The path and name of the Output File Name may be modified Translation Settings X Language Character Set Cancel Latin SO 8859 1 CGP437 Help Qutput File C Proeram Files O mron app_German mmi Browse Database File Files amp Omron app English MDB Delete Translation Deletes the selected Language column Select Delete in the Translation Menu of the Application window This option will only be enabled if there is at least one target language translation data present
641. ut field No 2 is pressed the No 2 input field becomes the objective field for data input The input character string is stored in input field No 2 A cursor moving touch switch is created using the dialog box that is displayed when creating a character string input element The properties for the cursor moving touch switch can be set in the same manner as for a standard touch Switch How the properties for a touch switch are set is shown below For details of Settings refer to 6 8 Touch Switches General Settines l Light Function l Position Size X 81 141 Width 99 Height 39 Label Settings Label Frame Shape Standard Show ON State r Colour Frame OFF Transparent v General Settings Light Function Function Use Window Keyboard Screen Screen No local L Keyboard ai 4 Window Position Bottom Left xp rp Local Window VV Auto Arrange This Touch Switch is not attached to any data input object If a check mark is set for Use Window Keyboard Screen in the cursor moving touch switch setting properties it is possible to display the specified window keyboard at the same time as the cursor is moved 187 Data Input Section 6 4 This feature allows appropriate numeric keys for the input field to be displayed It is possible to create a temporary input field in addition to
642. ute Interlock Table Entry Length Font Type Scale Smoothing 3 Available only in V2 and later models 526 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT600S NT620S Ver 5 Ver 4 Attribute Color Fore ground Color Back ground Focus Frame Focus At tribute Interlock Data Table Input Entry Thumb wheel Switch Display Type Decimal Hexade cimal Format Integer Decimal Limit Maximum Limit Minimum Display Sign Attribute Size End Plate Charac ter Color Fore ground Charac ter Color Back ground Thumb wheel Color Frame 1 Small amp Medium only 2 Medium only 3 Available only in V2 and later models 527 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT11S NT600S NT620S NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Thumb wheel Col or Fore ground 1 Thumb wheel Col or Back ground Interlock Polyline Rectangle Polygon Circle Arc Sector Color Foreground Maximum Character Font Type Scale Smoothing Attribute Color Foreground Color Back ground Insert Mark Insert Image Patter
643. ute ON Type Specify the status of a standard lamp that is ON Edit peni Label Label Label Type Edit Light Flash Displays the dialog box used to specify the bit number Displays an I O comment table entry Specify whether or not a label is appended to a standard lamp Specify the type of the Label when Label is selected Following selections will be available for the NT21 and NT31 631 V2 V3 models Static Static On Off Numeral Display and String Dis play For the other PT models this option is disabled and is set to Static default Displays the dialog box used to edit a label This button is en abled only when Label is selected Copy O Comments Copies the I O comment set to the lamp bit as a label To display a label set a check mark in the check box of the Label attribute in la bel page and select an option of the available options from the Label Type com bo box Label Type Static m Static On Off Static Numeral Display umngDisplav For the non NT21 and NT31 631 V2 models this combo box will have only one choice Static and this will remain disabled Static For this option the On label and the Off label will be same On Off Static For this option On Off labels may be different 195 Lamps Section 6 5 Numeral Display Displays the numeral value by referencing the specified table entry Indirect reference is also possible String Display D
644. vailable word addresses 0000 9999 Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Status after Conversion Conversion With OMRON data The PLC address is PLC address XXX Reset the area to an area other than reset of YYY is invalid It memory link area PT the CIO area is set is reset to default memory If this PC PLC address is re ferred to from the pro gram it is necessary to correct the program ac cordingly Refer to 6 1 10 Setting Proper ties Error Message Corrective Action Correcting the PC PLC addresses On data conversion between PT models When converting the data of the entire screen data file screen data for use with new models cannot be converted to screen data for use with conventional mod els However if the data of a new model is registered for the screen of a conven tional model using the symbol manager the following points must be taken into consideration due to differences in the usable PC PLC address range between a conventional and a new model Difference New models Word addresses can be handled up to five digits Conventional models Word addresses can be handled up to four digits Conversion result error message and corrective action 468 Data Conversion Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Appendix A Corrective Action With a new model word addresses are within four digits With
645. ve memory table entries are converted into percent age values in the range from 0 to 100 or from 100 to 100 and dis played in the form of a broken line graph Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Graph Broken line Graph Selection using the drawing toolbar Terminology Property setting General Position Indicates the display position of a broken line graph The reference point is at the upper left corner of the broken line graph Size Indicates the size of a broken line graph Frame Specify whether or not a frame is displayed for a broken line graph Display Sign Specify whether or not a display area for negative values is displayed Direction Specify the display direction display direction of numeral memory table entries in ascending order of a broken line graph Right 2 Left lt Up T Down 1 237 Graphs Section 6 9 Color Frame Specify the color of a broken line graph frame if Frame is selected Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Range Specify the color of broken line graph displayed for a positive value Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Range Specify the color of broken line graph displayed for a negative value Can only be set for PTs with color display Valid only when Display Sign is selected
646. vely click on the first code to be se lected and then the last code to be selected while pressing the Shift key If you click on a code while pressing the Ctrl key the code will be selected or deselected alternately each time it is clicked Mode Si 8 Colo2 8 Colo 40 8 Colo 40 8 Colo 32 8 Colo 32 Shift 4 Click 8 Colo 32 8 Colo32 Mode Si 8 Colo 24 Ctrl Click 0008 No cn B Colo 32 Preview Function Support Tool provides a preview function that can display the contents of the selected code When two or more codes are selected the preview of the code selected last will be displayed in preview window The preview window can be switched ON and OFF by clicking the reves Preview gt gt button Deleting the image data To delete an image data follow the procedure below Deleted image data will not be stored to the clipboard and its code itself will be also deleted When two or more codes are selected they will be deleted collectively 1 Select Image Editor from the Tools menu The image table is displayed 2 Select the code of the image data to be deleted When two or more codes are selected they can be deleted collectively 3 Perform one of the following operations Edit button Delete e Right click the selected code Delete Delete button Selected code will be deleted after you click the firma
647. version check if NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode Configura tion PT Type is selected In the default status the check mark will be ON when trying to convert screen data from the NT20S NT30 NT620S NT620C and NT625C to the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 or V3 Correcting colors Conversion from monochrome display models to color display models Colors black and white remain as they are after the conversion If you want to color the converted data change or color the data as needed 467 Data Conversion Appendix A Conversion from color display models to monochrome display models Colors are converted into black or white as shown below Colors for objects other than Image Black blue red magenta Black Green cyan yellow white White Colors for Image Black Black Blue red magenta green cyan yellow white White Change the colors as needed Correcting the PLC addresses On data conversion between direct accesses When converting the data between different direct accesses it may be neces sary to change PLC addresses since corresponding PLC is changed In this manual conversion between OMRON and MEMLINK is described Difference OMRON Various words are available such as CIO area and data memory area Available word addresses differ depending on the PLC that is used MEMLINK Only memory link area PT memory can be used A
648. w shows the screen numbers that can be used for a standard screen 90 Continuous Overlapping Screens Section 5 3 PT Model Screen Nos NT11S NT11 1 to 250 NT20 NT20S 1 to 250 256 to 500 NT600S 1 to 1000 NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C 1 to 1899 2000 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C 1 to 3999 Screen No In a standard screen all elements can be used However the usable elements depend on the PT models Standard screens are also used for creating child screens of continuous overlap ping screens 5 3 Continuous Overlapping Screens Reference Continuous overlapping screens are multiple screens that are switched consec utively or overlapped for display Screens that are switched consecutively are called continuous screens and screens that overlap multiple screens are called overlapping screens Screen numbers that can be used for continuous overlapping screens are same as those for standard screens Note that continuous screens cannot be used with the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C To obtain the same effect as con tinuous screens with these PT models use touch switches that are assigned the switch screen function The application manager displays a parent screen as a folder as shown below and child screens are displayed when the folder is opened For NT11S NT11 parent screen setting is not possible 8 28 1 E Screen Ez 2 EN 1 1899 2000 Standard 5 as
649. ware Confirm the Support Tool and PT side PLC vendor and PT type is mismatching Memory utilization has exceeded the XXX bytes limit by YYY bytes Delete several elements Memory utilization has exceeded the XXX bytes limit by YYY bytes Delete several elements and screens More than one Numeral Input Thumb wheel are referring to Numeral Table entry O Set different numeral memory table entry numbers at the numeral input and thumb wheel switch properties 550 Notify Area not specified Control Area not specified Set the PC PLC address for the PT sta tus control area PT status notify area after selecting Tools PT Configuration Number of Object name has exceeded the XXX limit by YYY Delete several elements Numeral Input Total number of integer and decimal exceeds limit It is dis carded Create the numeral input field again Cor rect the screen data and the program in the host so that numeric values such as maximum minimum check values and an input value of up to 8 digits will suffice Error Messages Appendix K Error Message Corrective Action Object Name value is out of limit Default values restored for 10096 096 and 100 Correct the screen data or the program at the host so that a value of up to 8 digits will be sufficient for the 10096 value 096 value and 100 value in the bar graph Object Name has exceeded the maxi
650. when creating a numeral or character string input element The cursor moving touch switch can be added later Touch Switches Section 6 8 Print screen function touch switch 1 When a touch switch is pressed a hard copy of the screen is output to a printer Printing screen hard copy PRINTI Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Touch Switch Selection using the drawing toolbar E3 Terminology Property setting General Position Indicates the display position of a touch switch frame the area that senses pressing of the switch The reference point is at the upper left corner of the touch switch frame Size Indicates the size of a touch switch frame Frame Specify whether or not a frame is displayed for a touch switch Shape Specify the shape of a touch switch Standard Shadow 3 Dimension Rectangle Circle Polygon Sec tor Show ON State Specify the status when touch switch is pressed When this check box is ticked touch switch will be lighten Not valid for 3 Dimension Color Frame Specify the color of a touch switch if Frame is selected Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow ON Specify the display color of a touch switch which is ON Can only be set for PTs with color display Setting is valid only when Show ON state is selected White black blue red mag
651. wing position is fixed and the entire graph moves in the direction set for Direction Present display status Present drawing position ex display status A Present drawing position If you specify a trend graph element only one broken line is displayed To modify the settings for the line select the line to be modified and click on Line Property The line properties are displayed To add a line click on A line is added and the line properties are displayed for the added line A maximum of 50 lines can be created To delete a line select the line to be deleted with the Settings and click on Delete lne The specified line is deleted The following four types of line are provided for displaying trend graphs Solid Dash Dot dash Dot dot dash Set the line type with the Style property The intervals between points of a trend graph in the time axis is specified by Drawing Width The width is set as a number of dots The time intervals in which the drawing value of a trend graph is read is speci fied by Sampling Cycle Set the interval in units of 0 1 seconds for NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C and 0 5 seconds for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C The latest drawing value of a trend graph can be displayed as a percentage value In the default setting a percentage value is displayed Whether or not a percentage value is displaye
652. with codes FFEF to FFF5 are used as desired With a new model marks registered with a conventional model are used as trend graph control touch switches 1 Copy marks regis tered under codes FFEF to FFF5 to other codes with the mark editor Reset the marks with codes FFEF to FFF5 with the mark editor By resetting the marks are re turned to the trend graph control marks For the elements that use the conven tional marks of codes FFEF to FFF5 correct the codes to those as signed after copying the marks Refer to 8 3 Mark Editor With a conventional model the marks with codes FFEF to FFF5 are not used With a new model nothing is registered for codes FFEF to FFF5 and trend graph control touch Switches are not displayed Correction related to sampling cycles of trend graphs Reset the marks with codes FFEF to FFF5 with the mark editor The marks of these codes are recognized as the trend graph control marks Refer to 8 3 Mark Editor In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model conver sion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences of trend graph sampling cycles Difference New models Conventional models Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion The sampling cycle can be set in the range from 0 5 to 6553 5 s in units of 0 5 s 6553 5 s in units of 0 1 s Status after Co
653. ws Ver 4 These precautions contain important safety information Be sure to observe them carefully The indications and symbols used herein and their meanings are as listed below Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could re VAN i NS MICE sult in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage A Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result Caution in minor or moderate injury or property damage Precautions for Safe Use Indicates actions that should be done or avoided for the safe use of this product Precautions for Correct Use Indicates actions that should be done or avoided to prevent operating failure or malfunction of this prod uct or to prevent adverse effects on the performance or functions of this product Notes within the text of this manual indicate safety related points and information that are equivalent in importance to those included in the Precautions for Safe Use sections Symbols Disassembly Prohibition Indicates prohibitions when there is a possibility of injury such as from electric shock as the result of disassembly Electrical Shock Caution Indicates the possibility of electric shock under specific condi tions Indicates the possibility of injury by high temperature under A A Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result N WARNING
654. ws when another window of the same type Local 1 Local 2 is already displayed when opening a window Specify if a touch switch is to move with or indepen dently of an input field when the input fields shifts Object Data Input Numeral Refer to 6 4 7 Numeral Input Character string input element Object Data Input String Refer to 6 4 2 Character String Input 223 Touch Switches Section 6 8 Guidance When a cursor moving touch switch is pressed input is enabled at the speci fied or associated input field Settings shown below can be made only with the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above Local 2 Window Position Replace Local Window f a cursor moving touch switch is created automatically at the creation of a nu meral character string input element the touch switch is created overlapping the input field t is possible to specify a window keyboard for a cursor moving touch switch This specification enables display of the specified window keyboard by sim ply pressing the cursor moving touch switch Numeral character string input field Numeral character string input field Touch switches assigned with cursor movement and window open functions When the touch switch atthe top is pressed Specified window opens Reference A cursor moving touch switch can be created automatically when creating a numeral input element or
655. x set 1900 for the screen No Setting the screen properties 1 Select Screen menu bar Properties 2 Setthe screen properties as shown below for screen No 1900 Attributes Screen No History Title Comment Pop up Numeric Keys Buzzer Load Local 1 Keyboard System Keypad Color Background 400 Grid Size Section 9 3 Creating the Sample Data Custom Horizontal Spacing 5 Vertical Spacing 5 Display Grid d Snap to Grid Creating the screen numeric keys Creating the 0 key frame 1 Select Objects menu bar Touch Switch 2 Create the outline of the 0 key by dragging the mouse on the data ation screen 3 Set the properties as shown below Position Size Frame Shape Standard Show ON State d Color Frame White ON White OFF Transparent Function Input Key Control Control Key n Address PC PLC Address Comments Lamp Attrib ute General Light Label 1 Press Edit button to set the label O refer to the following After completing the setting go to the next step without clicking on button 401 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Setting the label of the 0 key 4 Press edit button in the general property of a touch switch and set the labe
656. y Appendix C Device necessary for transmitting screen data RS 232C cable The cable used for the Support Tool can be used For cable specifications refer to Appendix J Connecting Cable Specifications Installing the NT Transfer Utility Installation 494 Reference Reference Install the NT Transfer Utility in the personal computer that is to be connected to a PT on site NT Transfer utility operates alone You do not need to pre install the Support Tool in the personal computer To install the NT Transfer Utility execute the install program that is in your soft ware package The basic operation of the install program is same as the install program of the Support Tool Refer to 2 2 1 Basic Installation Operation Procedure 1 Start up Windows When using Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista or Windows 7 log in with a user ID in the administrators group 2 If you are using CD ROM set the Support Tool CD ROM in the CD ROM drive while holding down the Shift key to prevent the Support Tool setup pro gram from starting up Release the Shift key after CD ROM is recognized and the access to the CD ROM is stopped If the Support Tool setup pro gram is automatically started click on e to abort it You can execute the setup program by double clicking Setup exe for NT Transfer Utility in the Support Tool system disk by displaying the Windows Explorer In this case steps 3 4 and 5 bellow can be ski
657. y Increment Setting Operation Reference To start editing click on s right click the mouse on a table entry number to display the menu then select the desired edit function in this menu It may not be possible to select an edit function if an input field is displayed If the selection of an edit function is not possible left click the mouse on a table entry number field to select the entire line and after that click on Edit gt or right click the mouse on a table entry number to display the menu When the two screen data files of the same PT model are opened using Import Component command it is possible to paste the table data that was cut co pied by one Support Tool to a table of another Support Tool For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool Clear L Cut Ct X Copy Ctrl Paste Copy To Next Ctrl Clear Clears the data in the selected memory table entry Cut Cuts the data in the selected memory table entry and stores it in the clipboard The cut data can be pasted to another memory table entry Copy Copies the data in the selected memory table entry to the clipboard The copied data can be pasted to another memory table entry Paste Pastes the data stored in the clipboard by the cut or copy function to the memory table entry at the cursor position 274
658. y Report Image Library Report Mark List Screen Image Screen list Table Report Validation Report Output of these reports can be selected from the following three types use Print Preview for outputting to the display Printer Screen image setting data etc are output to a printer Rich Text Format file Various setting data etc are output to a file in RTF Display print preview Screen image setting data etc are displayed on the screen before output to a printer The screen image can be output to a file in bit map format using the Screen menu bar Copy to Image Refer to 12 4 Outputting the Screen Image 444 Report Types Section 12 1 12 1 1 Cross References The use statuses of memory tables such as the numeral memory table and char acter string memory table string table are printed or displayed The cross reference allows you to find the screens where a specific memory table is used Gross Reference String Merory Table Initial Value Autaratic IVenual Step Reset Nureral Merory Table Initial Value 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 10 11 12 10 Comment Table Address 10 Conrents Eoo 200 Set Num input 2 000000 disp 1 2029000 Alam data 8 017000 Alarm date 2 m0500 Mtr Ber graph 1 10000200 Start Fi lenge SAMPLE DATA 96 12 25 9 08 P 1 445 Report Types Section 12 1 12 1 2 Direct Connection Info
659. y attribute Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Color Foreground Specify the line color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Position Indicates the position of Attribute Point reference point Guidance A polygon is created on the basis of a triangle After a triangle is drawn vertices are added in the edit operation to create a polygon Vertices can be set at up to 255 positions To add a vertex follow the steps shown below 1 Draw a polygon Td 2 After locating the cursor at a position where a vertex is to be added right click the mouse and select Add Node in the pop up menu Cut Copy Paste Delete Bring To Front Send To Back T TRIES u Select Object Properties Use As Default 3 Drag the vertex to the desired position a a 55 a To remove a vertex locate the cursor on the vertex be removed and select Remove Node in the pop up menu Cursor S Nes s lt a i Remove Node executed BH 145 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Totile a rectangle paste a tiling element into it Polygon DEC E Tiling element E For details of tiling elements refer to 6 2 8 Tiling 6 2 6 Sector A sector is drawn Sectors cannot be used with NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S 1 A sector is drawn The size of a sector can be changed Operation
660. y co ordinate of window position bottom left at Window Control Area from the host opening closing moving a window are possible Window Control Area can control global window and local window For details refer to the operation manual of PT Window Scre ES The selected PLC window opens Window screen number Window Window PLC e window shifts The co ordinates of the window Size and display position of window the NT21 and the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C V1 and above With the NT21 and the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above size of window can be specified freely by 20 dot unit Minimum window size 20 x 20 It is possible to display a window at a different position from where it was created or to move a window However the distance between the position where window was created and where it is displayed have to be always multiple of 20 dot Window Window Display Display A Co ordinates at the bottom Co ordinates at the bottom left corner 20 179 left corner 180 219 Reference Specify the bottom left co ordinate of window when specifying the window posi tion at Window Control Area Checking the display status of a window Whether window is opened or closed will be written to the PT Status
661. y in the range of 201 to 999 and if the initial value is a 4 digit value the setting value can be changed only in the range of 1000 to 1200 This is because the limit check function detects an error if the most significant digit value is changed from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 To avoid this problem set the maximum and minimum limits so that n n 2 m m or provide a touch switch separately to write a value at carry over or shift to the lower digit 3 With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C when hexadecimal val ue is input it is regarded as signed binary data and upper lower limit check is performed Therefore if the top bit is 1 it is regarded as negative value and input will be prohibited when the minimum limit was set as O In this case set those value such as 80000000 2147483648 for minimum limit setting to prevent it from being checked 193 Lamps Section 6 5 6 5 Lamps The status of a lamp changes according to the status of a PC PLC bit Two types of lamp element are provided standard lamps that change their dis play status ON flash inverse flash and image library lamps that show different image library data in the lamp ON and OFF states Image library lamps cannot be used with NT11S NT11 NT20 NT20S and NT600S 6 5 1 Standard Lamps Operation procedure Terminology A lamp OFF ON flash is displayed in accordance with the status of a PC PLC bit Bit status PC
662. yed fol lows the setting for Replace Local Window Replace Local Window Check mark If another window of the same type Local 1 Local 2 is already displayed no operation is executed No check mark If another window of the same type Local1 Local 2 is already displayed closes the window and then opens the specified win dow 6 8 5 Control Code Input Touch Switches Function Input key Control Settings Control Key Specify the key code that is input when the touch switch is pressed Select from 39 kinds of codes Some codes cannot be specified depending on the PT model Related elements and setting Numeral input element Object Data Input Numeral Refer to 6 4 7 Numeral Input Character string input element Object Data Input String Refer to 6 4 2 Character String Input 219 Touch Switches Section 6 8 Guidance Control code input touch switches control data input processing cursor move ments etc The contents of control are selected from the codes shown below Control code input touch switches are used in combination with numeral input elements character string input elements continuous screens alarm list ele ments and alarm history elements 1 Combination with numeral input elements character string input ele ments and continuous screens If control code input touch switches are arranged with a numeral input ele ment or a character string in
663. ype is not sup ported It is dis carded The associated touch switches of the alarm has been discarded and com ponent touch switches have been created No error message will be generated Adjust the position of control touch switches if necessary Refer to 6 3 Alarm With a conventional model an alarm list history is registered for a screen with out control touch switches With a new model control touch switches in the ini tial state are auto matically created The associated touch switches of the alarm has been discarded and com ponent touch switches have been created If control touch switches are not necessary de lete them by setting in the alarm list history properties Refer to 6 3 Alarm With a new model touch switches are automatically created by register ing alarm list history to the symbol man ager Correction of touch switch position and size With a conventional model all control touch switches are deleted IW The component Touch Switches of the Alarm List will be discarded Create the control touch switches using the touch switch control code input function and associate them with the alarm list history Refer to 6 8 5 Control Code Input Touch Switches Touch switch size differs between NT20 NT20S NT600S NT620S and other PT models Therefore when the data of NT20 NT20S NT600S NT620S is converted to the data for other
664. ystem installer are described below uu NT Series System Installer Ver 2 00 Download System Help Drive c CyoY omn c tawrsT4sE Port System Program COMS System File s File Name Size System Program Name Modifie OMR EOG63D 855KB OMRON Direct Access E 2006 08 25 11 34 00 AB EOE63D 845KB DF1 Full Duplex Protocol 2006 08 31 0 30 14 GE EOE63D 844KB GE Fanuc SNP X 11 2006 08 29 8 36 04 MOD EOE63D 842KB Schneider Modbus Protocol 2006 08 25 17 01 20 MIT EOG 63D 765KB MITSUBISHI Direct Access E s 2006 08 25 10 52 46 Drive Specify the drive where the system program is stored Click on and select the drive name from the displayed items The drive in the network can be selected only when it is allocated to My Com puter When installing on a personal computer the system installer will be installed but the system program will not be installed PT Model Specify the PT model for which the system program is installed Click on F and select the drive name from the displayed items Select NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C to use NT31 NT631C NT631 or NT631C Com Port Specify the port used for communications with the PT Click on F and select the drive name from the displayed items Selection is possible from COM1 and COM2 Look in Specify the folder where the system program is stored The folder can be opened or closed by double clicking on the

the Data

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents